Home

ATLAS.ti®

Contents

1. Result 0 Figure 63 The Query Tool The Query Tool has the following main components The operator toolbar 1 located near the left margin of the window The code family pane 2 in the upper left lists code families to be used in queries The codes pane 3 below the code family pane contains all current codes set filters do apply The term stack pane 4 in the upper right displays the stack of all expressions entered in the current query If more than one entry is visible there are arguments still waiting to be used in the query The topmost entry is the current query and its result is displayed in the results list 5 located in the lower right of the window Special Tools e 161 162 Special Tools Above the term stack pane are several buttons for manipulating the stack swapping or duplicating terms clearing the stack etc Close to the results list are two buttons for removing unwanted hits and creating a report Directly below the term stack pane is a feedback pane 6 displaying the topmost entry of the term stack Operands Operands also called arguments or descriptors and operators are the only ingredients of queries necessary for the Query Tool Parentheses or other characters are not needed to construct valid queries Basic Operands Two sorts of basic or atomic operands may be used in a query Codes and code families A code represents a set of
2. lt Horror 1 4 1 ordinally scaled numeric codes tog Horror c Code No item selected FiHorror Name Title Figure 80 The code manager s statusbar displays the current family filter F Horror To Filter Items using the Family Manager 1 Open the Family Manager 2 Double click a family Watch how the display in the Object Manger and the margin area changes to display only items that are members of the selected family AA 3 To change the filter back to All double click on the family YF again or click on the Toggle Filter button Gi in the toolbar Note Filters do not affect Network Views Even if you have set a filter Network Views still display all their nodes 196 e Family Life A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Removing Families Removing a family does not remove any of the contained items To remove a family 1 Open the Family Manager for the relevant object type 2 Select the family to be removed 3 Click the Delete button x or select menu option FAMILIES DELETE FAMILY Primary Document Families Naty oe PD families as variables can be used in queries and SPSS Jobs Use PD Family tables to assign PDs and variables at the same time A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Along with sharing all the characteristics of code and memo families PD families have some additional characteristics Primary Docum
3. c 1 E i E Rar 14 3 1 9 and there Followed hail ar EY Eii G 4 Golden Ataro v lt 1 and there fell a great star 3 lt ii gt i gt having a golden 7 incense that he Distance in lines 1g P upon the golden Result 15 TE All ga Fire Horror ol Smoke Figure 67 Displaying a hit in context Output of Query Results Before printing the quotations found with the query you can optionally remove quotations that you don t want Cleaning up the Hit List x Before creating a report of all the quotations found by the query you have the option to remove entries from the hit list You can remove unwanted hits from the list using the erase button a above the printer button right next to the results pane You could of course reformulate your query to improve the precision This 1s how you clean up the hit list 1 Select an unwanted quotation in the hit list 2 Click the ERASE button Creating a Report To print all hits found by a query click the PRINTER button List to the right of the results list risen 2Omnitreiaes Select one of the following report options Full Content Full Content Include Comments e LIST Print a list of all quotations in a compact format showing only the quotations names e LIST INCLUDE COMMENTS Same as LIST but includes the quotations comments if any e FULL CONTENT Output the complete text of the quotations e FULL CONTENT INCLUDE COM
4. B amp under 25 amp New York A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Family Life e 209 6 Click the NOT operator and you have created a family combination not containing female respondents under the age of 25 living in New York As an exercise how would you create a family combination yielding males over 25 not living in New York Create a Snapshot Snapshots are hard A snapshot creates a hardwired standard family containing the wired versions of items derived from a Super Family as its members It is a super families convenient shortcut for the following actions 1 Creating a new family 2 Double click a Super Family to set the filter in the corresponding object manager 3 Drag the displayed items from the Object Manager into the member pane for the newly created and selected standard family Example By creating a snapshot from Super Code family Chemistry a new standard family is created which includes all codes that the Super Family has as its members at this time While a Super Family reflects any changes in regard to the members of any of its combined families a snapshot will not change This is identical to creating snapshot from Super Codes Snapshots are a means to audit the process of your analysis By comparing Super Families with previous snapshots you can see how and in which direction your thoughts have developed C E E CF chemistry r CF Chemistry 5M 1 a at
5. To create a Super Code 1 Click the Super Code button 2 Enter a name for the new Super Code or accept the default name created from the query expression Click OK 3 The newly created Super Code immediately appears in the list of codes and can be used for new queries and Super Codes right away A default comment for the new Super Code is also created showing the assigned query in infix notation Special Tools e 177 2 Supercodes cannot used for manual coding 178 e Special Tools Mame 21 SuUB Magic WITHIN Horror 4 Obe THa Formula 1 0 Abaddon 1 0 k lt Ti gt TERM SUB Magic WITHIN Horror 4 Figure 70 A super code displayed in the Code Manager Auto Optimization of Super Code Queries In order to take into account quotations that were manually removed from the hit list the query must be modified accordingly before a Super Code is created Otherwise it would display the full set retrieved by the original query To accomplish this task a suppressor code is created which refers to the quotations removed from the hit list This suppressor code is negated and then ANDed with the original query Example The original query All quotations coded with Sanity or Health Sanity OR Health yields 4 quotations 1 1 1 2 1 3 and 3 1 From the hit list quotation 1 1 and 1 3 are removed The query is now modified by creating a new suppressor code Q1 referencing 1 1
6. 2 Right click on the HU Editor s background and choose SELECT WALLPAPER from the context menu 3 Choose an image file from the file dialog as the new wallpaper CENTER IMAGE A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 If checked centers the image inside the pane If unchecked tiles the image to cover the complete pane The HU Editor s Toolbars The Main Toolbar Open Object Explorer Frustration button Save HU Last quotation Edit HU Comment Setups Choose Network View 7 ris e 2 Pa E OH 4 S E t Query Tool __ Assign Primary Docs Object Crawler Word Cruncher XML Conversion Tool Name Description is Choose Network View Open the Network View Manager or select an existing Network View A Edit HU comment Opens a text editor to view and edit the HU s comment Li Save HU Save the HU under current name afs Open Object Explorer Opens the Object Explorer ith Query Tool Opens the Query Tool ca Assign Primary Docs Open a file dialog to assign PDs Open Crawler Opens the Object Crawler to search the entire HU EA Word Cruncher Create word ferquency counts amp a XML Tools Opens the XML Converter Fa Genral Preferences Opens the preferences dialog re Last quotation Selects a previously activated quotation Y Frustration button See or better hear for yourself A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 373 The Edit Toolbar The Edit toolbar offers a variety of character and paragraph formatting options If not in edit
7. Different Codes Choose this strategy when target and source HU contain the same PDs but different set of codes have been applied If identical codes are found during the merge procedure the Project Management e 291 The link between Code A and Code B in the target HU survives the merge process Co authors are also merged 292 e Project Management duplicate codes from the source HU are automatically renamed by adding the suffix _number Different PDs Same Codes Choose this strategy when target and source HU contain different PDs that have been coded with the same code set This is a common situation when working in teams and different team members have coded different PDs using a common set of codes If a few additional codes have been added to the common set these will be added Different PDs and Codes Choose this strategy when both PDs and codes are different The PDs and codes from the source HU will be added to the ones in the target HU If identical codes are found during the merge procedure the duplicate codes from the source HU are automatically renamed by adding the suffix _number Conflict Resolution for Links For certain entities a default conflict resolution strategy is used If the inclusion of objects could result in the modification of a link between objects in the target HU the target HU link is preferred Example If there is a link 1s associated with between two codes Alchemy a
8. Media Types ATLAS ti can display and process four different media types text graphic audio and video data Text Textual PDs can consist of plain or rich text RTF Rich Text Format Objects like a PowerPoint presentation or an Excel table Main Concepts e 29 Quotations Free quotations resemble passages scribbled in the margin of a book 30 e Main Concepts can be embedded and edited See Preparing Textual Documents on page 72 Using Word and Other Text Processor s Files With restrictions Word WordPerfect MS Works or HTML documents can be directly used as PDs See Word HTML and Other File Formats on page 72 for details Images More than twenty graphic file formats are directly supported by ATLAS ti including Windows Bitmap BMP TIFF JPG and Kodak Photo CD See Preparing Graphical Documents on page 74 Multimedia ATLAS ti supports a number of audio and video formats utilizing Windows Multimedia Control Interface MCI MCI needs to be correctly installed and configured in order to work with multimedia files See Preparing Multimedia Documents on page 74 A quotation is a segment from a PD that is interesting or important to the user In textual documents a quotation is an arbitrary sequence of characters ranging from a single character a word a sentence or a paragraph up to the entire data file Usually quotations are created by the researcher How
9. Note If you modify a previously renamed text quotation you are asked for confirmation using the newly selected string truncated as its list display name Deleting Quotations Quotations can be deleted Of course nothing is removed from the primary document s data source A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Textual Level Basic Functions e 115 9 Deleting a quotation affects only its references Free quotations are deleted silently However 1f references to codes quotations or memos exist you are prompted for confirmation The option to delete quotations is available in a number of different places the Quotation Manager the drop down list the Object Explorer and the margin Deleting Quotation s in the Quotation Manager 1 Select the quotation s in question 2 Click the Remove button a 3 If references exist for the quotation confirm or reject the deletion process Note All quotations of a primary document are deleted when the primary document is disconnected from the Hermeneutic Unit Coding Techniques SE Code associated with multiple quotations Sty OX Make code names as succinct as possible 116 e The Textual Level Basic Functions eee et The coding procedures described in this section do not fully encompass the complexity of the intellectual activity of coding as for example understood in Grounded Theory GLASER amp STRAUSS 1967 Methodologically coding is
10. The items offered by the View menu let you change the font useful before capturing screen shots for presentations the display of object specific items the length of the tree indentation the presence of the collapse expand buttons the display of the object s icons and the comment area Zoom List You can also disable the in place editing capability w Has Lines Has Lines at Root Indent Zoom List w Show Toolbar w Has Buttons w Use Images w Edit Labels Font Refresh F5 The Toolbar Toggle View has Lines Toggle View use Images Toggle View has Buttons E C O fw ee 2 amp Toggle View has Lines at Root Toggle Always on Top Code Trees amp Forests Special Object Explorers can be invoked to display codes only To display a tree view for a selected code only A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Special Tools e 187 1 Select a code e g in the Code Manager 2 From the CODES MISCELLANEOUS menu choose CODE TREE To display all root codes with their trees and branches 1 Select a code 2 Choose CODES MISCELLANEOUS CODE FOREST The rules and procedures described above for codes in the Object Explorer apply here as well see Using the Object Explorer on page 183 Ky Codes displayed in code trees and forests can be used for drag amp ae drop coding This is a preferred alternative for users who like to work with hierarchically ordered coding schemas Redundant Coding Analyzer This procedu
11. 1 Select a node whose right edge should serve as reference point 2 Select the nodes that are to be aligned with the first node s right edge Top Shortcut CTRL SHIFT T Aligns selected nodes with the top of the first selected node This changes their horizontal position BOTTOM Shortcut CTRL SHIFT B Aligns selected nodes with the bottom of the first selected node Their horizontal position is not changed CENTER VERTICALLY Shortcut CTRL SHIFT C Centers selected nodes around the vertical axis of the first selected node Their horizontal position is not changed CENTER HORIZONTALLY Shortcut CTRL SHIFT ALT C Centers selected nodes around the horizontal axis of the first selected node Their vertical position is not changed DISTRIBUTE VERTICALLY Shortcut CTRL SHIFT D A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Creates equal vertical spacing between nodes Their horizontal position is not changed At least three nodes must be selected DISTRIBUTE HORIZONTALLY Shortcut CTRL SHIFT ALT D Creates equal horizontal spacing between nodes The vertical position is not changed At least three nodes must be selected SEND TO BACK Shortcut CTRL B In the z order of all nodes sends all selected nodes to the back e g to be covered by all other nodes BRING TO FRONT Shortcut CTRL F In the z order of all nodes brings all selected nodes to the foreground covering all other nodes MOVE SUBMENU These oper
12. A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Pop up Menus Context or pop up menus are used for commands that apply to a selected object or to a specific sub pane inside a multi pane window A pop up menu is activated by a right mouse click at the current location of the mouse pointer They are also termed context sensitive because the offered commands depend on the type and the current state of the object or the context in which the menu was activated Using pop up menus to initiate procedures is a three step procedure typical for window mouse user interfaces 1 Select an object 2 Open the pop up menu with the right mouse button 3 Select a command with the left mouse button The HU editor provides specific pop up menus in each of its sub panes The PD pane alone offers a variety of pop up menus depending on what is currently displayed or selected When there is no PD displayed e g directly after starting a session or after closing a PD you get the wallpaper menu p s mm eed i i A F i A o a j When a PD is loaded and a chunk of text is selected a different pop up menu is displayed reason of the other wo angels which are yet to sound Create Free Quotation Coding Create Link Source Create Link Target db Copy Ea If the selection is an existing quotation the pop up menu gets more specific Main Workspace The HU Editor e 45 Pop up menu for a 13 And I beheld and heard an an
13. Code Manager A double click on a code displays the coded quotation highlighted in the context of its PD If more than one quotation is associated with this code a list pops up from which a quotation can be selected A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Modified Date and time of last modification Besides the HU Editor the Code Manager will probably one of your most frequently used tools E Code Manager HU The Sample Codes Edit Miscellaneous Gutpuk view me A XB oo Grounded Density Author Created Modified Admin 16 1 Oia OF OS poe Admin ll Osca OFO i55 2 George i Thomas M es Gold Admin ga Golden Altar Thomas M H Horror sal Andreas 8 Horror toe Andreas Like for code Nick the text passages were automatically assigned to this code Sentence was the segmentation method used Search was restricted to Indian Camp 53 Codes George 15 0 Mame Title Figure 16 Code Manager The Code Manager is frequently used to create and modify codes to code data segments via drag amp drop and to retrieve coded data segments It can also be used to sort your codes in multiple ways in order to analyze codebook evolution Single click Selects a code If you have written a definition for the selected code it is displayed in the text pane Once selected the code can be used for drag amp drop coding Single click pause single click or F2 activates in place editing of co
14. Include statistics A short numerical summary of the main objects included in the HU is created Include link to HPR A link is included that allows the reader of the HTML page download the HU itself If this link is activated a copy bundle ACB version of the project must be provided and copied to the location of the HTML page 392 e Reference A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Include author s Includes the name of the HU s author and co authors if any Primary Docs General Primary Docs Codes Memos Families Network views Define options For the display of primars documents in HTML code Include Primary Docs section Include Bullets Quotations Comment Codes Inclusion date Memos URL Ref Text and JPEG only Use absolute paths For best runs Content Text and JPEG only Dont wrap inlined text Include Primary Docs section Check this box if you want to include information about the PDs Bullets Displays a specific icon with every PD description Comment Includes the PD s comment Inclusion date Includes the date the PD was assigned to the HU URL Reference Text and JPEG only Includes a clickable link to the PD file Note that if the files are plain ASCII JPEG or of another suitable file type PDs can be displayed by most WWW browsers without additional plug ins Content Text and JPEG only Displays the contents of the PDs within the created HTML document itse
15. Memos Families Network views Include networks section Define options For the display of network views in HTML code Include Bullets Modelist Code neighbors list thesaurus style Hierarchical list Reference to network wiew graphic Files Inline network view graphic Files Include networks section Includes information about Network Views A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 395 396 e Reference Bullets Displays a specific icon with every Network View description Node list Includes a textual description of every node Code neighbors list Textual description of the complete network structure in a thesaurus style format for every alphabetically listed node displays its direct neighbors Hierarchical list Converts the network into a hierarchy Identifies the root objects and displays an indented forest of trees Reference to Network View graphic files Includes links to the graphic files created from the Network Views These files have to be created manually A common file format is Windows Enhanced Metafile EMF EMF can be created within ATLAS ti see Save Network View as Graphic File on page 234 Inline Network View graphic files As above but displays the graphic images in the WWW page itself A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Appendix Selecting Objects Multiple selections are possible in some situations while in other situations they aren t This section explains the di
16. small sized copies of these PDs To create a graphical content table 1 Create a new Network View by choosing NETWORKS NEW NETWORK VIEW from the HU Editor s main menu 2 Import some graphical PDs see Importing Nodes on page 226 3 From the Network Editor menu choose DISPLAY FULL IMAGE FOR PDS 4 Rearrange the nodes in the Network View 5 Save the Network View A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Network Editor et al e 249 r Using a Network View as a Graphical Content Table Network Nodes Links Layout Display Specials Help J ASEH HHR et kt BG Figure 105 Network View as graphical content table Its name reflects this usage Pa You can change the size of the thumbnail images by setting the width in the Network Preference window Change the size of the ES l thumbnail images 1 From within the Network Editor select SPECIAL PREFERENCES or from the main menu select NETWORKS PREFERENCES 2 Click on the Nodes tab Next to the option Full image for PDs on the right you see a small entry field entitled Width The standard width is set to 200 3 Change the width and click Apply Close the Network Preferences window 4 Close and reopen the Network View in order for the changes to take effect 250 e The Network Editor et al A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Hypertext A network with text or other media as nodes is often referred to as a hypertext The original sequential text
17. 230 e The Network Editor et al Two methods are available for the automatic placement of nodes Semantic Layout Places the nodes within the window using the semantic layout algorithm This algorithm tries to place the nodes into optimal positions using an invisible matrix of default positions It tries to A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 place the nodes with the highest connectivity into center positions By recursively applying the same method to the rest of the nodes using neighboring positions of the first node placed the algorithm tries to avoid overlapping nodes and too many crossing links However calculating an optimal solution is not possible in a reasonable amount of time The user can exert some control on this algorithm via the preferred layout direction of the relations used for the links e g links using the is a relation go from bottom to top if possible You can change the layout direction manually using the Relation Editor see The Relation Editor on page 235 for details oar is park of magic f is a is a a mage 7 j Number mag c is part ar is part of E mege Figure 93 Before and after applying Semantic Layout to a Network View The results of the automatic layout procedure are typically quite usable and provide at least a good starting point for subsequent manual refinement of nodes placement If you are not happy with the layout produced you can revert to the previous placeme
18. 3 Select the appropriate code 4 Inthe search entry field define a new category by entering DISTRESS nervous Itens luneas ledg letc Special Tools e 153 5 Depending on your data set select a suitable scope of search current PD all PDs or a specific PD family 6 Select the segment size to be coded e g sentence 7 Check Confirm Always and click on the Start button 8 Every time the program finds a piece of text that matches your search category it stops the search and highlights the text it has found You can then read the surrounding context and decide whether the text passage really has something to do with distress If it does click CODE IT otherwise click SKIP IT The program continues to search for the next match You can uncheck the Confirm always box at any time and let ATLAS ti scan through the rest of your texts without prompting you for further confirmation Brushing up Results after Auto Coding Since no automatic search can guarantee 100 meaningful results the quotations created and assigned to the selected code during auto coding should be screened and modified if needed Checking and Modifying Quotations Close the Auto Coding tool Open both the Code Manager and the Quotation Manager Select the code you just used for auto coding SN S In the Quotation Manager set the quotation filter to Selected Code 5 Click the Created column header to find all recently created quotat
19. A further option offers the Co occurring Codes possibility to remove the selected hit from the results list Femove from Hit List A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Special Tools e 181 Display Term The context menu for the term stack pane resembles the stack function buttons described above Push Undo Fedo Clear Stack Fecalc 182 e Special Tools A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Object Explorer The upper pane displays the tree structured contents of the HU The text pane below displays the comment that is associated with the activated object A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Although the structures that can be created with ATLAS ti are not necessarily restricted to hierarchical trees the ATLAS ti Object Explorer provides a hierarchical view of the HU and all of the objects that it references Main purpose of the Object Explorer is to serve as a hierarchical content table which may be used to navigate between the different parts of the HU Unlike the pure Object Managers that display only one type of object the Object Explorer allows an integrated and structured display of all heterogeneous objects that make up an HU These are PDs quotations codes memos families and networks The display though is not strictly hierarchical You will notice some redundancy when expanding the tree view For instance quotations are listed under each PD As PDs can also be members of PD families their quotations appea
20. A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 E Family Managers can be accessed from the Object Manager by clicking the Family button rey Objects can now also be assigned as family members by dragging them from other Object Managers the margin area and the Crawler into the member pane of a Family Manager Super Families Similar to the idea of Super Codes ATLAS ti 5 offers the possibility of creating Super Families for primary documents codes and memos For example you can combine the family for Gender Female with the family for Position Executive to create Female Executives Such super families make powerful filters PD Family Tables The relation between PDs Primary Documents and their families can be transported exported and imported using the Excel compatible CSV format This data exchange format can be used to conveniently assign a large number of PDs from generic lists This feature 1s explained in PD Family Table on page 197 Teamwork Support A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 ATLAS ti has always supported teams of authors This approach has been further elaborated and we can now offer a powerful context for multiple authors editing PDs Shared Documents To make documents accessible and editable from different projects and users a sophisticated change management and multi user access system has been implemented A pool of documents can be safely used and shared between different HUs Howe
21. Alchemie The four elements lt is cause of gt Gold Alr lt is part of gt The four elements Earth lt is part of gt The four elements Fire lt is part of gt The four elements Water lt is part of gt The four elements Fire lt contradicts gt Water The four elements is pat of Alchemie Figure 124 Print codes hierarchy Codes Neighbors Similar to codes hierarchy but restricted to one hierarchy level Prints all current codes with only their immediate code neighbors Codes Primary Documents Table Submenu Prints frequency counts in form of a table all current codes x axis by primary documents y axis You may also export the table to Excel for further processing or more flexible reporting A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 CODES PRIMARY DOCUMENTS TABLE Super 23 05 04 13 51 27 HU C Programme scientific SoftwareVATLAStiTESTBANKnewtthe sample hprd Code Filter All PD Filter All A Formula Abaddon AIr Alchemie Animal P 1 Revelatic 0 0 0 P 2 Revelatic 0 0 0 0 PS Indian 0 0 0 0 0 P 4 The sefir 0 0 0 0 0 PS Revelatic 0 0 0 j 0 F 6 videoSF 0 0 0 0 0 TOTALS 0 0 Figure 125 Codes PD table displayed in Excel Quotation References Prints a list of codes including the boundaries of their quotations Code comments can be included All Codes with Quotations Prints all codes with a full report of their quotations The Output Dialog When clicking t
22. Codes and Memos branches can be made visible Note All codes displayed in the Object Explorer can be used for drag amp drop coding PDs codes and memos can be dragged into family managers and assigned to families Caza Double click Actions Double clicking the entries directly below the root launches the respective Object Managers These are the Object Managers for PDs codes and memos the Family Managers for PDs codes and memo families and the Network View Manager for Network Views e When double clicking on a PD its comment is displayed e When double clicking on a quotation it is highlighted in context e When double clicking on a code a list of quotations pops up If only one quotation is associated with the code it is highlighted in context A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Special Tools e 185 e When double clicking on a memo its content is displayed Renaming Objects All objects excluding the top level entries like the name of the HU the container entries Primary Docs Codes Memos etc can be renamed using the in place technique This technique is also used by Windows Explorer and other Windows file dialog boxes to rename files and directories To rename an object in the Object Explorer In the example below Network View 4 Elements is renamed to Four Elements 1 Select an object with a single left click UF Network views 10 Ta Texture a hypertext
23. E ATLAS E Quotations 36 E codes 18 E Memos 4 Figure 131 Applying stylesheet Author To create the figure above stylesheet Author was applied The result shows that Admin created 8 quotations and 4 codes Andreas created 64 quotations 6 codes 3 memos and 2 primary document families and so on With a click on the colored square at the left of an object type the corresponding objects are expanded Under codes a list of all codes created by the respective author is shown under each code more detailed information like the creation and modification dates and the definition and frequency of application can be expanded Example CSS Switcher The output shown in the figure below might be used in presentations because it displays HU information in a more comprehensible way This particular stylesheet example makes the point that you can go in wildly differing directions with your design ideas when it comes to displaying your ATLAS ti data to the outside world solely equipped with a Web browser A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Generating Output e 325 Sty Create presentations using stylesheets 326 e Generating Output Stored from Word 2003 HU is a toy aw le b The Sample A Formula Abaddon Alchemie Bad weather Booth Brass Casualties and many men died of the water And the third part of the crea and their torment was as the l Chemical warfare Figure 132
24. The Service Pack Manager installs the software that you have downloaded in the previous step and updates your system accordingly You must be logged in to ATLAS ti as an administrative user to be able to access the service pack menu You also need to have administrative rights as a Windows user in order to install the package Before you can start the actual installation you must copy the downloaded service pack into the service pack folder By default this folder is located in the ATLAS ti installation folder e g C Program Files Scientific Software ATLASti To install a service pack 1 Download the service pack and copy it to the service pack folder 2 Start ATLAS ti Troubleshooting e 335 3 Choose TOOLS SERVICE PACK MANAGER from the main menu The Service Pack Manager window opens displaying all applicable patches ATLAS ti Service Pack Installer Seles Mame Id Updates to File Create Service Pack Build 60 SP_BUILD60 5 0 60 spbuild6 0 spk 28 05 0 Install a service pack only when you have freshly started ATLAS til Proceed as follows 1 Choose a service pack file from the list above 2 Click the Start Install button 3 Leave and restart ATLAS ti to realize any changes after the installation of the package Cancel Figure 137 The Service Pack Manager 4 Click on the service pack usually only one is applicable and listed that you want to install 5 Click INSTALL 6 After th
25. The difference between a Network and a Network View is an important distinction that is necessary to understand the way networks are handled within ATLAS ti An ATLAS ti network is the set of all objects and their links inside the Hermeneutic Unit HU It exists independently of any display oriented characteristics layout color line width etc It 1s the logical structure of the HU s objects It exists even before the first Network View is created A Network View is typically only a subset of this global structure of nodes and links combined with an individual layout of nodes It is like viewing the same thing 1 e the network from different angles and with different pieces visible Network View Characteristics Network Views have certain important characteristics e Several different Network Views on the same network are possible e Network Views can be given names under which they are stored and accessed inside the HU e Network Views can be commented e Network Views are displayed and edited in the Network Editor e Network Views allow individual layout of the nodes e As anode a single object can be a member of any number of Network Views just like a code can be an element of more than one code family e An object e g a specific code can only appear once in any Network View Network Views allow for a flexible but logically consistent display of the network of objects so there are a few constra
26. amp drop Sty a Code multiple quotations at once 120 e The Textual Level You can create a code from each word of the selected text by holding down the ALT key when dropping the text Code by List This procedure offers a list of all current codes from which one or more code can be selected and associated with the current data selection The number of codes that you can select from the list is unlimited If the data section resembles an existing quotation only codes not already assigned to this quotation are offered To use the Code by List technique 1 Select the data section quotation to be coded 2 Click the Code by List button an or choose CODING CODE BY LIST from the menu 3 From the list window with applicable codes select one or more codes while holding the Ctrl key and click OK To use Code by List via drag amp drop Drag amp drop is also available for the code by list technique The Code Manager not only offers the In Vivo drag amp drop technique described above You may also drag any number of codes from the Code Manager onto a data selection Select a data section Open the Code Manager Select one or more codes in the Code Manager YS Drag and drop the codes into the primary document pane If a quotation already exists you can alternatively drop the code onto the bracket in the margin area Note it is not necessary to drop the codes into the selected area You may drop the codes a
27. can be stored as a search category and later reused Search categories are managed in search libraries Categories allow abstraction from the search string itself and permit easy re use of complex expressions in later searches With the simultaneous use of wildcards a search request using a search swarm might look as follows caus why efore since The individual elements of the search swarm are delimited by the vertical bar character I The bar can be read as a Boolean OR The search defined above yields text passages including any of the following strings because causes causation before and therefore why and since Note Do not mistake search categories for codes Search categories are shortcuts for complex search procedures while codes are concepts representing some level of interpretation However when using search categories extensively and building A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 9 Sty ox Create hierarchies of search swarms by embedding existing categories Search categories can build hierarchical structures A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 hierarchies of search categories such a para taxonomy might stimulate the construction of a matching network of codes Defining Categories Search swarms that have proven useful can be assigned names search categories in ATLAS ti to facilitate re use For example CAUSE caus why efore since defines CAUSE as a placehold
28. data that will be shared by different users to be placed in publicly accessible directories But even with the Hermeneutic Units stored in a public directory access is restricted to the author No one but the author may load the HU into ATLAS ti unless it is defined as public or another user is defined as a co author for this Hermeneutic Unit The author may make his her Hermeneutic Unit public so that all other users can use it or even make modifications to it Alternatively public access can be restricted to a specific group of users the co authors ATLAS ti allows the author to define other users who can access and modify a Hermeneutic Unit A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Access Rights Co Authors A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Access to a Hermeneutic Unit is restricted to the author unless he she makes it publicly available to other users or defines a group of co authors To change the rights choose option EXTRAS CHANGE ACCESS RIGHTS from the HU Editor s main menu Four options are offered Choose between PUBLIC READ ONLY this choice lets all other users load and view the Hermeneutic Unit it may even be edited e g for training purposes but it cannot be saved to disk PUBLIC READ amp WRITE permits other users to have the same rights as the author but not the ability to change the access rights PRIVATE By choosing this option you can revoke previously granted rights again SET PASSWORD lets you p
29. number of connections to codes quotations and memos for the selected quotation The connectivity counter provides an additional clue about the next step A quotation with less connections might be less painful to remove If you see a quotation listed more than once in one of the quotation list panes 1 27 and 1 17 in the figure above it means that three or more quotations are involved in a redundant coding You will notice that merging one pair of quotations may have the effect that other pairs are removed from the list as well as the redundancy assertion does not hold any longer for the remaining pairs of quotations for this code Unlinking Removing or Merging a Redundantly Coded Quotation 1 Select a code in the upper pane All pairs of redundantly coded quotations are then displayed in the two lower panes 2 Double click on the quotations of a pair to inspect them in context 3 Decide whether you want to unlink or remove one of the two quotations or whether you want to merge them 4 To unlink a quotation click the UNLINK button below the appropriate list pane The effect and alternative procedures of unlinking codes is described in further detail in Unlinking Codes on page 125 5 To remove a quotation click the REMOVE button below the appropriate list pane 6 To merge the pair of quotations click the MERGE button 7 Note that the quotations removed by this procedure cease to exist inside the Hermeneutic
30. on page 243 Before the merge sixteen quotations were attached to the code Magic 3 three quotations to the code Magic 7 and one quotation to the code Number magic Now we show how to revert this action A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Network Editor et al e 245 To split the previously merged code Number magic 1 2 Select Number Magic in the Code Manager Open a Network Editor on this code The network editor will display Number Magic and all its direct neighbors except quotations Select code Number Magic in the network editor and select NODES IMPORT NEIGHBORS from the network editor s main menu to import its quotations Select NODES DUPLICATE CODES to create an exact clone of Number Magic which is immediately displayed in the network editor as well The clone inherits all quotations code links family memberships and other relations from the original code You will see that all links originating from Number Magic also appear with the newly created clone Number Magic Clone 1 You will very likely end up with lots of nodes and links cluttering the screen Rename clone Number magic Clone 1 via NODES REMNAME into Magic 3 7 This is not mandatory but Magic 3 6 reflects much better what it stands for Magic 3 and Magic 7 Enlarge the network window to fill the entire screen To de clutter the display select menu option L
31. on page 304 EXPORT CODES XML Exports all codes in XML format see Export amp Import using XML on page 304 IMPORT CODES XML Imports a list of codes in XML format see Export amp Import using XML on page 304 Unlike the Import Code List function code comments are imported as well CHANGE DATE Changes the creation date for the currently selected code CHANGE AUTHOR Changes the name of the author 1 e the user who created the selected code SUBMENU OUTPUT All output options for codes are discussed in the chapter The Codes Output Submenu on page 315 The Memos Menu CREATE FREE MEMO Creates a memo that is not yet linked to any entity ATTACH MEMO Creates a new memo associated with the current selection in the PD pane Creates a free memo if nothing is selected LINK MEMO TO SUBMENU Links selected memo to one or more objects e QUOTATIONS e CODES e MEMOS RENAME Renames the selected memo EDIT Opens the memo editor on the selected memo DELETE Deletes the selected memo Reference e 359 SORT Submenu Sets the sort criterion for memos The current sort criterion is displayed as part of the menu item For details see Sorting and Filtering on page 137 FILTER SUBMENU Sets or removes the filter for memos The current filter is displayed as part of the menu item For details see Sorting and Filtering on page 137 TOGGLE FILTER Reverses the current filter If yo
32. proper project management involves decisions regarding where HUs and documents are to be A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Various project scenarios are presented stored Most problems can be avoided by a little informed planning about issues such as file locations and paths and the need to copy move and distribute your HUs across disks networks and computers HU management is the least problematic if you can store all project related documents in the same folder along with the HU itself or in a sub folder However ATLAS ti also easily facilitates the distribution of files across the file system and across different computers and networks These procedures are also discussed in this section There are various types of ATLAS ti users there are those who have stronger or weaker computer skills those who work alone or in teams those who work only at one location or at two or more locations etc Accordingly we have created various project scenarios to illustrate best practices in some of the most typical situations Each scenario illustrates a specific use case and describes strategies for setting up new projects This includes issues such as selecting the ideal location for data files and how to best move or backup entire projects The scenarios are presented in order of increasing complexity All scenarios include specific characteristics and easy to follow instructions for setting up the project For most projects howeve
33. the SPSS Job Generation Window opens see SPSS Preferences below on page 303 Specify all desired properties and then click OK The output is generated and sent to the selected target location When directed to a text editor you can edit the job statements and other parts of the syntax file before proceeding If file separation is selected two files the SPSS job file and the data file are created simultaneously You can directly RUN the result if SPSS is installed on your computer and the SPS extension has been associated with SPSS SPSS Preferences SPSS Job Generation Specify Properties Sale File Creation Check Separate Data File when the data matris is to be stored in a separate file in the same directory as the syntax file DATA LIST FILE spssdat DAT Create a fresh data file during nest run Check when data quotations codes codings has changed since last run Value Separator E The single character used to separate a code name from its value part as Interpreted by SPSS e g Horror 3 Create task section PROCESS IF and DESCRIPTIVE S Figure 120 SPSS Options Dialog In the SPSS Job Generation window you can specify a number of properties Export amp Import e 303 Use separate file when checked the data matrix is written to a separate file This is mandatory if the size of the matrix exceeds a certain size SPSS cannot handle large data sets within a syntax file Speci
34. 06 03 13 42 09 Ey lt s ii Where aa 1 0 z Super 20 08 96 04 03 03 13 57 31 ID The ID combines the PD ID and the quotation sequence number In the example above the first ID number is 3 10 which means that the quotation is part of the third 3 document and it is the 10 10 quotation that was created in this document Quotations are numbered in chronological and not in sequential order The tilde sign indicates that a comment was written for this quotation the bracket symbol lt indicates that the quotation 1s a start anchor for a hyperlink Name The first few characters of a quotation are used as the default list name This name can be changed if desired The default name of a graphic audio or video quotation is the name of the data file name Size item type dependent e Text quotation number of lines paragraphs defined by the number of hard returns e Graphic quotation height in pixel of the quotation s rectangle e Audio quotation milliseconds e Video quotation frames Start item type dependent Text quotation line paragraph number and start position within the paragraph Graphic quotation upper left coordinate Audio quotation h mm ss mil hours minutes seconds milliseconds Video quotations start frame Density Number of links to other quotations Author Name of user who created the item Created Creation date and time 54 e Main Workspace The HU Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0
35. A medical expert attempting to capture diagnostic knowledge would use e g is symptom of and is medication for 214 e The Conceptual Level Networks A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Network Editor et al The Network Editor lets The Network Editor offers an intuitive and powerful method to you visually connect create and manipulate network structures It favors a direct codes and other objects manipulation technique You can literally grab codes quotations to create semantic memos or other objects using your cursor and move them around networks or hypertext the screen as well as draw and cut links between them webs The following describes various methods available for creating and editing Network Views ou Metals Si El Network Modes Links Layout Display Specials Help YA ESHA SVE H ayn a ae Code Metal 1 6 Right click For context menu Figure 86 The Network Editor The Network Editor has two helper windows NWE Toolbox and Alignment Tool that offer convenient support for some tasks see References at Display Menu on page 384 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Network Editor et al e 215 The Relation Editor for maintaining the relation database and for creating and editing relations is described in a separate chapter see The Relation Editor on page 235 Network vs Network View Network View logical structure visual layout 216 e The Network Editor et al
36. Basic Functions e 143 Special Tools Text Search gt Click this button to activate text search Short cut Ctrl F 144 e Special Tools In this chapter a collection of miscellaneous tools is presented that do not fit well under any of the other chapters Included are tools to search text to automatically code text matching specified patterns to retrieve quotations for combinations of codes to count words in textual documents to explore the components of a HU ina hierarchically manner and to remove redundantly coded quotations The Text Search Tool is used to search within primary texts for the occurrence of specific text strings that match a designated string or pattern The Text Search Tool offers three distinct methods entitled Standard Search Category Search and GREP Search to scan primary texts for specified text patterns The functionality of the Text Search Tool is also fully integrated into the Auto Coding Tool see The Auto Coding Tool on page 151 The search mode is automatically determined by the kind of search string entered Regular Expression search GREP however must be explicitly selected If you need to know what GREP stands for and what GREP searches are a detailed explanation is provided at GREP Search on page 149 The Text Search Tool To open the Text Search tool 1 Load a primary text You might not see the Primary Document PD toolbar otherwise 2 Either click the text se
37. Color mode visualizes the coding and modeling state of the codes This mode affects code nodes only Code nodes are The Network Editor et al e 239 automatically assigned a color according to their groundedness and density Groundedness of a code 1 e the number of associated quotations increases the red part of the node color note Magic 3 in the figure below Density 1 e the number of links to other codes increases the blue part Magic is the winner in the figure below is part of is part of A E ec This makes codes that are heavily or seldom used for coding or model building easily identifiable Fonts The font used for nodes and links can be set independently choosing DISPLAY SET FONTS from the Network Editor s main menu Node and Link Appearance Under the Display menu of the Network Editor you find a large variety of options to alter the display characteristics of nodes and links Some of these options affect all nodes regardless of their type Other options change the display of certain node types only 240 e The Network Editor et al A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Node Icon The node type icon can be switched on and off for all nodes Air Aire j by selecting the menu option DISPLAY USE NODE BITMAPS or by pressing the key combination CTRL ALT Ane Eh Airo B The small image used as a node icon increases the distinctiveness of the nodes especially when a mixture of node types exists
38. Content refers to the content of textual primary documents and memos Date only Comment Content Figure 60 Object Crawler Define Query 1 Enter a query Regular expressions and search swarms can be used see GREP Search on page 149 and Category Search on page 146 2 Select the Search Scope 3 Click the Select Objects button to proceed to the next page Selecting the Objects ATLAS ti Object Crawler Define Query l Select Objects Display Results Objects to be included in the search Code Families Hermeneutic Unit PO Families Primary Documents Memo Families Quotations Network Views Memos Code Code Links Codes Hyperlinks Figure 61 Object Crawler Select Objects 4 Select the objects to be included in the search Clicking All objects checks all other checkboxes 5 Proceed with the next and last step by clicking Display Results Displaying the result All objects for which a corresponding match has been found are displayed in the upper list pane The Field column displays the Special Tools e 159 The Query Tool Searching for quotations using codes Naty rA You need the Query Tool for queries using more thana single code 160 Special Tools facet in which the match appeared The selected hit a PD in the figure below had its match in its comment The hit itself is emphasized by red colored font and with angle brackets for easy detection ATLAS ti Object Crawl
39. Displaying a Hermeneutic Unit using stylesheet CSS Switcher Many more examples are included that can show you a variety of practical stylesheet applications If you already know how to write XSLT stylesheets use the supplied examples as a point of departure for your explorations If you are motivated to learn XSLT they can serve as study material for basic and advanced XSLT coding Many more examples are supplied to give you a hint of the limitless possibilities in designing and individualizing ATLAS ti XML output Check our Web site www atlasti com for additional information on ATLAS ti s XML support as well as for an emerging repository of useful stylesheets and dedicated service providers who specialize in creating custom applications interfaces and conversions on the basis of ATLAS ti s XML XSLT capabilities A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Resources Frequently Asked Questions An updated list of frequently asked questions FAQ and their answers can be found on the ATLAS ti website To access the site directly from ATLAS ti select HELP MORE RESOURCES VISIT FAQ from the HU editor s main menu An active Internet connection 1s required to access this web page The ATLAS ti Mailing List A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 During the beta tests for the predecessor of ATLAS ti which began in early 1991 an electronic mailing list was established for the users of the program A mailing list is a special e mail address
40. Displays labels rotated e g alongside the link between two objects Background color Sets the color for the network editor s canvas Node color Sets the color for code nodes Auto color with background If activating this option the background color is also used in auto color mode which is set to white by default Green part Customizes the auto color procedure Range min Customizes the auto color procedure A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Max node width The maximum horizontal size in pixels within which the node s text is formatted Nodes This page allows you to define the default settings for the display of nodes General Nodes Fonts Printing Miscellaneous Codes Yerbosity TF comment is displayed CO Mame only O First line O Mame plus comment First paragraph Full text Quotation verbosity CID only Ou auram Full image for PDs width z0 O plus comment F Box For quotations plus info and body Figure 139 Network Preferences for Nodes Codes Verbosity controls the length of the node name displayed for codes and memos You have the option to display the name only or the name plus comment If Name plus comment is selected you may also define how much of the comment should be displayed First line first paragraph or the full text of the comment see options to the right Quotation verbosity allows four increasing amounts of information to be displayed Full
41. E Formatting detected You have enriched the Formerly plain text with Format related changes such as font size color paragraph alignment etc Click YES bo save khe contents as rich text and preserve this Formatting Click WO to save the contents as plain text and discard all Formatting If you select No any features contained in the document beyond plain text will be lost If you want to keep the rich formatting you need to confirm the message If you select Yes the file will be saved in rich text format although the file extension e g TXT is not changed to RTF The Edit Toolbar The Edit toolbar provides a number of options known from other Windows applications Many of these options are also available from the Edit menu Primary Documents e 81 82 e Primary Documents Underline Cut copy paste Italic Bullet Style Allignment left center right 7 Bold Enter Edit Mode BZU VA Shrink Enlarge Font OO Set Font Color Highlight Selected Text The options in the edit menu are described in The Edit Menu on page 349 Ss Embedded Objects What is an Embedded Object Data from a variety of applications like Word Excel and PowerPoint can be embedded within a PD s data source In fact objects can be embedded in any rich text available in an HU including memos and comments By the way some of the images in this manual were also included as embedded objects In Place Activation amp Editing
42. Embedded objects can be edited like an Excel table or played a video clip without leaving the HU Depending on the object s features the toolbars and menus of the original application can be directly accessed within the ATLAS ti windows For example if you insert an Excel table as an embedded object and double click on it the ATLAS ti main menu and toolbar are replaced by the Excel menu and toolbar All Excel functions can be used to modify and work on the embedded table This is called In place activation or editing If you don t have Excel on your computer all you will see is the image of the table but it will not be activated Note When activating an embedded object it might not open in place but within its original application in a separate window This behavior depends on the embedded object and is outside the control of ATLAS ti A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 An activated embedded gt BIBLE_1 ATLAS ti Exce tab le sh owin g th e aE Bearbeiten Ansicht Buln Format Extras Daten Acrobat V 2 BS an amp E amp 214 MH Arial menu and toolbar within ATLAS ti Grafical docs Non bible Textual docs lt O rAMA D OU ay Figure 28 An activated embedded Excel table Its menu and toolbar are integrated within the HU Editor How to Embed an Object There are several ways to embed an object Embed an Object via Copy and Paste Special You can copy a table or a portion of it in Exce
43. File 3 A file dialog window opens Select a folder enter a file name and save the file 4 Open a HU into which the codes will be imported 5 For this HU select CODES MISCELLANEOUS IMPORT CODES XML 6 A file dialog window opens Select the XML file that you just exported and click Open 7 The code list is imported Check the Code Manager to see whether the procedure was completed successfully and according to your expectations Avoiding Name Clashes when Importing Code Lists If a code with the same name already exists in the HU the imported code name is prefixed with three exclamation marks Another attempt to load a code with a conflicting name will be ignored Note to ATLAS ti 4 x users The old Import Codes function still exists In case you have some previously created code lists saved as cod files that you wish to import select CODES MISCELLANEOUS IMPORT CODE LIST However this format cannot be generated anymore Renaming and Deleting a Code Renaming and deleting codes are procedures that seem trivial but understanding the scope of these operations can be a problem for new users For both operations you must understand that there is only ONE code object e g Happiness in a given HU even if you applied associated with quotations other codes etc this code many times With the margin area switched on you may see the code appear many times while scrolling through your document In fact you a
44. HU with another HU See Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 289 CODINGS ANALYZER The Codings Analyzer identifies codes that were used redundantly on overlapping data segments see Redundant Coding Analyzer on page 188 XML SUBMENU EXPORT HU To XML Generates an XML file from the current HU See Exporting the Hermeneutic Unit in XML on page 306 APPLY STYLE SHEET Creates output on the basis of an XML stylesheet without previously having saved the HU as XML file XML CONVERTER Opens a window on XML converted HUs and available stylesheets for conversion into reports browsers and foreign formats see Creating Reports with the XML Converter on page 318 for further detail Reference e 365 Connect to Server Import Query Result View Query Result Create Bundle Install Bundle 366 e Reference QUESSY TI Submenu Functions for querying databases and importing PDs and families Only available in enterprise edition CONNECT TO SERVER Connects to a remote computer running the QUESSY ti server IMPORT QUERY RESULT Imports the result of a query processed by the QUESSY ti server VIEW QUERY RESULT Displays a query result using style sheets COPY BUNDLE SUBMENU CREATE BUNDLE Creates a portable package of the project HU and all associated files See Copy Bundle Migrate and Backup Projects on page 282 for a detailed explanation INSTALL BUNDLE Distributes the HU and all other
45. Import of Documents amp Families Please refer to PD Family Table on page 197 for details on how to bulk assign a large number of documents and associated families in Excel compatible CSV format A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Export amp Import e 309 Generating Output Overview 310 e Generating Output This chapter provides an overview of all output options that are available within ATLAS ti In addition some general procedures common to most output functions are explained ATLAS ti offers numerous options to create output and reports Most output is textual but graphical output is also available where applicable Network Editor Typical textual reports include sorted and filtered lists of objects like code memos families and quotations Comments can often be included when needed For textual primary documents a near what you see is what you get WYSIWYG output is available including the annotations populating the margin area Output options are available from the menus of the tools e g the HU Editor s menus the Object Manager s and Object Explorer s menus Some tools offer an output button either as the only option e g the Query Tool or in addition to the menus Code Manager The target of an output is not necessarily restricted to the printer Many of the text related report procedures allow output to be directed to a text editor the printer or a file Other kinds of output are not necessa
46. In this case please choose EXTRAS LOGIN and enter SUPER and USER Before making any changes to the user database it is a good idea to make a backup copy of file HERMENCR HDB located in the program s directory Note in addition to being an administrative user in the ATLAS ti context you also need to have administrative rights as a Windows user in order to write access the user database which is located in ATLAS ti s PROGRAM folder below the Program Files folder This folder is usually write protected for non administrative users on secure well in principle operating systems like Windows XP Windows 2000 or better A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Collaboration e 265 The user administration tool allows you to create modify and remove users 266 e Collaboration a User Administration File Edit View Selected User Account Charly RETT First name Charles Darwin Access rights Ok Standard Administrator Password Lask name Current user database Account First Mame 3 Admin Admin Admin Charles Last Mame Rights Administrator Standard Standard Administrator Darwin Number of users 4 CO Programme Scientific Softw hermnencr Adb Figure 113 User Administration Editor Maintaining the User Database The options to add delete and change users are located in the User Administration Tool s EDIT menu You not only need administrative rights to modify the data bas
47. JFIF Compliant jpg Mu D Bi Tom rth JPEG JFIF Compliant jpeg y Documents jae ee BA vincent rtf MacPaint mac Zsolt Paintbrush pcs Desktop 2 Kodak Photo CD ped ig J UNI Portable Bitmap pbrm T UA Portable Pixelmap ppm My Computer UNI Portable Graymap porn Sun Raster Images ras E True Vision Targa tga Tagged Image File Format tit Audio WAY Files vay 4 Primary Documents i wt a File name a biy Metwork Files of type 3 Browse and select one or more data source files to be assigned to the HU and click the Open button The selected files are assigned as PDs Assigning Documents using Drag amp Drop Assigning documents via Drag amp Drop may be more convenient when you have different browsers opened on different folders To assign documents via drag amp drop 1 Open Windows File Explorer e g by selecting EXTRAS EXPLORER from the main menu 2 Select the folder from where you want to assign files 3 Select one or more files 4 Drag the selected files into the document drop down list or into the Document Manager 5 A single file can directly be dragged into the main PD area In addition to being assigned it is immediately displayed You may also drag amp drop subfolders This essentially assigns all files stored in the subfolders and any subfolders below Documents not compatible with ATLAS ti are rejected You can imagine that this
48. NEIGHBORS from the menu Note This procedure imports neighbors of all types If a code with many quotations is selected this operation might fill the Network Editor with unwanted quotation nodes To suppress the import of quotations hold down the CTRL key when issuing this command Note If you have mistakenly imported the wrong or too many node neighbors select Nodes UNDO IMPORT NEIGHBORS from the menu or press the key combination Ctrl Shift Z Import Co occurring Codes For code nodes there is a special import feature that exploits the spatial relations of different codings A code co occurs with another if it has been used to code quotations that are in close proximity embedded overlapping or directly following each other The proximity of coding applied to a text can also be exploited via the Query Tool s co occurence proximity operator However while the Query Tool yields quotations for explicitly specified codes the import function brings in only the codes To import co occurring codes 1 Select one or more codes in the Network Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 2 Removing Nodes does not delete the objects they represent Delete Entities however does Sty La All nodes and links have context menus A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 2 Choose NODES IMPORT COOCCURRING CODES from the Network Editor s menu Removing Nodes from Network View Removing nodes from the vie
49. NOT Grafical docs gt NOT Bible texts amp NOT Grafical docs _1 Unified Objects Unified codes are displayed along with their new quotation references within the resulting HU A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Project Management e 297 Unifying 54 Codes A Formula 6235 Abaddon Because both the target and the source HUs are identical and PDs were added rather than unified the code A Formula is not only applied to quotation 1 35 as in the original HU but also to the quotation 6 35 The same applies to all other codes In the excerpt above we see that the code Abaddon now also points to quotations 7 32 and the code Casualties to quotations 6 7 6 33 and 7 31 Statistical Summary The statistical summary at the end of the report provides an overview of all object types after the merge Object sizes per object type after merge Object Type HU after merge Primary Dogs 10 Quotations ZA Codes 54 Codangs 342 Memos 12 Network Views 11 Primary Doc Families 16 Code Families 3 Memo Families 2 Code Links 38 Hyperlinks 9 298 e Project Management A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Export amp Import SPSS Export The case for cases Sty bn ATLAS ti exports quotations as cases You can use SPSS features to use primary documents as cases A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 This chapter describes procedures to export import data and structures between ATLA
50. Pend s Ilr ER 7 as me p 12 Sa e a I ay r e ee Tie eae TES a Be oa a 1 1 32 poy SS Magic 3 7 19 0 77 liz4 ee ae in em oe eee 1 4 a l Pa E A 1 3 2 Be Re oe a o 1 15 I ae Jl 2 17 1 11 2 20 1 21 Figure 103 Number Magic almost in its original state Now we have to split Magic 3 7 into Magic 3 and Magic 7 13 Select code Magic 3 7 and choose NODES DUPLICATE CODES from the menu The new clone Magic 3 7 Clone 1 is displayed in the network editor 14 Now rename Magic 3 7 to Magic 3 and its clone Magic 3 7 Clone 1 to Magic 7 We are almost there 15 All you need to do now is to remove the irrelevant links from each of the codes using the procedures described above 16 Select nodes Magic 3 and Magic 7 and choose NODES LINK NODES from the menu 17 Click on code node Number magic and select relation is part of We are now back at the original state A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 es Magic 1 6 i Commentary pe i k 1 29 Big Star Magic 7 a l re 2 eo sn AZ oon ek Ih ee re OS aN o i j 1 24 E ae a S 1 4 312 Oa en 1 15 ra ae EE oes a i 1 13 a 5 hs i i DS EE ee 1 28 S i a 1 12 1 27 BBB BL 2 17 1 11 2 20 lel F igure 104 After splitting the code magic 3 7 Network Views as Graphical Tables of Contents If you use graphical PDs you can use Network Views to display thumbnails
51. Relations Semantic Layout ErI L Topological Layout Expand trl Shrink Ctrl Fit bo Window Fit Window bo Webwork Crh Align A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Opens a list of all nodes in the Network View for selection Links Menu The link menu provides options to link nodes to cut existing links or to invert links You may also activate a relation editor in order to create modify save or load the relation types Some operations require that links are selected beforehand 1 e Cut and Flip LINK NODES Links nodes Use this option to link two or more nodes See Linking Nodes on page 223 CUT LINKS Removes the association between one or more linked nodes FLIP LINKS Reverses the directionality of the link you created Edit Relations Submenu CODE CODE RELATIONS Opens the relation editor for code code relations cf The Relation Editor on page 235 HYPERLINK RELATIONS Opens the relation editor for hyperlinked relations cf The Relation Editor on page 235 Layout Menu SEMANTIC LAYOUT Places the nodes within the Network Editor using a semantic layout algorithm See Semantic Layout on page 230 for details TOPOLOGICAL LAYOUT This special layout procedure creates a linear list of nodes as the result of a depth first traversal of the graph Nodes with the least amount of dependencies are positioned at the beginning See Topological Layout on page 231 for detail
52. Selecting this option frees the tied resources DISPLAY BLACKBOARD Display the contents of the file blackbrd txt which can be found in the ATLAS ti program directory HTML PREFERENCES A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Manages the HTML code output See HTML Export on page 307 GENERAL PREFERENCES Opens the General Preferences dialog to customize the user interface and other system properties The Windows Menu Browse Windows Ctrl BROWSE WINDOWS 1 atlasti development journal Opens the Window Browser directly The Window Browser lists 2 45 Intro all currently opened ATLAS ti related windows When resized it e 3 MMSample can be displayed conveniently on the right or the left side of the Eanes Be screen this way offering easy access to all currently open windows Separated by a line from the above function the list of currently open HU Editors is displayed for easy switching atlast development journal ATLAS ti Code Manager HU The Sample a The Sample ATLAS ti The Help Menu ES ATLAS ti Help ATLAS TI HELP Open Welcome wiz Launches online help Also available via the F1 key Tip of the Day OPEN WELCOMEWIZ More Resources Y About ATLAS ti Opens the Welcome Wizard TIP OF THE DAY Display useful and short tips MORE RESOURCES SUBMENU A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 369 Open Manual ATLAS ti Web Site ATLAS ti Registration Check For Servicepacks Visit FAQ Check Workshops Che
53. That is they live exclusively in your Web browser This adds a huge new repertoire of applications to your tool chest since you can modify the supplied stylesheets to your hearts content and even create your own stylesheets to suit your unique and very specific needs How this is done will be explained through the examples below Example Sortable Table In order to create the output in the figure below stylesheet Sortable Table was applied The generated table allows interactive sorting and searching of codes and some of their related information Sortable and Searchable Results Table Search Results Highlight rows by clicking them Sort columns by clicking the ARRO in the header Find data anywhere in the table by using the search facility Please note Search is case sensitive Code Author Date Code Family M JA Formula Super 03 04 2003 3 4 sjanimal Super 1016993 S a jpible E 3 12 1991 CCS J Black Magic aTes yeooth CATS 18 1991 mgjerass CdSe 10 16 1993 S O Casualties Admin 10 08 1993 S e Figure 130 Code list using stylesheet Sortable Table Example Author The figure below presents an output that might be useful to support teams in the process of analysis A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 E Admin E Quotations 8 E codes 4 ee ee an sa sae naan aasanassasasaasaasaaaaseasaananaaanaan a E Andreas E Quotations 64 E codes 6 E Memos 3 E Primary Document Family 2
54. User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Main Workspace The HU Editor e 41 your needs Use the VIEWS menu to hide some of the buttons windows etc Components of the HU Editor The numbers in brackets refer to the figure above showing the HU editor Title Bar The title bar is common to all windows and dialog boxes It displays the name of the HU that is currently being edited Main Menu The main menu below the title bar offers access to the different kinds of objects that populate an HU Commands found in the main menu are often also available from context menus and toolbar buttons For a description of all available menu options refer to The HU Editor s Menus on page 347 Toolbars Toolbars offer functions that are generally also available as menu commands A short tool tip help text is displayed when the mouse pointer rests on a tool button The toolbars functions are described in section The HU Editor s Toolbars on page 373 The Main Toolbar 1 The main toolbar offers many major functions Unless switched off via the VIEWS menu it is always available The Edit Toolbar 2 The Edit toolbar is available only when an editable Primary Document PD is displayed The tools from the Editing Toolbar can be used after entering edit mode The various options are explained further in the section on Editing Primary Documents on page 78 The Primary Document Toolbar 4 The PD toolbar is to the left of the
55. a A a oor g tat u aot aaa ra 1 1 g m r s 1 m P Er 1 ea I ae Ve fee 1 P y 25 an r an 1 ie Pi Si a r Sr 1 1 ee Fog ee 9 Fire EF wWatere es v iiai p PEP iiaii Figure 83 A snapshot of super code family Chemistry displayed in a network view Solution Combine families Female Over 25 and New York using the OR operator then negate using NOT 210 e Family Life A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Conceptual Level Networks The word network is an ubiquitous and powerful metaphor found C in many different fields of research and application Flow charts in 2 The four elements vg i Neno R capa models of memory and knowledge representation semantic i l i DE networks are all networks that serve to represent complex va r o information by intuitively accessible graphic means One of the ET most attractive properties of graphs is their intuitive graphical presentation mostly in form of two dimensional layouts of labeled nodes and links A f project planning text graphs in hypertext systems cognitive In contrast with linear sequential representations e g text presentations of knowledge in networks resemble more closely the way human memory and thought is structured Cognitive load in handling complex relationships is reduced with the aid of spatial representation techniques ATLAS ti uses networks to help represent and explore conceptual structures Networks ad
56. a frame Quotations as Layers Quotations need to be regarded as a transparent layer on top of a document Quotations are stored independently of the PD inside the HU Technically speaking a quotation consists of the identifier a number and a pair of coordinates that specify the beginning and end of the quotation The content of a PD file the data source 1s Main Concepts e 31 belong Codes Sty a Keep code names brief and succinct Use memos or the comment pane for longer elaborations Memos 32 e Main Concepts therefore not altered by the creation deletion or modification of quotations The term code is used in many different ways First we would like to define what that term means in qualitative research and then in ATLAS t Objectives From a methodological standpoint codes serve a variety of purposes They capture meaning in the data They also serve as handles for specific occurrences in the data that cannot be found by simple text based search techniques Codes are used as classification devices at different levels of abstraction in order to create sets of related information units for the purpose of comparison e g a concept like Coping Strategy From a low level tool perspective codes are typically short pieces of text referencing other pieces of text graphical audio or video data Their purpose is to classify an often large number of textual or other data units In the realm of inf
57. a path used in current HU Enter or browse for any existing path Push ADD PATH Always use fallback paths If you do not want to define a mapped path a second option is to activate Always Use Fallback Paths see Redirection Fallback on page 104 for a definition If activated the following happens all such A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Project Management e 287 irresolvable files are unbundled in the HU s folder 1 e the folder where the HU HPRS file is stored It is best to organize projects in ways that use absolute path references as rarely as possible This reduces the need to use PD Mapping Report The report pane in the lower right of the Install Bundle window displays a dynamic report of the documents about to be unbundled How To Install a Bundle File 1 Select EXTRAS COPY BUNDLE INSTALL BUNDLE from the main menu 2 From the file dialog select a bundle file and click OPEN The Install Bundle window opens 3 Select an unbundling strategy Migrate or Restore see Unbundling Strategies on page 285 4 If in Migrate mode select the target location for the HU via the HU Path entry field All documents using HUPATH are also copied to this folder It might be a good idea to select a new empty folder as the target 5 Check for conflicts and try to resolve them Conflict color code on page 286 6 Exclude unwanted documents or the HU from the unbundling procedure 7 C
58. a wide variety of other representations by using stylesheets Individual reports conversions into other programs input formats or creating clickable viewer versions of your HUs are among the options available The default XML folder browse conveniently via EXTRAS EXPLORER XML FOLDER hosts some examples of such stylesheets waiting to be explored or modified to suit your own needs or tastes The XML converter can be viewed as a kind of plug in interface for user written programs or macros The ATLAS ti XML Converter is a convenient tool for user created reports converters and viewers It displays all XML and XSL files located in the default XML folder Note If you change the default XML folder under EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES PATHS and want to continue to use the provided stylesheet samples you need to copy the content of the default XML folder to the new location Requirements ATLAS ti s XML Converter requires Microsoft s MSXML v 3 XML parser to be installed In turn MSXML requires the Internet Explorer 5 5 or later to be installed Note Although Microsoft s Internet Explorer IE 5 5 or 6 must be installed on your system it 1s not required to be your default web browser If you have Windows XP as your operating system you should already be well equipped However it is recommended that you download the most recent version of the parser from the Microsoft web site run the Check MSXML option below To check
59. accessible See How ATLAS ti Handles Documents on page 93 for further information Location The actual location of the data source file acquired via redirection Dashes indicate that Origin and Location are identical Media The media type Author The name of the ATLAS ti user who assigned the document Created The date the document was assigned to this HU Modified The date when the PD was last modified Modification is not the modification of the data source but the date of last usage within ATLAS ti e g a quotation was created or removed Quotations The number of quotations created for this PD Quotation Manager This Manager offers you several display and sorting options 52 e Main Workspace The HU Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A double click on a l l Quotation Manager HU The Sample quotation loads its PD Quotations Edit Miscellaneous Gutpuk View unless already loaded n make gt Re KE and displays its content in context Mame Density Start Size Author Create 4nd the name of the st 3 1 Admin B In this examp le sateen nd when he had open 2 1 Admin quotation 1 2 is And I saw the seven 1 selected and its comment 41 And the seven angels l displayed in the text and stood at the altar 1 and there Fell a great s5 1 pone and many men died of i 11 03 965 I gt The number seven is very heavily used in all the texts 124 Quotatior 1 2 4
60. and 1 3 The original query is modified as follows Sanity OR Health AND NOT Q1 And returns exactly what you want quotations 1 2 and 3 1 Both the Super Code s and the suppressor code s automatically created comment reflect their mutual dependency Note A suppressor code cannot be deleted before the referring Super Code 1s deleted What You Cannot do with Super Codes As Super Codes are not directly associated with quotations certain restrictions apply Coding The most important constraint is that you cannot associate them with quotations directly Therefore Super Codes are not presented when doing code by list and drag amp drop onto data selections 1s prohibited Merging Code Merge operations including Super Codes are also not possible A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 TA all about Magic SM 1 7 1 21 all about Magic 1 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Prevent Cycles If you created a Super Code whose query contains a reference to a code family you cannot assign this Super Code to the code family later This would create a cyclic structure and is therefore disallowed Snapshot Codes A Snapshot Code is a normal code that records the current state of a Super Code by way of hard wired links to the derived quotations By creating a snapshot from time to time you can analyze the development of a Super Code Unlike the Super Code a code created by the snapshot is displayed in the margi
61. assign them to the HU e Changing the references to external data sources must be matched by appropriate relocation of the affected documents A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Wty A good reference is correct existing e flexible and consistent R In other words if you change a reference move the document to the new location specified Moving documents must be matched by updating their references in EVERY referencing HU In other words if you move a document inform all HUs that use it about its new address Editing the contents of documents used by any HU must always be done from within ATLAS ti What s a good reference A correct one have you assigned the right document An existing one does the file still exist A flexible one can the file be moved without changing its reference A consistent one does it always yield the right document Consequences of Accessing PDs via References The use of references offers flexibility and economy in handling large numbers of large sized documents and allows teams to work on shared data sources concurrently However you need to be aware of what it means to access documents via external references Consequences As we have discussed coding work on PDs does not affect the data source A quotation created during the process of coding is nothing but a reference including the file s path and name and the start and end position of the selection The quotati
62. attach the memo 2 Open the context menu for the desired memo for example in the Memo Manager 3 Choose the option ATTACH MEMO from the context menu or drag and drop the memo to the highlighted quotation To attach a memo to multiple quotations One option is to drag a number of quotations from the Quotation Manager onto a memo in the Memo Manager By using the Quotation Manager one can comfortably browse and review display quotations before attaching them to the memo cA Another option is to select from a list of quotations 1 Inthe Memo Manager select a memo 2 Choose menu option LINK MEMO TO QUOTATIONS from the context menu or the Memos menu 3 A window pops up showing all quotations that are currently not linked to this memo Select the quotations to be associated with this memo Click OK As a third option you can connect a memo and quotations visually by using the Network Editor see To link more than two nodes on page 224 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Textual Level Basic Functions e 131 Memo Types Memos can be organized sorted and filtered by the type attribute Several standard memo types are offered by ATLAS ti currently commentary method and theory You can add new types or modify existing ones Memo types may either have a global or local scope Global types are available in all HUs local memo types are known only for the HU for which they have been defined Memo types are displa
63. be named and specified by the user A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Network Editor et al e 235 236 e The Network Editor et al Code Code Relations Editor File Edit Relations Internal ID Label Label Menu Label 1 BTP i is part of CAUSA Is Cause of Label 2 CONTRA lt gt contradicts Menu Text lis associated with s E Line Style Width Solid Line Color CO Dashed Line Preferred Layout Direction Left gt Right Right gt Left O Up Down Down gt Up Formal Property Symmetric O Asymmetric Transitive Relates concepts without subsumption Cancel Figure 98 The Relation Editor What Can be Edited Cosmetic and descriptive as well as structural aspects of relations can be edited with the Relation Editor Cosmetics Cosmetic aspects include the label used when displaying links in a Network Editor the menu text displayed when creating a connection and the width solidity and color of the line connecting the nodes linked with this relation Preferred Layout Direction A more sophisticated cosmetic property is the preferred layout direction By using this relation characteristic the user can assert some control on the automatic layout algorithm Indeed this option justifies the name semantic layout Formal Property The formal property associated with a relation has a cosmetic effect and it controls the procedural semantics of the sem
64. brackets in the margin area The bracket width can also be set in General Preferences SHORT MARGIN NAMES If space gets sparse in the margin area you can reduce object names to a specified amount of characters Customize in General Preferences ADD TASK BAR ICON Adds an ATLAS ti Task Manager icon to the Windows task bar When clicking on the Task Manager icon a browser lists all windows currently opened in the ATLAS ti session This can also be accomplished by selecting BROWSE WINDOWS from the Views menu REFRESH SCREEN The splitter bar may disappear when dragging or there may be other display related peculiarities These can usually be cured by selecting this option A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Text Editor me Object Explorer ith Query Tool Object Crawler Word Cruncher Merge with HU Codings Analyzer APL QUESSY ti H Copy Bundle d Service Pack Manager iy Export HU to XML Apply Style Sheet AML Converter A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Tools Menu TEXT EDITOR Opens a text editor that is independent of the current HU OBJECT EXPLORER A hierarchical browser for all objects QUERY TOOL Opens the Query Tool cf The Query Tool on page 160 OBJECT CRAWLER Searches through the entire HU See The Object Crawler on page 158 for details WORD CRUNCHER Creates word counts See The Word Cruncher on page 155 for details MERGE WITH HU Merges the currently loaded
65. button The extension HPRS is automatically appended to the filename Pending Changes Pending changes are changes in open memo or comment text editors unless you have saved the text and in network editors with modified layout that has not yet been saved If you are currently editing a PD s data source this would also count as a pending change If any pending changes are detected when you are about to close or save the HU you will be offered the choice to accept or discard such changes By accepting the changes they become part of the HU and are then saved to disk along with all other changes in the HU Pending Changes Closing The Sample Pending changes detected Click Details For fine tuning Commit amp Save HUJ Discard Changes Figure 21 Pending changes detcted click Details opens the dialog below The extended dialog below lists all pending changes and allows control over which pending changes are to be committed Consolidate Changes before Saying Changes have been detected which have not wet been commited to the HU Before proceeding to save please check those changes in the list below which you want to become part of the HU Double click an item to bring the window bo the Foreground fe Memo Magic 7 i Network Editor 4 Elements I i Quotation Manager HU The Sample Clear all Check all Toggle all Click the button below to commit all changes checked Help above All unchecked change
66. call this a Hermeneutic Unit HU Next assign documents text graphic audio or video files as PDs to the HU The data files become the source material for your project s PDs and can be located anywhere on your computer or a network Note By completing step 1 and 2 you have already created something useful a framework that compiles many documents around a theme This framework is practical too because a single file the HU gives you meaningful immediate and easy access to hundreds or even thousands of files once assigned 3 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Read and select text passages or identify areas in an image or a multimedia document that are of further interest assign key words codes and write memos that contain your thinking about the data We call this the Textual Level working phase whereby textual not only refers to text but also to graphic audio or video data Compare data segments based on the codes you have assigned possibly assign more data files to the project Organize PDs codes and memos using Families Build semantic prepositional or terminological networks from the codes you have created These networks together with your codes and memos form the framework for emerging theory If appropriate you can also export data for further analysis with statistical software Finally compile a written report based on the memos you have written throughout the various phases o
67. can be opened inside the margin area by moving the mouse pointer onto the background between the objects It allows you to set display properties of the objects Margin area preferences Several individual preferences can be set for the margin area the kind of objects shown whether icons should be used whether in place editing should be allowed etc In order to set your individual preferences Select EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES or use the hammer button and select the Margin tab For further information please refer to The General Preferences Dialog on page 337 Status Bar 7 The status bar is at the bottom of the window The leftmost field informs the user about successful termination of operations displays the file name of the currently loaded file contains short help texts for menu items and buttons and shows error messages when necessary Loaded PT F 1 Revelation 8 lt HUPATH 1rew 8 rtf p ANSI CP 0 19 58 Figure 12 The HU Editor s Status Bar The icon next to the main information field changes to a book when the PD is switched to edit mode The next field displays the document s content type e g ANSI OEM Graphic Next comes a hint regarding the currently used code page 0 standard code page The last field displays the current time Sty Pop up or Context menus are activated with a right mouse button click The Wallpaper pop up menu Pop up menu for selected text
68. codes memos Density quotes codes me Quotes codes number of links to A mos objects of the same type Memos number of links to all associated objects 1 e quotes codes and other memos Size quotes memos Quotations number of lines paragraphs Memos size A of text Media PDs Media type i e audio image rich A text text video Quotations PDs Number of quotations for the primary document Origin PDs Origin of data source A alphabetically A PDs Memos Number of PDs using the memo as A their data source if any Filtering The status bar of all Object Managers displays the current filter and sort setting The default filter criterion is All The Textual Level Basic Functions e 139 E Code Manager HU The Sample Sel Codes Edit Miscellaneous Output View B h o Name Grounded Density Author A T a Formula Thonas M 2 Abaddon Thomas M 1 1 a 0 Laszlo Current Filter 1 0 1 za Alchemie Laszlo Animal Thomas Ml ga Bad weather Admin i Current Sort 52 Codes Mo item selected All Mame Title Figure 48 Display of sort and filter settings in the status bar It is possible to combine filtering and sorting e g all free codes sorted by the time of their creation The filter options are available in the object menus of the HU Editor Documents Quotations Codes and Memos and from the corresponding Manager s menu The filter field in the statu
69. common operations on primary documents especially when starting a project are selecting data sections assigning codes and or memos to them Marking a segment does not by itself create a quotation though this is often the very next step after making a selection Selecting Text Segments In addition to the usual selection techniques known from text editors and word processors ATLAS ti offers an extended semi automatic double click selection technique for textual primary documents Here is how it works A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Textual Level Basic Functions e 107 Double click selection sequence Paragraph Complete Text 1 Double click to select the word assuming it is not yet selected 2 Double click on the selection to expand it to the sentence embedding the current selection 3 Double click on the selection to expand it to the full paragraph surrounding the selection 4 Double click again to select the complete text 5 Double click once more to unselect the selected area Note To optimize retrieval of quotations using the Query Tool using semi automatic selection for creating quotations offers the necessary consistency For the semi automatic selection of sentences and paragraphs the currently used Paragraph Model plays a crucial role For instance if you have assigned a Legacy document with hard returns for every line selecting a paragraph will select a line unless you h
70. differentiated relationships between quotations contradiction ut pm n T F eif raai a F ey peeji Teg Hir atid AYE piel eH pamai support illustration etc pon tay SiE UER EA m Grian me ratte qf as No code is needed to gafe feud athe FO Aha tcpacnyes Reena wipe Nyi fu ET pr connect quotation Q1 with one that it contradicts Q2 fase E Peagi Bie ama wii ot py a al fore tute Faja riffen tap er faci tent Ate Te p Is apa Sai a _ N Ej Figure 106 Hypertext captures the macrostructure of a text Cross references between text passages are very common even in conventional media like books just think of religious and juridical texts literature journals etc Footnotes and endnotes are another common deviation from the pure linearity of sequential text However in conventional media not much navigational support is provided for traversing between the pieces of data that reference each other Today s largest Computer related hypertext applications include for example hypertext system the online help systems that display operational information in suitable World Wide Web small chunks compared to lengthy printed information but with a considerable amount of linkage to other pieces of information A well known hypermedia structure is the World Wide Web with its textual graphical and other multimedia information distributed world wide Benefits of Hypertext What ar
71. divorce and then compute a possible sequence of events A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Creating Output A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Several output options are available for Network Views The range is from printing the layout via copying to the clipboard in a variety of formats both textual and graphical and by saving a Network View to a file Printing Networks Before printing a Network View the first time you may prefer to setting some general options include title print border etc SPECIALS PREFERENCES PRINTING See Printing on page 390 for detail You can either print the entirety or part of a Network View To print only parts of a Network View highlight the nodes you wish to print To Print a Network View 1 2 6 Open the Network View and arrange all nodes to be printed If you want to print a selection of nodes only select these nodes for multiple selection hold down the Ctrl key Choose NETWORK PRINT NETWORK VIEW from the Network Editor s menu Check Selection to print the selected nodes only If the size of the network view determined by the node layout exceeds a single page depending on current printer settings scaling or multi page print will be offered as a choice E Network Printing Recommendation fx Current settings produce a multi page printout of 3 by 1 pages IF you want to set the paper orientation to landscape click CANCEL and change printer settings acc
72. each time unless they were modified A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The following variations are not essential at this stage and you may study them later You may now jump directly to the scenarios below Variation Distributed Project Team Splitting a project and merging the split projects later can be accomplished in all of the scenarios presented Such a Split amp Merge approach makes sense not only for teamwork but is also feasible for a solitary researcher working on individual aspects of a problem Before splitting a project a base version is usually created which already either contains or references all commonly used resources documents codes memos comments network views For details see the scenarios below From the base project version a number of copies can be created to distribute to team members in a teamwork setting You should make a backup of this basic version Certain project scenarios may have restrictions regarding the location at which the project and all its associated documents are fully functional A safe place will always be the location at which the base version was created For details see the related scenarios Merging HUs later requires a certain discipline with respect to the base version For instance PDs must not be rearranged or they won t be matched in the process of merging For teamwork using ATLAS ti internal user management described in User Management on page
73. for the version of MSXML installed on your computer Generating Output e 319 320 e Generating Output run TOOLS XML XML CONVERTER from the main menu or click the globe button in the main toolbar Checking MSXML compatibility If you receive an error message you need to check if you have a compliant version of MSXML installed From the main menu select HELP MORE RESOURCES CHECK MSXML A list of installed MSXML modules will be displayed including their compatibility with ATLAS ti If none of the modules is compatible follow the link to the offered download site to get a compliant version of MSXML How to Use the XML Converter The XML Converter offers XML versions of HUs you have already created using the procedure described in Exporting the Hermeneutic Unit in XML on page 306 Note the XML Converter can only convert XML versions of ATLAS ti Hermeneutic Units It is not a generic tool for arbitrary XML conversions To open the XML Converter 1 Select EXTRAS XKML CONVERTER to start the conversion or click the globe button in the main toolbar This opens the ATLAS ti XML Converter A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 ATLAS ti AML Converter Select an ML data source in the left list and a style sheet in the right list before converting ML Data Sources Style Sheets Edit Stylesheet Toggle View Name Category Description ka Expandable Boxes by author Viewer 4
74. helps you to explore the complex phenomena hidden in your data For coping with the inherent complexity of the tasks and the data ATLAS ti offers a powerful and intuitive environment that keeps you focused on the analyzed materials It offers tools to manage extract compare explore and reassemble meaningful pieces from large amounts of data in creative flexible yet systematic ways Not a Foreword 2 e Introduction When I asked Anselm Strauss back in 1996 to contribute a foreword to the manual of the first version of ATLAS ti I was extremely happy he agreed As I have no idea how his attitude and his decision would be today I decided not to include the original foreword except for the following quotation which I promise will remain true for some time to come the program author makes no claims whatever to having produced a program that will perform miracles for your research you Still have to have the ideas and the gifts to do exceptional research So then after all these years of developing the current release still no miracles Even with the help of a team of developers business experts designers technical writers and patient users No miracles True But on the other hand something has grown that we can be proud of A versatile tool still not perfect but state of the art and Still close to the needs of the people we have been serving with our development for more than a decade Thomas Muhr Scientific
75. identification numbers Standard Search Mode GREP Figure 55 Using GREP search The Case Sensitive option can be used in combination with a GREP search 150 e Special Tools A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Auto Coding Tool Auto Coding Text Search Automatic Segmentation Coding The New Code button allows you to create codes on the fly A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Auto Coding tool finds text passages selects a specified amount of text e g the exact match or spread to the surrounding word sentence or paragraph and then codes the passages with a previously selected code Auto coding is useful when coding structural information like speaker turns in group interviews or other sections that can easily be identified by a text search Auto coding allows you to quickly collect ideas that belong to a certain concept on the basis of words or patterns found in the text Concepts The Auto Coding Dialog The Auto Coding tool combines the Text Search tool with an automatic segmentation and code assignment mechanism To open the Auto Coding Dialog select CODES CODING AUTOCODING from the main menu E Auto Coding Dialog Select Code Ecology 1 O w Enter or select Search Expression ASpeaker 1 5 F Case Sensitive ARTIFICIALLIGHT candle lamnp lantern A Use GREP CLOSERELATIVE Father mather brather child p Corm Al COLORS blue brown gray green magent
76. image for PDs displays graphical PDs as small images also called thumbnails In addition you can set the horizontal width in pixels for all displayed graphical PD thumbnails Box for quotations Display quotations inside a bounding box A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 389 390 e Reference Fonts General Nodes Fonts Printing Miscellaneous Object Font Size es Italic aS Font Details Printed Comment Printed Title Reset All to Default Font sample The great brown fox QaUG4ar 1234 Figure 140 Network Fonts Preferences You can globally specify a font for all nodes and links In addition you can choose how the network title and comment should look when outputting a network Font changes for nodes and links are visible the next time you open a Network View Printing General Nodes Fonts Printing Miscellaneous Prink network view title Left margin mm a Print info page l l e Right margin rrr 20 Print border z oim pnek a Print background color Top margin rim 20l8 Offset From border mm aig Bottom margin mm a Auto Fit to page down bo ese percent Figure 141 Network Printing Preferences Network Views are printed as bitmaps You have the following options to include the title and comment info page to draw a border around the Network View and to print or ignore the background color Furthermore you can scale the Network View down or u
77. in Restore mode If a data source is addressed relative to the TBPATH it is copied to the TBPATH named above Data sources addressed as HUPATH are copied to the target folder chosen for the HU List of bundled documents The list of bundled documents can be sorted with a click on the column header The following information is provided e name of the document e target location of the document including special paths more on Special Paths below e a field indicating if this document is used when unpacking the bundle It also contains a small color square indicating a possible conflict more on the Conflict color code below e size the total of the file sizes of the document file and its optional auxiliary files e last modification date e document type Special Paths If a document s target location is lt TBPATH gt it will be copied to the folder that is currently set as the textbank path on the target system If a document s target location is lt HUPATHS the document is unpacked at the location of the HU HPRS file Conflict color code Possible target conflicts are indicated by the colored square in the Use column A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 i Ho conflict detected The green light is on for every document that can be installed without overwriting an existing version Existing file can be overvarithen Yellow A compatible file was detected replacing this file does not harm
78. in a Network View Nonetheless when space runs low you may prefer to switch off the icons A node can be displayed with a 3D border or with a drop shadow To switch between the 3D and the shadowed view select the menu option DISPLAY DISPLAY NODES 3D or press the key combination CTRL 3 Node Verbosity You have several options to control the amount of information displayed in a node Quotes can be displayed with just their ID or with the complete selection of text they represent Of course to decide which level of verbosity makes sense you need to examine how many nodes Id only t46 Id amp comment populate the Network View and the overall size of the text 1 26 11 And the name of the To change the verbosity of quotes select the menu option star is DISPLAY QUOTATION VERBOSITY Link Display ae There are numerous ways to display links via menu item DISPLAY LINK DISPLAY First choose from three different ways of displaying the label choose to display label 1 label 2 or the menu text as defined in the Relation Editor See The Relation Editor on sie page 235 for further detail ole The second option is to display labels with a box around them or not or to display them rotated alongside the line connecting two codes or quotes Further display options are explained in the preferences section Display Menu on page 384 Miscellaneous Network Procedures This section describes useful procedu
79. in the data list statement will be 9 determined by the maximum width value Christine A comment linked to such codes could be used as an explanation of the values to instruct researchers in coding the material Keep in mind that ordinal codes only have meaning in the context of being used by SPSS Within ATLAS ti the differently valued codes are treated like every other code dichotomously Check The Sample hpr5 for an application of an ordinal code The name of the code is Horror split into Horror 1 to Horror 5 Assign only one value Do not assign more than one scaled variable value e g fear 1 and fear 2 to the same quotation Although ATLAS ti permits an arbitrary number of codes to be attached to a quotation this would not make much sense with mutually exclusive values of scaled variables If you do so the SPSS generator will simply ignore additional values after processing the first one it finds for a given quotation Since it cannot be guaranteed which value will be detected first this will most likely produce unpredictable results in the SPSS job generated Export amp Import e 301 302 e Export amp Import How SPSS Export Handles Families Treatment of Code Families Code families in SPSS jobs simply count the occurrences of assignments of any of its contained codes for the current case quotation using COMPUTE statements A code family KF_1 of which 5 codes are assigned to case 77 will have the va
80. is complicated problems rarely occur because different relations with the same name are not very common in everyday work HTML Preferences A number of options can be set to customize the appearance of the generated HTML document To set HTML preferences select EXTRAS HTML PREFERENCES from the main menu A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 391 General pE HIML Preferences General Primary Docs Codes Memos Families Network views Character encoding iso B859 1 File extension For image links jem _ Short report disables all other controls Include statistics Create contents table Include link to project Include HU comment Include author s Character Encoding Controls interpretation of characters encoded with values beyond 7 bit ASCII For western locales this encoding should be set to ISO 8859 1 File extension for image links This extension is used for network view image links like lt IMG ALIGN BOTTOM SRC Terminology emf gt or lt A HREF Terminology emf gt Terminology lt A gt As you can save network views as WMF files leave or set this value to WMF Short Report Only the name author date and commentary of the HU become part of the HTML document All other setup options are disabled Create contents table A list of all sections in the HTML page is created All sections can be jumped to from the contents table Include HU comment Includes the HU s comment 1n italics
81. is used to automatically draw the picture when opening a Network View on an object 7 The final attribute to enter is the formal property of the relation transitive symmetric or asymmetric 8 Optionally you can describe the newly created relation in the text pane at the bottom of the Relation Editor 9 In order to save the new relation select FILE SAVE from the Relation Editor menu A file dialog window opens The suggested file name is default rel It is recommended to use this file as your standard repository for relations It 1s possible to create different sets of relations by entering a new file name see Managing Relations below If you do so you need A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sty oe Create sets of relations that reflect your methodology to load the desired set every time you start ATLAS ti In the Relation Editor select FILE LOAD RELATIONS By default the standard file default rel is loaded You can modify the entries at any time In the Relation Editor click on the relation and overwrite the existing entries Save the relations You can also modify the standard relations that came with ATLAS ti translate them to your language change the labels or the menu text modify the line color etc Managing Relations Using the Relation Editor different sets of relations can be created and stored in separate files using FILE SAVE RELATIONS For instance you could have a set of relations related
82. last used Hermeneutic Unit loads the most recently used HU In order to start a new project select the option Create a new Hermeneutic Unit Click on Just continue if you want to close the wizard and return to the HU Editor Welcome to ATLAS Please choose Ok Cancel Open Hermeneutic Unit From Picklist Open last used Hermeneutic Unit E Create 4 new Hermeneutic Unik CO Just continue Dont display this screen again Figure 18 The Welcome Wizard Select one of the four options and click OK Note If you do not choose anything from the Wizard it will time out and close automatically after a minute You can always get it back by choosing OPEN WELCOMEWIZ from the HU Editor s HELP menu Logging In By default 1 e when first opening the program you are automatically logged in as Super ATLAS ti associates the user currently logged in with all objects like codes quotations memos etc created during a session If you keep the default settings all objects are stamped with the user name Super A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sty Create your own user account We recommend that you create your own user account EXTRAS USER EDITOR so that all objects are stamped with your real name If you are the only person working on a project or are responsible for a team do not forget to assign administrative permissions to yourself Then login under EXTRAS L
83. list of codes and ba Expandable Boxes by Date Viewer 4 list of codes and ba Expandable Boxes by Mame Viewer 4 list of codes and ka List with TOC Report 4 list of codes and ba DEConvert Converter Converts a HU into ca HU Entity Browser Viewer 4 simple browser Fo atlasti development journal xml ka Sinanle ist 4 siranle list nf code Displays expandable lists of HU entity types Convert Clicking any of the lists display all objects of the selected hu GrouTheo xml type Refresh Close hu The Sample xml Size 67839 aS entities1 xsl Size 16307 Figure 127 ATLAS ti XML Converter 2 Select an XML file in the left browser pane entitled XML Data Sources 3 Select a stylesheet from the Style Sheets pane Style sheets are categorized by name converter type and target format usually HTML 4 Double click the stylesheet or click the CONVERT button This starts the conversion process which usually creates an HTML document The HTML document is stored in the XML folder and is automatically displayed by the default web browser Converting a HU on the fly It is also possible to use the ATLAS ti converter directly on the current HU If you prefer this option do the following Generating Output e 321 G A 1 Click on the globe button s arrow in the main toolbar and select APPLY STYLESHEET big Export HU to XML Apply Style Sheet 2 Select a stylesheet from the list displayed e 3 Choos
84. memo memo title creation and modification dates author name number of referenced quotations and content CHANGE MEMO TYPE Changes the type of the selected memo MAKE TYPE GLOBAL If you have entered an individual type for a memo in the memo editor this type is only known within this HU To apply the type in other HUs as well select this option EXPORT MEMO XML Exports selected memo in XML format see Export amp Import using XML on page 304 EXPORT MEMOS XML Exports all memos in XML format see Export amp Import using XML on page 304 IMPORT MEMOS XML Imports memos in XML format see Export amp Import using XML on page 304 USE AS PRIMARY DOC Assigns selected memo as a PD see Using Memos as PDs on page 133 CREATE CODES FROM SELECTED MEMO Creates a new code from each line of the selected memo See Using Memos to Create a Code List on page 134 CHANGE DATE Changes the creation date for the currently selected memo CHANGE AUTHOR Changes the name of the author 1 e the user who created the selected memo OUTPUT SUBMENU The output options for quotations are discussed in the chapter The Memos Output Submenu on page 318 Reference e 361 The Networks Menu Network View Manager NETWORK VIEW MANGER New Network view f Opens the Network View manager Close all Network Editors p 8 Import Code Network NEW NETWORK VIEW Export Code Network Creates a
85. more than merely indexing data Coding is simply the procedure of associating code words with selections of data In ATLAS ti s framework the foundation of coding is the association between a quotation and a code The following describes ways to establish maintain or remove such associations Although some of the coding techniques reflect the ideas and terminology used in Grounded Theory you do not have to use this methodology when analyzing your data within ATLAS ti Four coding procedures are described Open Coding In Vivo Coding Code by List and Quick Coding In addition the purpose and creation of free codes are explained Automatic coding is described elsewhere see The Auto Coding Tool on page 151 A code may contain more than a single word but should be concise Use the code comment area to write a definition If you find yourself writing prose instead of a succinct code name you might in fact want to annotate If this is the case use comments or memos instead General Coding Procedure There are some common steps with each of the coding procedures described below A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 First of all it is useful to switch on the margin display to see the immediate effects of the coding process note there is no margin area for audio and video documents The margin area also permits the direct manipulation of the codes and the associations between the quotations and the codes To display t
86. new Network View and opens a Network Editor Relation Editor i CLOSE ALL NETWORK EDITORS Preferences Closes all open Network Editors Code Link Manager IMPORT CODE NETWORK Hyper Link Manager Imports a code network generated by EXPORT CODE NETWORK see Semantic Network Migration on page 242 EXPORT CODE NETWORK Exports a Network View for later theory reuse see Semantic Network Migration on page 242 RELATION EDITOR SUBMENU CODE CODE RELATIONS Opens the relation editor on code code relations See The Relation Editor on page 235 for details HYPERLINKS Opens the relation editor on quotation quotation relations See The Relation Editor on page 235 for details PREFERENCES Sets Network Editor preferences cf Network Editor Preferences on page 387 OPEN CODE LINK MANAGER Opens a browser on the list of all code code links The links can be reviewed and edited See Link Management on page 234 for details OPEN HYPERLINK MANAGER Opens a browser on the list of all hyperlinks The hyperlinks can be reviewed and edited See Link Management on page 234 for details 362 e Reference A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Zoom Ctrl Shift 2 w Margin Grea Cbrl ShiFe h1 w Line Numbers Cbrl ShiFt h w Main Toolbar w Drop Down Lists w Primary Document Toolbar w Status Pane Margin Tip Ctrl ShiFt T Set Bracket width Use Short Margin Names Ctrl Shift 5 Refresh Scr
87. new entry appears in the quotations drop down list and the Quotation Manager In the margin a new bracket will be displayed Quotations are also created in the course of coding or memoing using drag amp drop Activating Quotations A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Quotations can be activated retrieved and displayed by selecting an entry from the drop down list by double clicking on an entry in the Quotation Manager or by clicking on the quotation bracket in the margin area Coded quotations can be retrieved by double clicking on an associated code see Code Manager on page 55 for detail Quotations can also be activated from the results pane of the Query Tool see The Query Tool on page 160 A quotation can be activated and displayed from virtually any browser displaying quotations drop down list Object Manager Network Editor Object Crawler Object Explorer etc The Textual Level Basic Functions e 113 Graphical quotations in a document appear as rectangles The selected quotation is emphasized Activating Graphical Quotations In addition to the general activation procedures listed above a graphical quotation can be activated by directly double clicking within its box in the document pane Where two or more quotations intersect you are presented with a list of quotations from which to choose Display Of Graphical Quotations All graphical quotations are indicated by borders A selected q
88. nice modifications to the PD e g its quotations are lost In this situation your PD is as dependent on the recorded changes as is any other PD in any other HU using the edited data source Synchronization Next time you load this HU and click on the edited PD or a quotation as ATLAS loads the data source s contents for display it will open the LOG file analyze the recorded changes and will find that the PD is not up to date You will be offered the option of synchronizing the PD If at this point you say NO it won t display the contents This is because the old version that the program would expect is not available If you click YES ATLAS ti will open the LOG file and instantly update the affected PD or PDs if you have assigned the same data source more than once Voil All quotations will be in sync You should save the HU this time or you will be given the same option the next time you load the HU Synchronization on Demand Instead of synchronizing PDs one at a time you may want to synchronize all or a selection of PDs at the same time Choose DOCUMENTS DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT SYNCHRONIZE PDS from the main menu ATLAS ti then searches for LOG files analyzes them and asks you for confirmation if synchronization 1s necessary File Locking Have you wondered about that weird LOK file interview 1 rt lok that exists at one time and does not exist at other times This file is the gatekeeper that controls access to the d
89. of item icons FONT individually specifies the font used for this list The default font for the list and the text area can be set in General Preferences LEDGER STYLE shades every other row REFRESH F5 refreshes the list display SELECT ALL ITEMS is self explanatory Selecting Items in Object Managers Next to thinking clicking will likely be one of the most frequent activities when working with ATLAS ti Clicking is done in many different ways such as single and double clicking and clicking with the left or the right mouse button The semantics of a mouse click are not perfectly straightforward and a few variations must be learned A single click with the left mouse button selects and highlights an item in each of the Object Managers Double clicking an item selects the object and invokes a procedure depending on the type and state of the object The effect of a double clicking is described for each of the Object Managers below For multiple selections you may use the standard Windows selection techniques Sorting and Filtering The Object Managers permit comfortable sorting and filtering See Sorting and Filtering on page 137 for details Main Workspace The HU Editor e 49 The asterisk enables mid string matches for incremental search Sty Incremental List Search This feature is available in the list pane of all Object Managers Select any item in the list and type in an arbitrary sequence of c
90. off PDs are tested case by case when they are accessed the first time A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 List name size for quotes By default the display name of quotations is 30 characters The recommended length is between 30 and 50 characters Note that size changes apply only to subsequently created or modified quotations Section HU Editor General HU Editor Margin Fonts Storage Paths Test Editors PD Printing Memos Load last used HU upon start up Remember window positions Open maximized Activate last quotation Auto open Play multimedia PD when loaded _ Primary Doc Manager Loop media clip _ Quotation Manager When assigning Primary Documents Code Manager Use special paths HUPATH TBPATH Memo Manager _ Object Explorer The settings in this section affect the appearance and behavior of the HU editor and its child windows Load last used HU upon start up When checked the last HU closed is automatically loaded Open maximized Opens the HU Editor in full screen mode Activate last quotation Shows the last quotation selected when the HU was saved Play multimedia PD when loaded Activates immediate play of a multimedia PD when it is loaded Dis Play of last used quotation is not affected by this option Loop media clip By default a media document is only played once after activating and loading it Activate this option to repeat the cli
91. offered see Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 289 for details Coding Analyzer The Coding Analyzer is helpful after merging HUs It tests for redundant codes 1 e codes used more than once for data segments that overlap or are embedded in one another see Redundant Coding Analyzer on page 188 HTML Generator Publishing online or just creating a printout from a project is available with the HTML generator The results can be viewed platform independent with any Web browser see HTML Export on page 307 XML Generator The XML generator exports all information contained in an HU in XML format This universal open data format allows for a wide variety of possibilities for display processing and even integration of your data with external applications see Export amp Import using XML on page 304 XML Converter The XML Converter lists HUs saved in XML format and applies so called style sheets miniature programs written in XSLT to the XML files The user may edit the supplied style sheets or add new ones see Creating Reports with the XML Converter on page 318 User Administration Manage the ATLAS ti user database through the user administration tool This is a prerequisite for collaborative work but is also useful to A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 individual users through personalizing the login or protecting an HU with a password see User Management on page 264 A5 Use
92. on the nature of your project your creativity and methodological considerations While it is not always feasible to blend original data and interpretive thoughts there are situations where you might want to make use of this feature e To analyze paraphrased material stored in memos e To analyze partly transcribed or summarized information about graphic audio or video data stored in memos e To be able to code your own thoughts and ideas stored in memos e For added security embedded in a password protected HU e As an internal data source no references to external files are needed Consequences of using memos as PD Assigning a memo as primary document has two immediate consequences e If you want to edit the memo s content you need to edit the primary document Once a memo has been assigned as a PD you can no longer edit the memo in the Memo Manager The reason 1s that as a PD s data source the memo may be referenced from quotations Only the PD editing technology guarantees the necessary synchronization after content changes e All editing in the primary document also affects the memo The reason for this 1s that the data source for the Primary Document IS the memo The PDs column in the Memo Manager indicates whether a memo is used as primary document The number displayed indicates the number of PDs using the memo as a data source A dash indicates that the memo is not used as a PD Mame Type PO
93. on the plus or minus sign Below a partly expanded branch for memo families is shown El F Memo Families 2 1 w Just For testing 5 rs Theoretical 3 mM Angel s music 1 Co Admin mM Horror 0 Me Andreas Sf Magic 7 4 Co Admin Expanding the Primary Docs branch displays the PDs expanding this branch displays quotations expanding those displays codes memos and other associated quotations Expanding the Codes branch displays all codes and their connections to other codes Following the code names the semantic relation connecting the code with its parent code is shown a Animal 10 3 F Horse 3 1 lt is a gt 2 Lion 2 1 cis a gt 2 Scorpion 2 1 lt is a gt Each code appears at least once This means that all codes are listed directly under the Codes branch but may also appear further down in the hierarchy if they are connected to other codes The order in the hierarchy is determined by the kind of relation you have used If a directed 1 e a transitive relation like the lt is part of gt relation was applied codes are displayed hierarchically the target code becomes the higher order code and the source code s the lower order code s When using symmetric relations the codes appear in at least two places since the direction causal relation cannot be determined A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Associated memos if applicable are displayed under the code branch Expanding Su
94. on the status bar s sort field refreshes the current sort This is a useful option because newly added objects are appended to the end of the list regardless of their correct position in the sorted sequence Sorting via the menus The Sort menu option is available in the object menus of the HU Editor Documents Quotations Codes and Memos and from the corresponding Manager s menu The figure below shows the Sort menu for codes with the current sort criterion set to Name which 1s also the default Sart Mame Filter All Grounded Toggle Filter Density Author Edit Families Created Open Network view Modified Code Manager F Figure 47 Sort options for codes In Object Managers the currently selected sort criterion is also displayed in the status bar see Figure 48 After new items are 138 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 added to the list refresh the sort with a double click on the status pane s sort field Overview of Sort Options The following describes the sort options in more detail Default sort order D descending A ascending Entity type Description Sort order Name PDs quotes Entity name string A codes memos Author PDs quotes Author s name string A codes memos Created PDs quotes Creation date or date of codes memos assignment for PDs date time Modified PDs quotes Modification date date time
95. oth family A and family AND oR 5 gt amily B Members that do not Family A NOT NOT Family A belong to family A Combining more than two families In order to combine more than two families you can use a simple query to build upon or you can click it as one sequence For the beginner it is recommended to build up to a more complex query step by step Family Life e 207 208 e Family Life Creating a complex query step by step Let s assume you want to create a Super Family containing all female respondents under the age of 25 living in New York This means you want to generate a Super Family based on the overlap of the three families female under 25 and New York We start by combing the first two families female and under 25 1 Double click family female 2 Double click family under 25 3 Select operator AND The stack pane and the query pane now contain the following terms Quey LCJLSJLE Recalc _Undo _Redo J AND female under 25 atack Shemale amp under 25 The display in the query feedback pane matches more or less the way we would express the query in everyday language In the figure above one item is displayed in the stack namely the query we just entered We can now incrementally build a more complex query from this query 4 Double click on the family New York This pushes the family onto the stack which now contains two items ready to be c
96. placed into the network as a node After entering a name for the new object memo names are created automatically when configured this way it is displayed as a box close to the mouse pointer Click at the position you want the new nodes to appear DELETE ENTITIES This deletes the objects represented by the selected nodes from your HU Deleted objects cannot be recovered To only remove nodes from the view choose REMOVE NODES FROM VIEW instead REMOVE NODES FROM VIEW Shortcut CTRL DEL Removes the selected nodes from this network view The represented objects are not affected IMPORT NODES Opens a window offering the choice to import different node types into the Network View These are codes code families memos memo families PDs PD families or quotations codes and memos see Importing Nodes on page 226 IMPORT NEIGHBORS Reference e 379 Hold down the Ctrl key if you do not want to import quotations 380 e Reference Imports all directly connected neighbors of the selected node into the Network View see Import Node Neighbors on page 228 IMPORT CO OCCURRING CODES Imports all co occurring codes of a selected code node into the Network View This used to be called the blind shot tool on the ATLAS ti discussion group wish list With this option you can forego having to enter a specific search request in the Query Tool in order to determine which codes co occur see Import Co occurring Code
97. populating the margin area 1 e margin objects support drag amp drop The brackets visualize quotations segmenting the document and depending on the context the objects attached to the brackets represent themselves or the link with the bracketed quotation A code appearing in the margin can be deleted via its context menu the code is affected itself or it can be unlinked from the quotation hence affecting only the relationship between the code and that specific quotation The effect of a drag amp drop operation depends on the objects that are involved as drag sources those that are dragged and targets those onto which objects are dropped A large variety of objects from the margin area can be dropped into the margin area Furthermore objects can also be dragged from other object managers and browsers Objects can be dragged from the margin into other windows and even into foreign applications like Word In the latter case the ATLAS ti objects lose their ATLAS ti specific objectness but at least they render into something useful e g a formatted title and rich text comment Move Linked Objects When an object e g a code memo or hyperlink is dropped on a bracket a new link is created between the object and the quotation represented by the bracket In the figure below the code Water is unlinked from its original quotation red bracket and linked to the quotation of the target bracket Th
98. primary documents and quotations if not needed The benefit of exporting the entire HU lies in applying style sheets to create impressive reports browsers and formats suited for other applications By using ATLAS ti s XML Converter and the supplied style sheets on HUs exported as XML you can create output usually HTML displayed in the web browser installed on your system The first step however is to export the HU to XML format 1 From the EXTRAS menu choose EXPORT TO XML Or click on the down arrow next to the globe button in the main toolbar and select the option Export HU to XML 2 Next you need to decide whether you want to include the primary documents and quotations descriptions only no content 3 Select File as the output destination You may also apply a style sheet on the current HU without creating an XML file first TOOLS XKXML APPLY STYLE SHEET A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 HTML Export http A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The default folder for storing XML files also contains the style sheets and several other auxiliary files that are used when working with the ATLAS ti converter see Creating Reports with the XML Converter on page 318 If you select a different folder to store XML files customizable via General Preferences but still want to make use of the ATLAS ti converter make sure that you copy the content of the default XML folder to your new XML folder Limitations The
99. referenced all changes during an edit paragraph 4 and beyond needed to be updated to take into session in order to inform account their new position The quotation starting at paragraph 4 other projects to update before the editing procedure and its associated code A5 their quotations feature have shifted to paragraph 5 A word of caution is in order Even though a number of safeguards d are built into the software to prevent misaligned codes or other nuisances after an editing session it is still a good idea to know how ATLAS ti handles edited PDs and to give some thought to the question of how to manage all documents related to an ATLAS ti project see also Project Management on page 270 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Primary Documents e 79 Auto converted documents Word HTML cannot be edited If nothing was changed clicking the edit button will close the edit session and not display the drop down menu 80 e Primary Documents Therefore the objective of this section is to inform you about the dos and don ts of editing PDs Entering and Leaving Edit Mode Note Editing is only possible when logged into ATLAS ti as an ATLAS ti user with administrative rights See User Management on page 264 for further information Entering Edit Mode 1 Load a rich text or plain text PD 2 Click on the Edit button TAN in the main toolbar or select EDIT DOCUMENT ACCESS ENTER EDIT MODE from the main menu A me
100. s Such instances can be found with Project Management e 295 Sty oe Test merge effects by experimenting with sample HUs 296 e Project Management the help of the Coding Analyzer see Redundant Coding Analyzer on page 188 Recommendation To get acquainted to the effects of either adding or unifying entities you should experiment with the various strategies using sample HUs Observe what happens Before modifying serious projects you should gain some understanding of how the merging process works A few considerations You can unify codes but add Network Views This results in a new network containing the same nodes as those already contained in the target HU s network Adding nodes and unifying networks could result in an existing Network View being crowded with both the nodes from the target and the source HUs Unifying Super Codes combines their queries using the OR operator Creating and Interpreting Merge Reports If you have checked the option Create Merge Report in the Merge Wizard default a report generator keeps track of every object affected during the merge process The report displays e the name and location of the source and target HUs e object statistics and merge strategies for source and target HUs e added objects sorted by object type prefixed with a e unified objects sorted by object type prefixed with a e statistics for the resulting HU Below excerpts from a merge r
101. scientist in mind it has been put to use in areas that we had not anticipated These areas include psychology literature medicine software engineering quality control criminology administration text linguistics stylistics knowledge elicitation history geography theology and law A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Emerging daily are numerous new fields that can take full advantage of the program s facilities for working with graphical audio and video data The following are a few examples e Medicine Analysis of X ray images computer tomograms microscope samples e Anthropology Micro gestures mimics e Architecture Annotated floor plans e Graphology Micro comments to handwriting features e Criminology Analysis of letters finger prints photographs surveillance data e Geography e Art Art History Detailed interpretative descriptions of paintings or educational explanations of style e Tourism e Industrial Quality Assurance Analyzing video taped user system interaction Design Objectives ATLAS ti offers support to the researcher without taking control of the intellectual process Support of Teamwork A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The fundamental design objective in creating ATLAS ti was to develop a tool that effectively supports the human interpreter particularly in handling relatively large amounts of research material notes and associated theories Although ATLAS ti facilitates many of
102. send the report to an editor printer save it to disk select File or to save it and run the file in the standard RTF application usually Word or Wordpad select File amp Run Reports on Quotations for Code Combinations To retrieve quotations or generate reports for combinations of codes use the Query Tool For more information see The Query Tool on page 160 Other Places to Activate Quotations Quotations for a code can be activated from the margin area and any browser displaying codes The Textual Level Basic Functions e 127 The Margin Area displays codes and other objects associated with quotations Clicking on a code in the margin area selects the associated quotation in the primary document pane By activating objects in the Object Explorer see The Object Explorer on page 183 quotations are displayed in context similar to the object manager The Network Editor see The Network Editor et al on page 215 also offers access to associated quotations via a node s context menu Working with Memos Possible uses for memos To take methodological notes As a bulletin board in team projects As a project planning device As a primary document To create code lists Writing memos is an important task in every phase of the qualitative analysis process The ideas captured in memos are often the pieces of a puzzle that are later put together in the phase of report writing Theo
103. short story by Ernest Hemingway which was used in a semiotics seminar A This primary text has nothing to do with the topic of this HJ The text was included merely as a filer to demonstrate primary text families Hote All quotations in this text were created by automatic coding where search category 3 was Used to code all sentences including either three or third 7 Primary Docs P 3 Indian Campr All Id The P index Figure 13 PD drop down list and the corresponding Object Manager Alternatively choose OBJECT MANAGER from the corresponding main menu entry The Object Manager Window The four Object Managers have some common properties The general layout of their window 1s as follows Title Menu and Toolbar The title bar displays the object type In the figure above the PD Manager is shown The menu and the toolbar below the title bar offer access to frequently used functions some of which are also accessible from pop up menus As the functions are different for all four object types menu and toolbar options differ for the four Object Managers The toolbar options are described in more detail below The menu items resemble the corresponding main menus in the HU Editor see Reference on page 337 for a description of all menu items Note that not all options are available at all times Some menu and toolbar options need either a single selection or multiple selections The List Pane B
104. stylesheets themselves The atlas description node within the atlas data namespace contains this self description Stylesheets that do not use this header are not displayed in the converter 322 e Generating Output A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 lt atlasDescriptian version 1 0 gt lt l Version of this description syntax gt lt friendyName gt C8s Switcher lt triendiyName gt lt To be displayed in ATLAS ti gt lt shortDescription gt Switch dynamically between stylesheets lt shortDescriptian lt comment gt live and instantenous switching between CO looks and layouts of your output can be applied to ot well USE THE INLINE SELECTION MENU to switch bet this stylesheet courtesy of ringmayr IT consulting www hypertexxt com atlas lt caomment gt lt Category gt Report lt category gt lt complexity gt medium lt complexity gt lt l Computational complexity lt lt lt iconPath hypertexxt ico iconPath gt lt To be displayed in ATLAS ti lt author name Thomas Ringmayr email atlas hyperte Ul WWww aypertexxt com atlas gt lt creationDate gt 003 06 30 lt creationDate gt lt sourceType type HU version 5 0 gt lt l EML type acecepted as input lt targetDocT ype HTML targetDocT ype lt fatlasDescriptian gt Figure 128 An atlasDescription XSLT element Custom Applications with Stylesheets Let s take a look at some of the examples for manipulating raw XML data th
105. the integrity of the HU Other HUs accessing this document will be synchronized when needed If you unpack a document with this magenta marker other HUs with references to it may no longer be able to access it Such documents will not be extracted in Migrate mode You can however include these documents in Restore mode Path cannot be created Red If a path does not exist on the target computer it is created during unbundling However not every path can be created If a volume disk does not exist on the target computer or if there are certain Windows access restrictions for the current user AND no appropriate PD mapping path is defined on the target computer this conflict arises E Fallback path uzegd A document is marked light green if an otherwise irresolvable path could be resolved via fallback redirection W Version conflict detected Example for code red The original path of a file on the originating computer was K myprojects interview1 rtf On the target system a disk K does not exist Therefore a path K nyprojects cannot be created Such a conflict can be resolved by mapping the non existing path This can be done by clicking on the MAP PATH button included in the Install Bundle window When the PD Mapping tool opens open the drop down list of the From field You are offered all paths in the bundle that need mapping Enter new path to map Tu From Kc nyprojects Ga Select from
106. the HTML and XML generator But even links and relations can be commented Authorship Authorship is essentially ownership Any item created while a user is logged in will be tagged with the name designated for that user By using filters it is possible to compare the work of different authors in the same project Some division of labor strategies will prevent tracing all work done by each person Authorship can be changed globally or on an object by object basis 34 e Main Concepts A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Workbench Tools Overview The All in One Workbench Concept ATLAS ti The Knowledge Workbench is a tightly integrated collection of individual tools that support your analysis of written texts audio video and graphic data Easy transition between the tools is important to fit the typical work flow of the qualitative researcher Some of the tools such as the Object Managers the Network Editor the Object Explorer the Code Forest and the Code Tree help you to browse and navigate through your data structures and concepts Other tools like the Hermeneutic Unit HU Editor the Text Editors and the Memo tool help with reading annotating and writing during your analytical process For searching the Text Search Tool the Auto Coding Tool Auto Coder the Object Crawler and the Query Tool are at your disposal For bridging the qualitative quantitative gap the SPSS Export function and the WordCruncher mig
107. the Network Editor s background 2 Double click the left mouse button Moving Nodes By moving nodes to different positions you can modify an initial layout created by the automatic layout procedure For precision placement of nodes use the node alignment procedures see References at Layout Menu on page 381 Note Do not forget to save the Network View and the HU itself at the end of the session if you want to make the new layout permanent To move a single node 1 Move the mouse pointer onto the node to be selected 2 Hold down the left mouse button 3 Drag the selected node to its new position To move multiple nodes 1 Create a multiple selection of nodes as described above 2 Hold down the CTRL key and drag the selected nodes to their new position To move nodes with the arrow keys 1 Select one or more nodes using the selection methods described at Selecting Nodes and Links on page 220 2 Use the arrow keys in combination with the CTRL key to move the node s 1 pixel at a time in all four directions Note To undo an erroneous placement use the function UNDO POSITIONING or the key combination CTRL Z Linking Nodes The links between nodes in a network are real connections between the objects Therefore creating and removing links should not be regarded as solely cosmetic operations Links make permanent changes to the HU The Network Editor et al e 223 FaN There are several ways to l
108. the account database in a local area network or your Windows login name 264 e Collaboration If you do not intend to use ATLAS ti in a workgroup environment the only procedure you might want to know is how to modify the default account called Super ATLAS ti knows two classes of users administrators and all others Administrators have more rights than normal users The key rights of administrators are the ability to define new users to install service packs or use the more advanced data source management features Note that users defined in ATLAS ti are not necessarily the same as Windows users Furthermore administrative rights assigned to an ATLAS ti user have nothing to do with Windows user rights Recommendations for Instructional Use If ATLAS ti is to be used in a project or a classroom situation and there is a need to have groups of users collaborate it is recommended that every user be registered in the users database This is done by the administrator defining an account for every user Accounts include the login name a password the real name and the access level Although user management increases bureaucracy its purpose is to support a cooperative working style All Hermeneutic Units and the objects they contain are marked with the currently logged in author s account name The technical prerequisite for team work is either a single PC running ATLAS ti or more appropriately a local area network LAN with ATLA
109. the activities involved in qualitative data analysis and interpretation particularly selecting indexing coding and annotating its purpose is not to automate these processes Automatic interpretation of text cannot succeed in grasping the complexity lack of explicitness and contextuality of everyday or scientific knowledge In fact ATLAS ti was designed to be more than a single tool think of it as a professional workbench that provides a broad selection of effective tools for a variety of problems and tasks ATLAS ti facilitates co authoring 1 e it allows two or more researchers or work groups to work on the same project It provides powerful functions that allow for the transfer and conversion of research data while keeping the respective sources of ideas identifiable at all times Introduction e 5 A Little History ATLAS the project Archive for Technology Life World and Everyday Language A first prototype of this program was developed in the context of an interdisciplinary research project entitled ATLAS 1989 1992 at the Technical University of Berlin Germany The project entailed close interactions between computer scientists psychologists linguists and future users From 1993 on the software was further developed into a commercially available version In 1997 ATLAS ti for Windows 4 1 was released Being the versatile product that it is with a growing network of business partners world wide and especial
110. the input and tries to determine which delimiter was used 5 Click OK to start the import procedure A PD Family Table imported 11 new Farnilieis created Primary Document Families in SPSS Jobs In addition to being used within ATLAS ti PD families as well as code families are used when creating SPSS jobs Both PD and code families are a way to aggregate data see SPSS Export on page 299 for further detail Code Families Code families in the In ATLAS ti the term code family is used to sort codes into ATLAS ti framework named sets or groups For example if you have four categories that 202 e Family Life A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 are simply named sets of codes Memo Families Super Families Just like Super Codes Super Families re calculate their A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 are types of actors you can group them into a code family Four members of the actors family might be friends parents siblings and partner Code Families in Queries Code families can also be used with codes to construct queries using the Query Tool Families are interpreted in queries as if all its contained codes were combined using the Boolean operator OR For example a code family containing the four codes water fire air and earth is interpreted in a query as water OR fire OR air OR earth For more details refer to The Query Tool on page 160 Code Families in SPSS Jobs Code famili
111. the overhead of managing documents and their current versions To avoid such problems the previous scenarios using special paths may prove to be better approaches Scenario 4 All Inclusive If you plan to use only a few smaller textual documents an approach that does not use any references at all may be a solution No files other than the HU itself are involved in this scenario The trick is to use memos as PDs see Using Memos as PDs on page 133 Unlike document files memos are HU internal objects and are stored along with the HU This approach is also recommended for work with sensitive data material When saving the HU the data material is highly compressed and therefore unreadable outside ATLAS ti pseudo encryption In addition the HU can be password protected This should make unauthorized access reasonably difficult wa Project001 hprs K ras a P3 Interview 3 ac F 1 Interviews 1 E P2 Interview 2 ie P4 Interview 4 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Project Setup l 2 Create an HU Create a new memo see Working with Memos on page 128 A text editor opens From the memo editor menu select the option INSERT INSERT FILE A file dialog window opens Select a file that you want to use as a PD and click OPEN Of course you can also write the memos on the fly instead of filling their content from a file Save the memo by cl
112. to Setups and activate the option Accept changes in browsers silently EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES General Memoing Attaching Memos to Data Segments ra The procedure to create and associate a memo with a data segment or an existing quotation is similar to the coding procedures described above see General Coding Procedure on page 116 Creating a memo for a data segment 1 Select the part of the primary document for which you want to write a memo 2 Click the memo button K in the primary document toolbar 3 Ifthe selected data segment does not resemble an existing quotation a new quotation is created and the memo is attached An editor opens and you can start to type 130 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Young Indian pulled the boat way up to the beach par Uncle George gave both the Indians cigars par vas soalono wet with dew followime the Indian whoipar carried al a Editing ME ME 7 08 03 1en they ehra e drape tr Gere Bere eet ee Oe The YOULL Title ME 7 08 03 Type Commentary they all w Figure 39 Creating anew memo for a data segment 4 Adapt the automatically generated memo type and title according to your needs Pa Note You can customize the default values used for memo title and type via EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES MEMOS To attach a memo to a data section 1 Select the part of the primary document to which you want to
113. to argumentation theory or a set based on Grounded Theory relations When starting ATLAS ti the default relation set is loaded 1 e the file default rel If you have created a new set and stored it in a new REL file you need to load it after starting ATLAS ti 5 To do so open the Relation Editor and choose FILE LOAD RELATIONS This adds the new relation set to the already loaded default set If you want to delete relations from the default set or from any newly created set select a relation in the Relation Editor and choose the menu option FILE DELETE RELATION When you have removed all unwanted relations and want to make the changes permanent you need to save the set select FILE SAVE RELATIONS Cosmetics Network Display Properties A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 There are numerous options available to alter the appearance of nodes links and even the background However all settings created using the Display menu of Network Editor are lost after closing the editor If you want to change colors and fonts globally for all Network Views you need to change these settings under NETWORKS PREFERENCES see Network Editor Preferences on page 387 Colors The color of the Network Editor s background and the color of nodes can be set independently Choose DISPLAY SET COLORS and then one of the options from the submenu You are offered a standard color chooser dialog from which to pick a color Auto Color Mode Auto
114. values 4 Click on APPLY If you open the Relation Editor from within a Network Editor all changes are broadcast to the editor and you see the changes in the display of the affected links Note When opening the Relation Editor from the main menu all but the preferred layout direction settings are realized immediately in all currently open Network Editors Creating New Relations Note User defined relations are only available for code code or quotation quotation links All other links use hard wired relations like the ones between quotations and codes New relations are stored together with the HU in which they are used When starting ATLAS ti 5 the default relations as defined in the file default rel are loaded This file is located in the user system folder that can conveniently be accessed via EXTRAS EXPLORER USER SYSTEM FOLDER When creating new relations it is suggested that you save these relations to the default rel file If desired different REL files can be created and loaded The Network Editor et al e 237 CcC Link Air gt Chemical warfare associated with is partof gt is cause of lt gt gt contradicts sa isa L noname L oo is property of Open Relation Editor 238 e The Network Editor et al To create a new relation New relations can be created when linking codes or quotations or independently of any linking activity In both cases entries are c
115. was burnt up Step by step instruction 1 Double click code MAGIC 1 hit Click the SUB operator 21 hits Double click code HORROR 4 10 hits Click the WITHIN operator 7 hits a The query in infix notation reads as follows SUB Magic WITHIN Horror 4 Note When using distance operators such as FOLLOWS or IS FOLLOWED BY the maximum distance in terms of paragraphs between two quotations can be specified in the lower left of the Query Tool The appropriate count needs to be entered before entering any of the distance operators Super Codes Super Codes are a convenient way to store queries Super Codes are very similar in look and feel to normal codes with one important difference instead of hardwired connections to quotations Super Codes store a query to compute their virtual references whenever needed They automatically change their behavior during the course of theory building If you have a Super Code All about Magic with a query SUB Magic and later add another sub code White Magic all quotations to which the latter code refers are also retrieved by the unchanged query of All about Magic Super Codes can be clicked on in the code list like any other code and they will display their quotations in an identical way A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Normal codes are hard wired to their quotations Super Codes automatically update Super Codes ca
116. when bundling the HU The following conflicts may occur e Source Missing Conflict The document does not exist e Source Unusable Conflict The document cannot be loaded Possible cause It was manually copied from another location without its associated LOG file using Windows copy method e PD Source Conflict Mismatch between PD and its source This implies that the data source is not the one that is expected by the PD Possible causes mapping changed data source was replaced by another file LOG file was edited manually e Ambiguous Reference Conflict A data source is used by more than one PD but was assigned using different paths Report In the report pane the situation before bundling is summa rized This includes a list of all excluded documents and the reason for their exclusion A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Project Management e 283 How to Create the Bundle File 1 Save the HU 2 Select EXTRAS COPY BUNDLE CREATE BUNDLE from the main menu The Document Selection window opens All documents that can be bundled are listed in the top right pane Documents not in bundle Bundled documents Mame Fath Size Type Hame Fath Size Type A kabbala b C Dokume 47 43 gra gt gt gt indiantst CADokume 946KB rich videofZ avi CADokume 1258 video m regi CNDokume 22 06 rich abl rev 9 rtf C Dokume 364KB rich oad f Total size of 0 selected documents 0 Byte Total size of 3 b
117. 0 gt lt HUPATH gt N interview_1 rtf lt HUPATH gt Specialinterview_7 rtf The same principles work for documents stored in the TBPATH hierarchy unless the HU is also stored in the same location Adjusting References The very concept of external references assumes that the locations of data source files are not changed after they have been assigned to the HU However some situations make it necessary to update invalid references to PDs Redirection of hanging references becomes an issue when an existing project needs to be adapted to an altered environment computer or network or if such a modification is in preparation System modifications are fairly common occurrences such as moving folders to disks with more available space or moving to a new computer altogether From your project s view this is also a modification These cases are similar in that absolute paths to documents which worked well before now no longer point to the correct document files It now becomes necessary to give these projects a little help in finding all their documents Two Ways to Adjust References Redirection Dynamically uses an alternate path for one many or all documents when needed Change Path Permanently changes the path reference to the document for each PD that needs it The change path option changes the external reference that is used by ATLAS ti to access a data source file permanently The redirection option in compa
118. 03letter for a letter written on the first of July 2003 The identifier should be used exclusively to mark passages in the text that indeed relate to the person or object identified The plain word Peter will likely also occur elsewhere in the text for instance when another person is referring to Peter The markup P or lt Peter gt however is unlikely to occur elsewhere In order for the Auto Coding tool to select a complete speaker section a section delimiter is needed As discussed above a speaker or section turn will start with the speaker s identifier markup The end of a section can either be marked by a hard return standard paragraph model or an empty line the old paragraph model We recommend inserting an empty line two hard returns to delimit sections By doing this you can still use single hard returns to segment a speaker section into paragraphs When auto coding such a document you would choose Multi Hard Returns for extending the matched text Using lt Peter gt as the search pattern would then yield a quotation including everything from lt Peter gt up to the empty line lt Peter gt Cutting Cutting Cutting I never wanted to be a hair stylist Indeed I hate cutting hair I always wanted to be a lumberjack starts singing lt Doreen gt Oh Peter I never knew you were so weird The Word Cruncher A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 This feature offers word crunching capabilities fo
119. 264 also supports an effective merge of projects See Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 289 for details Variation Mobile Project Using this approach enables migrating projects HUs and referenced documents between different environments e g different stand alone computers or different networks Depending on the scenario certain adjustments must be made usually only once This variation is a feasible approach for taking your work home It can also be used for backup purposes For migration a package is bundled by ATLAS ti see Copy Bundle Migrate and Backup Projects on page 282 In the destination environment this package is reintegrated installed unpacked using TOOLS COPY BUNDLE INSTALL BUNDLE Moving a project back to the original computer reverses the roles above accordingly Documents should be packed the first time the project is migrated With subsequent migrations this is only necessary for those documents edited since the first migration With teams it is the team members responsibility to determine who is eligible to edit a particular document that now might Project Management e 273 274 e Project Management through the above mentioned migration procedures exist in two or more places at the same time Project Setup for Teams The following sequence allows project administrators to setup an ATLAS ti project that will enable your team members to work within your project 1 2 C
120. 69 Disconnect 78 Encoding 351 family SPSS 202 Load 76 Marking segments 107 media types 29 Navigation 77 Rearranging 69 Renumber 70 352 Renumbering See also Primary document Rearranging Unicode 399 Primary Document 29 Primary document families 302 Primary Document Pane 43 Primary Documents 12 Audio 75 Companion files 87 Editing 12 78 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Graphical 74 Legacy 73 Log file 87 Lok file 88 Multimedia 74 Plain Text 73 Rich Text 72 RTF 72 saving 81 Size Restrictions 72 Supported Formats 71 Synchronizing 88 Unicode 73 Video 76 Word 72 Printing Preferences 345 Project Maintenance Copy Bundle 282 Extending Projects 289 Optimizing Projects 289 System Modifications 289 Project Management 25 270 Planning and setup 271 Scenario 275 Scenario 2 276 Scenario 3 278 Scenario 4 280 Project planning 232 Proximity Operators 165 Q Qualitative Analysis 2 4 Query Tool 15 37 Boolean operators 163 QueryTool 160 Auto optimization 178 Boolean operators AND 163 OR 163 Boolean query 170 174 Clear term stack 180 Context menus 181 Distance 181 Examples 170 174 Operands 162 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Operators 162 Print results 173 Proximity Co occurrence Operator 167 Distance Operators 167 Embedding Operators 166 Overlap Operators 167 Proximity query 176 Push 180 Query 160 Recalc 181 Recall amp Precision 163 Redo 181 Scope 179 181 Screen 161 Semantic operators
121. A 271 Project Mantenan O esana nau wseateh debisaateeedaaarebnaueeetss 282 Merging Hermeneutic Units yerscasicrdccsteudsexpisn ccd davindatawndass a E A aeeaenee 289 Export amp Import 299 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Contents e v vi e Contents 10 peo Yo eB 4 0G aa a eee runes tanner serene sr tere co acre et ar meres itm mmr eer mer mere aT 299 Export amp lmportusmnms ON ee caesar reece es sctenldaynew taba tartan tessa iicelae enna seen 304 H ECMLEE DO anie e tus inane ede iaeanaaed ieee eases 307 Export and Import of Documents amp Families cccccesesseseceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 309 Generating Output 310 Og ly Aer ere eee eC ne eer Tee Ree A er nn Rn ar crn rTe 310 Rye teta HOC CC hips rida careers oa anne aetna cand cae mete A E NET 311 Creating Output for the Main Objects sssseneesssssseoeeersssssssseeerssssssssseeerssssss 312 Creating Reports with the XML Converter ccccccccccccessseeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 318 Resources 327 Frequently Asked Questions cccccccccccccccesssseesecceceeeeaseeseecceeeeeeaaeaesseeeeees 327 The Aci AS T Malme WS seve cntricet ide carseat sateen eee eee ace 327 avery Ml Bye ov si 2 oc Cogeeeeen ements vs cement Were trem sen an tyarT ne menr renin tyne tne rhe 328 5 5 Hg zae 1 0 010 d Meee gees On eae rena nein cr tre ae ein seem ne ee DR Ta nT 328 Troubleshooting 329 OP IB USS76c NUISANCES irisi nan ctianesGededa asad a a a 329 FO Wi LS SUC S gcse as ve tase tere e
122. AS GENERAL PREFERENCES HU Editor the following characteristics can be made permanent e Play multimedia PD when loaded e Loop media clip Creating Quotations Ht A LLH For immediate feedback activate the margin area In most cases creating quotations is part of a higher level procedure like coding or writing memos described later There are a number of ways to create a quotation These options are available via the toolbar and menus and via drag amp drop For immediate feedback when creating quotations switch on the i margin area if not yet activated Before a quotation can be created an appropriate selection must exist as described above Creating a free Quotation To create a free quotation 1 Mark a section in the primary document 2 Click the CREATE FREE QUOTATION button in the HU Editor s primary document toolbar also available in the multimedia control window Alternatively you can choose CREATE FREE QUOTATION from the HU Editor s main menu Creating Quotations Using The Context Menu Only available for textual and graphical documents To create a quotation via the context menu 1 Mark a section in the primary document 2 Open the context menu on the selection with a right mouse Click B they all walked on along the road hey came around a bend pct See Se ol Shead were the lights of t Create Free Quotation ar k peelers lived Coding More dogs rushed ou
123. ATLAS ti the Knowledge Workbench User s Guide V 5 o and Reference o BEE Eau Ti Be sSBHes E see E E E E CO a Zz E E B m s a ese 8 scollect a s E observe E analyze E explore Visual Qualitative Data Analysis amp Knowledge Management in Education Business Administration amp Research User s Manual for ATLAS ti 5 0 2 Edition Berlin June 2004 Copyright 2003 2004 by Thomas Muhr Scientific Software Development Berlin All rights reserved Co author Susanne Friese Quarc Consulting Research Tolk Editorial advisor ResearchtTalk Inc Bohemia Long Island USA Copying or duplicating this manual or any part thereof is a violation of the law No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including but not limited to photocopying without written permission from the author Disclaimer 1 LICENSE RIGHTS AND RESTRICTIONS Scientific Software Development grants to you the non exclusive non assignable right to use the enclosed software in object code form the ATLAS ti Code on as many computer systems as are granted by the type of license You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the ATLAS ti Code except to the extent that the foregoing restriction is expressly prohibited by applicable law You may not rent or lease the ATLAS ti Code or otherwise transfer the ATLAS ti Code and accompanying written m
124. AYOUT SEMANTIC LAYOUT This distributes all nodes in a more ordered fashion It might be necessary to move some nodes individually for a cleaner layout The network editor might now look as in the figure below peer Fee ev Magic 1 74 Commentary pe A 1 29 wa Big Ste Magic 7 ee in ae ra I n AT 1 1 8 Number magic 20 1 Commentary z gt I eee ks et 1 1 Traa ae eo by poe noe y i at ise oe Hata e Tm E se i TEG ee 7 c je I a i ia Smeal re Ta Ta more Brie r a rr lR z 1 ae 7 J yee Pooky ch g cL ae ae Sea al Sree lp gt gt Eea Fa TSH i 1 Sia SS ms me 3 1 32 io i i A Magic 3 7 20 1 FST ee l ee ee ee T TETA Nee es en ee ey e r I roan ee 5 a zi putea mars Peace meee rts ee Ta Seem ae Ia lit a et TaN is Tae 5 E os 1 4 F I I lt T I Tea S pate Ta 3 3 woi tpa oe g aS 7 be I I r i x y hy a S ee ye a ee ee ol 1 1 ma I I r ae i i w fi n i roS x 1 1S I ie i d ae 14 r A E I F r 1 eS BB as S I T I I 1 a m S 1 l a C BS z rot ae fee es Ta La i Baas Hl 2 17 1 11 2 20 bel Figure 101 Step 2 After import of all neighbors for Number magic 246 e The Network Editor et al A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 In order to revert back to the original state two splitting actions are necessary First we revert the code Number magic back to its original state Then we split code Magic 3 7 8 Select all
125. Adobe Acrobat is a trademark of Adobe Inc IBM and OS 2 are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation Microsoft Windows Word for Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation SPSS is a trademark of SPSS Inc Netscape is a trademark of Netscape Inc Other product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies Contents Introduction Nora T Oe 01 cesta ence eed eee ene hie VISE Prn ciple eea R Areas of Application eessssssseseressssssseecresssssssees Des eM ODJECIVE S ena E aeeastenat ALUSTI ON iaa N Acknowledgements ccccccccccsssesseeeceeeesseeeesees About this Manual cccccccccccssssssseeeeeceeeseeeesees What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 User Interface Improvements cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees Primary Document Sorsi Starine a New Project acacia ene Data Source Management ccccccsssseeseeeeeeeeeeees ODEM INi E Seena aiadae eclebenaeacleeenee ODJCCCEXDIOE rn ete ante ie idan Families 4 25220 ceinyantaicebeattnaceaeetosuecsstiaremyceeanaaae es Pa Family Tapes n Teamwork SUpport ersin i aite ia SPSS OUMU oei r AME SUP DOU a tached cmeto teenies tases INTIS Ce HAC OU S rn dete cueets cere daeoeeeediaintees What Has Not Changed ccccessecccceeeeeeeeeeeees If You Have Used ATLAS ti Before Main Concepts TDG PEOCCSS inean a A a a a The Hermenevae Uni snit Primary Doc mentS sasraneanai OOO as
126. CT NAME gt OBJECT EDIT or lt OBJECT NAME gt OBJECT OPEN from the context menu Idiosyncrasies Editing an embedded object is possible even when the embedding PD is not currently in edit mode For example you may want to play a video or recalculate a range of cells without making such changes permanent If you want to preserve the changes applied to an object however you need to enter edit mode before editing the object After deactivating an active object by clicking outside its border you might find that the object has reverted to its original size Resizing an object can only be done by grabbing its selection frame at any resize handle except those located on the frame s right border To get enough space to the left you might want to center or right align the object before resizing Inside Editing Primary Documents While the following description is covered in other chapters e g How ATLAS ti Handles Documents on page 93 this issue is helpful and important to your understanding of editing documents in ATLAS ti Primary Documents e 85 Sty SR Don t be afraid of editing ATLAS ti 4 2 did not support editing documents Referential integrity was endangered 86 e Primary Documents One of the most powerful features of ATLAS ti 5 is the possibility to edit PDs or more precisely editing the contents of a PD or editing its data source Some might ask why is editing a PD an issue at all Isn t edit
127. Codes Neighbours Codes Primary Documents Table Standard Report Quotation References Excel Compatible C54 All Codes with Quotations Print Codes with Comments Quotations for Selected Code Prints all quotations for the selected code s When quotations are outputted headers for individual quotations include references to other codes and memos that are linked to those quotations This is also true for other output options including quotations Quotation List Prints a compact list of all quotations for the selected code appearance as in All Quotation list A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Generating Output e 315 Standard Report Excel Compatible C5 316 e Generating Output Include Sub Terms Prints all quotations for the selected code including all quotations connected to any of the codes that are transitively linked to this code sub codes This resembles a Query Tool created term using the SUB operator Query Tool Opens the Query Tool see The Query Tool on page 160 for details Code List Prints a list of codes according to the current sort setting Code Hierarchy Prints the hierarchy of codes as indented text Codes hierarchy Code Filter All HU The Sample File C Programmevscientific Software 4 the sample hpro Edited by Super Date Time 23 05 04 13 25 51 A Formula lt is gt Foot Abaddon lt is gt Root Air lt is gt Foot Alchemie lt is gt Root Gold lt is part of gt
128. Copy Bundle to backup copy Don t separate the files comprising a data or migrate projects greatly simplified by source the document file and its LOG file good project management see Project Management on page 270 A Sample PD Editing Session Let s assume you work in a team of five people Each of you is located in a separate office and sitting in front of a computer with ATLAS ti running All of you work on the same project and analyze the same pool of data source files As shown below all data source files are located on a network drive and are shared by all team members HU Paul hpr5 i X rm The data source files wae stored on the company s _ gt network are shared by all five team members SA ee HU Mary hprs5 3 F se a oN HU Linda hor U Peter hpr at b x Y Aa Figure 32 Editing PDs live in a shared team context It is Monday morning at 9 a m Paul Mary and William are currently working on an ATLAS ti project The project consists of 120 documents including interview material observations photographs short video clips newspaper articles and other secondary data material The documents are saved on network drive Z in folder ATLAS project Project 576 textbank Each team member focuses on a particular subset of the data material but all have access to the full set of documents Mary currently works with PD observation_4 She reads thro
129. D Manager by clicking the button to the left of the PD drop down list 2 Double click an entry in the PD Manager to load and display the PD Content Caching By default the content of PDs is cached 1 e kept in memory unless this option has been switched off in GENERAL PREFERENCES The benefit of caching is that the time a document requires to be ready for use is greatly reduced whenever its content is accessed more than once e g when auto coding text passages The drawback of caching is that a larger amount of internal memory is needed when loading many large documents which might in turn create performance issues on systems with insufficient memory Caching can be turned off completely but you can also empty the cache periodically by choosing menu option DOCUMENTS DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT CLEAR CACHE Note With caching turned off repetitive operations like auto coding will be significantly slowed down Navigating within Primary Documents The available navigation options depend on the media type of the selected PD Navigating within Textual Primary Documents Textual PDs allow for a variety of options to display different parts of the text e You can scroll up and down using the mouse wheel e The arrow keys and other navigational keys can be used to move through the text e Jump to specific line paragraph numbers using the GO TO LINE button to the left of the PD pane A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 P
130. Docs Default i Font Details Report Window sued aa Selection Lisks Tooltip Reset All to Default Font sample The great brown fox OOUGAaR 1234 Set the font characteristics for the HU Editor and other windows and controls Object Select the window control for which a font is to be customized Font Select the font face here Size Specify the size in points Bold sets the bold attribute Italic Sets the italic attribute Font Details Opens a Font Dialog on the selected font Allows the user to choose the script Reset All to Default Resets all fonts to the default settings Font sample Displays a text sample using the selected font Reference e 341 342 e Reference Section Storage General HU Editor Margin Fonts storage Paths Text Editors PD Printing Memos Store HU compressed smaller file size slightly increased saveload time Load HU into memory completely Cache primary documents Backup Options Automatic backup Save auto recovery into every 10 4 minutes Automatic backup path C A Dokumente und EmstellungensT Muhr Ei Load automatic backups at system start m The settings in this section relate to backup and file security modes Store HU compressed significantly reduces the amount of disk space However on slow systems storing HUs uncompressed might have a slight performance benefit Load HU into memory completely During a work session an HU needs
131. Ds e Ifa PD s data source cannot be loaded ATLAS ti inspects the mapping file to find a valid substitution for the path that is causing the error e Ifa mapping file is found and a mapping exists for the original path the program tries to load the file from an alternative path e If this does not produce a valid path then the fallback paths are checked e If even this last attempt to load the file fails you will see an error message A redirected PD is indicated as such in the status bar at the bottom of the screen Loaded PT F 1 The setiroth tree redirected lt TBR ATH Kabbala brnip Redirection is also displayed in the Document Manager s Location column It shows where a data source file was actually found I Mame Origin Usable Location Me Pere eee eee eee eee eer eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee In the above example a file expected in the folder of the HU origin is the HUPATH folder is found in the textbank folder Redirection should be used with some caution as every additional alternative to find a matching document increases the probability that you will actually end up accessing the wrong document same name different folder and different revision This is a problem if you have edited a document and saved various versions in different locations You should try to make sure that older documents are not accidentally and erroneousl
132. ES from the Network Editor s main menu to open the Import dialog box 6 Select node type Quotation 7 Inthe multiple choice dialog box select all quotations that you want to link to the selected quotation You may use the standard Windows techniques for multiple selections using the Shift and Ctrl keys For multiple selection techniques consult Multiple Selection on page 397 8 Click the Import button All selected quotations are arranged from the upper left to the lower right corner in the Network Editor You may close the Import dialog box now 9 Choose LAYOUT SEMANTIC LAYOUT from the Network Editor s main menu for better access to the nodes if you imported many 10 Select the imported quotations 11 Select LINKS LINK NODES from the main menu 12 Move the rubberbands to the target node the quotation you opened the network on and click on it 13 Choose an appropriate relation for each pair of linked quotations from the relation menu that has popped up 14 The only difference to linking codes is a different set of hypertext relations e g continued at supports 15 After your map of text nodes is being built save it as a Network View You might want to use it later to traverse your hypertext paths Defining New Hyperlink Relations The procedure for defining or editing hypertext relations is equivalent to the methods described for editing code code relations You may either define a new relation b
133. Enable Drag amp Drop 387 Fonts 240 Import neighbors 228 Layout 230 Link Display 213 Link nodes 223 Links Cut 226 Merge Codes 243 new node 379 Nodes 3 D display 384 Appearance 240 Delete 379 Hide 380 Import 226 379 Index e 407 Remove 229 Open 219 pending changes 64 Preferences 387 Primary document Thumbnail display 385 Quotations Verbosity 385 save as graphic 234 378 Setting fonts 386 Split Codes 245 Topological sort 387 Traverse Hyperlinks 260 Network View manager 362 Network View Manager 37 185 219 220 22 Network views 216 as contents table 249 Creating 218 Network Views 33 Networks 33 211 Node types 212 217 Nodes 33 211 O Object Crawler 15 16 35 37 113 158 365 open 158 Object Explorer 18 36 183 Object Manager 17 36 43 Object Managers Codes 55 Launch 47 Primary documents 51 Quotations 52 Selecting items 49 Operands 162 Operators 162 Optimize Paths 289 Order nodes 211 Output all objects 348 Ownership 20 34 P Parallel search 146 Password 266 267 Password Protection 20 408 e Index PD Family Table 19 198 201 Export 199 Import 201 PDs 29 Plain Text 81 Preferences 387 Preferences 239 337 Backup 342 Display 339 Fonts 341 General 338 HTML 307 Language Support 344 Memos 346 Paths 343 Printing 345 Text Editors 344 Preferences Network Editor 387 Preferences Network Editor 387 Primary document ANSI vs OEM 399 Caching 77 Change encoding 399 Change Position
134. For instance if you have coded the document quite densely with lots of overlapping quotations and many memos and hyper links color is recommended for best visual discrimination The Quotations Output Submenu Selected Quotation All Quotations All Quotations List Selected Quotation Prints the selected quotation In the Quotation Manager all selected quotations are printed A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 All Quotations Prints all current quotations If any of the quotations have a comment you are asked if these are to be included in the printout All Quotations List Prints all current quotations in a compact format including only the quotations id and display name List of current quotations 8 Quotation Filter Hyper HU The Sample File C Programme scientific SoftwareVAT the sample hpro Edited by Super Date Time 25 04 04 13 12 54 gt 1 6 And the smoke of the incense 13 13 1 10 and there fell a great star fr 25 25 21 21 3 And another angel came and s 11 11 lt 1 27 12 And the fourth angel sounde 29 29 22 1 and there arose a smoke out of 9 13 lt gt 8 5 And to them it was given tha 25 29 lt gt 2 9 6 And in those days shall men 31 33 ail but only those men which have 21 23 Figure 123 Output of All Quotations List The Codes Output Submenu l Quotations For Selected Code Quotation List Include Subterms ith Query Tool Code List Code Hierarchy
135. HUPATH gt rev 9 rtf 0 1 text 4 P a Indian Camp C Programme lt HUPATH indian txt 1 0 text P4 The sefiroth tiC Programme lt HUPATH gt Kabbala br 0 0 grafic 6 IPS Revelation M Revelation M Revelation 0 1 text Figure 81 PD Family Table in Excel Family Life e 197 198 e Family Life The above PD Family Table was created from HU The Sample rearranged a bit for clarity and exported to Excel with the following columns Documents The PD sequence number Name The name of the PD Path The resolved path of the PD s data source 1 e the actual location of the data source at the time the table was exported In the figure above the complete path of P 2 is displayed in the entry field below the Excel toolbar Origin Contains the original path reference that was valid at the time the document was assigned to the HU May contain special paths e g lt HUPATH gt This attribute can only be handled intelligently when importing such a table with ATLAS ti Other applications may simply ignore it and use the Path attribute instead Note that P 5 uses a memo as its data source Its path and origin use a Special notation indicating that the data source is not a file but an internal object e g a memo All following columns Families Column E represents a Super Family which is often prefixed by an asterisk Note that during import of a table Super Families are treated like standard famili
136. Journal 3 Available at http www qualitative research net fqs texte 3 00 3 OOmuhr e htm Date of Access January 08 2004 402 e Appendix A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Appendix e 403 Index A Absolute Paths 96 Access rights 263 Administrator 264 Assigning Primary Documents 65 ATLAS The Project 6 Author 262 Authors 34 Auto Coding 37 151 Scope 152 Auto Color mode 16 Automatic backup 65 Automatic Logon 268 B Backup Preferences 342 Boolean operators 163 Brackets Menu 350 Bugs 329 C Category search 146 Change PD position 351 Click retrieval 126 Co authors 263 Code Migration 242 Codes Comments 121 301 Definition 32 Deleting 123 124 dichotomous 300 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Display 117 Free codes 122 Merge 380 Renaming 123 scaled 300 Unlink from quotations 125 Coding 116 Code by list 120 Code by List Inverse 120 In vivo 119 Quick 121 Collaboration 262 Comments 33 Commutativity 165 Compatibility Loading A4 HUs 61 primary documents 24 Using old HUs 23 Conceptual level 25 107 211 Copy Bundle 13 282 Conflicts 286 Create Bundle 282 Install Bundle 284 Migrate 285 Paths 286 Restore 285 Special Paths 286 Crash recovery 65 D Data Source 65 Data Source Management 13 DBCS 12 344 Degree nodes 211 Dependent windows 363 Dichotomous codes 300 Dimension 300 Document caching 77 Documents Preparing 71 Documents Menu 350 D
137. Life Although the handling of families and their members is identical their usage differs between the types of families In the following the general aspects of and procedures for working with families are described Thereafter a description of specific characteristics of the different family types follows All procedures for displaying editing and creating families are found in the menus of their object type 1 e under the Documents Codes and Memos menus The Family Manager Using the Family Manager you can create edit and delete families You can add and remove items family members write comments concerning a particular family or set a family as filter Family Managers and the procedures described in the following are the same for all family types A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Primary Doc Family Manager HU The 5 Sel Families Edit Miscellaneous wiew G h Ogaa xg Mame G OT Bible texts amp NWOT Grafical Thomas Ml GE NOT Textual dacs Z Thomas Ml 2 Bible texts 7 Andreas content grafic Thomas M gt Content text Thomas M lt mM Pi Revelation P 4 The sefiroth treer P 2 Revelation 97 P 3 Indian Camp PS Revelation lt LIII This is a value family The value separator here separates the name fom the value Inside ATLAS ti this is just an ordinary family However 5 creating a PO Family table Documents Miscellaneous ort PO Family Table only the name par
138. MENTS Same as FULL CONTENT but includes the quotations comments if any Then choose whether the output should be displayed in a text editor saved to disk or printed A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Special Tools e 173 More Query Examples This section provides additional practical examples for effective queries All examples are based on the HU The Sample Ideally you should follow along Example 1 by clicking your way through the actual exercise to familiarize yourself with the ATLAS ti Query Tool You may try to find your own solutions for Examples 2 and 3 before reading through their step by step instructions Working through these exercises should give you a better understanding of the Query Tool and its potential Note To check if you have entered everything correctly the number of hits are listed after each step If the numbers do not match but you are sure that you entered everything correctly it could be that your sample HU has been modified in the meantime Example 1 How to Formulate a Boolean Query Task Retrieve all quotations coded either with any of the codes included in the BIG FAMILY code family or with those in the MAGIC STUFF code family but exclude those coded as MAGIC 3 Step by step instruction 1 Double click code family BIG FAMILY The results pane immediately displays 13 hits 2 Double click code family MAGIC STUFF The results list displays all quotations coded with codes belongi
139. Management 234 e The Network Editor et al For a very efficient way to review and edit first class links code code links and hyperlinks two new tools are introduced with ATLAS ti 5 the Code Link and the Hyper Link Managers Links can be edited flipped and removed and a Network Editor can be opened on selected links e g all nodes affected A comment can be viewed and edited for the selected link Last but not least and typical for all Object Managers links can be sorted by criteria such as the target or source object the relation used etc Changes made to the links are immediately displayed in any Network Editor that currently display the links The Code Link Manager The two figures below show a Code Link Manager and a Network View opened on two selected links In the left figure the two links are selected and Flip Link from the context menu is selected The right figure displays the effect The Code Link Manager and the Network View show the changed links A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Code Links Edit Miscellaneous View baon xa Source Relation Target isa isa Kabbala is associated with Alchemie pS Kabbala contradicts Bible Se Code Links Edit Miscellaneous view arrg xX Source Relation Target Kabbala is associated with Alchemie Kabbala contradicts Bible by Magic is Black Magic 2 Brass Black Magic The four elements is part of m The four elements is part of Pine be
140. Migration installs a HU and its associated PD data sources on another folder or Migrate computer It assumes that newer file versions should not be overwritten by files C Restore Included in the bundle Missing folders are created if needed HU Path C Dokumente und EinstellungensSusanneSEigene Dateien 4T LA w t Esclude HU TB Path cDokumente und Einstellungen Susannese igene DateienVAaT LASHVaTLAaSh Dateien T extba 3 bundled documents 35 37 EB plus HU 281 KB totals 316 37 KB Mame Target Location Use Size Log Modified Type a rew 5 rtf lt HUFATH pes m 304 KE OF 05 03 16 38 26 richtest a rew 5 rtf HUPATH gt pes E 2206 KE 10 09 03 13 29 04 richtest indian tet lt HUFATH pes mH J46 KE 10 09 03 16 3418 text Status report Map Path HU will be unbundled ia replacing existing version Existing file can be overwritten all documents will be unbundled Version conflict detected replacing 3 documents Unbundle Conflict Color Code B No conflict detected E Path cannot be created E Fallback path used Cancel Figure 116 Copy Bundle Install Bundle window Unbundling Strategies Unbundling is the term we have adopted for unpacking or extracting the compressed archive containing the HU and its associated files bundle at its new location The installation of a bundle on the same or a different computer can be done using two slightly different strategies Migrate and Restore Migrate The Migrate stra
141. OGIN and deactivate the option Automatic Login This way you are prompted to login every time you start a session For further information consult the section User Management on page 264 Ending your ATLAS ti Session When you have finished working select FILE QUIT from the HU editor s main menu to close the session Creating Opening and Saving a Hermeneutic Unit im Write a comment for your HU You and your team members will benefit from this useful information A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Creating a Hermeneutic Unit For more detail on how to best set up a project see Project Management on page 270 When you start ATLAS ti and a recently used HU is not loaded you will see New Hermeneutic Unit in the caption of the HU Editor You can start working right away on this new HU Alternatively you can choose NEW HERMENEUTIC UNIT from the File menu to open a new HU To provide a name for your HU save it to disk 1 Choose FILE SAVE AS from the main menu which opens a standard file dialog 2 Browse to the desired folder and enter the name for your HU 3 Click SAVE Recommendation Make it a habit to write a short comment for any new HU Describe the project s goals and intentions HU comments are displayed in the HU Browser and in HTML and XML output HU comments are also displayed when reviewing file properties with Windows Explorer To write an HU comment click on the comment button in the mai
142. Open Coding button or choose CODING OPEN CODING from the main or context menu 3 A prompter opens It was cold on the water he Indian who was rowing them was working very hard WWE the other Goat moved Further ahead in che mist all Open Coding Enter codes separated by d Uncle Geo Uncle Geo 4 Enter the code name and click OK The new code now appears in the Code Manager If a quotation was also created a it is displayed in the Quotation Manager Make it a habit to write a comment for every new code see Writing Code Comments on page 121 Creating more than one code concurrently When using the Open Coding procedure more than one code can be created at a time In order to do so you need to separate the code names with the vertical bar or pipe character ASCII 124 118 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sty bn Create more than one code at a time using the vertical bar character H The term in vivo in this context stems from grounded theory which draws the researcher s attention to expressions used by the interviewees themselves E A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 It was cold on the water he Indian who was rowing them was working very hard Wk kthe other boat moved Further ahead in the mist all the time Open Coding Enter codes separated by Boat Mist Indian Boat Mist Indian creates three new co
143. PD pane Note that it is disabled unless a document is loaded 42 e Main Workspace The HU Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Object Drop Down Lists 3 Codes E The four elements Below the main toolbar you find four drop down lists that The codes drop down list Line Paragraph Number button Illy al J Margin Area button Sty SK Resize the margin area using the split bar 9 between the PD pane and the margin pane A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 contain the HU s main entities From left to right these are the drop down lists for PDs quotations codes and memos Click into the entry field or the little drop down arrow on the right to select an object Click the button to the left of the entry field to open an Object Manager Primary Document Pane 5 The dominant window pane in the HU Editor is the Primary Document Pane This pane is the central workspace where text or graphic material is reviewed marked coded and annotated It is usually augmented by the Paragraph number pane 6 and the margin area 8 Line Paragraph Number Area 6 33 To the left of the text area but still inside the PD pane paragraph numbers can be displayed In fact displayed is a new number for every piece of text followed by a hard return Only when using legacy documents with hard returns for every line see Handling Legacy Documents on page 73 the numbers displayed alongside the doc
144. Remember the DELETE option removes the code for good including all associations with quotations codes memos etc Merging Codes When developing a coding scheme it may happen in the course of the analysis that two or more codes essentially mean the same thing One cause could be the import of code lists with different names but similar meanings ATLAS ti offers a procedure to merge synonymous codes into one resulting target code This target code replaces the merged codes and inherits all of their references 1 e quotations links to other codes or memos and their comments There are two ways to merge codes a list based method and one that works from within the Network Editor For a description of the network method and a descriptive example of merging codes see Merging Codes using the Network Editor on page 243 The Textual Level Basic Functions e 125 Save the HU before merging codes Sty Quotations are activated differently in context depending on the media type Merging Codes Using the List Method 1 Select the target code into which a number of other codes are to be merged 2 Choose CODES MISCELLANEOUS MERGE CODES from the HU editor s main menu 3 Inthe multiple choice window select the codes to be merged into the selected code Note The codes merged into the resulting target node are deleted from the Hermeneutic Unit s code database Since merging cannot be reversed easily
145. Repositions the track slider to either the next selection mark to the right or the end of the file The current position is made the start coordinate of a segment to be created Keyboard shortcut lt The current position determines the end coordinate of a segment Keyboard shortcut gt Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking the button creates a quotation for the current selection and starts a new selection This facilitates fast creation of sequential quotations Creates a free quotation from the current selection This button is disabled unless a valid segment is marked or if the segment already matches an existing quotation Keyboard shortcut q note q also starts a new selection In combination with the CTRL key this button trims the current media quotation to the current selection In addition to the buttons in the media control window you can use the cursor keys on your keyboard for fine resolution positioning Opening and Closing the Multimedia Control Window The multimedia control window opens automatically when you load a multimedia document When you switch from a media to a graphic or text PD the media control window is closed You can also close the control window manually To reopen the window open the context menu on the background of the multimedia document pane black with green text and choose the menu option OPEN MEDIACONTROL The Textual Level Basic Functions e 111 Preferences Under EXTR
146. S ti and other software The export procedures introduced in this chapter are not always clearly distinguishable from the chapter Generating Output on page 310 While the output options are generally display and print oriented export of the HU or parts thereof allows for analysis of data and structures created with ATLAS ti within other software packages ATLAS ti is intended primarily for supporting qualitative reasoning processes On the other hand especially with large amounts of data it is sometimes useful to analyze the data in a quantitative manner using Statistical approaches ATLAS ti provides an export function to permit further processing of the syntax file by SPSS the Statistical Package for the Social Sciences Cases amp Variables The basic components for statistics are cases and variables The SPSS export function in ATLAS ti treats codes as variables and data segments quotations as cases In contrast to the dichotomous treatment of codes within ATLAS ti you can use codes as ordinal or otherwise scaled variables in SPSS jobs by using a specific code naming convention The notion of a case here is rather fine grained and differs from the common understanding of this term Usually cases in qualitative research refer to persons interviews or documents We chose to treat the smallest unit as a case for the output to SPSS to ensure that no data is lost during export Broader information e g which primary doc
147. S ti installed on a server in LAN aware mode only for multi unit licenses All Hermeneutic Units and primary documents that the group works with should be stored in a publicly accessible shared directory on the network These Hermeneutic Units would still have optional access restrictions Access to individual Hermeneutic Units is always controlled by their authors A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The procedures outlined below are for use by the administrator only They include the definition and modification of user accounts and passwords The User Database All ATLAS ti users are cataloged in a special database file HERMENCR HDB located in the ATLAS ti system directory This file is loaded on program startup Never modify this file from outside ATLAS ti as this will corrupt it and lock you out of the system After the initial installation of ATLAS ti there is already one dummy user with administrator privileges set up Account SUPER password USER Because automatic login is the default mode it is quite likely that you usually work under this default account Because of its administrative privileges this mode lets you gain access to the following user management functions The User Administration Window A special tool for maintaining the user database is activated by choosing EXTRAS USER EDITOR from the main menu To anyone logged in without administrator privileges this option will not even be included in the menu
148. SIBlings 165 SUB 164 UP 164 Super Codes and code families 179 Creation 177 Cycle protection 179 Merging 178 Suppresssor codes 178 Quick Coding 121 Quit program 61 Quotations 30 Audio 31 Delete 115 Graphic 31 Graphical Selecting 114 Merge during modify 115 Modify 154 Multimedia 31 Retrieval 126 Textual 31 Types of 31 Video 31 R Rearrange PD 351 Redundant Codings 188 Reference types 96 Relations 33 212 Index e 409 vs links 213 Relaxed User Management 269 Remove filter 142 Reverse filter 141 Rich Text 12 15 29 81 Roles 214 Rollup Mode 11 Rulerbar 363 S Save Hermeneutic Unit 347 Scaled codes 300 Search swarm 146 Secondary windows 363 Serendipity 3 Service Pack Manager 335 Service Packs 334 Shared Documents 19 Snapshot Codes 16 Sorting 138 Special Paths 14 97 275 HUPATH 97 TBPATH 98 Use Special Paths option 272 Split Codes 245 SPSS 20 299 Code families 302 Missing values 302 Naming convention 300 Primary document family 202 Primary document families 302 Syntax file 300 Start ATLAS ti 59 Status Bar 44 363 Strong and weak links 212 Super Codes Definition 32 Super Family 19 Synchronization 88 T Teamwork 19 Text Editor 36 Text Editors Preferences 344 410 e Index Text search Defining categories 147 Search swarm 146 Search swarm delimiter 146 Text Search 144 Category search 146 GREP search 149 Standard search 145 Text Search Tool 37 Text segments Semi automatic select
149. Software Development Berlin 2004 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 An Anselm Strauss Website http www ucsf edu anselmstrauss index html The VISE Principle Webster Main Entry ser endip ity Pronunciation di DACE Function noun A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The main principles of the ATLAS ti philosophy are best encapsulated by the acronym VISE which stands for Visualization Integration Serendipity and Exploration Visualization The visualization component of the program means directly supports the way human beings this includes researchers think plan and approach solutions in creative yet systematic ways Tools are offered to visualize complex properties and relations between the objects accumulated during the process of eliciting meaning and structure from the analyzed data The object oriented design of ATLAS ti seeks to keep the necessary operations close to the data to which they are applied The visual approach of the interface keeps you focused on the data and quite often the functions you need are just a few mouse clicks away Integration Another fundamental design aspect of the software is to integrate all pieces that comprise a project in order not to lose sight of the whole when going into detail Therefore all relevant entities are stored in a container the so called Hermeneutic Unit HU Like the spider in its web the HU keeps all data within reach Loading a project with
150. T keys in combination with the left mouse button GREP Search GREP is a well known tool in the UNIX environment The original GREP tool printed each line containing the search pattern hence the acronym GREP Globally look for Regular Expression and Print In ATLAS t the results of a GREP search are not printed line by line Instead the text matching the search pattern 1s highlighted on the screen The core of a GREP search is the inclusion of special characters in the search string that control the matching process GREP finds instances in your data that match certain patterns The ATLAS ti GREP search offers a subset of the Regular Expression language used in sophisticated text search systems Supported Basic GREP Expressions All GREP expressions supported by ATLAS ti are shown in the table below GREP Description Expression Anchors the entered pattern to the beginning of a line If used as the first character within brackets it excludes the following characters or range from the search Anchors the entered search pattern to the end of a line Matches any single character Special Tools e 149 Matches any number including zero of the preceding expression Matches at least one occurrence of the preceding expression or character Matches zero or one occurrence of the preceding expression or character stones matches stone and stones Matches a range or set of characters a z or 0 9 or aeiou For e
151. TLAS ti 5 0 e 17 Object Explorer Families 18 e What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 Some important improvements have been made in the Object Explorer Code Forest and Code Tree The Object Explorer as a Window Manager The Object Explorer used as a Window Manager makes it a convenient access tool for all objects Double click the composite objects 1 e Primary Docs Codes Memos etc to open the corresponding Object Manager Browsing Super Codes amp Families The queries associated with Super Codes are displayed hierarchically Various components of the query can be separately processed Display Qualified Link Names Until now code code links and hyperlinks did not indicate the kind of relation used when displayed in the Object Explorer Symmetric Link Display Representing symmetric links in a hierarchical view is problematic How should the two codes Smoke and Fire engaged in a symmetric link be displayed Our solution display Fire as the parent of Smoke and Smoke as the parent of Fire and prevent infinite expanding of the hierarchy caused by such a cyclic arrangement which would create an error In the figure below the code Smoke underneath Fire is displayed in gray and cannot be further expanded e Fire 12 3 S A Smoke 6 1 G Fire 12 3 e Water 9 2 cane E3 ga water 19 2 Figure 4 a symmetric link displayed in the Object Explorer Family Managers
152. To change a user s name 1 Select a user in the list window 2 Edit the first and last name entry fields or select the corresponding menu items from the EDIT menu 3 Select another user to consolidate the changes or click OK which also closes the window Maintaining the User Database Saving the user database After new definitions and modifications the user database must be explicitly saved or all changes will be discarded As ATLAS ti processes a file named HERMENCR ADB in ATLAS ti s Program folder upon start up this name and folder should be used unless you are about to create a copy of the database Loading a user database The standard user database is loaded upon start up You may load a different database to make modifications to different set of users or to reload the standard database that has just been modified by another administrator Automatic Logon If you are the only person working with ATLAS ti you probably never have a reason to disable the automatic logon It is active by default after the installation of the program You can set the option Automatic Login after opening the login dialog box via EXTRAS LOGIN from the main menu ATLAS ti Login ATLAS ti User Account Automatic Login ATLAS ti WIM 5 0 Build 60 Figure 114 The Login Dialog Box A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Relaxed User Management This feature removes the password requirement and accounts are not checked
153. U itself and are loaded when needed This one file for all structured storage technology that is also used by MS Office makes loading safe and fast and the user is not likely to experience significant delays Outsourcing memos into separate files is no longer necessary A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Rich Text Memos and comments may also be formatted as Rich Text New Memo Editor Memos have undergone a facelift and now assume a more prominent role compared to previous ATLAS ti versions A special text editor with a dedicated memo name and type field opens when you create or display a memo Drag amp Drop Memos can be attached to selected data segments or existing quotations via drag amp drop just like codes Dragging a memo into the PD Manager assigns it as a Primary Document Additionally document text can be dragged into an existing memo or into the list pane of the Memo Manager to create a new memo Using Memos for Bulk Code Generation You may bulk create a large number of codes using a memo containing a code name per line See Using Memos to Create a Code List on page 134 Search amp Retrieval A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Query Tool has been improved and a new tool the Object Crawler allows you to search through all objects contained in an HU Query Tool Some subtle improvements have been made e When creating a super code or when new codes are added the corresponding lists di
154. Unit A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Family Life Overview A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Just as codes describe sets of quotations families cluster Primary Documents PDs codes and memos One important objective is to manage large amounts of objects by classifying them into subsets e g all theoretical codes all PDs from respondents of a certain age group or location all memos related to a theme etc In the following the role of families as variables super families and for controlling the HU merge procedure are introduced Families as Variables While families are used to classify a group of objects the objects they classify can be members of more than one family Unlike Network Views which can contain objects of different types as nodes families can only contain one type of object For example a code can never be a member of a memo family Partitioning objects into families reduces the number of chunks requiring the researcher s attention Families are often used for filtering see Sorting and Filtering on page 137 and when formulating queries in the Query Tool see The Query Tool on page 160 Example When conducting an interview study with respondents from various backgrounds and locations PD families can be created to classify the respondents into e Female Male e Location A Location B Location C e Age Group 20 30 Age Group 2 31 40 Age Group 3 41 50 e Blue collar work
155. WATLASH project w o gt To H kMy Files ATLAStH project d Ee Select from a path used in current HU Select from all current target paths or Enter or browse For any existing path browse to select any path Click 400 FATH Click 400 PATH Always use Fallback paths Apply poly amp Close Cancel amp Close Figure 33 Path Map Editor The figure above shows a mapping example for path Z My files ATLASti project data With this mapping the documents Z My files ATLASti project data interview_3 rtf and Z My files ATLASti project data Special interview_4 rtf would also be assumed at H My files ATLASti project data interview_3 rtf and H My files ATLASti project data Specialinterview_4 rtf in case they are not accessible at their original location Primary Documents e 103 104 e Primary Documents It is possible to define more than one replacement alternative for a given path However we strongly advise against making use of such multi mappings As we have already pointed out chances of accessing a wrong document with the same name increase with multiple alternatives To enter a path to be mapped 3 Into the From entry field on the left side of the Path Map Editor type in either the full path select a path from the drop down list or click on the file browser symbol Generally useful options non accessible paths used in the current HU are already offered in the drop down list Enter new pat
156. YPERLINKS BY LIST Links the selected quotation to other quotations chosen from a list RENAME Renames the selected quotation MODIFY BOUNDARIES Corrects the selected quotation s boundaries see Changing The Boundaries Of A Quotation on page 115 This option is also available in the vertical tool bar EDIT COMMENT Edits the selected quotation s comment DELETE Deletes the selected quotation The referenced portion is NOT deleted from the PD s data source SORT SUBMENU Sets the sort criterion for quotations The current sort criterion is displayed as part of the menu item For details see Sorting and Filtering on page 137 FILTER SUBMENU Sets or removes the filter for quotations The current filter is displayed as part of the menu item For details see Sorting and Filtering on page 137 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Info Merge Quotations SQUeE2e Change Date Change Author A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 TOGGLE FILTER Reverses the current filter OPEN NETWORK VIEW Opens a Network View on the selected quotation Choosing this option in the context of an Object Manager displays all selected quotations in the network view Hold down the Ctrl key to list all network views containing the selected quotation QUOTATION MANAGER Displays the list of quotations in a separate window The Quotation Manager offers a number of options to handle and manage quotations see Quotation Manager
157. a drag amp drop e CODE BY LIST e Assigns a code to the current selection by choosing existing codes from the list QUICK CODING Codes the current selection with the selected code AUTO CODING Opens a tool to search select and code automatically For details see The Auto Coding Tool on page 151 LINK CODE TO SUBMENU Links the selected code to one or more other objects e g e QUOTATIONS e CODES e MEMOS RENAME Renames the selected code EDIT COMMENT Opens an editor for the selected code s comment DELETE Deletes the selected code SORT SUBMENU Sets the sort criterion for codes The current sort criterion is displayed as part of the menu item For details see Sorting and Filtering on page 137 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 FILTER SUBMENU Sets or removes the filter for codes The current filter is displayed as part of the menu item For details see Sorting and Filtering on page 137 TOGGLE FILTER Reverses the current filter If you currently filter for all free codes Toggle Filter displays all codes that are NOT free 1 e codes that reference a quotation or are linked to other codes EDIT FAMILIES SUBMENU pen Family Manager The items in the families submenu provide access to the operations Assign Families available for assigning objects to subsets families For details see Family Life on page 191 e OPEN FAMILY MANAGER Creates edits or deletes code families Assigns or
158. a memo Text dragged from the PD pane becomes a quotation Wta aA Hold down the Ctrl key to suppress the import of quotations Naty Import neighbors can be undone Shortcut Ctrl Shift Z 228 e The Network Editor et al Drag text from other applications into a Network Editor This method allows you to drag text from drag amp drop compliant applications like Word into a Network Editor Text dragged from Word is converted into a new memo and displayed as a node 1 Open the application from which you want to drag selections of text in to a Network Editor 2 Mark the piece of text within the other application 3 Move the mouse pointer over the selected text The pointer changes its appearance 4 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the selected text into the Network Editor 5 Release the mouse button at the position you want the new node to be placed with its upper left corner A new node is created and displayed Import Node Neighbors This method imports all direct neighbors of the selected nodes into the Network View This option is also available from the node s context menu Importing direct neighbors allows you to construct a connected Network View step by step In a connected graph there is always a direct or indirect path between any two nodes To import neighbors of selected nodes 1 Select the node s whose neighbors are to be included in the Network View 2 Choose NODES IMPORT
159. acing absolute references to specific disk drives and specific computers this reference will always work even when copying the HU and the complete folder tree with root D Data ATLASti ProjectX to C ATLASProjects Pros e The HU always finds its PD files as long as sub folders and files are not moved independently of the HU s folder e Portability Moving projects is simple copy the HU s folder and all subfolders Cons e Sharing data between different HUs or even different users 1s not very convenient unless the HUs reside under the same folder Special path TBPATH The customizable TBPATH Textbank Path has the following objectives e tis the default folder opened whenever you assign documents save HUs etc e Itis aconvenient location including subfolders in which to store your project s documents To emphasize that this special path is user relative it is set to the following default location after the installation of ATLAS ti TBPATH My Documents Scientific Software ATLASti Textbank This creates a nested special folder The Windows special folder My Documents is also a variable This location was selected because the My Documents folder is a location that belongs to the user currently logged in under Windows The user has all required permissions to work on items in this folder But setting the TBPATH to a private user folder may not always be appropriate useful or even smart In ca
160. against the user database If neither data security and protection nor teamwork is an important issue to you part of the bureaucratic burden is removed when you enable the relaxed user management This feature can only be changed by editing the central configure tion file for ALL users ATLAS INI This file resides in the Changes to PROGRAM directory of the ATLAS ti directory structure and you ATLAS INI aff ect all need Windows administrator rights to be able to modify this file computers in a After making a backup copy of ATLAS INI open it with a plain text ney orked editor such as Windows Notepad Under the lan section set the environment variable relaxedUserManagement to either enabled or disabled Note Settings in ATLAS INI affect all clients in a networked environment For any changes in ATLAS INI to take affect ATLAS ti has to be restarted A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Collaboration e 269 Project Management Objectives Sty With a single project and no need to work in teams you can almost forget about sophisticated project management issues 270 e Project Management This section provides assistance in setting up your ATLAS ti project in the most efficient manner and for maximum work productivity Furthermore it gives advice on how to maintain your projects effectively throughout their entire lifetime Backing up and migrating projects across systems and merging the combined work efforts of d
161. age primary documents may boost the size considerably and therefore transmission times depending upon the size of the documents A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Rich Text Rich Text formatted documents cannot be included in the resulting HTML code All contents from rich text primary documents including Word files comments or memos are converted to plain text for HTML output Embedded file links to such documents can of course be used When clicking the link the application registered for this file type e g Word is opened or displayed using a plug in inside the browser s window Network View Images Checking the option to include Network Views is not sufficient to display them in an HTML document The graphic files have to be created manually for every network that you want to include To create Network View bitmaps for HTML files 1 Open the Network View in a Network Editor 2 Set the fonts colors and the size of the window Arrange the nodes as desired 3 Choose NETWORK SAVE AS GRAPHIC FILE from the network editor s main menu ATLAS ti saves network views in Bitmap BMP or Windows Enhanced Metafile EMF format 4 The file name offered should resemble the link created by the HTML generator 5 Choose EME as format since this is also the default format used by the HTML generator If you prefer a different file type you must use another tool to convert the EMF files into the required format Export and
162. aginary rectangle 1 Move the mouse pointer above and left to one of the nodes to be selected 2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer down and right to cover all nodes to be selected with the selection marquee 3 Release the mouse button 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to add nodes from other parts of the Network View to the current selection is part of is part bf 3 The four elements i is part of 3 The four elements i is part of is part of As En of T G is part of is part of contradicts contradicts 3 Fire Fire 3 Fire Fire Bai is part of is part of A 2 The four elements is part of __ sete is part of _ 3 Earth is part oF i is a of contradicts n is part of ww is part of Figure 89 Selecting nodes via marquee selection Selecting Neighbors Neighbors are the nodes linked directly to a node Using this procedure repeatedly selects a complete connected graph which A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Network Editor et al e 221 is a partial Network View where every node has a path either a direct link or via intermediate nodes to each other node To select neighbor nodes 1 Select the initial nodes 2 Choose NODES SELECT NEIGHBORS from the Network Editor s menu or press CTRL N on the keyboard 3 To mark a complete connected sub network repeat the previous step until all nodes within the partial Network View are highli
163. ain document there is no guarantee that you will be able to continue working smoothly on the other computer If the subdocuments were referenced via absolute path names e g d word manual chapter22 doc and your other computer cannot resolve this path because you copied everything into c mydocuments instead of d word you still will not be able to access the chapters even though they are all there The ATLAS ti Reference Model If you translate the Word way of handling multiple documents through one main document into the ATLAS ti world the analogy is straightforward The main document is equivalent to the HU and the subdocuments chapters equal the PD data sources Just like the chapter headers are displayed inside the central document PDs are listed in the HU But when it comes to displaying their contents clicking on a chapter in the Word doc will yield an error just like clicking a PD in ATLAS ti if those files are not properly assigned This is where ATLAS ti extends beyond WORD Word does not worry about misaligned quotations after a subdocument was edited nor does it have any intelligent strategies for keeping track of documents under changing circumstances Basic Principles for Working with Referenced Documents e During the lifetime of an HU references to documents always need to point to the same documents or equivalent copies In other words Make an effort to keep your documents where they are when you first
164. alpink z Senn red nove dan ERiqhel tnnnnleweninalmnarnina Scope of Search Selected PD All current PDs CPD Family Create quotation From match extended to 3 Exact Match Word O Sentence 2 Multi Hard Returns All Text Close Standard Search Mode GREP Figure 56 The Auto Coding Dialog Note the New Code button which allows you to create codes on the fly for the auto coding procedure The GREP search expression entered looks for occurrences of string Speakerl to SpeakerS5 located at the beginning of a paragraph in all textual PDs The whole paragraph will be selected before a quotation is created and the code is assigned Special Tools e 151 Naty Test search patterns with the Text Search tool first 152 e Special Tools Search Expression The top part of the Auto Coding Dialog window resembles the Text Search tool see The Text Search Tool on page 144 Search expressions can be entered or search categories can be selected The search mode can also be set in a similar way as for the Text Search tool Scope of Search Scope of Search can be all textual PDs the selected PD only or it may be restricted to a set of texts from a PD family When you choose All current PDs the search starts at the beginning of the currently selected primary text Scope of Search Selected PD All current PDs PD Family If Selected PD is chose
165. amme Scient The Sample Aprs J registration and download reports hbprs Di Extractlinstitutional 2003 1116 hpr5 D Extracti Super Family HU Aprs B D Extractiinstitutional hpr S C FProorammetScientif 1the samole hors Details lt MT gt Always on Top Store lisk when closing session Using binary predicates For representing paradigms Filesize 10068 Created Modified 27 08 93 20 02 97 ATLAS ti Wind Authoris GAST Primary Docsi O Quotations 0 Rights Access granted This very incomplete hermeneutic unit shows how to use Wosdsrv 1idataiTwin Backup 47 L4stil TEs TBA PARADIGM hpr Figure 19 The HU Browser and info pane The browser displays some information about the selected HU e g its location date of creation co authors number of assigned PDs quotations codes and its comment If needed you can launch the standard file dialog from within the HU Browser by clicking the BROWSE DISK button If you want to clean up the list of recently used HUs click the REMOVE button This action deletes the list entry not the HU itself Although the standard file dialog is generally more flexible the HU browser s capability of displaying files from different locations in one list is often quite convenient However if you only want to A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 disk locations open you can simply choose from the list of most recently used HUs available in the FILE menu To open a rece
166. and graphical hyperlinks 114 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 BE 12 2 lt contradicts gt B 6 2 lt expands gt Z4 2 29 continued by gt 9 4 8 supports Figure 36 Hyperlinks of different content type in the margin Modifying Quotations This feature lets you change the boundaries start and end position of a quotation Changing The Boundaries Of A Quotation 1 Activate the quotation if not already selected 2 Select a data segment that you actually want to use as this quotation This destroys the data selection of the quotation just selected However the next step simply modifies the most recently selected quotation Click the modify button d located to the left of the text window or choose QUOTATIONS MODIFY from the main menu For multimedia quotations use the combination of the Ctrl key and the Media Control window s Create Quotation button The quotation will be changed reflecting the new boundaries New boundaries match existing quotation If the new boundaries match another existing quotation you are asked for confirmation to merge the currently modified and the already existing quotation The quotation resulting from the merge operation collects the references of both quotations For example 1f the modified quotation was coded with code A and the existing quotation with matching boundaries with code B the new quotation will be referenced by both code A and B
167. and paths Once a data source has been assigned to an HU it is mandatory that during the course of a project it always accesses this same document and not a different one The main consequence of an architecture made up of referenced files is that those files must always be at their original locations when you or your project need them Otherwise the files are not found creating a broken link However you do have the means to make such references more flexible Referencing a Common Procedure ATLAS ti organizes projects into different referenced files This is a common procedure for many professional applications when things get large or complex Two well known examples for systems of referenced files are discussed in this section Example 1 The World Wide Web Way When you click on a link in a Web page your browser loads and displays the linked page target A Web link is really nothing but a reference to another Web page Such a reference or URL Uniform Resource Locator is very much like a file name only that the former is unique in the namespace of the whole world while a simple file name is unique only on a certain computer However if the linked page has ceased to exist has been moved or renamed or if a connection to the site where the file resides can simply not be established you will get a message that the page cannot be loaded the infamous error 404 If the owner of the missing Web page tak
168. and since this procedure might affect many aspects save the Hermeneutic Unit before doing the merge If you are not satisfied with the merge result you can reload the previously saved HU Another more laborious way to revert to the previous state is to split the target code See Splitting Codes on page 245 Retrieving Coded Quotations There are different ways to retrieve coded segments Quotations for a single code or a combination of codes quotations displayed in the context of their primary documents or quotations sent to a report The simplest retrieval is by activating a code in the Code Manager with a double click Activating a quotation for a code A straightforward method is to display quotations in context textual and graphical quotations will be selected in the document when activated A multimedia quotation begins to play when selected When you select a code in the code drop down list or double click an item in the Code Manager the following happens depending on how many quotations are coded to that code If there is only one quotation If there is only one quotation for the selected code it will be activated immediately 126 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 4 d Use the NEXT and PREVIOUS button in the Code Manager to browse through all quotations for a selected code Naty rA Use the Query Tool for complex retrievals of quotations A5 User s Guide t
169. antic operators in the Query Tool When you want to utilize the semantic operators SUB UP SIB transitive relations need to be used Comment As with all entities in ATLAS ti a comment can be attached to a relation The text entered as a relation comment is displayed within A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 a Network Editor after opening a context menu on a link or when selecting DISPLAY RELATION Bear in mind that a comment written for a relation is different from a comment written for a link The comment for a relation is of a global nature and defines the relation type e g what is meant by the relation is associated with A link using this relation connects two specific codes When writing a comment for this link the meaning 1s local and explains why two codes were connected using this relation Editing Relations The Relation Editor is available from the HU s main menu NETWORKS RELATION EDITOR or can be launched from the Network Editor s LINKS menu A submenu offers the choice between editing Code Code relations or Hyper Links quote quote relations To edit a relation You can change the properties of relations If these relations are already in use by the currently loaded HU changes will be stored along with the HU when saving it 1 Open the Relation Editor NETWORKS RELATION EDITOR 2 In the list of relations click on the relation to be edited 3 Change any of the
170. ara ree RTT mE Tm ce eR A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Contents e iii iv e Contents General Properties of Objects Workbench Tools Overview 35 The All in One Workbench Concept sinerien i r 35 The TOO ecse E T aun deaussadgidavaldedenigedace 36 Main Workspace The HU Editor 41 ONONLO a A E T eon ea ee scote ee 4 Components Of the HU Editor v sus criodiorcoisaleaiasnwctoteestaiedonttotualtaladioarietenres 42 THE OD COE MANAG CLS ia a E a basen piehianiaatnsadiawentaadas 46 Primary Document Manage ereeroniranai en a cena lein see 51 Quotation Manas er ssswaieiessctsiaiuaieedict aie duce a a 52 Code Manager arrg a Ea 55 Memo Mand Se esac tess erect ca ince oneness aan etic 56 Working with ATLAS ti 59 Starting and Ending an ATLAS ti Session esssesssoeeeessssssssseeressssssseerssssss 59 Creating Opening and Saving a Hermeneutic UMit ee ecccccceeessseeeeeeees 61 Assigning Primary Documents siiccdissscsssarsrancedssiawt taxes eanddeheduasiaea tacedaseentsaveieecdes 65 Primary Documents 71 Prepa me DocuMmen Sears net a E ocee ite tal ew ee lines 71 Loading and Navigating Primary Documents ccccssseeseeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 76 Editi Pomar Documents issie RE 78 Converting Documents to New Paragraph Model cccceccccccceceeessseseeeeeees 91 How ATLAS A Handles Document lt lt 2zaieciesstetaedinnieceinata iw diadiveteuioneis 93 The Textual Level Basic Functions 107 Seene Document Semen erroan aa e
171. arch button L gt in the PD toolbar select EDIT SEARCH from the main menu or use the key combination CTRL F A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 E Text Search Enter or select Search Expression Case Sensitive Standard Search Mode Figure 52 The Text Search tool in standard search mode Note If the document is in Edit mode Ctrl F opens a Windows standard text search Use the menu option or the search button instead Not all options are available for every type of search For instance backward and case sensitive searches are not available for Category Search Initially the status bar displays the current search mode in the figure above Standard Search Mode During a search activity this is the place where you should look for warnings and messages A text search always starts from the current position of the text cursor in the currently selected primary text When the end of this document is reached you are asked if the search should continue through the rest of the primary text documents Search Options Two options are available to control the search mode Case Sensitive Check the CASE SENSITIVE box if you want characters to match the searched text exactly If CASE SENSITIVE is selected you will not find Love when you search for love This option is not available in Category Search mode GREP Mode Checking the GREP box enables GREP mod
172. are A w G Target HU The Sample 2 Source HU To procede with Next please select a source HU Figure 118 The Merge Tool Selecting the source HU 3 Select a source HU from the file dialog opened by clicking the browse button 4 Clicking the NEXT button will load the source HU and will proceed to the next step If the merge procedure was initiated by drag amp drop the source HU is already entered into the source entry field You can immediately proceed by clicking on the NEXT button Next you need to choose a merge Strategy Choose a merge strategy The second step is the selection of how the source HU is to be merged into the target HU Four broad predefined strategies are available that can be customized in a second step Object classes can be selectively added unified or ignored The four stock strategies were explained above in detail see Stock merge strategies on page 291 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Merge Wizard offers a variety of options to set the merge strategy for every object type A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Merge Hermeneutic Units Define the merge st x Create Merge Report PD Families Both POs and code scheme of the merged a HU are the same as in the target HU Memo Families Stock Strategies Same PDs and Codes Primary Docs 2 Same PDs Different Codes Quotations C Different PDs Same Codes Codes Different PDs and Codes Memos CL CL Unif
173. argin area Creating Hyperlinks A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 ATLAS ti offers a variety of options for creating and traversing hypertext links Similar to the linking of codes you may create hyperlinks using a list method or the network editor In addition hypertext links can be created in context or via Drag amp Drag in the Quotation Manager and in the margin area Creating Hyperlinks using the List Method Quotations can be linked with a method already described for connecting codes using the Hyperlink menu option cf To link code nodes using the list method on page 225 When using this method the quotations to be connected must already exist It is possible to create a chain and a star connection using this method but the procedures are slightly different than those described in the star and chain connections section To create a chain 1 Select a source quotation either in the Quotation Manager or by clicking on a quotation bracket in the margin area 2 Select HYPERLINK CREATE LINK SOURCE from the main menu 3 Select the target quotation 4 Select HYPERLINK CREATE LINK TARGET from the main menu The relation menu pops up 5 Select a relation to link the two selected quotations or create a new relation by selecting OPEN RELATION EDITOR Hypertext e 255 To create a star 1 2 Select a source quotation either in the Quotation Manager or by clicking on a quotation bracket in the
174. arker color Non DBCS Language Support Although full multiple languages for ATLAS ti s object names codes memo titles are not yet supported the user can specify the language encoding for extracted text used in subsequent operations e g In vivo coding This becomes necessary if the language of the document differs from the language of the Windows installation However an appropriate font still needs to be chosen For general information on this issue consult chapter Character Encoding for Textual Documents on page 398 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Use this code page Permanently selects an appropriate code page matching the character set used in your documents e g 932 for Japanese text Use active code page Uses the currently active code page This can be switched via the Windows task bar or it is the code page for the active editing pane The currently active code page 1s displayed in the HU Editor s status bar Don t use code page Do not use any code page other than the default code page 0 Extracted text is considered native This would be your preferred setting on a native DBCS Japanese Korean Chinese system Section PD Printing General HU Editor Margin Fonts Storage Paths Text Editors PO Printing Memos Unit of measurement Print header page Left margin Right margin Added offset to margin area Top margin Bottom margin The above settings affect the printi
175. arth 170 e Special Tools A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 3 Double click on the code Fire EN ATLAS ti Query Tool Seles Families Query ae Chemistry Hye SF BigFamily 10y r Chemistry E lt ii gt Black Magic 0 1 F Booth 1 0 pk Brass 1 1 ga Casualties 3 0 gh Chemical warfare 1 0 a Dimension Horror 0 5 2 Earth 4 1 Name f1 hew AlEcology 1 0 and stood at the altar he 4Fire 112 3 and there fell a great star fa ceorge 15 Oh And the smoke of the ince 2 Gold 4 3 8 Golden ae as and there Fell a great star t ii ti gt Distance in lines E Refresh Codes Result 12 TE All and there Followed hail ar Now there are two entries in the term stack codes Fire and Earth The feedback pane displays the active query code Fire The results of this query are shown in the results pane the 12 quotations associated with the code Fire With two operands on the term stack we can combine them with an appropriate operator The intention was to retrieve all quotations coded as Earth or Fire A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Special Tools e 171 4 Click on the OR operator to combine the two expressions from the stack E ATLAS ti Query Tool Seles Families Query ise Chemistry 1 ORC Earth Fire F pigramily 10 Chemistry a iii gt Fire Black Magic 0 1 2 Booth 1 0 gh Brass 1 1 gh Casualtie
176. assigned to an HU This section discusses techniques for making references more flexible special paths and 1f absolute paths are necessary path mapping Absolute Paths Absolute paths are fully qualified file names such as DNData ATLASti ProjectX Interviews Interview 1 rtf Or Server1 D Data ATLASti ProjectX VInterviews Interview rtf The former path references a file in a non ambiguous way on a specific computer which has a disk drive D The latter path a UNC path addresses a file on a specific computer in a local area network Both paths will refer to the same file 1f your computer is in fact Server Pros e As long as the file itself 1s not deleted or replaced by another one it will always be found at this original location e Absolute paths stay valid even when moving the HU to another location on this computer or when UNC paths are used to another computer within the local network e Absolute unique paths in a local area network are easy to share among users Cons e When porting the project to another computer or to another network files will not be found unless the target has identical conditions identical drives identical folder structure identical computer and network names e If referenced files or folders are moved to another drive or to another computer the references become invalid A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 ATLAS ti uses special paths to reference data sources whenever possibl
177. at as the original Excel object and it cannot be activated but you can select and code a single cell or several cells of the spreadsheet 84 e Primary Documents A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The same Excel table selection pasted into a document as Rich Text above and as an Excel object below The margin shows several codes for the Rich Text version and only one code for the object version below Objects can be activated and edited without the PD being in edit mode Such changes are not permanent A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 File Bearbeiten Ansicht Einf gen Format Extras Daten Acrobat Arial lW vo F XU E amp E E m t ete SU O A Yi tf BES ono Bre 215 Ow 0 0A PD Family Table 2 PD Family fabe S 03 Documents NOT Bible texts NOT Textual docs 1 aks Ani lt C is Di wall 0 g niig Air Piir 2 Bla i e prer PD Family Table 9 Dim Documents NOT Bible texts NOT Textual docs Bible texts P1 P2 P3 5 P4 P5 E g g igh ef eS eK OOK OO So EE asa aeaa gt gt I PD Family Table Bible OFFFFEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EE EEE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Figure 30 An Excel table inserted as Rich Text and as an embedded object Editing Embedded Objects To edit an embedded linked object 1 Enter Edit mode 2 Double click the object or right click on the object 3 Select lt OBJE
178. at come with the program The following sample was created by exporting the HU for The Sample to XML A short snippet of this raw output looks like this lt xml yversian 1 0 encoding iso 8859 1 7 gt lt storedHU xmins aml http wayw atlasti com hu ns2003 lastSaved 2004 05 23715 13 07 creator ATLAS tr method AML ATLAS Markup Language version WIN 5 0 Build 59 gt lt hermUnit name The Sample au Admin cDate 1991 03 11713 22 37 mDate 2004 05 23715 12 53 lastPD 5 prot publicReadWrite gt lt comment This HU is a toy example but nevertheless draws some interesting relations between magic and religous terminology lt comment gt lt hermUnit lt codAuthors gt lt coduthor name ADMIN gt lt co4uthor name ANDREAS gt lt cod4uthor name ATLAS gt lt codauthor name JOOpP gt lt cosauthor name TM gt lt coAuthors gt lt Codes size 52 gt lt code name 4 Formula id co_1 au Thomas M1 cDate 2003 03 04714 30 57 mDate 2003 03 O7T13 19 42 cCount 0 gCount 1 gt Figure 129 HU displayed as raw XML in Internet Explorer A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Generating Output e 323 324 e Generating Output Three different stylesheets were independently applied to this XML file using the XML converter to generate completely different representations from the same source It is important to notice that these representations work independently of ATLAS ti
179. ata source Every user on every ATLAS ti workstation accessing a data source is registered in this LOK file It also registers the name of the user the name of the computer and the time access was granted None of this information is stored forever all user related information 1s removed when leaving the ATLAS ti session A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sty The HU is also protected against accidental concurrent editing A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 ATLAS ti 5 allows more than one user accesses a data source at the same time However when you switch into edit mode it will either inform you that user X is currently using the document or it will reject the editing attempt in case another user is already editing it first come first served If the other user forgot to exit edit mode left ATLAS ti running and went away on a long vacation you might be informed that User X has been editing the file for 23 days Well either this is really the case or a LOK file could not be updated or removed because of a crash during an edit session If you happen to know that there really isn t anybody editing the document you can simply delete the LOK file to gain write access to the document Remember though do NOT delete the LOG file There is also a LOK file for the HU itself e g myhu hpr5 lok to prevent concurrent editing of a HU If an HU has an associated LOK file it is currently in use by someone and can consequ
180. aterial by different authors Semantic Network Migration This method transfers a relatively complete theory into a new project Like the flat code migration method described above two steps are necessary First the network of codes needs to be exported and saved as an external file Second this file is imported into anew HU or an existing HU To export the code network 1 Load the HU that contains the theory you want to migrate 2 If needed set the code filter to contain only those codes to be processed in the next step 3 Choose NETWORKS EXPORT CODE NETWORK from the HU Editor s main menu 4 Enter a name for the network file By default the name of the HU with the extension NET 1s offered The file contains a textual description which can be processed by the import step described in the following directions To import a code network 1 Load the HU into which the network of codes shall be imported 242 e The Network Editor et al A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Clean up synonymous codes using the Code Merge procedure A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 2 Choose NETWORKS IMPORT CODE NETWORK from the HU Editor s main menu 3 Select a network file extension NET Conflict Resolution When importing networks into an HU that already contains networked codes the following internal strategy is applied to avoid conflicts Existing codes and links are not modified inconsistent links are not created e g d
181. aterials All rights not expressly granted are reserved by Scientific Software Development 2 NO WARRANTIES The ATLAS ti Code and accompanying written materials are provided as is without warranty of any kind To the maximum extent permitted by law Scientific Software Development disclaims all warranties either express or implied including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose and non infringement The entire risk arising out of the use or performance of the ATLAS ti Code and any accompanying written materials remains with you 3 NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law in no event shall Scientific Software Development its suppliers subsidiaries or representatives be liable for any damages whatsoever including without limitation damages for loss of business profits business interruption loss of business information or other pecuniary loss arising out of the use of or inability to use the ATLAS ti Code even if Scientific Software Development has been advised of the possibility of such damages 4 MISCELLANEOUS This Agreement is governed by international laws If either party employs attorneys to enforce any rights arising out of or relating to this Agreement the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys fees costs and expenses Trademarks ATLAS ti is a registered trademark of Scientific Software Development
182. ation about an HU comment keywords is accessible via Windows Explorer properties What Has Not Changed Development of ATLAS ti 5 has concentrated very much on the content richness of primary document and concurrent and consistent editing Many other features have been added others refurbished and improved What has not been changed is the overall conceptual foundation There are still the four main concepts primary documents quotations codes and memos You can start right away and code your data as usual even if you are not yet familiar with the new bells and whistles that ATLAS ti 5 offers The Query Tool the Family Managers and the Network Editor also function as usual The handling of multimedia documents also remains largely the same If You Have Used ATLAS ti Before A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 You can start using your knowledge about ATLAS ti and your old projects and data right away There is no need to study the manual in full detail or to apply complex conversions as you start using ATLAS ti 5 However reading the chapter Project Management on page 270 and especially Optimizing Projects for ATLAS ti 5 0 on page 289 is strongly recommended to facilitate your transition to ATLAS ti 5 Can Use my Old Hermeneutic Units and Primary Documents The short answer to this burning question is YES Migrating HUs ATLAS ti 5 can read all your current HUs which have the file extension HPR and silentl
183. ations move the selected node s one pixel at a time in any of the four directions up down left and right Use this to fine tune a layout Should prefer to access these functions with their shortcuts use the arrow keys in combination with the Ctrl key UP Shortcut CTRL UP Moves all selected nodes up by one pixel DOWN Shortcut CTRL DOWN Moves all selected nodes down by one pixel LEFT Shortcut CTRL LEFT Moves all selected nodes to the left by one pixel RIGHT Shortcut CTRL RIGHT Moves all selected nodes to the right by one pixel A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 383 Show Tools Show Alignment Tool Display Grid w Display Node Bitmaps Cbri 4lk 6 Display Modes 3D Ctrl 3 Extended Code Label Codes with Comments Boxed Quotations Link Display Full Image For PDs Quotation verbosity Sek Fonts Set Colors Refresh Display F5 Shortcut CTRL 3 384 e Reference Display Menu The functions offered by the Display menu affect the display of the nodes the links and the background of the Network Editor Some of the properties are reserved for specific node types e g verbosity for quotations By combining display attributes a large variety of display properties are configurable To make your individual settings permanent use the preferences dialog window under the Specials menu SHOW TOOLS Opens a floating toolbox that offers a selection of the operations described above As lon
184. ave switched interpretation to an Old Paragraph Model see Handling Legacy Documents on page 73 Selecting Graphical Segments Selecting graphical segments differs from the operations required for selecting segments within textual documents However the overall look and feel is sufficiently similar 1 Move the mouse pointer to the upper left corner of the rectangular section that you are going to create 2 Drag holding down the left mouse button the mouse to the lower right corner of the rectangle 108 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 3 Release the mouse button You have now created a selection and the rectangle will be highlighted inverse display or thicker border Navigating Multimedia and Selecting Segments Creating dis playing and modifying media quotations is as easy as creating textual or graphical segments The following section explains the Media Control window that is used to create audio and video quotations When working with video data an additional video window is opened that plays the video The video window floats on top of all other windows It can be resized and moved to an appropriate position GE A gt P 1 A short video demo Sele Stretch Mute lt Sel Start gt lt Sel End gt lt Sel Figure 34 Active video window The Textual Level Basic Functions e 109 The Multimedia Cont
185. ave to be built manually and result from an intellectual effort The system cannot decide for you that segment x is in contradiction to segment y But after the work of establishing the links you can make semantically richer retrievals Show statements contrary to statement x Hypertext allows you to create different paths through the data you are analyzing For example you may create a timeline different from the strict sequence of the original text Graphical Hyperlink Maps ATLAS ti incorporates procedures for creating and browsing hypertext structures It allows for two or more quotations being connected using named relations Further you can create graphical maps using Network Views to make parts of your hyperspace accessible in a comfortable way Hyperlinks may connect quotations textual graphical multimedia across documents inter textual links or may link segments within the same primary document intra textual links The natural boundary for hyperlinks like all structures in ATLAS ti is the Hermeneutic Unit Justification 2 26 but only those men which have 2 11 6 And in those days shall men BOTETE u but only those 6 And in those days shall men seek death men which have not the seal of God in their and shall not find it and shall desire to foreheads die and death shall flee from them 1 29 12 And the fourth angel sounde 12 And the fourth angel sounded and the b third part of the s
186. be asked to send further information Service Packs amp Patches Program updates patches and service packs are posted on our website for download from time to time 334 e Troubleshooting A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 0 Programm Files O LoclInst O PROGRAM TEXTBANK 9 WallPaper O XML A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Downloading Service Packs Check our website occasionally to see if new patches or service packs are available If you are a member of the mailing list you will receive notification whenever new software was uploaded to our server The service pack page is directly accessible from our home page http www atlasti com To download a service pack or patch 1 The most convenient way to access our service pack page is from within ATLAS ti Click on the main menu option HELP and select MORE RESOURCES SEARCH FOR SERVICE PACKS You may also start your web browser go to our web page at www atlasti com and select the Download Section 2 Read the information provided on the page as it might well be that some patches are not applicable for your release of ATLAS ti 3 Download the instructions for the applicable patch or service pack and read it carefully 4 Download the service pack or patch 5 Copy the downloaded service pack into the service pack folder on your computer Locate this folder via the menu option EXTRAS EXPLORER SERVICEPACK FOLDER Using the Service Pack Manager
187. bjects Bracket width Sets the width of the brackets shown for a quotation in the margin Include Codes Memos and Hyperlinks may be selected separately to be displayed in the margin area You can also change these settings using the context menu in the margin area Use short names sized Activate this option to display abbreviated names for the margin objects The character limit is chosen in the field next to this option Double click toggles short name A double click in the free space of the margin area toggles the name abbreviation described above Show tips When moving with the mouse pointer over an entity in the margin area a tip is displayed providing information about the entity such as its name and comment In Place Action A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 This refers to what happens when you are in place editing a margin object e Global rename The selected object will be renamed this affects all occurrences of this object e Local replace The selected object will be replaced only for this link with an object of the same type and with a name as entered If no object with this name exists it will be created only for codes or memos e None No in place action will occur Section Fonts General HU Editor Margin Fonts Storage Paths Text Editors PD Printing Memos Object Font Size ping yee ew ae Object Manager Text Pane Italic Primary
188. ces including additional information like the fully resolved path and its availability When you select a document in the monitor access information is shown in the comment pane below ATLAS ti Data Source Monitor Name Container PDs Edited by Loaded Displayed State C Programmet Sci none YES no others may read amp write CiProgrammelsci PS YES a others may read amp write MU NIETZSCH BMP D TextBank none no lock E rev Arf C Program me 5 T MuhraTW IN others may read vile r AM mnl akin Ul h The C ramla mmm mm lale Used by F3 Indian Camp Location C Programme scientific Software VATLAstiSamplestindian txt Modified 21 01 01 11 54 56 SIZE Tops Availability OK Figure 135 The Data Source Monitor one document is currently being edited red and bold The monitor is an instrument to assist administrators and the support staff in resolving document access related problems For more information see the chapter on Project Management on page 270 Embedded Objects Cannot be Activated In order to activate objects embedded in primary documents memos or comments the object s application e g Excel needs to be installed You might have received an HU created on another computer which had the application installed Another cause is that you may have deinstalled the application needed for activation 332 e Troubleshooting A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Cannot Enter Edit Mode for Pri
189. ch can be restricted to certain facets like name author date comments and content Regular expressions GREP as well as Category Search can be used as search expressions see GREP Search on page 149 and Category Search on page 146 Unlike the Text Search tool the Object Crawler can search through all objects and fields that contain text The Text Search tool only searches primary text documents However 1t finds all occurrences of the entered search term s and highlights a match at its original location The Object Crawler stops at the first occurrence in an object and highlights the hit in the results pane of the Object Crawler window How To Use the Crawler A Crawler search is a three step procedure starting with entering a query and specifying the scope e g name comment etc and then selecting the object classes to be included in the search and as the third step displaying the results Starting the Crawler From the main menu select TOOLS OBJECT CRAWLER or click the Object Crawler button in the main toolbar The Object Crawler dialog starts with a page to enter the query and specify the scope A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 158 e Special Tools A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 ATLAS ti Object Crawler Define Query Select Objects Display Results Query the that this those iy Search Scope All Select the Fields which are to be included eee in the search Author Mote
190. ch tool is that no quotations are created How to Auto Code Auto coding can be fully automatic or semi automatic The sections below will clarify the difference and will show the advantages of each method Fully Automatic Coding 1 Select the PD you want to code using the auto coding procedure If you only want to auto code the current text load the PD in question If you want to auto code all texts load the first PD and position the cursor at the beginning of the document 2 To open the Auto Coding tool choose CODES CODING AUTO CODING from the main menu 3 If no code is selected select a code from the drop down list at the top of the Auto Coding tool 4 Enter a new search string or choose an existing search category 5 Specify the search scope e g Selected PD 6 Specify the segment size 7 Start the process by clicking START Semi Automatic Coding As it is not always desirable to let the program decide whether or not to code a given text passage you can control the process by checking Confirm always Specific confirmation from the user on each new code will then be requested An example for the usage of semi automatic coding would be to code for the concept distress Indications that a person might be distressed could be words like nervousness tension unease edginess etc In order to capture this you would do the following 1 Create a code with the name Distress 2 Open the Auto Coding tool
191. cient va taain dees aed ive asada 330 Brequenthy Asked QUeSHONS iocur E EE 330 Internal Enor Message eaa A aaeaiteaintedneed 333 Reporlne BU cerea a nT ee ne 333 Service Packs amp PAlCHES vascaieicduentcondoivaietsiaraisieastaied ay eouenteied aie 334 Reference 337 The General Preferences Dial S sisesssicessrmnsiesesiesanedousadenadebsuneceteasentaseialon dvs 337 The HU Editor Meis orea ue aeneesncateodateaaweneescodasecewe eon 347 Fhe FU Editor ST OOH ATS serna E 373 The Family Manager s Menus and Toolbat ccccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 375 The Network Editor s Menus and Toolbar cccccccccssssesseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 377 Network Editor Prel erences micie e AE E annie 387 HECME Fre ren C S eener a A ae aaamina cote 391 Appendix 397 Selecting OD CCS ayaan E E aces ancieenakives 397 Character Encoding for Textual Documentts ccccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 398 XML AM nodu cH Oieee E ecsarc ores eae eeneeea 400 Index 405 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Introduction e 1 Introduction ATLAS ti is a powerful workbench for the qualitative analysis of large bodies of textual graphical audio and video data It offers a variety of tools for accomplishing the tasks associated with any systematic approach to unstructured data e g data that cannot be meaningfully analyzed by formal statistical approaches In the course of such a qualitative analysis ATLAS ti
192. ck MSL visit the MailingList Archive 370 e Reference OPEN MANUAL Accesses the PDF manual that was copied to your computer during installation of the program ATLAS TI WEB SITE Visits our home page active Internet connection needed ATLAS TI REGISTRATION Registers your license online if you haven t already active Internet connection needed CHECK FOR SERVICE PACKS Accesses the ATLAS ti Service Pack web site and checks for updates active Internet connection needed VISIT FAQ Accesses the ATLAS ti web site to review the Frequently Asked Questions active Internet connection needed CHECK WORKSHOPS Accesses the ATLAS ti Workshop site active Internet connection needed CHECK MSXML Checks whether the necessary preliminaries for running the MSXML parser are installed on your computer If they are missing you are directed to a site on the Web where you can download the needed files VISIT THE MAILING LIST ARCHIVE Accesses the ATLAS ti mailing list archive requires an active Internet connection ABOUT ATLAS TI Displays information about the program The Margin Area Context Menus The margin area is a multi purpose device and displays a variety of menus depending on the object or pane area for which it was opened The Margin Area Main Context Menu The main context menu pops up when you right click in the margin s background between the displayed objects By clicking on an object a dedicated cont
193. compressed formats may counteract any attempt to select specific frames You will need to experiment with these issues Loading and Navigating Primary Documents 76 e Primary Documents Loading Primary Documents Whenever the content of a PD needs to be displayed printed or searched it accesses its data source file memo and loads the content This request is often triggered indirectly e g by displaying or printing a quotation For performance reasons documents are only loaded once they are cached unless this option is turned off The following lists a few procedures that directly or indirectly load the content of a PD e Activating it in the document drop down list or the PD Manager e Activating a quotation in the quotation drop down list or the Quotation Manager e Selecting a quotation for an activated double clicked code or memo e Activating a hyperlink in the margin area A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 e Using the LOAD option from the context menu of a PD node in a Network Editor To load a PD using the drop down list F 1 Revelation 87 P 1 Revelation 8 1 Click on the PD drop down list F amp Revelation 97 ETETE arene 2 Select a PD by clicking on an entry in the list The selected PD ee ree is displayed in the PD pane If the list does not display all PDs assigned the scrollbar lets you navigate the list of entries To load a PD using the PD Manager P Docs 1 Open the P
194. content of quotations is ignored All memo texts and entity comments are transferred to the XML output as plain text Rich Text Unicode and embedded objects are ignored or replaced by placeholder The new HU to XML export and conversion utility allows an alternative and very powerful and flexible approach to creating web pages for users willing to learn how to program stylesheets Using HTML Export and specifying the layout using the HTML generator on the other hand is simply a matter of clicking options without any need to learn HTML Potential reasons for creating HTML versions of Hermeneutic Units include Create a web publication Even intermediary results can be presented to other researchers without much effort These reports are readable without needing ATLAS ti on every system that has a web browser available Create a report A convenient way to create a printout of almost all objects contained in a Hermeneutic Unit using a web browser ATLAS ti s HTML code generation converts the Hermeneutic Unit currently being worked with into an HTML document The user can control the HTML creation entirely via the HTML Preferences dialog box Of course the generated code can be edited and refined with a plain text editor or specialized HTML tools if you are knowledgeable in HTML Creating a HTML Document Creating an HTML Document can be accomplished as follows Export amp Import e 307 308 e Export amp Import To creat
195. course the single researcher can also benefit from this function using the merge facility to help organize large projects Project Management e 289 290 e Project Management Examples of Application Text Corpus Reuse With only PDs to add and everything else IGNORED you can transfer all documents from any HU into a freshly created or already existing HU The PD comments and any existing quotations are also transferred Theory Import With only codes networks and code families selected a theory can also be migrated to another HU This is similar to the current Import Networks feature but also migrates Network Views and code families Team Work Add codes unify PDs This would be the strategy when the same set of PDs is utilized by different team members using different codes Unify codes add PDs Different PDs were distributed to team members using the same set of codes or mainly the same set of codes Codes that are different from the common set are not lost but added See Stock merge strategies on page 291 Concepts Target and Source HUs The main concepts in Merge are the Target HU and the Source HU The Target HU is the HU into which another Source HU is merged The target HU has to be loaded into the HU Editor before invoking the Merge HUs option It is advisable to store the target HU under a different name before starting the merge procedure To prevent accidental overwrite of an existing HU you ma
196. d a heuristic right brain approach to qualitative analysis Networks are more Along with using networks for mind mapping and the visual than just graphics design of theoretical models you can exploit the structural properties of code networks to enhance the retrieval of quotations Using networks for retrieval purposes is a well known technique in information retrieval In that domain a structured sets of keywords is usually referred to as a thesaurus This usage of networks for semantic retrieval will be described at Semantic Operators on page 164 in more detail Nodes and Links The term network is formally defined within graph theory a branch of discrete mathematics A network 1s defined as a set of nodes or vertices and links A node in a network may be linked to an arbitrary number of other nodes The number of links for any one node 1s called its degree e g a node with a degree of zero is not linked at all Another simple formal property of a network is its order the number of its nodes You may make practical use of the degree of nodes by using it as a A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Conceptual Level Networks e 211 Is part of Strictly speaking code quotation associations codings also form a network Relations sorting criterion in the codes list window Column Density in the Code Manager is the degree of the code Directed Links Links are usually drawn as lines between
197. d be restricted to the quotations currently present in the Quotation Manager Network Views are not affected by filter settings and display all objects at all times The margin area shows only the filtered objects An overview of all filter options for all object types is provided below Pattern Searches as Filter New in ATLAS ti 5 is a powerful pattern filter Enter a GREP pattern to filter all objects with names matching this pattern For example if you have used names prefixed with ATT for all codes handling attitudes the pattern AATT would filter all those codes the caret character anchors the search at the beginning of the name Enter to filter all items containing arbitrary text in brackets An overview of the available GREP expressions is listed in the section GREP Search on page 149 To Reverse a Filter Choosing Toggle Filter from the menu or double clicking the filter field reverses the filter The tilde symbol indicates a negated filter in the status bar By reversing the codes filter Abstract you can display all codes that are not Abstract 1 e codes that do have quotations associated with them 435 Codes No item selected Abstract Mame Title E The Textual Level Basic Functions e 141 Figure 51 Negated Filter To Remove a Filter TaN To deactivate a filter either select FILTER ALL from the menu or Press CTRL and double click on the filte
198. d on nodes and links Dependent on the type of the node or link selected these menus will offer specialized options from which to choose When the mouse pointer is over a node or a link related information is displayed in the status window of the Network Editor Code Fire 12 4 Right click for context menu Code Link Fire 41s part of The four elements Fight click for contest menu The Network Editor et al e 229 To open a context menu move the mouse pointer onto a node or link and click the right mouse button Context menu for a code Context menu for a link node Code Fire Code Link BTP Rename Display Comment Edit Comment Edit Comment Flip Link Cut Link Open Network Import Neighbors Display Relation Import Cooccurring Change Relation Remove From view Delete Node Cut Link List Quotations To execute node actions per double click 1 Position the mouse pointer over a node 2 Double click the left mouse button The table below describes the specific actions launched for the different node types Note If a comment or a memo s text pops up you can click inside the pop up window to open a text editor Primary Documents Displays the comment for the PD Displays the description comment for the family Network Views Displays the description comment for the Network View Hold down the Ctrl key to open this Network View in another Network Editor Layout Procedures Shortcut CTRL L
199. d print results All editors are capable of displaying and editing rich text format RTF They offer WordPad alike comfort and editing features Object Explorer The Object Explorer displays all the elements of an HU in a strictly hierarchical manner even if the structures are non hierarchical or even cyclic see The Object Explorer on page 183 Family Manager Codes memos and PDs can be grouped within families The Family Manager is the tool with which you create modify and edit them see The Family Manager on page 192 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Text Search Tool From simple string matching to sophisticated pattern match GREP and category search all is available in the Text Search Tool see The Text Search Tool on page 144 Query Tool For more complex search requests the Query Tool is at your disposal Here you can formulate search requests that are based on combinations of codes see The Query Tool on page 160 Word Cruncher The Word Cruncher counts all words in textual PDs The count can be limited to one PD only To clean up the count a stop list can be defined to exclude special symbols or words like and or the etc The result can be displayed in an Excel table see The Word Cruncher on page 155 Object Crawler With the Object Crawler you can search all of the parts of your project within ATLAS ti that conta
200. de lt au The Four eler paar lt Cut Link Change Relation Miscellaneous gt 41 Code Links Magic lt is a gt Black nil ackup 20 19 10 CF ackup 20 20 10 Figure 96 Flipping two links in the Code Link Manager The Hyper Link Manager The Hyper Link Manager works exactly like the Code Link Manager only that it is populated by hyperlinks E Hyper Link Manager HU The Sample Hyper Links Edit Miscellaneous view Source Relation Target Author ps 1 10 and there fe supports 2 1 and there ar Guest SL 1 27 12 And the F explains 2 8 5 4ndtothe Thomas M E 2 24 but only tho a Andreas 2 24 but only tho justifiel Display Comment Andreas SL 2 8 5 nd to the discuss Edit Comment a Thomas M a 2 9 6 And in thos criticize Flip Link a Thomas M a 4 3 The sefiroth t explain Cut Link a Guest lt jili E Display Relation This comment describes a sH Change Relation Miscellaneous 9 Hyper Links 2 24 lt justifies gt 2 8 nil Figure 97 The Hyper Link Manager The Relation Editor The Relation Editor allows the creation display and editing of relations that are used for linking codes to codes or quotations to quotations Explicit relations can only be used when connecting codes to codes or quotations to quotations Connections between codes and quotations memos and quotations memos and codes and families and their members cannot
201. de names Double click Opens a list of quotations that have been coded with this code Multiple Selection You can select more than one code at a time to delete code a data segment with all of the selected codes open a network create output assign them to one or more code families or to create a code family containing the selected codes CODES EDIT FAMILY Drag amp Drop You can use the Code Manager as a convenient tool for coding by dragging codes onto a highlighted piece of data If you drag codes onto another code within the same list pane code links will be created Colors When icons are not displayed Super Codes are displayed in red Main Workspace The HU Editor e 55 Code Manager Toolbar Previous next quotation Open code family Edit Comment browser Toggle always on top Toggle view Create a new code E o Grr 0 gt amp X42 M Open network view Delete code Create output Code Manager List Columns Mame Grounded Density Author Created Modified Fire 1 3 ATLAS 11 03 91 04 03 03 13 56 18 Name Code name Grounded Code frequency or groundedness 1 e the number of quotations to which the code is applied Density Number of links to other codes Author User who created the code Created Creation date and time Modified Date and time of last modification Memo Manager The Memo Manager lists the HU s memos Memos created today are listed in bold font The text pane
202. default type used when creating a memo Also allows modifying adding and removing memo types For details see Memo Types on page 132 Open editor on new memo When a memo is created a memo editor is opened Open editor on double click list quotes Specifies the double click behavior for memos in the Memo Manager You can choose either to open the editor or to list the quotations linked to a memo 346 e Reference A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The HU Editor s Menus A New Hermeneutic Unit fa Open Browse Close Save S A Edit Comment Info Edit Summary Info Cutout Printer Setup Cit A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 This section describes the menus for the HU Editor accessible via the main menu Some of the menus are also accessible as context pop up menus in the respective panes There is some helpful redundancy as some functions are available under more than one main section e g the CODING submenu is available in the Quotations menu as well as in the Codes section The File Menu NEW HERMENEUTIC UNIT Opens a new HU Editor on a new HU OPEN Selects and opens an HU in anew HU Editor using the standard Windows file dialog Shortcut CTRL O BROWSE The HU Browser offers additional information for the most recently used HUs see To open a Hermeneutic Unit using the HU Browser on page 62 CLOSE Closes this HU The last editor is not closed as this would end the session bu
203. des Already existing codes are simply used and not created anew Uncle Geo In Vivo Coding Use in vivo coding when the text itself contains a useful and meaningful name for a code In vivo coding creates a quotation from the selected text AND uses the selected text trimmed to 30 characters as the code name If the selected text s boundaries are not exactly what you want for the quotation modifying the quotation s spread see Modifying Quotations on page 115 is often the next step after creating the in vivo code Note In Vivo coding can only be applied to textual primary documents To create an In Vivo code 1 Mark the text passage that you want to use as an in vivo code Bear in mind that the code name is created from the text selection s first 30 characters 2 Click the In Vivo coding button or choose CoDING IN VIVO CODING from the menu 3 If needed change the newly created quotation s boundaries Modifying Quotations on page 115 for details In Vivo coding can also be done using drag amp drop To create an In Vivo code via drag amp drop 1 Mark the text passage that you want to use for In Vivo coding 2 Open the Code Manager 3 Drag and drop the selected text into the Code Manager s list pane or the code drop down list The Textual Level Basic Functions e 119 Naty oe Create multiple In Vivo codes js The Code Manager offers bi directional drag
204. details NODES Sets the color for code nodes BACKGROUND Sets the color for the network editor s canvas NODES amp BACKGROUND Sets the same color for nodes and background LIGHT GRAY Sets nodes and background to light gray REFRESH DISPLAY F5 Refreshes redraws display Because of incomplete screen refreshes that may happen occasionally it is sometimes necessary to manually repaint the window A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 w Enable Drag Drop Always On Top Generate Family Print Topological Sort Preferences Specials Menu ENABLE DRAG DROP If enabled the Network Editor will accept dropped objects ALWAYS ON TOP If set the Network Editor will float on top of its parent HU Editor GENERATE FAMILY Generates a new code family from all codes contained in the Network View PRINT TOPOLOGICAL SORT Creates a textual representation of the topologically sorted nodes see Topological Layout on page 231 for detail PREFERENCES Opens the preferences dialog to make many of the settings described above permanent For a detailed description see Network Editor Preferences on page 387 Network Editor Preferences A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Unlike settings modified using the Network Editor s menu commands several options can be made permanent using the network preferences dialog Note that most modifications are not immediately displayed in the Network Editors Close and reopen a Network Editor t
205. die doce renders 107 Ereaine QUOIATIONS isis cheeses a a a suse ess 112 ASCULY AUIS QUO LATIONS aiae E a EA ESES 113 Modi yt OU OLATI OM Sece Gasic taleucetaw tes xabieciaw asst eaten ulemioases 115 Delete QUOTANONS een ur wi uactaladunreu E 115 Codne CC IG WC Seen a a a 116 More Coding Related FUnctons srera aes 122 W Orkinis With MEMOS eieaa E 128 Margin Dras Sc Drop scccsainceselercasennamsesasunsadedendedguaawnaiealendyetsue satel odedaetabeadees 135 Sore ANG PU CHI S ea a a RR 137 Special Tools 144 Tes ES gare ecese E muaaeiaestecageeeteeedenmnenks 144 The Auto Odin Tooker tat iainbnceineb aah sletiaaermestisiuusaiid 151 THE Word CrUncheT eis ccs csenctxtacumncabaendetusiediectuatenctxtaguendeeaendeteseaiiaduaee dened 155 MCSD CCUG Fa WNC Ee a ateshacteet ncescern arrears cho ed cme aldo oust tes wctcber aya vecadeudeme sv yes auent dassee eaves 158 Bare ire T Bole Peereeeeve nner niente E thr rre miner rr an 160 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 DU aves ODC EDIO ka aueroneerse tremor tee enemy S 183 Redundant Cogine Analy 78 asna isviieiiinle a A 188 Family Life 191 DY CLVICW sss soctucreanctainioleddenenancdabspansiecnanotaunsolnddusadadsdatsbontiacnanoransieiaidasnadebaesnuts 19 COMMON PRO CE GUIS aerma stv aese acne eeaueevadaueudind tanner 192 Primary Document FANS ossa fanpouiet eee oinesieupiineninwontiss 197 cod T mi Glen maagnee ene terea eerie tee A pre Roe et Set ie epee ea ea eeere an a 202 Memo Re AINA Sciacca lea a
206. displays the content of the selected memo 56 e Main Workspace The HU Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 EF Memo Manager HU The Sample Memos Edit G r O K E w Mame Type Grounded Density Size em Justification Commentary 1 l 216 Commentary 3 104 0 a2 q c4 Miscellaneous Gukpuk View l Memo oO 4 Commentary IU Interesting Links You can embed arbitrary links into Your texts ec memos primary documents Such links can be act hy double clicking The ATLAS ti Web Site http www atlasti com Auu Talna s Programme AucDhren einer Fun kton Figure 17 Memo Manager Single click selects a memo The content of the memo is displayed in the text pane Single click pause single click or F2 activates in place editing of memo titles Double click opens the memo editor This behavior can be changed to activate the quotation associated with a memo via General Preferences Multiple Selection You can select more than one memo at a time for bulk deletion to attach all selected memos to a data segment to open a network on them to create output to assign them to one or more memo families or to create a memo family containing the selected memos MEMOS EDIT FAMILY Drag amp Drop You can attach a memo to a data selection memoing by dragging it into the PD pane applies to text and image data Colors Memos content resides in the HU s file sto
207. dit Miscellaneous Output View seH gt XG W Hame S Air 0 2 3 Animal 0 3 Bible 0 1 8 Black Magic 0 1 2 Dimension Horror 0 5 4 Non ideal gas 0 1 Red Magic 0 1 fa The four elements 0 8 t iiil Aur air nothing but air 9 Codes Air 10 217 Abstract Mame Title Figure 6 Display of Object Manager and drop down list when a filter is active Word Cruncher The Word Cruncher has also been improved Word frequency counts can now be applied to more than one PD Regular expressions can be used in stop lists In addition various output formats can be specified Results can be directly displayed in Excel Hyperlinks When creating output for hyperlinks the full text of all hyperlinked quotations is shown Additional options to create hyperlinks using drag amp drop margin manager are now available Hyperlinks can be inspected and modified using the Hyperlink Manager Locales Support East Asian languages are supported on native Windows systems and limited on non native Windows versions Now you can see Japanese text in the margin area Right to left Middle East languages Arabic Hebrew are supported by mirroring several controls tree and list view and placing the scrollbar to the left of a window pane A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Windows Integration ATLAS ti 5 is now more smoothly integrated with the overall Windows architecture Some inform
208. e If unchecked the Search Tool is in standard mode You may use the standard wildcard character even without GREP More discussion on GREP searches is provided at GREP Search on page 149 This option is not available in Category Search mode Standard Search Mode Use the standard search mode when you want to find exact specified strings of characters Word boundaries are not recognized Special Tools e 145 Categories are reusable named search swarms 146 e Special Tools in this mode Hence searching for the would also find instances like bother there and theater Searches that recognize word boundaries are available with the Category Search or by using appropriate GREP patterns To start a standard search 1 Open the Text Search tool E Text Search Enter or select Search Expression C Case Sensitive Standard Search Mode 2 Enter a string into the entry field The search string should contain the special pipe character as this initiates the Category Search 3 Uncheck GREP mode 4 Set CASE SENSITIVE as needed 5 Start the search by clicking the NEXT or PREVIOUS button Category Search The Category Search method combines two powerful techniques Parallel search is a sophisticated method that handles textual variations You may specify a number of patterns that scan the text simultaneously Secondly search expressions search swarms
209. e Special paths offer a degree of flexi bility which increases project portability HUPATH is relative to a specific HU It has no relevance independent of this HU A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Special Paths Absolute paths are exact and inflexible To overcome this restriction a more flexible reference type is offered Special Paths Special paths eliminate the need to address specific resources a specific computer a specific drive a specific path that may not be available over the lifetime of a project There is no need to know the actual file paths when porting a project to another computer Special paths contain variable components that are interpreted whenever the reference is needed Special paths or special folders are common in Windows Most users are probably aware of the following examples User s Desktop A folder that contains files and folders that appear on the desktop on a per user basis Typically C Documents and Settings username Desktop User s Personal Data Folder My Documents A folder that serves as a per user repository for documents Typically C Documents and Settings username My Documents Other special folders refer to the location for temporary system files fonts Windows system files etc By using special folders Windows can manage different users on the same computer and restrict access to personal files to the specified user In ATLAS ti two special paths or specia
210. e You also need to assure that you are currently the only person accessing the user data base This is especially mandatory when working in LAN settings Note none of the menu options except NEW USER will be available if you select yourself in the list of users If you need to change or even delete your own account login under a different administrative account edit your normal account and login again Logging in can be accomplished without the need to restart ATLAS ti Add a New User A user is characterized by five attributes four of which you are prompted for in sequence Account name password rights name first name Account name When working with ATLAS ti the account name has to be entered at login time Every object created including the Hermeneutic Unit is samped with the account name Password A password should be at least 4 characters letters digits symbols long but should not exceed 10 letters higher risk of typos A password can be changed later by the administrator A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Note A password is only required from the user during login when the option Relaxed User Management is set appropriately see Relaxed User Management on page 269 Last and first name Both names really have no important function other then giving the user a correct welcome However both a last and a first name must be provided when defining a user To add a
211. e e g by selecting multiple files in the file dialog but there is no need to assign all documents at one time You can assign more files during the course of the analytical process Bulk assigned files are listed in alphabetically order For every PD created during assignment an ID 1s created consisting of a prefix P and a consecutive number In addition the name of the data source file name is appended to the ID This name can be changed later for display purposes By default all files assigned as PDs are referenced in the most effective way see How ATLAS ti Handles Documents on page 93 One Data Source Many PDs If you plan to analyze a single document source from several different perspectives there is no need to create physical copies of the document and assign each of the copies as a PD to the HU A single data source can be assigned more than once which creates as many PDs each with its own number and name but they all refer to the same data source Figure 23 The two PDs P 2 and P 3 share one data source text_2 rtf 66 e Working with ATLAS ti A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 This one source multiple PDs principle is not restricted to one HU A data source can be assigned as a PD or many PDs in more than one HU This is usually the case in team scenarios Each PD however refers to exactly one data source Figure 24 Two PDs from different HUs sha
212. e Sample Sel Networkviews Edit Miscellaneous wiew SE E X e Name Size Author Created ES TA Texture a hypertext e Andreas 14 09 92 XA 4 Elements I Admin 12 07 91 ta 4 Elements II Guest 08 10 93 Ta all memos Thomas M 16 10 93 se odes and their comments 6 Admin TA Different node types 19 06 91 lt gt This view shows the usage of different display options for code icons You may either display the tip of the iceberg the code s name or the first Figure 88 The Network View Manager Selecting Nodes and Links Selecting nodes is an important first step for all subsequent operations targeted at individual objects within a Network View Such operations have their corresponding menu commands in the main menu of the Network Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 To select a single node E Horror 1 1 Move the mouse pointer over the node to be selected The mouse pointer changes its appearance to 2 Click the left mouse button 3 The selected node will be displayed inverted 4 All previously selected nodes are deselected To select multiple nodes method 1 1 Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard 2 Select a node as described above 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for every node to be selected To select multiple nodes method 2 marquee selection This method is very efficient if the nodes to be selected fit into an im
213. e Textual Level Basic Functions e 135 Moving code Water to another bracket unlinks it from its original quotation Replacing a code In the margin drag a code from one quotation onto another code and the target code is replaced To copy linked objects hold down the Ctrl key and drag a margin object e g a code onto another bracket l Water j a a gt 4 Animal 2 Animal f Bible 3 Bible gH Wiater Figure 42 Moving a code link Replace Linked Objects When a margin object is dropped onto another margin object it is replaced It combines the operation described above with the replacement of the dropped on object Three operations are accomplished at the same time the object is removed from its original quotation it is linked to the target quotation and it replaces the object it was dropped on the latter is unlinked from its quotation In the figure below code Water replaces code Animal Animal ws Bible Bible fal Water gt Figure 43 Moving amp Replacing a code Copy Linked Objects An object in the margin is unlinked from its original quotation when it is dropped onto another bracket or another margin object To keep the object from unlinking from its original bracket hold down the CTRL key when dropping This resembles dragging objects from managers and browsers into the margin area which does not change existing links In the figure below code Water
214. e added to clarify the meaning of a code or to explain how the code 1s to be used for coding The practice of commenting objects greatly supports a transparent and if working as part of a team cooperative working style Creating and Editing a Code Comment 1 Select a code from the drop down list 2 Choose CODES EDIT COMMENT from the main menu 3 A text editor opens Write or edit an existing comment 4 Save the changes and close the editor Of course you can use the text pane of the Code Manager see Editing Text on page 50 to create or edit a comment Note By accepting a comment it is not stored permanently on disk You need to save the HU itself to save all such changes The Textual Level Basic Functions e 121 More Coding Related Functions This section describes some additional coding related house keeping functions such as creating free codes importing lists of codes and renaming and removing codes Free Codes You can create codes that have not yet been used for coding or creating networks Such codes are called free codes Why Create Free Codes e To prepare a stock of predefined codes in the framework of a given theory This is especially useful in the context of team work when creating a base project e To code in a top down or deductive way with all necessary concepts already at hand This complements the bottom up or inductive open coding stage in which concepts emerge from
215. e an HTML version of your HU 1 Specify all desired characteristics using the ATLAS ti HTML setup under EXTRAS HTML PREFERENCES see HTML Preferences on page 391 for details 2 Select EXTRAS EXPORT TO HTML from the main menu 3 Select File amp Run as the output destination to immediately open the generated output in a web browser Select the Editor if you want to modify the source before storing it Generator ATLAS ti WIN 5 0 Build 555 Date 28 01 04 15 50 08 Original project ATLAS ti needed the sample 2 acb Copy Bundle format Table of Contents General Statistics Primary Documents Codes Summary Commented Codes Memos Primary Document Families Code Families Mema Families Network Views Code Neighbor List Thesaurus Code Hierarchy Figure 121 Partial display of a Hermeneutic Unit s HTML version Customizing HTML Output A number of options are available to customize the appearance of the web page created via EXTRAS HTML PREFERENCES from the main menu See HTML Preferences on page 391 for details Special Considerations Size of HTML Documents The more options you specify in the HTML Preferences dialog the bigger your HTML file will be This may not be a concern if you are using the documents in house However when making such documents accessible to others via the Internet slow transmission rates may demand a reduced set of output options In lined content included in the web p
216. e below the link list or 4 Open a dedicated text editor by clicking the Editor button i To edit a hypertext link comment using the Network Editor 1 Open a Network Editor on a quotation establishing one end of the hypertext link 2 Move the mouse pointer onto the link between two quotations and open the context menu with a right mouse button click 3 Choose EDIT COMMENT A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Hypertext e 261 Collaboration Objectives 262 e Collaboration Collaboration or multi authoring means that more than one author may work on a Hermeneutic Unit at different times ATLAS ti supports this teamwork by systematically keeping track of each author s productions Every object created including the Hermeneutic Unit itself is automatically stamped with a date time and author This identification of the author is what makes the login process upon system start necessary which by default proceeds automatically Simultaneous collaboration is not supported so only one person can work on a specific Hermeneutic Unit at a time By default only the author who created the Hermeneutic Unit the owner or original author is authorized to load read and edit the Hermeneutic Unit Letting others participate in creating a Hermeneutic Unit requires a few bureaucratic adjustments one of which is the definition of users cf User Management on page 264 The simple concept of the ATLAS ti user management allows all
217. e installation finishes you are asked to click the FINISH button and to restart ATLAS ti 7 Quit ATLAS ti 8 Start ATLAS ti Usually the installation of a service pack increments the build number You can verify the new build number in the HU Editor s main screen e g Version WIN 5 0 Build 60 If the Service Pack Manager shows no new Service packs even though you know you downloaded the latest service pack from the Make sure you have ATLAS ti website the reason might be one of the following copied the service pack to the right folder e The patch does not apply to your current release 1 e 1t has already been installed or your current build number is too low e The patch was not copied into the correct directory after downloading 336 e Troubleshooting A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference The General Preferences Dialog All settings from the Preferences dialog are stored in the USER INI file which resides in the private user s system folder The user s system folder is configured during installation of ATLAS ti and stored in file ATLAS INI Note Most changes made permanent by clicking APPLY or OK take effect only after the affected procedures or tools are accessed the next time To set General Preferences a Select the main menu option EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES or Pai click on the General Preferences button in the main toolbar p General Preferences General HU Editor Margin F
218. e names a memo s title should be short and concise Don t mix the name with the content 128 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A comment is a part of another object a memo is an object by itself A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 How Memos and Comments Differ Memos are very similar to comments in that both are intended to hold lengthy texts as opposed to codes that are simply naming a concept Comments exclusively belong to one entity For example the PD comment is part of the primary document Comments are not displayed in any browser separately from the object to which they are attached Memos can be associated with more than one object and have an additional type attribute e g theoretical methodological commentary etc They can also be free standing unlike comments Memo Content Memos may use plain text as well as Unicode or Rich Text The latter allows extended formatting and offers the option to insert pictures tables etc The Memo Editor For displaying and editing memos a modified text editor is used It is opened via the Memo Manager s toolbar for an existing selected memo or when creating a new memo Below the toolbar the editor includes a title and memo type field The default title assigned to a newly created memo is ME today s date The title and the default type Commentary can be changed by overwriting the default title or by selecting a dif
219. e or contain special paths For details see Reference Types Many Paths One Destination on page 96 If neither Path nor Origin is defined the name of the document is used as the file reference with special lt HUPATH gt It is expected to be located in the same folder together with the HU All following columns Enter variable names the document families into the subsequent columns If you want to use string variables use a hash as the lead character as in Education A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Note If a field name or value contains characters resembling the separator you need to enclose the name or value with quotation marks Origin Reading oe oe Primero CA foo ooo fps nerviow Cavan acer fr When importing the above table ATLAS ti links the name and the value part for the non dichotomous variables and creates five PD families with the following titles e Education unskilled e Education high school e Education bachelor Education doctorate Reading Newspapers If the PDs do not yet exist in the HU new PDs are created and are assigned to the HU If you have entered a valid path the PDs can immediately be loaded If no valid path is entered it can be entered or modified later see Change Path for one PD at a time on page 104 Adding new PDs If your HU already contains PDs you can assign additional PDs by importing a PD Family table However you must be su
220. e the encoding information along with the text itself XML an Introduction Version 4 2 of ATLAS ti already offered a few options to work with the XML format such importing and exporting codes and memos This possibility has been substantially expanded in A5 In case you don t know what XML 1s the short explanation is that XML similar to HTML is a document markup language XML however has the advantage that it is less dependent on the capabilities of a particular application Web browsers for HTML Furthermore XML concentrates on structuring information Structured information contains both content actual words pictures etc plus some indication of what role that content plays for example text content inside a heading has a different meaning from content in a footnote content in a figure caption differs from content in a database table etc Almost all documents have some structure and a markup language is a mechanism to identify this structure in a document The XML specification defines a standard way to add markup to documents If you create an XML output file it can be read by other applications that support XML One main advantage is that the application can define autonomously and completely detached from any display information contained in the document what parts J J of the structure are to be displayed and what the display should Figure 143 With XML programs can exchange data via a standa
221. e the advantages of direct connections between text segments compared to the traditional procedures of qualitative text analysis What Codes Cannot Do Maybe we should ask a different question first How can you express that statement X in text A contradicts statement Y in text 252 e Hypertext A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Pure classification is not always adequate Hypertext makes text text relations explicit The hypertext Network View to the right displays quotations in maximum verbosity set to full text Other node types can also be included in the Network View like the memo in the upper left corner A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 B or how can you retrieve all contradictory statements of a specific utterance if all you have is codes and their associations with the data The code amp retrieve paradigm which is so prevalent for many systems supporting the qualitative researcher is not adequate for certain types of analysis In formal terms attaching codes to chunks of data creates named sets of segments with almost no internal structure This is not to say that partitioning lots of text segments into sets is not useful On the contrary classification leads to manageable amounts of segments that later can be retrieved with the help of the attached code words But this may not be the only way you want to look at your data The concept of hypertext introduces explicit relations between passages These links h
222. e whether to include primary documents and quotations As the latter can be quite numerous you can speed up the conversion if you omit those objects if you intend to select a style sheet that does not make use of them 4 An output file is generated usually HTML In the file dialog accept or modify the default name for the file Click the SAVE button 5 The output is displayed in the web browser i e Internet Explorer Creating and Modifying Stylesheets The following assumes some knowledge about XML and XSLT XSLT Stylesheets are XML conformant text files As such they can be edited with a simple text editor like the one built into ATLAS ti By pressing the EDIT STYLESHEET button you may start editing a selected Stylesheet However the language of Stylesheets its syntax and semantics are not trivial You need at least some basic knowledge about the guts of a Stylesheet Although not really produced for educational purposes you can start by analyzing any of the existing Stylesheets and creating modifications of those To learn something about the structure of an XML version of the Hermeneutic Unit double click on an XML file to study its structure Further resources on how to create stylesheets can be found under http www atlasti com xml Conventions You will note that the XML Converter displays more than just the file name of the stylesheets it found in the XML folder This additional information is part of the
223. e you use Change Path to move a document that is also assigned in other HUs this document will no longer be found In such multi project settings path mapping which affects ALL HUs and all of their PDs of the current user may be the preferred option How to Change a Path 1 2 Select the PD whose reference will be changed Choose DOCUMENTS DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT CHANGE PATH from the main menu If you attempt to change the path for an accessible document a warning will pop up The Change Path prompter opens with the current path displayed Change path for primary document Mew File name please enter complete path Absolute HAMy Files ATLAS project datatobservation_ 4 rtf The drop down list to the left shows the current reference type Absolute TBPATH or HUPATH The field to the right displays the documents path name relative to the reference type You can cancel the procedure at any time by clicking the Cancel button If necessary change the reference type by selecting from the list The complete path will be changed accordingly Change path for primary document Mew File name E enter complete path lt TEPATH gt v s ATLASI project datatobservation 4 rtf Absolute lt HUPATH gt lt TBPATH gt Now enter if required the new file name Alternatively you can use the Browse button to select a new location using the previous file name Hold down the Ctrl key if you prefer a file browser
224. ecial attention SS P Find this icon where Drag amp Drop options are i applicable COoDES CODING AUTO CODING Menu items embedded in the text body The Slashes mark different submenu levels The item after the last slash is the command When you see this icon a setup option is Pii explained Individual setups can be defined under EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES If you need to press a combination of keys a CTRL ALT plus sign is used between the keys that need to be held down at the same time Introduction e 9 What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 In this chapter new and modified features of ATLAS ti 5 are introduced In addition you learn what has not changed This chapter is especially intended for those who have prior experience with version 4 2 of the software If you are new to ATLAS ti altogether skip this section for now and continue with Main Concepts on page 25 User Interface Improvements 10 e What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 When you start ATLAS ti 5 for the first time the interface should look quite familiar Changes become apparent when you start opening the various menus and windows ATLAS ti has become even more interactive than it already had been All of the tools in ATLAS ti 5 0 have improved functionality that includes tools in the main editor and the former extra lists which are now called Object Managers To minimize screen clutter a roll up mode is available in many windows and there is a zoom o
225. ed access Users work on several independent projects using data relevant for their respective projects but use shared documents as well 3 Documents are stored in a location that does not allow the user full write access e g on a CD ROM or on a Server with restricted access permissions Therefore the user cannot create a HU in the document folder Project Setup Note If you have already stored the documents continue with Step 3 1 Create a new folder for your project 2 Copy all documents to be used by your project into this folder and in subfolder if you desire an added degree of structure 3 Create the HU outside the document folder hierarchy 4 Make sure that the Use Special Paths option is checked 5 Set the textbank folder TBPATH variable so that the document folder hierarchy is completely included 6 Assign documents from this folder Documents c myprojects projectINinterview1 rtf and c myprojects project2 imagel bmp would use the TBPATH variable when assigned if the latter was set to c nyprojects The resulting project has all documents assigned through the special lt TBPATH gt displayed by the PD Manager column Origin If by looking at the PD Manager you find that documents were assigned differently in the earlier steps check the following If you find documents using the HUPATH special path you have stored the HU somewhere in the textbank folder Documents with an absolute pa
226. ed as a source quotation and was linked to the target quotation 2 11 In order to continue the chain the target quotation 2 11 became the source quotation and was linked to the new target quotation 1 8 236 continued by Fo a expands discusses ae a 2 11 ya discusses criticizes Figure 109 A hyperlink star When creating a star there is one source quotation and multiple target quotations In the above example the source quotation is 2 11 which is linked to five target quotations via a number of different relations Hyperlinks in the Quotation Manager All hyperlinked quotations can easily be recognized in the Quotation Manager All source quotations are marked with an opening angle bracket lt all target quotations with a closing bracket gt If a quotation 1s both source and target as the case when creating chains then both brackets are used as prefix lt gt A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sty oe The margin is an optimal work space for navigating hyperlinks Bi gt 241 2 1 7 The firs E lt 24 3 1 3 And ano El lt gt 21 4 2 10Andth Figure 110 Hyperlinked quotation in the Quotation Manager Hyperlinks in the Margin Area When working with hyperlinks it is advisable to set the margin display options as follows ObjectTy pe Codes Memos j a sede w Hy per Links Line Refs Short Margin Names Mone Set Font All To open this context menu right click on a blank space in the m
227. ed parts of a document 314 e Generating Output Setting PD Printing Preferences Depending on the size and layout of your document the number of objects in the margin and the fonts used in the document adjustments may become necessary To set PD Printing preferences select the main menu option EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES See Section PD Printing on page 345 To print a primary document with margin 1 Load the primary document 2 If you do not want to print the entire PD highlight the section that you want to print 3 Switch the wrap mode to Printer via EDIT WORD WRAP FOR PRINTER Although printer wrap is enabled anyway when starting the print it is advisable to select this wrapping mode in the first place to better judge the expected layout and avoid Surprises 4 The printed page is divided into columns for the numbering the actual text and the margin area Specify the ratio between the space reserved for the text and the margin by moving the splitter bar to an appropriate position It might take some experimentation to arrive at optimal results for your printer 5 Select DOCUMENTS OUTPUT PRINT WITH MARGIN from the main menu 6 The printer dialog opens If you have made a selection e g manually or by activating a quotation and want to restrict the output to this part of the document check option Print Selection before clicking the Print button Our WYSIWYG of annotated documents has its limits
228. ed text from Word or other drag amp drop capable application into the Memo Manager s list part creates a new memo raza The dropped text becomes the body of the memo and the first few words are used as the memo s name Memo type AUTO indicates 134 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 that this memo was created automatically See figure below F Memo Manager HU BIBLE_1 Mef Memos Edit Miscellaneous Output View Name Type Author a w Size Created Modified PDs al Angel s music one ATLAS 06 07 9 O4 03 0 W Big Star ATLAS 16 03 9 O4 03 0 Drag content SF 16 09 16 09 Horror a Andreas 01 07 93 07 03 00 Wi Justification A Andreas 14 03 939 O4 03 0 Drag contents from a word processor to create a memo When dragging a piece of text from Word or another word processor mto the Memo Manager a new memo is created The first few words of the text are used as memo title the entire text is automatically copied into the text pane for the newly created memo see example below A new memo type is added AUTO indicating that this memo was created automatically Drag contents from a word 0 4U FP All Hame Title Figure 41 Drag amp Drop text into the memo manager list Margin Drag amp Drop Margin Drag amp Drop can be toggled on and off via General Preferences Advanced Drag amp Drop A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 All objects
229. een CErl ShiFE R A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Views Menu ZOOM Zooms main primary data pane within main window Shortcut CTRL SHIFT Z All toolbars and status bars disappear in activated Zoom The regular view is restored with another click MINIMIZE ALL Minimizes all dependent secondary windows Network Editors Managers etc RESTORE ALL Restores all minimized secondary windows CLOSE ALL Closes all secondary windows SEND ALL TO BACK Many secondary windows text editor Network Editors etc float on top of the HU Editor Toggle floating with this option MARGIN AREA Toggles margin area display makes the margin area appear and disappear Shortcut CTRL SHIFT M LINE NUMBERS Toggles line paragraph number display For graphical data the quotation reference number is displayed instead Shortcut CTRL SHIFT N RULERBAR Displays the rulerbar for textual documents in edit mode MAIN TOOLBAR Toggles display of the main toolbar DROP DOWN LISTS Toggles display of the four drop down lists 1 e for PDs quotations codes and memos EDIT TOOLBAR Toggles display of edit toolbar Only available for editable documents PRIMARY DOCUMENT TOOLBAR Toggles display of PD toolbar STATUS PANE Toggles display of the status bar Reference e 363 364 e Reference MARGIN TIP Toggles display of tips displayed for the objects in the margin area SET BRACKET WIDTH Sets the width of the quotation
230. elow the toolbar is the list pane Unlike the Object Explorer or the Network Editor that can handle heterogeneous collections of Main Workspace The HU Editor e 47 objects the Object Managers display objects of only one type When you are in Details view mode a number of attributes of the items are displayed in a table like manner The order of the columns can be changed by dragging a column to a different position in the list Items can be sorted or reversed by clicking on the respective column header The Text Pane The text pane located below the list pane displays the comment or in the case of memos the text body All text panes are Rich Text compatible The Split Bar The relative size of the list and comment pane can be modified by dragging the split bar between the two panes The cursor changes when the mouse moves over the split bar You can resize the adjacent panes by dragging the split bar to the desired position The Status Bar The status bar s fields display from left to right the number of objects the selected object the filter and the sort option 11 Quotations 24 2 The setiroth tree 265 3554 Hyper Author The status bar above indicates that the Quotation Manager lists 11 quotations with quotation 4 2 selected The filter is set to display only hyperlinked quotations and items are sorted by Author For additional information about how to use the status bar for sort and filter related proced
231. embers of one or both families Combining two families with the AND operator yields only those members belonging to both families Combining two families using the XOR operator yields all members belonging to any of the families less those that are in both families The NOT operator inverts an existing family By negating a family female you could simply create a Super Family that presumably includes all males The NOT operator as well as all other operators does not only work on families but also on Super Families or in arbitrary partial queries as in NOT A OR BY Combining Families using Boolean Operators Combining families to build Super Families is essentially the same as formulating code and code family based queries in the ATLAS ti Query Tool If you are interested in a more detailed and more theoretical explanation of the logic underlying both Super Families and the Query Tool read the chapter The Query Tool on page 160 The sequence of entering a query to create a Super Family is as follows First select all families that you want to combine and then select the operator s Intended Query Display in query feedback pane Members family A or Family A Family B Family A family B or both OR Ra mily B Members that exclusively Family A Family B Family A belong to either family A XOR Ramily B or family B cad AS E ee p p Family A Family B Family A amp
232. ement on page 270 for details The Copy Bundle tool The bundle tool is separated into three list panes and one report pane see Figure 115 below A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Copy Bundle Document Selection Documents not in bundle Bundled documents Name Path Size Type Mame Fath Size Type E Kabbala c Qokume 4743 0 gra rew 9 rtf C Dokume 384KB rich videofe avi Co Dokume 12 58 video E indian tet CADokume 4BEB rich rev Gutf C Dokume 22 06 rich lt ft gt Total size of selected documents O Byte Total size of 3 bundled documents 35 37 KB plus size of HU 281 EB totals 316 37 KB Documents which cannot be bundled Report Conflict 3 documents will be bundled A total of 2 documents are excluded 2 documents excluded by user wt Create Bundle Figure 115 Copy Bundle Pack amp Go Documents not included in the bundle The user can specifically exclude documents that should not be in the bundle e g unchanged or even non editable large documents e g video audio files that have already been carried to the target system with a previous Copy Bundle Bundled documents This list displays documents that will be included in the bundle Documents that cannot be bundled This list displays documents that are excluded by the system because of an irresolvable conflict If all PDs in the HU can be displayed in the HU Editor there should be no conflict
233. en Network view Open Super Family Tool Edit Super Family Display Query Mucor Output all Families Import PD Family Table Export PD Family Table The last two items are only available for PD Families A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Ctrl Shift to reset The Family Manager s Menus and Toolbar The Family Manager offers four menus Families Edit Miscellaneous and View The options offered by the Edit and the View menu have been described elsewhere and are not repeated here For a description of the edit menu see The Edit Menu on page 349 and for a description of the view menu see View Menu on page 49 The Families Menu The options provided by the Families menu are also accessible from the context menu NEW FAMILY Creates a new family RENAME FAMILY Renames a family you can also rename a family by in place editing DELETE FAMILY Deletes a family This operation does not delete the items that were included in that family USE AS FILTER Sets or resets a filter for the selected family Same as double clicking a family EDIT COMMENT Opens an editor where you can write or edit a comment for a family OPEN NETWORK VIEW Opens a Network View displaying a family node and all family members In the Network View family members are linked via red dashed lines to the family node OPEN SUPER FAMILY TOOL Opens a tool to create Super Families EDIT SUPER FAMILY Reference e 375 Additional o
234. ent topics different projects etc 148 e Special Tools course this tool does not find relevant information beyond the characters specified in the search How To Use Category Search 1 Open the Text Search tool 2 Enter a new search swarm or select an existing category from the library of search swarms by clicking on the drop down button at the right of the entry field 3 Click NEXT AW Text Search FAMILY CLOSEREL FARRELATIVE aunt cousin uncle FRUIT apple banana orange pear LIFE liFe live living LIGHT 4RTIFICI4LLIGHT N4TURALLIGHT lig Category Search Mode Figure 54 Example of Search Categories When using Category Search some of the controls become disabled Category Search cannot be combined with GREP mode can never be case sensitive and the Previous button cannot be used To define a new category 1 Open the Text Search tool 2 Enter a new definition into the entry field using the following syntax CATEGORY NAME lt string or category gt l lt string or category gt l etc As soon as you press the NEXT button a new category is created and a search for the first occurrence starts This category 1s now available to you for the current work session If the new category should be available in the future you need to save it to the search library Managing Search Categories On startup ATLAS ti loads a default library of search categories named srchbib skt You can upda
235. ent Families as Variables PD Families can be used to define the scope of a query when used as global attributes supplementing codes For instance if the PD families female and under 25 were assigned to a number of interviews one can then formulate queries like Show me all quotations from interviews with females under 25 coded with coping or power For a step by step instruction see The Query Tool on page 160 In SPSS jobs PD families are a way to aggregate some of the data see How SPSS Export Handles Families on page 302 PD Family tables are an efficient means to create families and to assign PDs to their respective families You can also use them to assign PDs and to generate variables in one step PD Family Table PDs PD families and their relations can be transported ex and imported using the Excel compatible CSV Comma Separated Values format This data exchange format can be used to conveniently assign a large number of PDs from generic lists A Table Example EJ Microsoft Excel The Sample CSV ba Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Einf gen Format Extras Daten Fenster Adobe PDF Frage hier e MEEA ch FD EEES Kt O Arial m0 gc C2 C Programme Scientific Software ATLASti Samples rev 6 rtf D documents Name Path oOrigin NOT Bible texts Bible texts Content P 4 Revelation 8 E Programme lt HUPATH gt rev 8 rtf 0 1 text P Revelation 9 C Programme lt s
236. ent ok erence ect eh eons 203 Super Panes ennnen a onnnses abandon nlias stoked cones salseantencd yan 203 The Conceptual Level Networks 211 Nodes and LINKS sins sasene dine catedsvanctncainsuieadenademe bane caleddvandineaieouaaedensdemetatscaeddvansee 211 REKON sega cette iets a eas 212 The Network Editor et al 215 NetWork vs Network View sii wacucsincentatancadiie E EE S 216 Nodo Typos ea A ten naeeenee 217 Basic Network View Proced res oisnucnucse nacii aa ia 218 Layout Proced r Seini A 230 Camne OUDOT aE te cediniem saint umeneietieeaidies 233 B re Veal maceme n eae aetna ee ae ar tee Senne A Dorey re vee tm et 234 OB Kee Reton wo ON 0 erga ements mene renee eer a reer at ne 235 Cosmetics Network Display Properties cc ceecccscccccceesseeeeeceeeeeeeeaaeeeees 239 Miscellaneous Network Procedufres cccccsssesscccccccceeesssssececeeeeeaaeesseseeeess 241 Hypertext 251 Representing the Rhetoric Of Text i ischaciih nek ci edie 252 Benets or FIV Perle xt saa atitt nosh rede S 292 CTC ate HyperUNk Sease A E ecebvidetasantecbeains 2993 Traversin Hyper Mii oar E 259 Collaboration 262 OD CI CG ica asec cctonsanceahistaneccioh E teat tectennitocs 262 PROCES SARIS ince sailor a ian a Beano area etic 263 COMAUIUNOLS aaia a EE ORE 263 User Manage Ment serenierrrss ee EEE 264 Project Management 270 ODJECU oS anesan TTA tay ey CeoTTe eeoe Cee OT CeMORET UeN Pe ny Care one rer 270 Project Plannin Sand S Ct Derna E ER RA SERS
237. ention VARNAME VARVALUE PDs are assigned to their respective families in the usual way e PD 1 is a document from Berlin When creating a PD Family table the name and the value part are split using the name for the column prefixed with and the value in the cell documents Name Path ffLocation po memewe CA ro preview 7 CA dO ps inerview 8 CA Landon From the four families only one variable and column location is created when generating the table Missing values are indicated by a zero 0 and used for documents not assigned to any family Note Do not assign a PD to more than one family with the same variable name e g both to Location Berlin and Location New York ATLAS ti allows this as it treats every family as a separate dichotomous variable However when converted into a single non dichotomous variable Location during export as a table such multiple assignments could create problems To Export a PD Family Table 1 Select DOCUMENTS MISCELLANEOUS EXPORT PD FAMILY TABLE from the main menu This option is also available from the Families menu or the context menu in the PD Family Manager 2 You are prompted for a separator value Click OK to use the 6c 9 default value Value families found Family Life e 199 200 e Family Life 3 Select the output format in the next step and click OK Note Tab delimited text files can also be interpreted by Excel Export PD Fa
238. ently only be opened in read only mode If you are sure you are the only one using this HU and you have not already loaded it in another window you can treat this message as a false alarm and delete this LOK file LOK files are usually updated or deleted when you stop using the protected file HU or PD data source but occasionally you may not have time to allow for proper closing of the file due to a system crash or power outage Figure 31 A PD refers to its data source and observes the LOG and LOK files In a perfect world you shouldn t have to know about this mechanism But it cannot hurt to have a certain understanding of what goes on when things don t work smoothly After all you re working with computers What did we learn from the above The Golden Rules of Editing PDs If you create modify or delete quotations Don t be afraid of editing a PD but do it during an editing session save the file as explained above when leaving edit mode Avoid Path Mapping all together and Once assigned as a PD NEVER edit the follow some basic principles of project data source with any other tool than management ATLAS ti Primary Documents e 89 While the data sources referenced by an HU can be shared by multiple users HUs cannot be worked on concurrently Therefore each team member works on her own HU The work can then be combined using the ATLAS ti Merge feature 90 e Primary Documents Always use
239. eport are shown resulting from merging The Sample HU with itself using the strategy Different PDs Same Codes During this merge PDs quotations and PD Families are added and all codes are unified The first part of the report provides an overview of the selected merge Strategies A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Object Type aource HU Target HU otrategy Primary Docs 5 3 Add Quotations Lal lal Add Codes 54 54 Unify codings Lil 17i Memos Lz le Ignore Network Wiews 1i 11 Ignore Primary Doc Families m m Add Code Families 5 5 Ignore Memo Families 2 2 Ignore Code Links 30 30 Target Hyperlinks J Target Added Objects When objects are added that have identical names in both the source and target HUs the added object is renamed using an incremental numbering scheme Note that the PDs are not renamed This is because the prefix P x is a part of the name making equally named PDs distinct Adding 5 Primary Documents P 6 Revelation 8 P 7 Revelation 9 P P o Lnoaran Camp Os The Seri rOoch Cree t P10 REVve lat on The imported PD families are renamed using the suffix _1 Adding 8 Primary Doc Families Bible texts gt Bible texts_l1 Content stgqratic gt Content grafic_1 Content text gt Content text_l Grafical docs gt Grafical docs_1l Non bible texts gt Non bible texts_l Textual docs gt Textual docs_1 NOT Textual docs gt NOT Textual docs_1l x NOT Bible texts amp
240. er Define Query Select Objects l Display Results Mame JEP 4 The sefiroth trees 150 matches Dake Field 24 0 id Maalla ot Author Thomas M Thomas M Thomas M Armin Type Primary Doc Primary Doc commen M subject 0 Me F T Anoel s miisi 1 00 iM gt This lt is a file less PD Its data source is a memo and it is also listed in the memo li t Please note that once a memo has been assigned as a PD it can ONLY be edited rra la 1 ele UtTTDH 3 Figure 62 Object Crawler Display Results The results list can indeed be used like an Object Manager in a variety of ways Double clicking a hit in the results list activates the object For instance double clicking a quotation displays it in context in the PD pane The list is also drag amp drop capable you can drag objects from the list into a Network Editor or into a Text Editor The Query Tool is used for retrieving quotations using the codes they were associated with during the process of coding This is different from a text search To search for occurrences of text that match a specified pattern or string you have to use the search command or the Object Crawler see Text Search on page 144 and The Object Crawler on page 158 The simplest retrieval of this kind search for quotations with codes is what you frequently do with the Code Manager double clicking on a code retrieves all its quotations This ma
241. er White collar worker Management etc Families make effective user defined filters For example you can filter PDs to only view female respondents Family Life e 191 In the Query Tool PD families can be used to restrict the scope of the search For example you can ask for all quotations coded by Code_A and Code_B that occur in documents of white collar female respondents from location B The PD Family table function provides a convenient way to import and export variables see below for a detailed explanation Code families can be used to loosely group codes that belong together Other than in Network Views where specific relationships between codes need to be defined in code families it is not necessary to specify the ways in which codes relate to each other Use memo families to sort filter and organize your memos Super Families Super Families are combination of other families including other Super Families You can build complex families incrementally from existing families using a set of powerful Boolean operators Super Families function just like Super Codes see Super Codes on page 176 by calculating their members on the fly when needed Using Families when Merging Hermeneutic Units A special application of families is used to specify the sets of objects to be excluded in the process of merging Hermeneutic Units HUs see Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 289 Common Procedures 192 e Family
242. er Install Bundle A Fa 282 e Project Management Copy Bundle Migrate and Backup Projects The Copy Bundle function serves a dual purpose portability to migrate a project to another location and data security a powerful backup amp restore device You should ONLY use Copy Bundle to port your projects to another computer To preserve the consistency of a project in regard to referenced files refrain from copying projects manually using Windows file procedures ALWAYS use Copy Bundle instead COPY BUNDLE is a powerful tool By inspecting the HU it finds and collects all files that make up the project the data files used as PDs and all associated auxiliary files It checks the accessibility of the data sources and provides feedback in problematic situations From all the project files it compiles a single compressed file On a target computer installing a bundle distributes the HU the data source files and all associated files to appropriate location s Under TOOLS COPY BUNDLE you find two functions one to create a bundle and the other to unpack or install a bundle The two procedures are explained below Create Bundle Create Bundle creates a single compressed archive containing the project In order to create a well behaving bundle e g one that can be unpacked without effort on a target system the project should have been set up with flexible use of references in the first place See Project Manag
243. er for the original search swarm Therefore instead of retyping lengthy search strings the user may later simply type the search category CAUSE into the entry field The dollar sign is a special character that indicates that the content of the CAUSE category is to be used for the search and not the string CAUSE itself Categories can be mixed with ordinary strings to build complex search requests until SCAUSE when Note When defining a new category do not prefix its name with a g As categories may be elements of other categories recursive search trees of arbitrary depth may be defined Another advantage of categories besides being short and handy is that their contents can be modified later without changing a single character in other expressions using this category Hierarchies of Search Categories Te gt EMOTION R DN a T a POSEMO NEGEMO Pa S A A LOVE ANGER love loving beloved lover v ss gt Search Swarm Figure 53 Hierarchy of Search Categories The definition for the taxonomy above is as follows EMOTION POSEMOI SNEGEMO POSEMO LOVEletc NEGEMO ANGER LOVE lovellovinglbelovedllover Such category structures are efficient tools to exploit the literal properties of the textual materials you use in your research Of Special Tools e 147 List of example search categories in the standard search library Naty na Create search libraries for different languages differ
244. er s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Boolean Operators Four Boolean operators are available with the Query Tool OR XOR AND and NOT OR XOR and AND are binary operators which need exactly two operands as input NOT is a unary operator and needs exactly one operand However as stated above the operands themselves may be of arbitrary complexity Codes code families or arbitrary expressions can be used as operands A OR B AND NOT C AND D OR The OR operator retrieves all data segments 1 e quotations that are coded with any of the codes used in the expression Example All quotations coded with Earth OR Fire As arguments can themselves be arbitrary expressions another formulation is All quotations that are retrieved by any of the expressions the query combines Example All quotations coded with Earth OR coded by both Fire AND Water Note the OR operator potentially generates MANY hits It has high recall a lot is retrieved but low precision many of the retrieved quotations may not make sense XOR The OR operator does not really match the everyday usage of OR Its meaning is At least one of including the case where ALL conditions match The XOR operator in contrast asks that EXACTLY one of the conditions must meet It translates into everyday either or Example All quotations coded with EITHER Earth OR Fire but not with both AND The AND operator finds quotations t
245. er s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 E ENCLOSES ENCLOSES button A ENCLOSES B retrieves all quotations coded with A that contain quotations coded with B Overlap Operators The overlap operators describe quotations that overlap one another fy OVERLAPPED_BY OVERLAPPED BY button A OVERLAPPED_BY B retrieves all quotations coded with A that are overlapped by quotations coded with B Cy OVERLAPS OVERLAPS button A OVERLAPS B retrieves all quotations coded with A that overlap quotations coded with B Distance Operators The distance operators describe a sequence of disjoint quotations The maximum distance in paragraphs may be specified E FOLLOWS FOLLOWS button A FOLLOWS B retrieves all quotations coded with A that follow quotations coded with B PRECEDES PRECEDES button A PRECEDES B retrieves all quotations coded with A followed by quotations coded with B The Co occurrence Operator CO OCCURRENCE CO OCCURRENCE button Co occurrence is essentially a short cut for a combination of all the basic proximity operators except FOLLOWS and PRECEDES A CO OCCURRING WITH B Find all quotations that co occur with B Note the procedures used for calculating cooccurrence for two codes is also used in the Network Editor to imort co occurring codes See Import Co occurring Codes on page 228 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Special Tools e 167 The Query Language Queries are built step by step from operands and operators using the princ
246. ermeneutic Unit The caption changes when you save the HU the first time The option to provide a separate project name in addition to a file name has been dropped because today s Windows systems offer sufficient expressiveness for path and file names Consequently the option to rename HUs has been dropped Data Source Management A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The most frequently asked question by ATLAS ti users in the past was related to having lost primary documents often expressed in ways like Help Where are my primary documents This question was based on an erroneous understanding of how ATLAS ti accesses primary documents For a better understanding of this important feature this manual includes a chapter Project Management on page 270 A number of project scenarios are presented to help in setting up new projects DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT under the Documents menu offers a variety of powerful tools to support users and administrators in locating document related problems Copy Bundle The Copy Bundle function has been completely revised What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 e 13 Memos 14 e What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 In ATLAS ti 5 one compressed file containing all associated files primary document data sources etc is created by the Copy Bundle function This file can be moved to another computer and unpacked to any location If a specific directory 1s required and it does not exist it is automatica
247. ers If you file a bug report you might be asked to send a system report including this file to a specified support e mail address Sending an Error Report The error report contains the following Troubleshooting e 333 The ERROR LOG file The System Report which you can view via EXTRAS SYSTEM REPORT DISPLAY SYSTEM REPORT The user s configuration file USER INI The ATLAS ti configuration file ATLAS INI The list of files in ATLAS ti s program folder The list of files in the user s system folder The information in the package contains technical information needed for the technical support personnel to analyze and respond to reported problems Except for the content of the ERROR LOG the system report and two INI files no other file content 1s transferred To send an error report 1 2 6 7 From the main menu select EXTRAS SYSTEM REPORT CREATE AND MAIL REPORT A message informs you that the report has been created Click OK ATLAS ti launches your default email client and creates a new message addressed to an ATLAS ti support address The body of the message displays further instructions Add a description of your problem in the mail body Attach the generated error report It is located in the user system path and can be easily accessed from within ATLAS ti via menu option EXTRAS EXPLORER USER SYSTEM PATH Make sure you have an active Internet connection Send the mail You might
248. ery backup file is removed automatically It is strongly recommended to keep this feature on Note When you experience long delays at the scheduled times when working with large HUs increase the period instead of turning this option off When you restart ATLAS ti after a crash it will ask you if you want to load a recovery backup of your HU 1f this backup is indeed newer than the one you last saved Note Any pending changes in open text or Network Editors are not saved by the recovery backup feature Saving such changes from time to time will preserve these changes See General Preferences Section Storage on page 342 Assigning Primary Documents CD A PD refers to a data source e g a file A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Assigning PDs is indeed a sloppy term and we left it as 1s mainly for historical reasons A more accurate name would be Create PD or Assign as PD or Assign Data Source Indeed whenever you do a DOCUMENTS ASSIGN a new Primary Document which is an ATLAS ti internal object is created e g P 1 and the data source e g file text_1 rtf is associated with this PD at the same time This distinction between a PD and the actual data source a file based document or a memo is explained in more detail in How ATLAS ti Handles Documents on page 93 Working with ATLAS ti e 65 More than one data source can be assigned as a PD at the same tim
249. es on page 101 that keep this loose link alive under varying circumstances When we refer to editing a PD we indeed mean editing the data source or editing the contents of a PD Understanding the relationship between a PD and its data source is important for addressing the most common FAQ Where are my PDs The special nature of this relationship explains why simply copying the HU to another computer is not sufficient a PD won t find its data source unless you copied it as well It also explains why you should use Copy Bundle for migrating a complete project HU data sources to another computer In addition it explains why there can be more than one PD referring to the same data source HUs can be owned by you or different team members as long as the files reside in a central location in the network The Complexities of PD Editing The above facts are true for version 4 2 as well as 5 What makes this a delicate topic in ATLAS ti 5 is that you now can safely edit the content of a data source Who records the changes when you edit a data source to make sure every PD in every HU can update its quotations ATLAS ti 5 watches every editing activity and stores every change in a companion file which is placed side by side with the edited document This file has the extension LOG If your document is interview rtf this file will be named interview 1 rtf log Note Once such a companion log file exists you sho
250. es Column F is a standard family Column G shows the values of a family with string variables see below PD Family Tables can be exported or imported as tab delimited or as comma separated value CSV files Both formats can be read by Excel PD Families as Non Dichotomous Variables Within ATLAS ti all families when interpreted as variables are dichotomous because an item may or may not belong to a specific family However by following a simple naming convention PD families can be made to represent more than two values for use outside of ATLAS ti These families can be used in other statistical and database applications as string variables after being exported as part of a PD Family table For example imagine a situation where your respondents represented by the PDs are from different locations Berlin New York London and Tokyo To create one variable with four values you would create 4 PD families named as follows Location Berlin Location New York Location London Location Tokyo A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sty PD families used as non dichotomous variables should be used in a mutually exclusive manner If you have named your variable families using a different separator change the separator when prompted A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The variable name precedes the name value separator default and the value name of city immediately follows the separator following the naming conv
251. es are also exploited when exporting an HU to SPSS syntax files see How SPSS Export Handles Families on page 302 Creating Code Families from Network Views This procedure assumes some acquaintance with networks see The Network Editor et al on page 215 Creating a code family from a Network View s code nodes might be useful when you need to print all quotations referenced by the codes in the Network View or to filter all codes contained in a Network View To create a code family from a Network View 1 Open the Network View 2 From the main menu in the Network Editor select SPECIALS GENERATE FAMILY 3 You are prompted for a name The offered default name is the name of the Network View Accept the name or type in a new name and click OK Memo families are useful for sorting and filtering your written reflections about the project Memos can be separated by type such as theoretical or linguistic The procedures for creating and handling memo families resemble those for code families Super Families follow the same underlying logic as Super Codes cf Super Codes on page 176 They are constructed by combining families including Super Families Family Life e 203 members on demand 204 e Family Life Their members are determined dynamically whenever you activate a Super Family Using Super Families You are working in the Customer Department of an airline and have been given the task t
252. es pity on other pages referencing the moved page she would create a forward link redirection to the new location of the page ATLAS ti works in a similar manner Files that are assigned to an HU do not become a physical part of the HU but are referenced via the file s path and name Example 2 Word Documents with External References Word gives you the option to organize large documents into one central document and a number of semi dependent subdocuments say one for each chapter of a book Primary Documents e 93 94 e Primary Documents The objective is to reduce the overall size of the main document and make handling easier and faster Why load 50 chapters into memory when you want to read or edit only two of them Furthermore this approach facilitates teamwork while the main document is edited by the main author other team members can work on individual chapters Although a multitude of files are stored Word gives the appearance of working with one single monolithic file When you click on an outsourced chapter its file 1s loaded from the disk and displayed just as it would if it was an integral part of the main document But alas if you decide to copy the main document to another computer and forget to take all subdocuments along you will experience the dreaded file not found error when you want to look at a single chapter But even when you dutifully copy all the subdocuments along with the m
253. ete Delete Delete Open Metwork Open Network Open Network Unlink Lisk Quotations Lisk Quotations Unlink Unlink Edit Link Comment DISPLAY INFO Displays name creation date last modification date author and comment for the object A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 371 372 e Reference RENAME Renames the object code memo or hyperlink DISPLAY COMMENT Displays the comment or the text body of a memo in a pop up window For codes and memos the same is achieved by double clicking the object itself EDIT COMMENT Opens an editor to edit the comment or memo text body DELETE Removes the object not only its link from the HU OPEN NETWORK Creates and opens a Network View for the selected object and its neighbors LIST QUOTATIONS Displays a list of quotations to which the object refers available for codes and memos UNLINK Removes the link between the object and the quotation represented by the bracket Resembles erasing an annotation at one place in a physical book EDIT LINK COMMENT Applies only to quotations You can write or edit a comment for the hyperlink between the bracket and the quotation itself The Wallpaper Menu You can specify the background image to be displayed when no PD is displayed All file formats that are valid graphical PDs are accepted SELECT WALLPAPER To specify another wallpaper 1 Make sure the HU editor does not display a PD If necessary close the PD
254. etwork Views can be selected from the pick list or the Network View Manager Launch a Network View You can open a Network Editor on a specific Network that is already part of the HU Open a Network View by one of the following methods The Network Editor et al e 219 File Edit Documents OL E B E New Metwork view 4 Elements I 33 4 Elements II 7 nity u Ta a The Network View Manager offers easy access to all Network Views of a given HU The text area displays the comment for the selected Network View 220 e The Network Editor et al To open a Network View from the pick list 1 Click on the network button s down arrow on the main toolbar to display the drop down list of existing Network Views 2 Select one of the listed Network Views 3 A Network Editor opens on the selected Network View To open a Network View using the Network View Manager Use this method if the number of Network Views already defined is too large to be comfortably displayed using the pick list method The Network View Manager also allows you to view some properties of Network Views without opening a Network Editor 1 Select NETWORKS NETWORK VIEW MANAGER from the main menu or click the Network button in the main toolbar 2 Select one of the displayed Network Views 3 Click on the network button above the list Note Steps 2 and 3 can be replaced by double clicking a selected Network View Network View Manager HU Th
255. evel Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 eee Code Water Display Info Rename Display Comment Edit Comment Delete Open Network List Quotations Sty oe Clean up synonymous codes by merging them A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Unlinking Codes This option is the reverse function of coding It removes the links between codes and quotations Unlike the delete function neither codes nor quotations are removed only the association between the code and the quotation is removed Two methods are described in the following sections To unlink several codes from a quotation This method is used to remove a number of codes linked to a specific quotation 1 Open the context menu of the desired quotation 2 Choose UNLINK CODES from the context menu 3 From the list of all codes connected to this quotation displayed in a pop up window select the codes to be unlinked and click OK In the margin area you can see the immediate effect of this operation the unlinked codes disappear To unlink a single code from a quotation This method is a very direct manipulation of the association between a code and a specific quotation using the interactive margin areas 1 Switch on the margin area display 2 Right click a code in the margin area 3 Choose UNLINK from the context menu The code disappears from the margin area It does not disappear from other places in the margin where it has been used Note
256. ever if repetitive words or phrases are found in the text the Auto Coding feature can be used to automatically segment these quotations and assign a code to them When a quotation is created ATLAS ti automatically assigns an identifier to it This identifier is built from the index of the primary text to which it belongs and the first 30 letters note that a different length can be set via PREFERENCES of the text segment e g 1 21 Therefore a more efficient fil The identifier is displayed in list windows and printouts For graphic audio and video segments the original file name of the PD is chosen as an identifier Note Although the creation of quotations is almost always part of a broader task like coding or writing memos free quotations can be created that indicate interesting parts in the primary data for which a meaningful classification has not yet been found See Creating Quotations on page 112 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A textual quotation originates from an arbitrary sequence of selected characters Quotations are stored inside the HU independent of the document to which they A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Types of Quotations In accordance with the four different types of PDs there are also four different types of quotations Text quotations Textual quotations represent for the computer a sequence of characters strings and can be of arbitrary size Sentences speech turns o
257. ever seen the source code of a HTML coded web page you can easily recognize two of the main characteristics of XML which makes them distinct from HTML e The presence of tags e g lt MEMO gt lt SPEECH TURN gt which are not available in the fixed set of HTML tags where new tags are proprietary or at least deviations from the standards The tags used in an XML file represent YOUR data without invalidating any standards Below a raw XML file is shown e The absence of presentation display layout related information tables fonts images rulers etc lt Trans version 1 trans _method LING22 version date 990120 audio_filename au wav xml lang DE gt lt Speakers gt lt Speaker id I name Interviewer gt lt Speaker id B name Herr Schultz dialect bavarian gt lt Speakers gt lt Turn speaker I tape_pos 2010 gt war lt Turn gt lt Turn speaker B tape_pos 2314 gt Wars doch eigentlich ja da wars doch glaub ich erst ein oder zwei Tage oder vielleicht einen Tag L en eo Mies Figure 144 XML version of an interview section with some added information A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Appendix e 401 If you interested to learn more about XML you may want to look at the following online article Muhr Thomas 2000 December Increasing the Reusability of Qualitative Data with XML 64 paragraphs Forum Qualitative Sozialforschung Forum Qualitative Social Research Online
258. exploit connected codes resulting from previous theory building work While Boolean based queries are extensional and simply enumerate the elements of combined sets e g LOVE or KINDNESS semantic operators are intentional as they already capture some meaning expressed in appropriately linked concepts e g SUB POSITIVE ATTITUDES SUB The SUB or DOWN operator traverses the network from higher to lower concepts collecting all quotations from any of the sub codes Only transitive relations between the codes are processed all others are types ignored When building a terminology from your codes use the ISA relation for sub term links Example All quotations coded with Magic or any immediate or indirect sub term of Magic Like the OR operator in the set of Boolean operators the SUB may produce large result sets However unlike the OR operator because you make use of a theory using SUB the precision is much better 1 e you get only what you expect Of course if your network contains dubious connections computer ISA intelligent entity the quality of your retrieval will decline UP The UP operator looks at all direct Super Codes of the selected code Unlike the SUB operator it does not recursively traverse the structure Only the next level is considered A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 SIBlings button The Proximity Operator buttons Sty Because of non A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 SIB
259. ext menu pops up OBJECT TYPE Submenu A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sets the type of objects you want to see displayed in the margin ObjectType w Codes ener v Memos area CODES MEMOS HYPERLINKS NONE de selects and ALL Hyper Li Aly vee Coordinates Y TER selects all three objects types in one step faut Use Short Names Mone e ae e USE IMAGES Displays the object s type icon along with its name This facilitates quick identification of objects especially when more than one object type is displayed DISPLAY COORDINATES Appends the quotation s start and end position to each displayed object USE SHORT NAMES If space gets sparse in the margin area you can reduce object names to a specified amount of characters Customize in General Preferences SET FONT Sets the font for the margin object s labels Keep the margin font small in relation to the PD font for less clutter In order to correctly display non Western languages select an appropriate font and its script The Margin Area Object Menus Right clicking on an object in the margin area pops up a context menu that presents available options for the corresponding object This section explains these menus The menu s title top line shows the object s name Quokation 2 24 Code Water Memo Big Star Sa eee Display Info isplay Info isplay Info E Rename Rename eee ee f Display Comment eB ay Commen Ep ay Commen r Edit Comment Edit Comment Del
260. f your project and the networks you have created and even publish your project as a World Wide Web document or an individual presentation using XML Main Concepts e 27 Creating a Hermeneutic Unit Assigning Primary Documents Visualizing amp Writing up results Exporting data Discovering TO relevant passages Creating code s and memos concepts to networks Figure 8 The ATLAS ti workflow The Hermeneutic Unit The HU provides the data structure for each project in ATLAS ti The name was chosen to reflect the approach we have taken when building a support tool for text interpretation There was no intention to frighten potential users with this admittedly tongue breaking name s If you understand the HU concept then you understand almost Get acquainted everything that is necessary to work with ATLAS ti And in spite with this concept of its impressive name it is simple and practical to use Everything that is relevant to a particular project e g a research topic is part of the HU and resides in the electronic environment For instance the PDs representing the data sources quotations codes used for developing concepts conceptual linkages families networks and memos etc are all part of one HU One obvious advantage of this bundling is that the user only has to deal with and think of one entity Activating an HU is the straightforward selection of a single file a
261. ferent memo type s Memo ME 02 03 04 Sele Memo Edit Format Insert ww Interesting Links You can erbed arbitrary links into your texts i comments memos primary documents Such links can be a ctarated by double clicking The iris ct Web Site http www atlasti com Figure 38 Memo The memo editor offers a memo name and type field Various options are available You can change the default memo title and manage available memo types You can also be prompted for a title when creating a new memo For details see Section Memos on page 346 The Textual Level Basic Functions e 129 After having typed or changed something in the memo editor and before closing the editor save the contents if you want to keep it Click on the Save button v or select MEMO SAVE from the editor s menu To create a free memo 1 In the Memo Manager click the CREATE NEW button or select CREATE FREE MEMO from the HUEditor s MEMOS menu 2 A new memo with the default memo title is created The memo editor opens 1f preferences are set accordingly 3 Begin to type the memo Change the memo title and type according to your needs 4 Save the memo content before moving on to do something else by clicking on the Accept button If you forget to save it you are reminded by the program to do so before closing the editor Pa If you prefer that all new entries or modifications to a memo are saved automatically you need to go
262. fferences Single Selection Only Drop down lists and pop up menus allow single selection only All four drop down lists in the Hermeneutic Unit editor under the main menu are single selection devices Any pop up menu offering a selection of options 1s single selection only The pop up menu disappears immediately after the item is selected Data segments in the primary document pane The Object Explorer Code Forest and Code Tree also only allow single selections Family Managers families list are single selection All items in the margin area All lists in the Query Tool Multiple Selection Multiple selections are possible in the following places e All Object Managers e All Family Managers member and non member panes e Code by list window e All Link to list windows e g CODES CODING LINK CODES TO from the main menu A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Appendix e 397 e The Network Editor several methods for multiple node selections Character Encoding for Textual Documents 398 e Appendix Most plain text and all Rich Text documents are displayed correctly using the default settings For older texts or documents using special character sets e g Arabic Cyrillic Hebrew a few preferences might need to be set If such settings are necessary can often easily be determined when texts are displayed incorrectly especially in regard to language specific characters Umlaute etc To understa
263. file and in addition also releases the resource giving as it were other Windows applications the opportunity to access the resource and or the media player Keyboard shortcut Stop s by Repeats either the complete file or any selected Repeat Loop segment until the pause or stop button is clicked Especially useful to repeat noise covered or otherwise hard to understand passages during transcription Helps to fine tune a segment end e g to isolate a Sneak Preview word from a contiguous spoken text When moving the position while the Sneak Preview mode is active a short preview of 500 milliseconds or 2 frames a 110 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sty ox Coding Create Link Source Show Links Ctri RB Edit Comment Open Network View Open MediaContral A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 H Skip back Move back Move forward Skip forward Selection start af Selection end C4 Create quotation for video data is played repeatedly making it easier for marking the boundary of your segment Using this function takes practice and is best used in combination with the cursor keys Repositions the track slider to either the next selection mark to the left or the beginning of the file Repositions the track slider by 1 20 of the overall size of the file to the left Repositions the track slider by 1 20 of the overall size of the file to the right
264. files in a bundle to be used on a target computer SERVICE PACK MANAGER Installs service packs and patches to upgrade the program See Service Packs amp Patches on page 334 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Explorer d Create Desktop Shortcut 13 User Editor Co Authors Change Access Rights d Login Change Object Ownership Export tg System Report Debug Window Free Unused Memory Display Blackboard HTML Preferences x a General Preferences A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Extras Menu UNDO Reverts the last action if it is an action that can be reversed e g renaming objects EXPLORER Opens the Windows Explorer You can drag PDs into the PD list or the PD pane CREATE DESKTOP SHORTCUT Creates a shortcut for the presently open HU on the desktop USER EDITOR Click this option to maintain a database of users see User Management on page 264 Co AUTHORS SUBMENU REGISTER CO AUTHORS Assigns co authors to the HU REMOVE Co AUTHORS Removes registered co authors from HU DISPLAY CO AUTHORS Shows the list of all registered co authors CHANGE ACCESS RIGHTS SUBMENU Changes general access permissions for this HU PUBLIC READ ONLY The HU can be opened and reviewed by all users but it cannot be saved PUBLIC READ WRITE The HU can be opened by all users reviewed and changed PRIVATE The HU can only be opened by the author and registered co authors SET PASSWORD Se
265. find expression through their assignment to a code or memo to which similar ideas or text selections also become assigned ATLAS ti provides the researcher with a highly effective means for quickly retrieving all data selections and notes relevant to one idea See The Textual Level Basic Functions on page 107 for details Conceptual Level Work Beyond coding and retrieval ATLAS ti s networking feature allows you to visually connect selected passages memos and Attitude Positive um __ Negative r i Ss aot codes into diagrams that graphically outline complex relations Love Kindness Hatred Anger This feature virtually transforms your text based workspace into a graphical playground where you can construct concepts and theories based on relationships between codes text passages or memos This process sometimes uncovers other relations in the data that were not obvious before and still allows you the ability to instantly revert to your notes or primary text selection Such textual conceptual modeling is unique to ATLAS ti See The Conceptual Level Networks on page 211 for more details 26 e Main Concepts A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 General Steps when Working with ATLAS ti The following sequence of steps is not mandatory but describes a common script 1 Create a project an idea container meant to enclose your data all your findings codes memos and structures under a single name We
266. fy the name of the data set This name is used as the file name and as the FILE reference from the DATA LIST section Create a fresh data file during next run can be unchecked if the data has not changed since it was last created This may save some processing time The value separator is by default but can be changed to something else Create task section Enable this option if you want templates for procedures included at the end of the syntax file Export amp Import using XML 304 e Export amp Import XML the eXtensible Markup Language is a powerful standard for information exchange between applications and has been used by ATLAS ti since release 4 2 XML is increasingly used in any information technology related domains the mobile phone web language WAP transcripts created by open source transcription tool Transcriber and Microsoft Office all use or are based on XML For some basic information and tech talk on XML see XML an Introduction on page 400 Codes memos or entire HUs can be exported into the XML format Exporting codes and memos as XML files allows you to transfer all or only selected codes or memos between HUs using the import function If you are looking to merge complete HUs check the section on Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 289 Exporting the entire HU in XML opens up numerous possibilities for individual reports and conversion for other applications Limitations Fo
267. g as the toolbox is open it replaces the toolbar SHOW ALIGNMENT TOOL Opens the floating Alignment Tool palette Keeping the palette open makes your life easier when you are manually adjusting the layout of several nodes DISPLAY GRID Overlays the network view with a grid to help with manual placement of nodes As the grid is colored light gray you need to use a different background color when using this feature DISPLAY NODE BITMAPS Display a type specific icon for the nodes DISPLAY NODES 3D Displays nodes in 3D style Two basic display styles for node A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 2 Aire The four elements The four main ingredients of the alchemistic esoteric reasoning A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 boxes are available The 3 D displayDisplay with a frame and a drop shadow EXTENDED CODE LABEL Displays the suffix along with the code name Turning this option off results in more compact node labels CODES WITH COMMENTS By default only the code s name is displayed Select this option to also display the comment or at least a portion of it This option can also be configured under Network View preferences see section Nodes on page 389 BOXED QUOTATIONS Displays a colored solid bounding box for the quotations boxed Not boxed 1 29 12 And the fourth angel sounde 1 29 12 And the fourth angel sounde LINK DISPLAY SUBMENU For relation types you can define two link labels and a
268. g in fully qualified UNC paths or by using identically mapped drives on the client computers Variation Mobile Project See Variation Mobile Project on page 273 for an introduction Installation of a bundle may require adjustments usually only once If paths containing drives or network shares e g server c were used to assign documents and these drives or network shares are not Project Management e 279 Using memos as PDs entirely eliminates the dependencies from external references However such embedded data sources are exclusive to the HU and cannot be shared Furthermore the size and number of PDs also increases the size of and access times for the HU 280 e Project Management available on the target system all such references need to be bent redirected by respective entries in the PD path map see Path Mapping on page 102 When the drives and the network are available on the target system the Install Bundle procedure will use them If they do not exist the Install Bundle procedure will create all folders required to store the documents So you may find a folder C Dokumente und Einstellungen next to C documents and settings after installing a bundle you received from a German colleague This may lead to a proliferation of parallel folders when working in multi national teams across borders This problem is specific to document references using absolute paths and increases
269. ge 245 for detail SPLIT CODE Currently only a message is displayed explaining a work around for splitting codes the so called Poor Man s Split Code option see Splitting Codes on page 245 for detail EDIT QUERY Use this option to edit the query of a Super Code see The Query Tool on page 160 for details CREATE SNAPSHOT Creates a new code from the selected super code See Snapshot Codes on page 179 for further detail CODE FOREST Hierarchical display of all codes as a forest in a special Object Explorer see Code Trees amp Forests on page 187 for details CODE TREE Hierarchical display of tree with the selected code as root see Code Trees amp Forests on page 187 for details MERGE CODES Merges code s with the selected code See Merging Codes on page 125 UNLINK QUOTATIONS Unlinks quotations from the selected code see Unlinking Codes on page 125 UNLINK ALL QUOTATIONS Unlinks ALL quotations from all currently filtered codes In the Code Manager all selected codes are unlinked EXPORT CODE XML A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Create Free Memo Attach Memo Link Memo to Rename Edit Delete Sort Mame Filter All Toggle Filter Edit Families d Open Network view Memo Manager Miscellaneous Dukput b A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Exports selected code in XML format see Export amp Import using XML
270. gel thang through them idst of heaven rs of the earth by gels which are yet to quotation Saying with a loud 3 reason of the other sound Create Link Source Create Link Target Coding Rename Show Links Ctrilt kB Unlink Codes Edit Comment Open Network View Delete db Copy Eal The commands are tailored to the objects under the cursor at the time the context menu pops up The Object Managers ie Pt The advantage of drop down lists is that they save space To provide more efficient access to the objects listed in the drop down lists the lists can be displayed in a detached window These windows are called Object Managers because they not only allow access to the objects but provide many more options and functions Although not an integral part of the HU editor the Object Managers are common tools that are part of the main editor and therefore are described in this section Object Manager button Note for ATLAS ti 4 2 users Object Managers were formerly called Extra Lists Like many other tools that can be invoked from the main editor an Object Manager is a child or dependent window of the main editor Child windows have some common properties e They are closely related to their parent window here the HU editor and changes in either the child or the parent window are usually broadcast between them like the selections of objects e They can be resized and positioned independently of their pa
271. ger Select the PDs Start to drag the PDs A dashed bar appears at the current list insertion point eS Drop the PDs when you reach the desired location for the documents Note Set the sort criterion to ID for an optimal feedback of the renumbering procedure Renumbering all Primary Documents Select DOCUMENTS MISCELLANEOUS RENUMBER ALL from the main menu This option becomes useful after you disconnect several documents from a HU When disconnecting PDs from an HU previously assigned IDs e g P 1 are not released This results in gaps in the sequence of PD numbers You may remove these gaps by renumbering all PDs in the HU using the Renumber All feature Note It is not necessary to renumber PDs in ATLAS ti Doing so can give reports a cleaner appearance However if you plan to merge HUs it is essential that PDs have matching IDs A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Primary Documents Primary Documents PDs play a major role in ATLAS ti s framework They are the interface between a Hermeneutic Unit HU and the data They provide access to data sources which are usually files stored on the disks of your computer or network This chapter outlines the steps needed to create select and prepare documents so that they will be suitable to use in ATLAS ti You will learn how to use PDs how to consistently edit the content of documents and how to move projects without losing connections to associated files Prepar
272. ghted Figure 90 One node selected then two neighbors via Ctrl N then a complete sub network Selecting or deselecting all Nodes To select all nodes or deselect all selected nodes select NODES DE SELECT ALL NODES from the Network Editor s main menu or press Ctrl A on the keyboard Inverting the current selection To invert the current selection press Ctrl I or select NODES INVERSE SELECTION from the Network Editor s main menu This will select all unselected nodes and deselect all previously selected Selecting a Link Only first class links can be selected First class or strong links can only exist between quotations or between codes Selecting links is similar to selecting nodes To select a link 1 Move the mouse pointer onto the label of the link to be selected 2 The mouse pointer changes its appearance to 3 Click the left mouse button 4 The selected link label will be displayed inverted All previously selected nodes links are deselected Selecting links is a convenient way to cut or flip multiple links see Cutting Links on page 226 222 e The Network Editor et al A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Ctrl Z Undo node placements A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Deselecting Nodes and Links To deselect a selected node or link 1 Hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard 2 Click on a selected node or link To deselect all nodes and links 1 Move the mouse cursor over
273. gnment of quotations if applied wrongly Handle with great care For details see Reset Last Access Information on page 331 ACCESSIBILITY REPORT The accessibility report is a diagnostic tool for advanced users or support experts It provides detailed information about the reasons why a PD s data source cannot be loaded You might need to supply this report to support personnel in order to trace a problem OUTPUT SUBMENU All document output options are discussed in the chapter The Primary Documents Output Submenu on page 313 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 353 Create Free Quotation Coding Hyper Link Rename Modify Boundaries Edit Comment Delete Sark Id Filter All Toggle Filter Open Network view Quotation Manager Miscellaneous Output 354 e Reference The Quotations Menu CREATE FREE QUOTATION Creates a new quotation from the current selection Free quotations are not linked to any other object e g codes CODING SUBMENU The Coding submenu is a subset of options that is also available under the Codes menu HYPER LINK SUBMENU For a description see Creating Hyperlinks on page 255 CREATE LINK SOURCE Makes current selection a hyperlink start anchor Creates a new quotation from the selection if a quotation does not yet exist CREATE LINK TARGET Makes current selection a hyperlink target anchor Creates a new quotation from the selection if necessary CREATE H
274. h that was valid when the HU was created For such constellations Scenario 3 1s the recommended solution even if portability restrictions arise Variation Distributed Project See Variation Distributed Project Team on page 273 for an introduction HUs are unlike to scenario fully movable and can be copied However all team members need to set their textbank path variable to the same folder that was set during creation of the HU Variation Mobile Project See Variation Mobile Project on page 273 for an introduction Installation of the bundle can be accomplished without any further adjustments However it is mandatory that for each project the textbank folder on the target system is set accordingly Always use the same TBPATH which makes life easier Scenario 3 Multiple Document Paths Not all documents can be accessed from a single folder hierarchy Some documents are located in distinct separate folders that cannot be incorporated under a common root Examples 1 Legacy data archives that cannot easily be moved to more appropriate locations because of size or access restrictions 2 Documents that are located on a variety of media such as CDs DVDs hard disks possibly on different computers A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Project Setup Note If you have already stored the documents you can continue with Step 2 1 Store the documents in the desired folde
275. h to map 4 Once a path is entered or selected click on the Add Path button The path will be added to the list of currently mapped paths 5 Now enter or choose from the drop down a replacement path into the To field on the right side of the Path Map Editor in the same fashion 6 Click on the Add Path button 7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 for every path to be mapped 8 Press Apply or Apply amp Close to store and activate the new mapping s Redirection Fallback A fallback path is used when a mapping does not exist or a valid path cannot be found In addition the fallback option must be switched on in the Path Map Editor The HUPATH is searched first and if the document cannot be found it looks into the TBPATH Note In fallback mode both folders are searched without searching any of their sub folders Change Path for one PD at a time With Change Path you can modify the reference of a single PD in a specific HU to its data source You can modify the path the file name or both Furthermore the special path can be changed or an absolute path can be replaced by a special path if appropriate If you change the path for a perfectly accessible document ATLAS ti thinks that you want to move this document to a new location Change Path is the best option to do this But use caution A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 you are changing conditions for a specific HU In cas
276. haracters to jump to a subsequent list entry matching this sequence For example suppose a number of codes begin with em e g Emotions and others with ex e g External Reference typing em will jump to the first of the EMotion codes while entering ex will jump to EXternal reference Every other character typed advances the focus to the next list entry unless a matching name cannot be found A very powerful variation to locate list entries is by typing the asterisk as the first character While the standard incremental search is always anchored to the start of the name using the asterisk allows the matching string to appear anywhere inside the name Example typing ref would jump to entry External Reference while ref would stop at Reference if such an entry exists This feature is especially useful for searching the Quotation Manager as quotations have a numeric prefix like 208 1977 Note You need to avoid long breaks between entering characters After a certain system defined timeout the next character starts a new forward search In place Label Editing In place editing in Object Managers is a convenient way to rename objects On a selected item you can initiate in place editing by either clicking again or pressing the F2 key Don t rush the second click though as this initiates a double click action Editing Text In the Object Managers the comment for the selected ob
277. hat match ALL the conditions specified in the query Example All quotations coded with Earth AND Hire The AND operator is very selective and often produces an empty result set Precision of this operator is high but the recall is rather low It produces best results when combined with less restrictive operators or when the overall number of the available text segments is large NOT The NOT operator tests for the absence of a condition Technically it subtracts the findings of the non negated term from all data segments available Given 120 quotations in the HU and 12 quotations assigned to code Fire the query NOT Fire retrieves 108 quotations those which are not coded with Fire Of course the operator can be used with an arbitrary expression as in the argument NOT Earth OR Fire which is the equivalent of neither Earth nor Fire Special Tools e 163 Venn diagrams are descriptive schemes for illustrating the different set operations associated with Boolean operators t ae The Semantic Operator buttons SUB button t UP button 164 e Special Tools Aand notB A and B not A and B The rectangle encloses the set of all retrievable quotations e g the document universe The two circles represent two codes A and B Q1 to Q5 are quotations coded with A B or none Q5 Figure 64 Boolean queries depicted as Venn diagrams Semantic Operators The operators in this section
278. hat projects created with ATLAS ti 4 work with absolute paths Unless reasons explained in the project setup scenarios above demand otherwise it might be a good idea to apply the Optimize Paths procedure to these projects See Optimize Paths on page 100 Surviving System Modifications Projects making deliberate use of special paths should prevent problems due to future changes in the computer or network environment Just as using flexible special paths eases the task of migrating a project to another computer they also prevent problems with changes of the computer affecting the proper localization of referenced documents A likely scenario of an environmental change might be moving documents to another disk or another computer in the network because of problems with the space available on the currently used drives or the need to make files available to a larger community by placing them on another server If needed the procedure to adapt the project to the new situation may be found in the preceding chapters that deal with project setup Merging Hermeneutic Units A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Merge Tool reunites HU s that were originally divided for analytical or economical reasons Its main purpose is the support of teams It links together the contributions of different members of a research team A common scenario is the analysis of different sets of documents by different team members sharing a common code base Of
279. he Code Manager output button a dialog opens to allow you to select the characteristics of your output Output Dialog Header Info Destination Include HU name Text Window Include author File Include current date Printer Include Code Comments Include Comments Include Link Comments One liner only Code List Full quotations Code Hierarchy Traverse Links Codes amp Neighbors Codes PT Table Selected Code Fire 12 3 Figure 126 Code Output Dialog Window Additional choices not available as menu options are the exclusion or inclusion of header information and link comments ONE LINER ONLY corresponds to menu option Quotation List TRAVERSE LINKS is the same as menu option Include Subterms Generating Output e 317 Reports for Code Combinations via the Query Tool When clicking on the printer button in the query tool you can print the list of quotations resulting from your selected combinations of codes and code families either in full length or in list format Before creating the output selected quotations can be excluded see Output on page 173 The Memos Output Submenu List of Memos Selected Memo s Selected Memo with Quotations List of Memos Prints a list of the current memos You are given the option of output with or without the memo text Selected Memo s Prints the selected memo s Selected Memo with Quotations Prints a selected memo including all refe
280. he Hermeneutic Unit Because of this editing is blacked by default when you view a primary document in ATLAS 4 Edit mode needs to be explicitly switched on for textual ge 45 Feature primary documents This chapter introduces available editing options and the issues to be considered when editing primary documents Figure 26 Text before editing 3 One of the core ideas of ATLAS ti Is that primary F basic concept documents are shared and part of an archive As you already know all quotations codes and memos are actually not parts of primary documents but are transparent layers that are stored within the Hermeneutic Writ Because of this editing is blocked by default when you view a primary document in ATLAS ti However to be Ge added text able to edit the content of POs is a necessity 4 For instance transcribed texts are often loaded with typos and other writing errors Users wish to correct such low quality texts Documents might not be complete and text needs to be added after they were assigned S Edit mode needs to be explicitly switched on for textual 45 Feature primary documents This chapter introduces available editing options and the issues to be considered when editing primary documents Figure 27 Text after adding text A piece of coded text was pasted A powerful change Added text included a hard return which resulted in a new maintenance system records paragraph As a consequence all quotations that
281. he margin area 4 And there came out of the smoke locusts i e Earth 9 Horror 5 _ upon the earth and unto them was gen 4 Fire power as the scorpions of the earth have k smoke Scorpion power Choose VIEWS MARGIN AREA from the main menu or click the a Margin Area button i in the primary document toolbar The margin area is a useful feedback device during coding Codes are displayed alongside the quotation to which they are attached Wta paN Resize th Note the size of the margin area can be changed by dragging the E ei split bar between the primary document pane and the margin aan area with the left mouse button Coding creates quotations Coding results in codes linked to quotations Any number of codes for selected data sections if may be assigned to a quotation and vice versa a code may refer to needed any number of quotations Coding implicitly creates quotations for data segments that do not already match an existing quotation You may activate the basic coding procedures either in the primary document toolbar the CODING submenu of the CODES menu the Code Manager or the context menu of the data selection The coding options in the primary document toolbar Create a new code ask user for name of code OPEN CODING 5 CODE IN VIVO Creates a code from the selected text H FE CODE BY LIST Selects existing codes from code list mis QUICK CODING Codes with the currently selected code How Codes are Di
282. her details ATLAS ti allows you to establish named links to more clearly express the nature of the relationships between concepts With named links you may express a sentence like a broken leg causes pain by two nodes the source node broken leg and the target 212 e The Conceptual Level Networks A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sty or default set of relations is provided You may define your own node pain connected with a named link causes or 1s cause of The name of a link is displayed in the Network Editor as a label attached to the link midway between the two connected nodes Six pre set relations or link types are available in ATLAS ti These standard relations can be substituted modified or supplemented by user defined relations The default relations are listed in the table below C1 and C2 are source and target nodes respectively Relation Label 1 Label 2 Width Color Formal Layout me Direction C1 is associated with C2 C1 is associated with C2 associated with C2 C1 is part of C2 ee l ae k Isa A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Some of these characteristics directly affect the display of links while others affect processing e g search routines automatic layout A link between concepts is displayed in a Network Editor by a line with the relation s label You can choose from three different labels label 1 label 2 and the name used for the menu when selecting a relatio
283. her hard return in other words an empty line This is the old paragraph model In order to be assigned as PDs and to be viewed comfortably in ATLAS ti documents had to be saved with Primary Documents e 91 achieve smooth wrapping Naty When converted documents need a 92 e Primary Documents hard returns for every line break Such a procedure is no longer necessary Lines are displayed via the wrap options available dynamically with regard to current window width and more statically using the current printer setting and paragraphs are defined by a single hard return Getting Rid of Hard Returns When you prefer to wrap dynamically documents formatted using the old paragraph model can be converted to the standard paragraph model During the conversion empty lines or multiple hard returns are converted to a single hard return and all other hard returns are removed All paragraphs are preserved but are now dynamically wrapped To convert a document to the new paragraph model 1 Load the text document 2 Enter Edit mode 3 Select DOCUMENTS DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT CONVERT TO NEW PARAGRAPH MODEL from the main menu 4 Inthe following dialog you can choose to preserve empty lines between paragraphs and you can select to be asked at every occurrence If you have selected a piece of text you may also choose to restrict the conversion to the selected text Convert to New Paragraph Model Eg Uncheck Keep Em
284. hs Assume ld Paragraph Model Synchronize PDs Reset Change Logs Edit Primnary Document Mappings Clear Cache Open Data Source Monitor Reset Last Access Information Accessibility Report 352 e Reference Eliminates gaps in the sequence of PD IDs see Renumbering all Primary Documents on page 70 WORD CRUNCHER Opens the Word Cruncher window For more detail see The Word Cruncher on page 155 IMPORT PD FAMILY TABLE Bulk imports PDs and families For more detail see PD Family Table on page 197 EXPORT PD FAMILY TABLE Exports a PD Family table CHANGE DATE Changes the creation date for the currently loaded PD e g to let the date represent the date of an interview or the release date of an article CHANGE AUTHOR Changes the name of the author 1 e the user who assigned this PD for the selected PD DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT SUBMENU CHANGE PATH Changes the path of the selected PD For details see Change Path for one PD at a time on page 104 OPTIMIZE PATHS Use this option to optimize the path references of PDs in order to gain added flexibility For details see Optimize Paths on page 100 ASSUME OLD PARAGRAPH MODEL When setting this property ATLAS ti assumes the old paragraph model which implies that paragraphs are separated by empty lines see Handling Legacy Documents on page 73 CONVERT TO NEW PARAGRAPH MODEL Converts text documents from the old t
285. ht meet your needs Support for teamwork and collaborative projects comes with the User Administration tool the HU Merger the Redundant Coding Analyzer the HTML and XML generators Most of the tools typically belong to more than just one of these broad categories for example Object Managers are used for browsing as well as for editing codes and memos A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Workbench Tools Overview e 35 The Tools 36 e Workbench Tools Overview Hermeneutic Unit Editor The HU Editor is the main window and usually the first thing you see after starting the system It lets you manage view and annotate primary documents PDs which are typically the starting point of your research see Main Workspace The HU Editor on page 41 Object Managers Object Managers were formerly called extra lists In ATLAS ti 5 their functionalities have been extended considerably and instead of just displaying a list of objects they now offer a variety of additional functions that turn them into Managers see The Object Managers on page 46 Object Managers are probably the most frequently used tools besides the HU Editor 9 Hermeneutic Unit Browser Although you can load projects using the standard file dialog the HU Browser displays some additional information for every HU that you select before loading it Text Editor Text editors can be opened to edit comments to create and edit memos and to view format an
286. hundreds of files is merely a matter of opening a single HU Version 5 further strengthens the idea of integration as it allows the inclusion of a larger variety of data types into the analysis Rich Text documents including Excel PowerPoint and other embedded objects can now be analyzed as easy as plain text was in the earlier versions of ATLAS ti Serendipity Webster s Dictionary defines the word serendipity as a seeming gift for making fortunate discoveries accidentally Other translations are fortunate accidents lucky discoveries In the context of information systems one should add To find something without having searched for it Introduction e 3 Etymology from its possession by the heroes of the Persian fairy tale The Three Princes of Serendip the faculty or phenomenon of finding valuable or agreeable things not sought for The term serendipity can be equated with an intuitive approach to data A typical operation relying on the serendipity effect is browsing This information seeking method is a genuine human activity When you spend a day in the local library or on the World Wide Web you often start with searching for particular books or key words But after a short while you typically find yourself increasingly engaged in browsing through books that were not exactly what you originally had in mind Examples of tools and procedures ATLAS ti offers for exploiting the concept of serendi
287. ic Flights and Business Traveler and combine them using the AND operator 5 The result pane of the scope selection window now displays documents matching the above defined combination of families 6 The result pane of the Query Tool now displays quotations related to complaints about in flight services from business travelers on domestic flights In order to compare the four groups in regard to different types of complaints the steps above need to be repeated Having frequently used combinations of families available as Super Families eases such tasks considerably A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Below a step by step instruction on how to create Super Families is provided To create a Super Family ay 1 Open a Family Manager and click the Super Family button or select FAMILIES OPEN SUPER FAMILY TOOL from the menu 2 The Super Family Tool opens N Super Family Tool on Primary Doc Families KE Families Query IEE business traveller amp domestic H re business traveller amp internation eS leisure traveller amp domestic flig E leisure traveller amp international gt business traveller 12 amp domestic flights 14 international flights 11 g gt leisure traveller 12 Result _Super Family Result 0 Figure 82 Super Family Tool The Super Family Tool is like a reduced Query Tool see The Query Tool on page 160 f
288. ic for chapter Network Editor but should be mentioned here Codes and quotations can also be linked in the Code Manager or Quotation Manager via drag amp drop 1 Identify the target item in the Object Manager s list pane 2 Select one or more source items in the Object Manager s list pane and drag them to the target item in the same pane 3 Select a relation from the list of relations E Link to code Alchemie is associated with is part of gt 1 is cause of lt gt 1 contradicts Bad weather 1 0 Animal 0 3 Bad weather 1 0 isa tis a noname S3 y L is property of Booth 1 0 Brass 1 1 Casualties 3 0 Booth 1 0 HEH Relation Editor Figure 92 Creating a Code Code link in the Code Manager This is only available for the Code and Quotation Managers The Network Editor et al e 225 226 e The Network Editor et al Cutting Links Several approaches to disconnecting previously linked nodes are available The first method works for all types of links and is useful when many nodes linked to one other node are to be disconnected 1 Select one or more nodes whose connections to another node are to be removed 2 Choose LINKS CUT LINKS from the Network Editor s menu 3 Move the mouse pointer with the rubber bands to the target node 4 Click the left mouse button Alternatively 1 Click on one or more link labels 2 Choose LINKS CUT LINKS from the Network Editor s me
289. icking the Accept button or select the menu option MEMO SAVE Repeat steps 2 to 5 for every document to be assigned as PD Assign the memos as PDs either by selecting and dragging them from the Memo Manager to the Document Manager or by selecting the menu option MISCELLANEOUS USE AS PRIMARY DOCUMENT Project Backup Create a copy of the HU file Benefits The project is a single file as no external documents are used It is easy to backup copy migrate or delete the project using Windows file functions Since the PDs are actually memos you can open two views of a PD one in the HU editor and one in the memo editor read only Data protection If sensitive documents are part of the HU they are stored securely within the HU file Since this file is highly compressed the documents become fairly unreadable outside ATLAS ti Unauthorized access within ATLAS ti can be prevented by a password protecting the HU Drawbacks Increased loading and storage times and an increased demand for computer memory as the HU can get quite large No data sharing at all Only rich textual documents can be used When merging HUs that contain memos as PDs these PDs cannot be unified Project Management e 281 e For every PD there is a corresponding entry in the memo list Project Maintenance cal iz N G Copy Bundle takes care of the HU and all associated files Copy Bundle Create Bundle Service Pack Manag
290. in a vast variety of variations In those days 128 different Latin characters were the standard much better than 0 and 1 in the beginning of all computing but not really satisfying The next step was to extend the table of characters to 256 which allowed for some national special characters In the absence of a standard for this extended character set computer manufacturers invented their own A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 assuming that they were the standard themselves One of those standards is the Original Equipment Manufacturer encoding shortly OEM This was used under DOS and also in the early Windows versions ANSI or OEM Nowadays the standard on modern systems is ANSI and has replaced the old OEM or DOS texts almost completely Even though working with text only files may become more the exception than the rule in ATLAS ti 5 the Encoding Type selector has not been removed Should you still need to access such legacy documents you can display them correctly in ATLAS ti by setting the OEM attribute accordingly You may change these encoding for a selected primary document using the DOCUMENTS MISCELLANEOUS SET ENCODING menu The option of setting the encoding type individually for each PD allows for primary documents with different encoding types to co exist in the same Hermeneutic Unit Correct Character Set While ANSI reduced the uncontrolled growth
291. in text Searches are not restricted to just textual PDs codes memos quotations all families code code links hyper links and the HU can be searched In addition the scope of the search can be limited to certain fields see The Object Crawler on page 158 Auto Coding Tool If the text itself contains important key words the Auto Coding Tool scans the text and automatically assigns a pre selected code to matching text passages If so desired the process can be controlled by manual confirmation of each action see The Auto Coding Tool on page 151 Network View Manager The Network View Manager contains a list of all previously constructed and saved Network Views It can be used to create new Network Views to access or delete existing ones or to write and edit comments Network Editor The Network Editor displays and offers all editing capability to construct and refine semantic networks In addition it allows the Workbench Tools Overview e 37 38 e Workbench Tools Overview visual creation and traversal of hypertext structures see The Network Editor et al on page 215 Relation Editor When the built in relations that are used to connect objects in Network Views are not sufficient you can edit them or create new ones using the Relation Editor see The Relation Editor on page 235 Hermeneutic Unit Merger This tool merges different HU A variety of options to control the merge strategy are
292. in the margin area object specific context menus are also available Network Nodes Links Layout Display Specials Help VAS MOEH An t Be Save commit changes into the Network View Set the font for nodes and link labels Set the color for nodes and the background Set Auto Color mode il p lt A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 377 Pox ARGERIA Save Save AS Create spin off Save as Graphic File Print Network View Copy to Clipboard Rename Edit Comment Close 378 e Reference H Display node bitmaps Edit the Network View s comment Position nodes using the semantic layout algorithm Undo positioning helpful after misalignments Shrink layout Expand layout Delete selected node Note deleting a code node deletes the code itself from the HU Create a new link Cut link Switch node display between 3D and shadowed style Toggle always on top The Network Editor will float on top of all other windows default setting The Network Menu SAVE Saves the Network View under its current name Use this option to commit changes periodically To preserve the current view choose SAVE AS SAVE AS Saves the Network View under a new name To create a new Network View and continue to work with the current choose CREATE SPIN OFF Creates a clone duplicate of the current Network View You are prompted to enter a name for the cloned network SAVE AS GRAPHIC FILE Saves y
293. ing Documents Larelh hajn Miu Danuri Pe Hi erates B Biy Netvech Pii Bkt gat Pist At Windows or O52 Bitmap big afl Flasher orma Wal rahira JPEG JFF Cempis Fal crue A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 This section explains how to properly create prepare and modify materials to be used as PDs Although such preparation is not mandatory and is often not feasible when possible it is preferable to adopt useful conventions The specific characteristics of the different content media types text graphic audio and video are discussed in this chapter Supported Formats In principle most textual graphical and multimedia formats are supported by ATLAS ti For some formats their suitability depends on the state of your Windows system particularly in regard to what other software is already installed Before deciding to use an exotic data format you should check if this format is available and if it is sufficiently supported by your Windows system For a list of formats that are currently supported as primary documents choose Assign from the documents drop down menu and click the File Type drop down list that appears at the bottom of the window see Assigning Documents via the File Dialog on page 67 Only the formats listed in the drop down list are supported by ATLAS ti To ensure that files are compatible with your system assign a few of your documents as PDs They
294. ing a text a simple thing to implement Understanding the Primary Document HU Relationship In ATLAS ti 4 2 1f you edited a document used within a HU or within a number of HUs you had to be very careful All editing procedures that changed the text sequence in any way unless done at the very end of the document had the potential of corrupting the alignment of quotations that referred to text passages Quotations are not much more than a set of coordinates that remember the start and end positions of a text sequence or a video passage an image area etc Quotations are managed and stored inside the HU The actual PD on the disk knows nothing of the references ATLAS ti compiles about it No provisions other than manual reselecting existed in ATLAS ti 4 2 that would enable the HU to update its quotation coordinates after the document was edited This was true for the HU that you worked with when editing the document and is especially true for all other HUs that used that same document Remember ATLAS ti has a Shared document approach that does not necessarily put the documents to be analyzed into a special location and of course they never become integrated into the HU themselves What would be needed to be able to edit the content of a document and to update the quotations so that they never lose their correct alignment e We would need to record every change that has the capacity of misaligning quotations e g deleting m
295. ink nodes but this one is recommended k A quick way to link two for linking exactly two nodes nodes To link two nodes 1 Place the mouse pointer over the source node The mouse pointer changes its appearance 2 Hold down the SHIFT key on your keyboard 3 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer to the target node A rubber band between the mouse pointer and the source node is drawn 4 Release the SHIFT key 5 Release the left mouse button 6 Select a relation applies to code code and quote quote links only Note A selection of relations is only offered if either two codes or two quotations are linked Code Code Relations Quote Quote Relations is associated with gt gt gt gt continued by is part of x gt contradicts is cause of gt criticizes contradicts gt discusses isa expands noname gt explains is property of I gt justifies t gt supports Figure 91 Lists of standard code code and quote quote relations To link more than two nodes If more than one source node is to be linked with a target node use the following method 1 Choose the source nodes 2 Choose LINKS LINK NODES from the Network Editor s main menu 3 Move the mouse pointer with the rubber bands to the target node and click the left mouse button 4 Incase of code code and quotation quotations links you are prompted to select a common relation that applies
296. ints to keep in mind If code A is linked to code B using relation R then every Network View that contains code A and code B will necessarily include the R link between the two Furthermore as only one link can exist between any two nodes at any given time no Network View will display any other relation between those two nodes Compare the figure below with Figure 85 above Any two nodes appearing in both Network Views will have the same link if any The positions of the nodes or how they are displayed may of course differ A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Node Types The node icon and label for codes The node icon for memos A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 obtained help soon contest contest Intensity high contest COnSEQUENCE el temporary relief strategy i t Sensation present interv Cond T interyCond strategy Reading a book strategy Fi not yet known Taking pills a Figure 87 This network view is consistent with the partial network view in Figure 85 above Untrained first aider The following object classes can be displayed and edited as nodes within the Network Editor The display characteristics of the nodes can be altered in a variety of ways Codes as Nodes Codes are probably the most prominent objects in ATLAS ti networks They provide the main ingredients for models and theories Memos as Nodes Memos in networks are often an important supplemen
297. ion 107 Textual level 25 107 Theory import 290 Theory Transfer scaled 243 Thesaurus 211 Tools Overview 35 Topological Layout 231 Transitive relations 164 U Unicode 12 399 Unify 291 Unlink codes 125 Unlink Codes 125 User management 264 Add new user 266 administrator 264 Change name 268 Change password 267 Change privileges 267 Classroom setup 264 Load user database 268 Relaxed User Management 269 Remove user 267 Save user database 268 User database 265 User editor 265 User Management Automatic Logon 268 V Venn diagrams 164 Vertices 211 VISE Principle 3 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Visualization 3 W Wallpaper 45 Welcome Wizard 60 61 Within operator 165 Word 30 Word Cruncher 22 37 Word Wrap 349 X XML 20 Create Reports 318 Export amp Import 304 Export HU 306 Limitations 307 Export Memos 305 Folder 322 343 Import Memos 306 MSXML parser 319 Path 343 Stylesheets 322 Transfer Codes 122 XML Converter 20 38 318 Samples 323 XML Generator 38 XSLT 322 Z Zoom 11 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Index e 411
298. ions at the top of the list 6 Browse through the quotations assigned to this code by using the NEXT and PREVIOUS buttons in the Quotation Manager 7 Modify or delete misaligned or inappropriate quotations See Modifying Quotations on page 115 and Deleting Quotations on page 115 Preparing Documents optimized for Auto Coding The following instructions are useful for preparing transcriptions of focus group sessions questionnaires or interviews Such data usually contains different speakers sections The hints given here also apply for other documents that include sections you wish to identify for auto coding It would be tedious to code speaker or section turns manually Two things are needed a good marker for which to search and once the marker is found a reliable identification of the unit sentence paragraph to be coded Insert easily identifiable markup in the text to let the auto coding pattern matcher do this for you For proper markup a little A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 154 e Special Tools knowledge regarding the auto coder s search procedure is helpful In combination with a few formatting rules documents can be created that can readily support auto coding quite a bit For the auto coding tool to yield useful results it is necessary to properly structure the source text using unique identifiers Simple examples are e P or lt Peter gt for a respondent with the name Peter e 7 01
299. iple of Reversed Polish Notation RPN This sounds complicated but it is actually quite easy RPN invented by Polish mathematician Lukasiewicz does not require parentheses to control the priority of operators nor does it require any other characters like commas periods etc Every click produces a meaningful result and it is impossible to create syntactically wrong queries Good ol RPN and it s still working Operands First Operators Next The most important point to understand about RPN is the order in which operands and operators of a search expression are entered Using RPN operands codes etc are entered first followed by one or more operators This is an unusual method for most of us who are familiar with notations where operators are placed between the operands as in 3 5 Most calculators use this type of notation also called infix notation Infix notation good for Two aspects must be distinguished how we read expressions and reading how we formulate them with a point and click language The infix notation is usually easier to read but the postfix notation is far easier to use when creating queries using mouse controlled direct manipulation user interfaces like Windows Postfix notation good for clicking An Arithmetic Example Here are some simple arithmetic examples using an RPN calculator Arithmetic expression RPN expression Note No parentheses are needed in expressions using RPN n
300. irect cycles Cleaning Up While the situation of importing homonyms is controlled by the conflict resolution strategy the system cannot automatically handle unwanted synonyms Especially when importing codes and networks created by others into a non empty HU such synonyms e g man and mankind might clutter the name space of codes You can clean up by merging the synonyms see Merging Codes on page 125 Scaled Theory Transfer Besides the two strategies described above you can use the HU merge procedure to gain more control over what components are to be transferred Code lists with rich representations of codes can be extracted from a given theory template HU Network Views memos and or PDs may be included This method also has the advantage that it is a one pass procedure and there is no need to create extra files containing the codes or networks to be transferred Unlike the Semantic Network Migration method described above it also allows you to assert more control over how conflicts with existing codes and links are to be resolved For details please refer to Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 289 Merging Codes using the Network Editor The essentials of merging codes have already been described elsewhere see Merging Codes on page 125 Below we describe how merging codes can be accomplished in a Network Editor The figures below illustrate that the merging of two or more codes is not a tri
301. is a standard feature that can be found in most word processing programs In Word for instance this is an option that can be selected in the data type field when saving documents under a different name Save as We recommend storing documents as rich text right away even if they are currently plain text and do not contain any formatting Handling Legacy Documents Applications that do not offer dynamic wrapping depend on text data wherein every line is delimited with a hard return at the end of every line This was also the case in previous versions of ATLAS ti However in order to have something like a paragraph an artificial and proprietary delimiter was needed Usually hard returns are used as paragraph delimiters but in ATLAS ti 4 2 this was already used for line feeds ATLAS ti 4 2 treated a double hard return in other words an empty line as the end of a paragraph All texts making use of paragraphs e g for semi automatic selection and auto coding needed to be formatted in this old paragraph model Now ATLAS ti uses dynamic wrapping and allows textual documents to be formatted with hard returns only appearing as paragraph delimiters The old paragraph model has become Primary Documents e 73 fe PaA For newly assigned legacy documents activate old paragraph handling 74 e Primary Documents obsolete You may now wonder what will happen with the legacy documents from previous ve
302. is de linearized broken down into pieces that are then reconnected making it possible to traverse from one piece of data to another piece of data regardless of their original positions Note The term hyperspace is a science fiction term describing a method of high speed travel using higher dimensional space holes as shortcuts When using the hypertext function in ATLAS ti you travel through a hyperspace of data overcoming distances between lines of text or data segments instantaneously using ATLAS ti hyperlinks as shortcuts through space The procedures described so far have focused on the creation of code networks Direct linking of data segments quotations to other data segments offers similar flexibility in choosing and defining relations Almost all of the editing functions described for code networks can also be used when connecting two or more quotations Note Code code and quote quote links are the only types of network connections that allow you to assign a name to the connection that appears on the line or arrow that runs between the objects A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Hypertext e 251 Representing the Rhetoric of Text While a code offers fast access to sets of data segments it defines only a simple relation between them namely equivalence Hyperlinks which directly Py relate data segments K mene Miter Am fea Fi hr Penre ee er Basted f pi 4 Hawt express more
303. is linked to the quotation visualized by a red bracket Of course the quotation does not need to be free h yey Z 3 Bible Sg Bible f Wata fae Waters iaaa 136 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Specialties Merging Quotations Dragging a bracket onto another bracket creates a new hyperlink between the two see Creating Hyperlinks in Margin Area on page 257 However by holding down the CTRL key you can merge the quotations gh Horror vot es Fire za water 2 Smoke 1 10 lt supports gt Figure 44 Merge Quotations Dragging the red quotation gh Horror a 2 Fire TH wW ater v F Smoke 1 10 lt supports gt Figure 45 Merge Quotations About to drop on the black quotation After confirming the merge dialog box appears Choose VES to change the boundary of the selected quotation rhe merge target to cover all merged quotations Choose WO to leave the boundary unchanged you can see the result bith Sot gH water mc 2 Fire 1 10 lt supports gt Figure 46 Merge Quotations Dropped and Merged Note how all objects code Fire and a hyperlink associated with the red quotation have migrated to the merged quotation The former blue bracket has changed its color to red which is meaningless Sorting and Filtering A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 What are the main strengths of a computer According to com
304. is not an embeddable object an icon representation is inserted and displayed instead Note Inserting an object from a file is not the same as INSERT INSERT FILE which appends the usually textual contents of a file at the cursor position If you choose to link the object it will also be inserted but with a significant difference Linked objects A linked object keeps a reference to the original file When you edit the original Excel table the changes will be written to the Excel file and will be updated in ALL documents where this object was embedded Because of this in place activation is not available and the original application is launched when double clicking the object An object inserted without checking the link option is fully embedded and has no reference to the file from which it originated Editing this object will only modify this copy of the object One Object One Character Every object is treated as a single character when it comes to selecting and coding it in ATLAS ti Note You cannot enter an object in order to select and code parts of it e g a single cell inside an Excel spreadsheet or a graphic inside a PowerPoint slide However for some objects selecting a more suitable format from the list presented by Paste Special see also Embed an Object via Copy and Paste Special on page 83 may be the solution For instance an Excel table is also offered as Rich Text It won t look as ne
305. istributed teams are also discussed in this chapter Working with ATLAS ti involves users files and computers An ATLAS ti project can be as simple as a single person working with a single Hermeneutic Unit HU and a few primary documents PDs on a single stand alone computer It can be as complex as large teams working on different computers in a network or even at different geographic locations working on several projects at once moving files between users computers and networks merging partial projects into compiled projects and many other conceivable constellations If you have a single project work on a single computer and have no plans to share your work with others you do not need to concern yourself too much with elaborate project management issues Keeping in mind a few simple rules is sufficient to make your work with ATLAS ti smooth and hassle free Please see Scenario for a simple project approach Project management however becomes an issue if your projects and your work environment are more complex than this most basic scenario What s in a project In short an ATLAS ti project consists of an HU and its associated document files ATLAS ti project management involves an understanding of how ATLAS ti handles and accesses documents see How ATLAS ti Handles Documents on page 93 It concerns itself with ways to fine tune data source access for a maximum of robustness and flexibility but first and foremost
306. items are displayed in the results pane Quer LCJLSJLP Recale Undo Redo J AND domestic fights business traveller domestic flights amp business traveller Result Note In the results pane those members of the families are listed either PDs codes or memos that match the current query 7 Click the SUPER FAMILY button to store the query as a Super family 8 You are prompted for a name Accept the default or enter a new name for instance Business travelers on domestic flights 9 The new Super Family is displayed in the family browser with a red version of the family icon If icons are turned off the list entry is colored red Possible Family Combinations You can combine families in numerous and complex ways to form Super Families In the following section some common combinations are presented Once you are familiar with the tool you can venture out and try out more complex combinations For the following descriptions of the four operators looking at the Venn diagram see Figure 64 Boolean queries depicted as Venn diagrams may be helpful 206 e Family Life A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 OR XOR AND 1 NOT A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Super Family tool offers four operators that can be used to combine families The four operators are also known as Boolean operators OR XOR AND and NOT Combining two families with the OR operator yields those items that are m
307. ith every code description Summary Lists all codes including the label groundedness and density count List sorted by 3 options Includes scrollable lists that sort the codes alphabetically by number of text references 1 e groundedness and connectivity 1 e number of code neighbors 1 e theoretical density Full description section including comments All codes that have comments are listed in an extra section The summary has links to these descriptions for all commented codes Memos General Primary Docs Codes Memos Families Network views Include memos section Define options For the display of memos in HTML code Include Bullets Full text Do not wrap lines 394 e Reference A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Include memos section Includes information about memos Bullets Displays a specific icon with every memo description Full text Includes the complete text body Do not wrap lines Keeps the line paragraph structure of the memo intact Families General Primary Docs Codes Memos Families Network views Include Families section Define options For the display of Families in HTML code Bullets Include PO families Code families Memo Families Include families section Includes information about families Bullets Displays a specific icon with every family description Include 3 options Includes PD code and or memo families Network Views General Primary Docs Codes
308. ject 78 e Primary Documents ATLAS ti 5 0 introduces the ability to edit textual PDs after they have been assigned and possibly coded What sounds trivial was maybe the most challenging issue in the development of version 5 Objectives One of the core ideas of ATLAS ti is that PDs are shared and part of an archive As you already know all quotations codes and memos are actually not parts of PDs but are transparent layers that are stored within the HU Because of this editing is blocked by default when you view a PD in ATLAS ti However it may be necessary to edit the content of a PD For instance transcribed texts are often loaded with typos and other A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 writing errors Documents might not be complete and text may need to be added after they were assigned fot np Edit mode needs to be intentionally switched on for textual PDs Click the pencil to bois a Le l This section introduces available editing options and the issues to enter edit mode be considered when editing PDs Two versions of a coded text are shown in the figure below one version before and one version after an editing session The added text is colored blue 3 One of the core ideas of ATLAS ti is that primary og basic concept documents are shared and part of an archive As you already know all quotations codes and memos are actually not parts of primary documents but are transparent layers that are stored within t
309. ject or a memo s content is displayed in the text pane below the list pane You may edit the text right there or you might prefer to open a full fledged text editor For minor changes working in the Object Manager s text pane is quite comfortable There are several ways to save a changed comment With General Preferences set to Accept changes in browser silently an object s comment or a memo s body is saved automatically whenever you select another object in the list This is a quick way to save However you will also change the text if you click on another item accidentally If you are not using the Quick Save option you need to confirm saving the comment memo when selecting another object in the list 50 e Main Workspace The HU Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Changes can be explicitly saved at any time by pressing the Ctrl S key combination or via EDIT ACCEPT from the Object Manager s menu Primary Document Manager One document is selected in the PD Manager Its comment is displayed in the text pane A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 For many operations the Primary Document Manager is easier to handle than the drop down list For instance using drag amp drop files can be assigned directly and very efficiently to an HU see Assigning Documents using Drag amp Drop on page 68 The PD Manager also allows drag amp drop rearranging of the documents see Rearranging Primary Document
310. l In ATLAS ti enter edit mode within the PD area or in the memo or comment area choose PASTE SPECIAL and select the Excel object The list of formats available in the PASTE SPECIAL dialog may also contain other non object formats Embed an Object via Insert Object Enter edit mode and select EDIT INSERT INSERT OBJECT from the main menu The Insert Object dialog opens and offers all object types installed on your computer If you don t have Excel installed you will not be offered an Excel object Not all of the objects listed in the dialog make sense inside a PD You can create a new object PRT te or insert an existing object ict Type C from a file An explanation id as Create New Microsoft Wiord Bild for the selected object type Microsoft Word Dokument y MIDI Sequence is displayed at the bottom of Create fam File kage the dialog Paint Shop Pro 8 Image Paintbrush Picture Srapehot D atei Video Clip Display As Icon Result Inserts a new Pamntbrush Picture object into your Ls document Figure 29 The Insert Object Dialog A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Primary Documents e 83 Create a new object To create a new object select the object type and click OK By default the option Create new object is activated Load an object from a file Activate the option Create from file in the Insert Object dialog Click OK and browse for the file to be inserted If the file s content
311. l folders serve a similar purpose By not assigning file references via absolute paths projects and users have their private repositories and changes to the underlying hardware do not affect the ability to retrieve the right files This is done through two special path variables HUPATH and TBPATH The HUPATH is the folder in which the HU is stored While there is one HUPATH for every opened HU there is only one TBPATH which is explicitly set by the user Special path HUPATH Unlike the Windows special folders or the TBPATH the HUPATH is relative to a specific HU and cannot be set explicitly It exists for the HU once it has been saved to a specific location It has no meaning outside a given HU When documents are assigned as PDs special paths are used whenever possible To activate this feature the Use Special Paths option must be checked in GENERAL PREFERENCES When you save an HU as D Data ATLASti ProjectX About Paths hpr5 it will set its HUPATH variable to Primary Documents e 97 i TBPATH is user relative It affects ALL projects on which the user works It is set via GENERAL PREFERENCES 98 e Primary Documents Ds Data ATLASti ProjectX When you later assign a document to this HU and this document is stored below this path ATLAS ti will replace absolute path components with the HUPATH variable DNData ATLASti ProjectX Interviews Interview 1 rtf becomes lt HUPATH gt VnterviewsVnterview L rtf By repl
312. lations 258 Hyperlinks 22 Hypertext 251 Creating Using the network editor 257 Creating links 255 List method 255 Target anchor 256 Traversing Editing link comments 260 In place 259 Margin area 259 I Images 30 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Import network 242 Incremental Search 50 Indexing 32 In Place Editing 82 Integration 3 Intension 164 Intensional Codes 177 In Vivo coding 119 K Knowledge Workbench 35 L Layout 230 Semantic 381 Topological 231 Legacy documents 73 Line Paragraph Numbers 43 Link comments 260 Links 33 211 Locales 22 Mailing list 327 Margin Area 11 43 117 125 128 259 260 Context menus 370 Font 371 Object menus 371 MCI 30 Memo Editor 15 129 Memo families 203 Memos Definition 32 Preferences 346 Types 132 Use as PDs 133 vs Codes 128 Memos 128 Merge Codes 125 243 380 Merge HUs 289 Link conflict resolution 292 Merge Wizard 293 Report 296 Scaled codes 293 Source HU 290 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Specify source HU 293 Stock strategies 291 294 Strategy 290 Add 290 Choosing 294 Ignore 291 Tuning 295 Unify 291 Unify PDs 291 Target HU 290 Using Ignore Families 291 Mind maps 211 MSXML 319 version 320 Multi authoring 262 Multimedia 30 N Named links 212 Network Merge Codes 380 Network Editor 16 37 113 213 215 Change Relation 226 Codes Extended label 385 Color 239 Display Grid 384 Drag amp Drop 160 Drag text from Word 228 Edit Hyperlink 261
313. lect CODES MISCELLANEOUS IMPORT CODES XML from the main menu 2 A file dialog window opens Select the XML file and click the OPEN button The code list is immediately imported and displayed in the Code Manager If conflicts occur you receive a warning and have the option to only overwrite the code for which a conflict was detected or all codes Exporting and Importing Memos in XML Exporting Memos You can export selected memos or all memos Export amp Import e 305 jA y gy Export HU to XML Apply Style Sheet ANIL Converter 306 e Export amp Import To export all memos 1 Choose CODES MISCELLANEOUS EXPORT MEMOS XML from the main menu 2 In the output target dialog select File To export one or more selected memos 1 Open the Memo Manager and select one or more memo s 2 Choose EXPORT SELECTED MEMOS XML from the Memo Manager s MISCELLANEOUS menu 3 Select File as the output destination Importing Memos 1 Select MEMOS MISCELLANEOUS IMPORT MEMOS XML from the main menu 2 A file dialog window opens Select the XML file and click the OPEN button If a naming conflict occurs you can choose to overwrite all memos to NOT overwrite the memo for which a conflict was detected or to never overwrite an existing memo Exporting the Hermeneutic Unit in XML Instead of just exporting a small selected part of your project you can also export the entire HU as an XML file You may exclude
314. les can also be used as Primary Documents PDs we mainly use the terms text and textual level regardless of the specific media that 1s involved Data and Project Management You must prepare your data and set up your project before you begin textual level work There are several issues to consider at this point e Where will you store your data e Do you think you might have to move your project at some point e Should data be edited after it is assigned to ATLAS ti e Do you need data to be shared among team members Consult Project Management on page 270 for further detail Main Concepts e 25 Textual Level Work Textual level research activities include segmenting PDs into quotations adding comments to respective passages note making annotating and coding selected PD passages secondary text materials annotations and memos to facilitate their retrieval The act of comparing noteworthy segments leads to a creative conceptualization phase that involves higher level interpretive work and theory building Text Structure Text A SN we Va S The overall process of text AN Pae a interpretation with i Le gears ATLAS ti proceeds from text to structure to text Figure 7 Text Structure Text ATLAS ti assists you in all of these tasks and provides a comprehensive overview of your work as well as rapid search retrieval and browsing functions Within ATLAS ti initial ideas often
315. lf The same restrictions for file types apply as in Reference to PD Note that the size of the WWW page increases significantly with the in lined inclusion of PDs Quotations Only the number of quotations is included Codes Displays the codes used for coding the PD Memos Displays memos titles used for the PD Use absolute paths for test runs Check this option when testing the WWW page on your local computer Absolute paths to all PDs are included in the links created Make sure to uncheck this box when you are creating the final page to be uploaded to the server When unchecked all paths will be removed assuming that the PD files are then located in the same location as the WWW page itself Without this option all PDs accessed from the WWW page created would have to be copied to the HTML directory to be displayed properly when needed Reference e 393 Don t wrap inlined text Use the line breaks of the original text If unchecked line breaks are removed in order to let the HTML browser apply dynamic wrapping Codes General Primary Docs Codes Memos Families Network views Define options For the display of codes Include codes section HTML code Include Bullets Summary List sorted alphabetically List sorted by text references List sorted by connectivity Full description section including comment Include codes section Includes information about codes Bullets Displays a specific icon w
316. lick on the UNBUNDLE Button When all files have been copied to their respective locations a message pops up informing you that the unbundling process is finished Every file that is replaced during the installation of the bundle is backed up The name of the backup files is backup of Note If you unbundle the bundle file twice all backup files are replaced a A two level backup strategy is in effect The files are first backed For all files up then the back up files are also backed up So you might replaced during experience quite an increase of files However given that disk installation of a bundle space is not a big problem these days we have decided to be more a backup copy is generous in regard to being able to revert to a previous state If you created find that everything worked well you can remove all backup of files 288 e Project Management A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sty oe Optimizing Paths greatly supports Copy Bundle Extending Existing Projects Extending projects by assigning more documents should never be a problem as long as the project setup conditions regarding the use of special paths etc are still met Optimizing Projects for ATLAS ti 5 0 Optimizing projects mainly involves making references to documents more flexible in order to ease project migration and extensibility Optimizing is especially helpful for projects containing absolute path references It is quite likely t
317. lies to options like replacing and moving codes in the margin area as described in Margin Drag amp Drop on page 135 Data Source Lock Protection Toggles ATLAS ti s system for controlling access to data sources with the help of lock LOK files As this mechanism can create some performance overhead it can be turned off in situations where only one person will need access to documents Length of HU pick list Specifies the maximum number of Hermeneutic Units appearing in the last recently used list at the bottom of the File menu or in the HU Browser Display Welcome Wizard Displays the Welcome screen offering a few start up options May be changed in the Welcome screen Accept changes in browser silently Select this option if modifications in the text area of browsers 1 e all Object and Family Managers should automatically be saved when selecting another item Play sounds Activates the use of system sounds Store preferences Preferences are made permanent across sessions All settings are stored in file user ini when leaving the session Use right to left setting Activates special user interface features right text alignment scrollbars left mirroring of tree and list views for RTL languages such as Hebrew or Arabic Show Tip of the Day Display the tip of the day window when starting ATLAS ti Validate PDs on HU load If active this checks the synchronized status of all PDs upon start up of the HU When turned
318. like Male Female Age under 25 Age between 26 35 and so on this option allows you to easily assign suitable attributes to the objects selected in an Object Manager Assigning Families to Objects 1 Select any number of objects in the Object Manager 2 Choose EDIT FAMILIES ASSIGN FAMILIES from the menu Family Life e 195 3 From the list select one or more families to which the selected objects are to be assigned 4 Click OK Using Families as Filters One added value of families is that you can use them as filters For example if you have created a code family including only Abstract codes you can use this family as a filter to reduce the total number of codes displayed in the drop down list in the Code Manager and the margin area If a family is activated as a filter it is displayed in bold letters in the Family Manager In addition the background color in the Object Manager and drop down list changes The active filter is also indicated in the filter field of the status bar in the Object Manager IE Codes Edit Miscellaneous Gutpuk View F Bigh amily io 62 Chemistry 8 Ph E 4 I x 43 sn Horror Ta l F Magic stuff 13 Mame 2 Numerology 5 SA Horror 1 7 1 8 Horror 2 6 1 Horror 3 5 1 g Horror o4 410 1 Horror 2 46 1 gH Horror 965 7 1 Horror 63 5 1 i Horror o4 410 1 1 7 al Horror 5 7 1
319. lings The SIBlings operator finds all quotations that are connected to the selected code or any other descendants of its parents Example All quotations coded with Horror 4 or any other value of Horror This works because all values of Horror have a common ancestor Dimension Horror Note Only codes can be used as operands for semantic operators Attitude Positive sibling Negative Attitude Attitude Love Kindness Hatred Anger indicatecdsoy Qi oa 33 4 a5 Q6 Q7 as Figure 65 A hierarchy of concepts suitable for semantic retrieval With such a network of codes the following queries would make sense Q1 to Q8 quotations SUB Positive Attitude gt Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 SUB Negative Attitude gt Q6 Q7 Q8 SUB Attitude gt Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Proximity Operators Proximity describes the spatial relation between quotations Quotations can be embedded in one another one may follow another etc The operators in this section exploit these relationships They require two operands as their arguments They differ from the other operators in one important aspect proximity operators are non commutative This property makes their usage a little more difficult to learn Non commutativity requires a certain input sequence for the operands While A OR B is equal to B OR A this does not hold for any of the proximity operators A FOLLOWS B is not equal to B FOLLOWS A When building a
320. ll associated material is then activated automatically 28 e Main Concepts A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The lowest level of an HU contains the PDs followed closely by the quotations as selections of PDs Codes refer to quotations Memos you meet them everywhere The AU is the spider in the web Hermeneutic Unit Super Codes Families Networks indicated by ous ted IN 5 BB e B Quotations supports Primary documents Figure 9 The hierarchy of objects inside a Hermeneutic Unit An HU can become a highly connected entity a dense web of primary data associated memos and codes and interrelations between the codes and the data To find your way through this web ATLAS ti provides powerful browsing and editing tools Primary Documents PDs represent data sources A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 PDs represent the text graphical audio and or video materials that you wish to interpret The content of PDs is usually stored in data files on your computer PDs are usually created by assigning files to an HU You can however also assign a memo as a PD You can assign as many documents as needed for a given HU Note we make a distinction between a PD and its data source file memo However unless the distinction is an important issue to consider we often speak of PDs as if they are identical to the data files to which they refer See Assigning Primary Documents on page 65 for details
321. lly created by the system Potential conflicts are clearly indicated The Copy Bundle function can be conveniently used to backup projects and to move projects between computers For more information see Copy Bundle Migrate and Backup Projects on page 282 There is no longer a need to re create the original directory structures or to deal with batch files when moving an ATLAS ti project Special Paths In order to facilitate data management and the migration of projects between different computers the use of special paths was further developed in ATLAS ti 5 Special paths are abstract paths which are independent of the concrete path names that exist on different computers ATLAS ti 5 offers two special paths the TBPATH and the HUPATH Depending on the project setup the use of either one of the special paths or the use of absolute paths is recommended see the chapter on Project Management on page 270 Quick Access to Folders Using the EXTRAS EXPLORER menu item you can conveniently access folders relevant for your work using Windows Explorer These include the sample projects folder the currently opened HU folder your default textbank folder the user system folder where files like the search library the relation types or the stop list used by the Word Cruncher are stored the service pack folder or Windows My Documents folder Storage Memos now reside in the same container file as the H
322. lue 5 for this case Note Variable scaled codes are ignored in the computation of the code family variable Treatment of Primary Document Families Each case quotation has its primary document index automatically generated by the SPSS export function The value of a quotation that is part of a primary document that is a member of a primary document family will be computed as a 1 or 0 For example take a look at the two PD families Bible texts and Content grafic in the provided sample HU PD1 2 and 5 are bible texts hence members of the PD family Bible texts and PD4 is a graphical document therefore a member of the PD family Content graphic The SPSS syntax file contains information to create the following two variables PF3 Bible texts and PF4 Content grafic which are computed as follows PF3 Bible texts COMPUTE PF3 0 IF PD 1 or PD 2 or PD 5 PF3 1 PF4 Content grafic COMPUTE PF4 0 IF PD 4 PF4 1 Missing Values Missing values are only computed for scaled variables A sequence of blanks depending on the format width of the variable is inserted in the data matrix for any missing value A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Creating SPSS Output To 1 2 create SPSS output From the HU editor s main menu select EXTRAS EXPORT TO SPSS The Send Output to dialog window opens Select a target location Next
323. ly with a base of extremely loyal users all over the globe ATLAS ti has since become one of the most prominent tools for qualitative data analysis Before the advent of ATLAS ti 5 in 2004 we provided a number of service packs that already greatly extended the functionality of the software Among the major changes was the introduction of fine grained audio and video analysis in 1998 This added functionality in itself would have justified a major version upgrade Instead all users received this significant extra benefit for free Acknowledgements 6 e Introduction It is near impossible to draw up a full list of people who have contributed to the current state of the software However I would like to thank as many as I can My very first thanks goes to Renata Tesch in memoriam for her encouraging support to make ATLAS ti a generally available and professional tool in the early days of this undertaking She died in 1994 at her home in Desert Hot Springs And without having initiated project ATLAS back in 1989 ATLAS ti would not exist Thanks to Heiner Legewie of Technical University Berlin My special thanks go to our beta testers who intensively worked with the new system s prototype and gave valuable feedback for more than a year Thanks to Carsten who has been developing for Scientific Software since 1997 He has done a tremendous job Without the help of the following people this manual would not be as it is NOW S
324. m within this window open the multimedia file you wish to use with ATLAS ti If this does not work there are problems with processing multimedia files via MCI Length Recommendations Multimedia file size does not pose a problem for ATLAS ti Megabyte audio and Gigabyte video files can be assigned and analyzed However certain issues should be considered regarding the length duration of a multimedia clip When creating multimedia quotations the start and end points are often selected using the mouse and the track bar of the media tool see Navigating Multimedia and Selecting Segments on page 109 The length of the track bar resembles the length of the multimedia clip The track bar can only be as wide as your computer screen whether your audio file is 30 seconds or two hours long Therefore when using very long clips as PDs it might be difficult to mark quotations of short duration In addition to the mouse and track bar the media tool buttons and the arrow keys can be used However the resolution is dependent on the overall size of the clip For instance a 15 minute audio file allows a resolution of 0 1 seconds while the resolution for a two hour audio clip is second If you need fine grained resolution when creating quotations chop a big file into smaller clips Note The resolution of multimedia documents also depends on the compression scheme codec used when creating the multimedia output Higher compressi
325. magic 1 3 is part of is part of Figure 68 Magic network Step by step instruction 1 Double click code MAGIC Only one quotation is directly referenced by this code so one hit is displayed in the results pane 2 Click the SUB operator The results list fills up significantly 21 hits 3 Double click code BLACK MAGIC Result Nothing 4 Select the NOT operator Result Everything 121 hits 5 Select the AND operator Of course 21 hits The feedback pane displays SUB Magic amp NOT Black Magic Note Example 2 at first glance may not seem like a particularly clever query But with expanding analysis it could be that more and more quotations are assigned to the code BLACK MAGIC If the query was saved as a Super Code and reused at a later point in time this would result in a different set of quotations see Super Codes on page 176 for further detail Special Tools e 175 E Distance in lines E w Intelligent Super Codes compute their quotations on demand 176 e Special Tools Example 3 Creating a query using proximity operators Task Show me all quotations coded with MAGIC or any of its sub terms that are embedded within larger contexts coded with HORROR 4 7 The first angel sounded and there followed 2 Horror 4 hal and fire mingled with blood and they were cast upon the earth Etats lanes est M Ana gaia ss was burnt up and all green grass
326. margin area Select HYPERLINK CREATE LINK SOURCE from the main menu Select HYPERLINK CREATE HYPERLINKS PER LIST from the main menu The relation menu pops up Select multiple target quotations from the list and click on the OK Button The Relation menu pops up Select one relation If not all target quotations should be connected to the source quotation using the same relation you need to change the relations in a second step see Modifying Hyperlinks on page 257 Creating Hyperlinks in Context Other than the list method described above linking quotations in context not only allows you to connect previously generated quotations but you can also mark new data passages to become part of the star or chain in the process These passages then also become registered as quotations To create a hyperlink in context 1 g 2 7 Mark a passage or select an existing quotation Right click on the selected passage quotation and select CREATE LINK SOURCE from the context menu Alternatively you can click on the Source Anchor button Xo in the primary document toolbar Mark another passage or select an already existing quotation to which the source is to be connected Right click on the target quotation and select CREATE LINK TARGET from the context menu Alternatively click on the Target Anchor button va in the primary document toolbar The Relation menu pops up Select the type of relation to be used to connec
327. mary Documents Currently only RTF and plain text documents can be edited under ATLAS ti s control An assigned Word document doc cannot be edited To be able to edit a document created with Word you need to save it from Word as a rich text document rtf Internal Error Message Reporting Bugs A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Once in a while you might see a message like the following Warning ATLAS ti Internal Error Keyboard Interrupt When reporting this error to bugsreport atlasti com please write down whak vou Were actually doing right now For instructions on how to report an error please consult chapter Trouble Shooting in the ATLAS ti manual or online help Figure 136 ATLAS ti Internal Error Although this is not always a dramatic issue you should contact support at bugsreport atlasti com if this happens occasionally Please be kind and supply information about what you were doing at the time this error occurred coding a text passage deleting a memo etc User feedback is an integral part of ATLAS ti s evolution and improvement For more information on how to send an error report consult the following chapter Most errors that occur during the operation of ATLAS ti are displayed and written to a special log file named ERROR LOG This text file is located in the user system directory The contents of this file can only be interpreted by the developers of the program and 1s of no use for oth
328. menu text in the Relation Editor see The Relation Editor on page 235 By selecting either LABEL 1 LABEL 2 or the MENU LABEL you can decide which label is displayed in the network view BOXED LABELS Switches between plain text display and boxed display of link labels ROTATED LABELS Displays labels rotated e g alongside the link between two objects FULL IMAGE FOR PDS Displays miniature thumbnail versions of graphical PDs For an application example see Network Views as Graphical Tables of Contents on page 249 QUOTATION VERBOSITY SUBMENU The following options control the amount of information displayed for quotations ID ONLY Displays only the quotation ID e g 1 27 NAME Reference e 385 4uto Color Mode Nodes Background Nodes amp Background Light ray 386 e Reference Displays the ID plus the name of the quotation COMMENT All of the above plus the quotation comment FULL TEXT All of the above plus the complete content of the quotation applies to textual quotations only Be careful with long text passages For non textual quotations the media type is displayed SET FONTS SUBMENU NODES Sets the font for nodes LINKS Sets the font for links SET COLORS SUBMENU Colors for nodes affect code nodes only AUTO COLOR MODE Code nodes are automatically assigned a color according to their groundedness and density See Auto Color Mode on page 239 for
329. mily Table Please choose Field delimiter O CS Semicolon Separated values Excel compatible O TXT Tab Delimited Text File Foc cont 4 Finally specify the output target as usual see Output Destinations on page 311 for details If installed the File amp Run option opens the table in Excel immediately If Excel does not display the table correctly e g only one column containing all values try the alternative field delimiter Preparing and Importing a PD Family Table Create the following columns when manually preparing a PD Family table for import from a spreadsheet application such as Excel First column Use Documents as the header and a PD number in subsequent rows Second column Use header Name and enter a name for the PD in each row The next one or two columns As already mentioned above the document path is stored twofold when a table is created by ATLAS ti The actual path at the time of export column Path and the path at the time of the assignment of the document to the HU column Origin The latter can also contain special path components lt HUPATH gt lt TBPATH gt that will be correctly resolved when imported into ATLAS ti When reading a table into ATLAS ti the Path column has more or less descriptive character as the Origin is always preferred Path can be omitted when creating a table manually Column Origin is sufficient and may either be absolut
330. ming convention see Scaled vs Dichotomous Codes on page 300 are added during the merge process their values are invalidated in case of name clash The reason for this is that imported codes with an identical name are automatically renamed using a number suffix Note that before applying the SPSS job generation feature on the resulting HU such codes would need to be manually renamed How to Merge Hermeneutic Units When merging two HUs the Merge Wizard guides you through the procedure In the first step the source HU is selected Next a merge strategy is chosen and possibly fine tuned To merge HUs 1 Load the target HU It is advisable to save it under a different name so that you don t corrupt the original file in case something goes wrong 2 From the HU Editor s main menu select TOOLS MERGE WITH HU Alternatively you can drag an HU onto the HU Editor s caption holding down the CTRL key The Merge Wizard opens guiding you through the merge procedure see Figure 118 Select the source HU The first page of the Merge Wizard displays the current target HU 1 e the one that was loaded first requesting you to enter the source HU s file name Project Management e 293 294 e Project Management Merge Hermeneutic Units Select Source HU x RA Please select the Hermeneutic Unit ta be merged the Source HU into the one that is currently loaded the Target HU Source HU C ProgrammeScientific Softw
331. mode the only tool available is the Enter Edit Mode button The color for highlighting selected text can be specified in the General Preferences Text Editor tab Underline Cut copy paste Italic Bullet Style Bold Enter Edit Mode Allignment left center right 7 BZU va fy Z Shrink Enlarge Font Td Set Font Color Highlight Selected Text E Ss The Primary Document Toolbar Tool Name Description Ze Goto paragraph Jump to the beginning of a specified paragraph Search Opens the search tool oO Free Quotation Creates a free quotation from the selected data segment me Open Coding Enter new codes for the selected data In Vivo Coding Create a code from the selected text TE Code by List Select codes from a list ae Quick Coding Use the active code pa Create Memo Creates a new memo and assigns it to the selected data y Modify Quotation Change the boundaries of a quotation 99 Line Paragraph Numbers Toggle display of paragraph numbers Margin Area Toggle display of the margin area ae Hyperlink Start Make the highlighted selection a hyperlink start anchor ae Hyperlink End Make the highlighted selection a hyperlink end Show Quotations Displays the list of all quotations surrounding the current text cursor position Zoom Zoom in Hold the Ctrl key to zoom out Ft 374 e Reference A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Edit Miscellaneous Mew Family Rename Family Delete Family Use as Filter Edit Comment Op
332. moke of the incense which came wath the prayers of the saints ascended up before God out of theangel s hand Figure 122 Output of hyperlinked quotations The figure above shows the report generated after setting the primary document filter to family content text and the quotation filter to Hyperlinked Only the quotation filter is displayed in the header Restricting Output to Selected Objects Output options for selected objects available from the HU Editor s menus are restricted to a single object For example you can print one code at a time Output options within the Object Manager allow you to select multiple objects and output each of them at the same time For example you can highlight three codes within the Code Manager and create a report that contains quotations coded to each of the three codes Creating Output for the Main Objects 312 e Generating Output Under the main menu for each of the four main object types primary documents quotations codes and memos you can find an output submenu The corresponding object managers contain equivalent output menus However output options within object managers allow A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 for the selection of specific items e g a subset of codes rather than all codes to be included in the output The output options for the four main object types are explained in detail below The Primary Doc
333. mon belief these would be sorting and retrieving data For such techniques to be deployed successfully however the data itself must have attributes by which it can be ordered and filtered A variety of attributes can be used for filtering and sorting data Many The Textual Level Basic Functions e 137 Wty o Click the header to sort the items Click again to reverse the sort entities within an HU can be filtered e g primary documents codes memos and quotations Sorting and filtering primary documents codes memos and quotations can help you gain deeper insight into your data Sorting and filtering can be accessed via the HU editor s menu or the Object Managers menus The columns in the Object Managers report views may also be used for sorting Some options for sorting and filtering are common to all objects while others are dependent on the object s type Sorting Sorting is available via the Object Managers columns and the main menus of the HU Editor and the Managers Sorting in Object Managers Sorting 1s conveniently available in all Object Managers via the list headers while in details view clicking on a header button sorts the list in either ascending or descending order Name Grounded De Fire 12 3 The column used for sorting is displayed in a darker shade The sort direction is visualized by an arrow in the header In the status bar the sort criterion is displayed A double click
334. n The formal attribute affects both the display and processing capabilities of a relation For example All asymmetric relations are symbolized in the Network Editor with an arrow pointing toward the target code C2 Symmetric relations are displayed without arrows A typical transitive relation is the is cause of relation if C1 is cause of C2 and C2 is cause of C3 it follows that C1 1s cause of C3 Transitive relations also enable the semantic retrieval described in chapter The Query Tool on page 160 There are some additional properties that the user may define when creating new relations a comment explaining the relation two labels and a longer text that can be used as alternative display options in the Network Editor the width and color of the line linking two nodes and the preferred layout direction This property affects the layout of a network when ATLAS ti automatically arranges the nodes See Layout Procedures on page 230 Link vs Relation It is important to understand the difference between a relation or a link type and the link itself There is only one is part of relation but potentially many links using it In the Network View below the relation consequence is used only once while the relation strategy 1s used four times The Conceptual Level Networks e 213 Relations are like styles in a word processor Changing the style will change all occurrences of its usage in thi
335. n the auto coding process starts at the current position of the text cursor Segment Size When a matched string is found the size of the segment to be coded can be specified as follows e the Exact Match only e the Word surrounding the matched string e the Sentence surrounding the matched string e the matched string expanded to paragraph boundaries Single Hard Return This option is useful when using the new paragraph model see Handling Legacy Documents on page 73 e the matched string expanded to a paragraph with one or more empty lines as its delimiter Multiple Hard Returns Use this option to code a paragraph when using the old paragraph model or when you need to include the speaker ID in a line preceding a paragraph 1 e all speaker turns separated by an empty line e All Text of the PD containing a match Test your Search Expression The Auto Coding tool creates a new quotation for every matched text passage that is not yet a quotation A potentially large number of inadequate quotations could be produced by an imprecise search For this reason you should always test a search pattern by using the Text Search tool first see The Text Search Tool on page 144 or select the Confirm option and click Skip This test will give an indication if the final search will yield meaningful results The A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 advantage of testing with the Text Sear
336. n a corrupt resultant PD with misaligned quotations While most other objects are unified via their name PDs are treated differently A PD from the source HU is unified with a PD from the target HU if the following conditions hold e Both PDs have the same ID e g P 1 e Both PDs refer to the same data source e Both PDs have the same revision If needed and both PDs data sources are accessible one or both PDs are synchronized e If none of the PDs can access its data source the test uses ID and revision equality only Ignore Instances from ignored object categories are not transferred during the merge process For a finer grained exclusion you can use the ignore families option Ignorant families To exclude specific objects from the transfer like private memos or test codes etc you would create a special family with the name MERGEIGNORE into which you can move items to be excluded This can be done for all three family types Stock merge strategies Four broad predefined stock strategies for the different object types can be selected in the merge dialog Same PDs and Codes Choose this strategy when PDs and codes are mostly the same in the target and source HU PDs and codes are then unified If the source HU contains a few additional PDs or codes these will be added When unifying PDs please observe that PDs are unified by their P numbers P 1 P 2 P 3 etc and not by their names Same PDs
337. n and the referenced file it assumes that it has been edited with another software or that it has been replaced with another version Because such changes bear the danger of corrupting the alignment of quotations loading is rejected However in some situations everything might be in good order If you know for sure that the current state of the document would not render any of the work done in the primary document like quote creation and or coding useless you may force ATLAS ti to accept the modified document as a legal primary document s data source Troubleshooting e 331 only if you are choose DOCUMENTS DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT RESET LAST absolutely sure that the ACCESS INFORMATION This synchronizes the access information modifications do not stored in the HU with the actual access info of the file An example affect the alignment of of an action that does not negatively affect a PD is adding text at existing quotations the end of a data document Note With this powerful option you can make files loadable that could detrimentally affect your work If you detect misaligned quotations after you chose this procedure you know you did something wrong If this has happened you should either leave the HU without saving or correct all misaligned quotations manually The Data Source Monitor The Data Source Monitor can assist in identifying the problem source when a document cannot be loaded It lists the primary document data sour
338. n area and can be used for further coding The default snapshot code names are suffixed with SN lt number gt How to create a snapshot 1 Select a Super Code in the Code Manager 2 From the CODES MISCELLANEOUS menu select option CREATE SNAPSHOT 3 The newly create code appears in the Code Manager Scope of Query You can specify the documents that are to be considered in any subsequent query By default the query s document universe is all PDs currently filtered in the HU Editor Clicking SCOPE opens another window that shows the PDs in the lower left pane and the PD families in the upper left As PD families can be looked at as nominal variables it is easy to pre select all interviews with male interviewees aged between twenty and thirty from small towns A restricted set of operators is offered note that only Boolean operators make sense here and can be used to construct scope selection queries in much the same way as the query itself The scope is not stored as part of a Super Code s query specification When you process the query of a Super Code later the complete textbase is queried by default Special Tools e 179 E E 180 e Special Tools N Scope of Query Sz x Primary Doc Families Query i Content text ite A Textual docs G2 Grafical docs 1j Non bible texts 1 Textual docs p 2 Revelation 9 Gp 3 Indian Camper JEF 4 The sefiroth tree Bp 5 Revelation lt Candidate Quo
339. n be severely handicapped e g scrolling to exact positions We recommend making data sources as small as possible but as large as necessary without breaking passages that belong together Even with many smaller PDs ATLAS ti supports unified processing and fast navigation Preparing Textual Documents Supported Formats ATLAS ti 5 principally handles documents in plain and Rich Text Format RTF See also Character Encoding for Textual Documents on page 398 for additional information Rich Text A Definition RTF Rich Text Format is a proprietary text data format developed and propagated by Microsoft and intended as an industry standard for exchanging documents between different applications It supports such extensions as character formatting bold italic color etc with different fonts and sizes paragraph formatting bullets indentation alignment etc embedded objects graphics tables video etc and more All textual documents are displayed on the basis of Rich Text within ATLAS ti Word HTML and Other File Formats For your convenience we also support the inclusion of documents that are not RTF e g several Office document formats HTML A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 documents can be used directly However not all features are preserved In addition automatically converted documents cannot be edited Plain text documents including Unicode can Still be used Sty Store d
340. n contain Super Codes can contain A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Figure 69 Code hard wired to quotations E Couer x gt a Super codes are displayed in the Code Manager just like regular codes and can be recognized either by a red text color or by their red symbol if images are switched on in the Views menu The list of quotations associated with the Super Code can be displayed with a double click just as for any other code Frequencies density are not indicated in the list view for performance reasons Instead an asterisk replaces the frequency count The reason for this is that a Super Code is dynamic and its density frequency count changes as soon as you modify any of the codes contained in the query of the Super Code For the same reason Super Codes are not displayed in the margin area ATLAS ti 5 however offers the possibility to create a regular code from a Super Code see Snapshot Codes on page 179 Super Codes can be used in code families Network Views and last but not least as powerful operands in queries allowing you to incrementally build complex queries Creating Super Codes To create a Super Code you must have already constructed a query using the Query Tool which is displayed in the term stack Note that because Super Codes are intentional you can also create a valid and useful Super Code with an empty results list which might well change in a later stage of your analysis
341. n page 226 4 Arrange the nodes 5 Save the Network View It will now be listed in the HU s repository of Network Views available via the network button When you save the HU the newly created Network View is also saved To open a Network View on an Object A Network View for an object is created with a selected object and its neighbors Proceed as follows 1 Open an Object Manager e g the Code Manager or the Object Explorer 2 Select one or more objects with a left mouse click 3 In Object Managers you can click the network button For an object selected in the Object Explorer select OPEN NETWORK VIEW from the context menu 4 A Network Editor opens with the selected object and its neighbors Note If multiple objects are selected their neighbors are not automatically included in the network view You can import their neighbors in a subsequent step The nodes are initially placed using the semantic layout procedure but can be rearranged manually More nodes can be added to this Network View using different techniques see Importing Nodes on page 226 for details Note Each time a network is opened on a selected object a new Network View is created There is no need to save it as you can easily display it at any time following the steps above If you rearrange the nodes and want to preserve the new layout or if you add or remove nodes then you need to save it explicitly NETWORK SAVE AS Saved N
342. n toolbar Opening a Hermeneutic Unit The Welcome Wizard opens upon start up unless you have checked the option in General Preferences to always load the last used HU or checked the box in the Welcome Wizard next to Don t display this screen again The Wizard offers options to work with a recently used HU create a new one etc Note No special actions are needed to load an HU created with version 4 2 of ATLAS ti into ATLAS ti 5 Old HUs are automatically converted to the new format Working with ATLAS ti e 61 The HU browser can display files from HUs that are in different 62 e Working with ATLAS ti To open a Hermeneutic Unit using the standard Windows file dialog 1 From the ATLAS ti main menu select FILE OPEN shortcut Ctrl O 2 The Open Hermeneutic Unit file dialog appears The default folder for ATLAS ti projects is the Textbank directory which is assumed to be your main repository for HUs and PDs 3 Select a HU and click OPEN To open a Hermeneutic Unit using the HU Browser The HU Browser is an alternative to the standard file dialog It offers the list of most recently used HUs This list is also offered at the end of the File menu To open the HU Browser 1 Choose FILE BROWSE from the main menu 2 Select a HU and click Load HU 3 The HU will be loaded in a new HU Editor Choose Hermeneutic Unit PARADIGM hpr Load HU New Ed CeiTe atlasti development journal hbprs my CiProgr
343. nd Gold in the target HU and a conflicting link is contrary to exists between the corresponding source HU codes then the link in the target HU would win However if no link exists between two objects in the target HU the link existing in the source HU is transferred This strategy is also pursued for hyperlinks and other connections between objects Target HU Source HU Merged HU ISA 4 ISA fisa Figure 117 Merging HUs Link resolution Migration of General Features The comment of the source HU is appended to the target and the list of co authors in the target is completed with those in the source HU Merge Report A report can optionally be created The report lists all added and unified objects and their old and new names Statistics about the A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Caza A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 source and target HUs and the resulting merged HU are created See Creating and Interpreting Merge Reports on page 296 for details Special Considerations for Quotations Quotations play a special role because they cannot be handled independent of the PDs When PDs are ignored so are quotations When PDs are added quotations are added The interesting case is when PDs are unified you can then select either UNIFY or ADD ADD will then create additional quotations in the target PD even if a matching quotation already exists Merging Scaled Codes When variable codes with their special na
344. nd the problem of encoding the following excurse should shed some light on this issue A plain text file does not by itself contain readable characters as does a piece of hand written paper It contains instructions or codes don t mix these up with the codes you use during coding in fact a sequence of characters represented by a sequence of numbers in the text file To arrive at something readable on the computer screen or printer the computer reads those numbers uses them as an index into a font table and when it finds a character description say at position 166 it takes this character information and instruct the video adapter or printer to paint it Another name for a font table is quite shortly a font Now it gets interesting As a plain text does not carry any information along which font should be used it needs to rely on the user or the operating system having selected the correct font or providing information about specific procedures when determining and displaying the correct characters By the way this is one of the benefits of the Rich Text format that such a text includes all information about which font table is to be used at any position in the text However you still need these fonts installed on your system in order for the text to be displayed correctly While in the early days the number of displayed characters was not overwhelming today s systems are capable of handling all known languages
345. nd when he had opened the All Id Index feg 2 33 Figure 15 The Quotation Manager Single click selects a quotation If you have written a comment for the selected quotation it is displayed in the text pane Single click pause single click or F2 activates in place editing of quotation names Double click A double click on a list entry displays the selected quotation in context Multiple Selection You can select more than one quotation at a time either to delete them to attach codes to open a network on them or to create output Drag amp Drop By dragging one or more quotations onto other quotations you create hyperlinks Colors The color pattern for quotations follows the same rules as for PDs e Quotations that can be activated and displayed are listed in black e Quotations from PDs that are available but cannot be loaded due to a mismatching log file or other problems are displayed in red e Quotations from PDs with inaccessible data source files are displayed in gray A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Main Workspace The HU Editor e 53 Quotation Manager Toolbar Next previous quotation Open network view Toggle view Toggle always on top Create output Edit anaes Bae Rm Xg Create source link H _ Create target link Delete quotation Quotation Manager List Columns Id Name Size Start Density Author Created Modified Ey 3 10 Mick lay i1 i4 1 Andreas 20 08 96 27
346. ned 30 lines Totali Tokeni 327 Types 145 Type Token Ratio 0 44 Count 40 reo on FB On ow Be BO PS oe Figure 58 Wordcruncher internal tool If you have chosen to output the result as an Excel compatible table then you are first prompted for a file name You can either accept the automatically created name or enter an alternate name Next you are asked what to do with the output WordCruncher Word by P x Matix of 56 Words by 6 POs exported 4548 cells Do nothing Run file Run file and remove later If you select the option Do nothing then the frequency count is saved as an Excel compatible CSV file If you select Run file then the file is opened in Excel Select Run file and remove later if you want to view the results in Excel but do not want to keep the file Special Tools e 157 Use Excel for further exploration of the WordCruncher output Of course you need to have Excel installed to be able to see the result EJ Microsoft Excel The Sample _WPDMat CSV B3 A lt A ZR cl S D E 1 words P P2 P3 PS ABADDON 3 ABOUT ACROSS AFFAIRS 6 AFTER 7 AGAINST 8 AHEAD P De Ee e E 1o bi D IEE mm DE mm p a e AE n AE a GA Figure 59 Word frequency count displayed in Excel The Object Crawler Use the Object Crawler to search for text and patterns in HUs PDs and all other entities that make up an HU The sear
347. new user 1 From the User Administration tool s EDIT menu choose New User 2 Enter Account Password Last Name and First Name into the sequence of prompters 3 After completion of the signup procedure the new entry appears in the list of users The remaining Access rights attribute is set to Standard by default 4 Inthe Access rights radio button group select Administrator to change this attribute if needed Remove a User To assure that there is at least one user with administrative privileges in the database any attempts to remove all administrators is rejected You cannot for instance remove the user who is logged in To remove a user 1 Select the user to be removed 2 Select the option Remove user from the menu Change Access Rights Two general access levels can be defined Administrator and Standard The Administrator has all privileges described in this chapter All normal users should be assigned the Standard privilege To change access rights 1 Select the user who s access rights need to be changed 2 Select the option CHANGE ACCESS RIGHTS from the EDIT menu or select the appropriate option in the Access rights group Change the Password You are asked to enter the new password twice for confirmation Collaboration e 267 268 e Collaboration Change Name Useful in case of mistyping or other special circumstances such as getting married
348. ng Object Manager Creating Families Before using a family it must first be created in the Family Manager To create a new family 1 Open the Family Manager for PDs codes or memos 2 Click the Create New Family button or select the menu option FAMILIES NEW FAMILY 3 Enter a name when prompted and click OK If you enter the name of an already existing family you will hear an error sound A message pops up letting you know that the entered name is not accepted 4 Now you can add members and write a preliminary comment describing the family Note The number of items in a family is displayed behind the family s name in parentheses Adding and Removing Members After a family is created adding members is often the next logical step However the assignment and removal of items can be done at any time during the life cycle of a family To add new items to a family To Add New Items to a Family 1 Open the Family Manager for the relevant object type PD code or memo 2 Select a family If you have just created the family it is already selected 3 Select one or more items in the right list pane 4 Click the Add Items button to make the selected items members of the selected family 5 Watch the member list being filled with the items you have just assigned A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 P Add members via drag amp drop from the Object Manager the Object Explorer or the margin area A5 User
349. ng of textual primary documents with annotation margin The kind of objects printed in the margin and the Fonts used depend on the current visual settings in the HU Editor Print header page If checked creates a header info page for the primary document Units of measurement You may use inch mm cm pts and picas Left right top and bottom margin Allows you to change the settings for the page margins Added offset to margin area Adds designated amount of space between the text document and the margin area A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 345 Section Memos General HU Editor Margin Fonts Storage Paths Text Editors PD Printing Memos Memo Titles Global Memo Types C Prompt For title Memo Types The Auto Title template may contain the Commentar Following special characters vod inserts the current date Theory 0 inserts the current date and time Sa inserts the current user 5h inserts the HU s name Open editor on new memo Use as default type Open editor on double click f list quotes Memo Titles Prompt for title Allows you to enter a title manually for a newly created memo Auto title Automatically generates a memo title using the given template The template can be edited Several macro variables can be used in the template d inserts the current date D inserts date and time a inserts the current user h inserts the HU s name Global Memo Types Specify the
350. ng through the primary documents The Network Editor method offers a visual approach to accomplishing this goal A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Create a network view of the hypertext nodes to facilitate this process To edit a hypertext link comment using the margin area 1 Switch the margin area on 2 Open up the properties context menu in the margin area and select OBJECT TYPES HYPERLINKS 3 Pop up the context menu for a hyper link displayed in the margin The quotation inside the primary document pane is highlighted at the same time 4 Choose EDIT LINK COMMENT E Hyper Link Manager HU The Sample Hyper Links Edit Miscellaneous wiew Brg x 4a Source Relation Target Author a 1 10 and there Fe supports 2 1 and there ar Guest gs 1 27 12 And the f explains 2 8 5 4ndtothe Thomas M 5 justifies nana SL 2 24 but only tho justifie Ondreas Andreas SL 2 8 5 And to the discuss Thomas M a 2 9 6 And in thos criticize Flip Link a Thomas M Ce 4 3 The sefiroth t explain Cut Link a Guest TTT ta Display Relation This comment describes a spt change Relation Display Comment Edit Comment Miscellaneous 9 Hyper Links 2 24 lt juskifies gt 2 87 nil To edit a hypertext link comment using the Hyperlink Manager 1 Open the Hyperlink Manager via NETWORKS HYPER LINK MANAGER from the HU Editor s main menu 2 Select a hyperlink 3 Edit the comment in text pan
351. ng to this code family 26 hits Two operands BIG FAMILY and MAGIC STUFF are now displayed on the term stack Y 3 Click the XOR operator and watch the results of applying the XOR operator on the two previously entered operands The results pane displays 25 hits The term stack shows one operand term that can be used in the following steps XOR Big Family Magic stuff 4 Double click code MAGIC 3 For easy navigation click with the mouse into the code list pane and then press the letter M on your keyboard The results pane displays all quotations coded with Magic 3 16 hits Z 5 Click the NOT operator The results list now displays all x quotations that are not coded with MAGIC 3 e g the rest 105 hits We now have two operands in the stack and may use another binary operator to combine these two 6 Click on the AND operator The following entry is displayed in the feedback pane Big Family Magic stuff amp NOT Magic 3 174 e Special Tools A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The query results pane displays 10 hits that can now be inspected more closely Example 2 How to formulate a query with semantic operators Task Show me all quotations coded as MAGIC or any of its sub terms but not including quotations associated with code BLACK MAGIC ALN I cu Red Magic 0 1 White Magic 0 1 Black Magic 0 1 Number
352. nodes that should no longer be referenced by the original node In the above example these are all but one quotation node 1 29 and one code node Magic A convenient way to select these nodes is to select code Number magic Then select all its neighbors by issuing NODES SELECT NEIGHBORS from the menu Hold drown the Ctrl key and deselect Magic Number magic Magic 3 7 and 1 29 1 29 DAN ae ae ws a Jl 2 17 1 11 2 20 bel Figure 102 All nodes to be unlinked from Number magic are selected 9 Select LINKS CUT LINKS from the menu Red rubber bands appear connecting the selected nodes with the mouse cursor 10 Move the mouse pointer over node Number magic and click the left mouse button This unlinks all selected nodes from the original code 11 Then select the node s that should be referenced by the original Number magic only quotation 1 29 and code Magic 12 Unlink the two nodes which should now be the only nodes selected in the network view from clone Magic 3 7 The original code Number magic references one quotation and code Magic and is almost reverted to its original state A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Network Editor et al e 247 248 e The Network Editor et al F Magic 1 6 ae Commentary p ae k 1 29 Big Star Magic 7 r isa os z TE r Y z E d k i j r Beem conmertary 2 ne ee r
353. nt by using UNDO POSITIONING Ctrl Z Topological Layout This special layout procedure tries to create a linear list of nodes positioned from the upper left to the lower right This sequence is the result of a depth first traversal of the graph The algorithm tries to resolve as many constraints between any two nodes so that a node with the least dependencies is made the first node positioned in the upper left corner and the node with the most dependencies on other nodes is positioned in the lower right corner of the Network Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Network Editor et al e 231 232 e The Network Editor et al Mi i Fi pap gt j ole gt gt Figure 94 A set of activities with local constraints In the example above the dependencies between several activities necessary to get dressed are described by local constraints between the nodes From these local constraints a global solution is generated One correct way to get dressed The 1s cause of relation was used to describe constraints The only condition a relation must meet is that it has the transitive attribute Figure 95 Topological sort always results in a linear diagonal placement of the nodes Such algorithms are typically in use in project management software You can use a directed relation like before to represent time dependencies between events socks before shoes shirt before tie marriage before
354. ntial manner the online help may offer optimal support during a work session How to Use This Manual This manual is intended for e Those who have no prior knowledge of ATLAS ti and for e Those who have worked with ATLAS ti 4 2 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 There is no need for users with prior knowledge to read through the entire manual However it is highly recommended that they read the following chapters and sections e What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 on page 10 e Object Managers on page 36 e Project Management on page 270 e Preparing Documents on page 71 e Editing Primary Documents on page 78 Throughout the manual you will find a number of notes that especially address the ATLAS ti 4 x user In the above sections you will find information that facilitates the transfer from version 4 to version 5 Please do not expect any introductory or advanced information on methodological aspects of qualitative research other than in cursory statements Some general familiarity with concepts and procedures 1 e windows mouse relating to the Windows operating system on your computer is assumed Manual Conventions The following conventions are used throughout the manual Convention Indicates Tips amp Tricks to make life easier are designated by an enlightening symbol in the left margin Pa w p Text passages marked with this icon should be given sp
355. ntly used Hermeneutic Unit 1 Open the File menu 2 Select an HU from the list below the menu option quit The list might be empty if no HU was ever used before To open the most recently used Hermeneutic Unit at start up Pa When starting ATLAS ti the last used HU can be loaded automatically This start up method can be selected under EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES HU EDITOR see General Preferences Section HU Editor on page 339 To open a Hermeneutic Unit using Drag amp Drop You can drag files from Windows Explorer or the desktop eA From Windows Explorer your desktop or any other folder containing HU files drag an HU onto the HU Editor s main pane or caption Saving a Hermeneutic Unit If you haven t saved your work already you will be asked to save the HU when you close the HU Editor If you leave ATLAS ti without saving your work during the last session 1s lost To save the currently open HU 1 Select FILE SAVE AS from the main menu The file dialog opens Save hermeneutic unit as Soe TEE HP y First project hprs My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents 95 My Computer J File name iy second project My Metwork Save as type Hermeneutic Units he Figure 20 Save Hermeneutic Unit dialog window 2 Select a folder and enter a name for your HU A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Working with ATLAS ti e 63 gt 64 e Working with ATLAS ti 3 Click on the SAVE
356. nts ASSIGN Assigns text audio or graphic file s Opens a file dialog box from which files can be selected See Assigning Primary Documents on page 65 for details RENAME Changes the HU s internal name of the selected PD EDIT COMMENT Opens an editor for the selected PD s comment Each PD can have its own comment Unlike the contents of the PD s data source this comment is part of the HU When removing a PD from its HU via disconnect the comment is also removed DISCONNECT Removes the selected PD its quotations and all references to them from the HU Note The referenced document file is NOT deleted CLOSE DOC Closes the current PD and displays the standard background wallpaper SORT SUBMENU Sets the sort criterion for the PDs The current sort criterion is displayed as part of the menu item For details see Sorting and Filtering on page 137 FILTER SUBMENU Sets or removes the filter for PDs The current filter 1s displayed as part of the menu item For details see Sorting and Filtering on page 137 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Open Family Manager Assign Families Info Set Encoding ANSI d Change Position Renumber All Word Cruncher Import PO Family Table Export PD Family Table Change Date Change Author A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 TOGGLE FILTER Reverses the current filter If your current filter is set to PD family female Toggle Filter will
357. nu Or 1 Move the mouse pointer over a link label 2 Right click and choose CUT LINK from the context menu Note The latter two methods work on first class links only code code or quote quote hyper links Modifying Links The type of a link e g its Relation can be changed in the Network Editor 1 Open a network view on a code 2 Right click on a link label and select CHANGE RELATION from the context menu 3 The relation menu pops up Select a different relation A very efficient way to manipulate first class links is offered by the Link Managers see Link Management on page 234 Importing Nodes There are several options available for including objects in a Network View The Import Nodes window offers access to all available node types The list pane offers a context menu to select or deselect all displayed objects A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Network views Se Air 10 2 Primary Docs EA A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 To import nodes via the Import Nodes dialog 1 Choose NODES IMPORT NODES from the Network Editor s menu A window opens offering objects to be imported Only objects that are not already members of the present view are listed 2 First select the type of node you want listed in the list pane from the node type drop down list 3 Select the objects to be imported into the Network View 4 Click IMPORT The imported objects are placed along the uppe
358. nywhere inside the primary document pane Code by List Inverse The standard code by list technique associates a list of codes to one selected quotation Sometimes it makes more sense to associate a list of quotations to one code ga SBE Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 imei Drag quotations onto a code Naty Le Use code comments to define your code words A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 To link a code to many quotations 1 In the Code Manager or the drop down list select the code to be associated with one or more quotations 2 From the main or the code s context menu choose CODES CODING LINK CODE TO QUOTATIONS 3 A list of quotations that were not already assigned to the selected code opens Select one ore more quotations and click OK To link a code to many quotations via Drag amp Drop 1 In the Quotation Manager select the quotations to be assigned to the code 2 Drag amp drop the selected quotations into the Code Manager onto the code Quick Coding Quick Coding assigns the selected code to the current data segment This is an efficient method for the consecutive coding of segments using the most recently used code To apply the Quick Coding method 1 Select a code in the Code Manager 2 Select a data segment 3 Click the Quick Coding button oe or choose CODING QUICK CODING from the menu Writing Code Comments Like Primary Documents comments can b
359. o ATLAS ti 5 0 If there are more quotations If more than one quotation is associated with the code they are offered in a pop up list Selecting one of the quotations activates and displays it in context 2 Stoke 5 1 4 test 1 0 9 Quotations for Smoke fx The four eleme 2 The key 1 1 ga Water 5 2 2 White Magic 0 2 Wormwood 0 1 lt 2 2 4nd there came out of the smok 115 2 22 18 By these three was the thir 41 41 2 29 2 Ond he opened the bottomless 9 9 23 abe 0 and the heads of the horses w 395 The men had moved off up to th 54 Figure 37 List of quotations for an activated code Create a Report for Coded Quotations As an alternative to the contextual display of quotations you can get different reports of the quotations for a selected code Reports are displayed in a text editor and can be printed or saved To create a quotation report 1 Select a code 2 From the main menu select CODES OUTPUT QUOTATIONS FOR SELECTED CODE When selecting a code in the Code Manager choose OUTPUT QUOTATIONS FOR SELECTED CODE 3 Select QUOTATIONS FOR SELECTED CODE to create a report including the full content of the quotations Select QUOTATION LIST if you only want a list of the quotations names 4 If acomment has been written for any of the quotations you will be asked whether you also want to include the comments in the report 5 Next you have the option to
360. o analyze customer complaints As basis for your analysis you have a set of documents dealing with customer complaints about domestic flights and a set of documents dealing with customer complaints about international flights Your company is particularly interested in differences between domestic and international flights and differences between business and leisure travelers Important factors to analyze might be gender level of income and frequent flyer status The matrix below is based on the four customer groups Domestic Flights International Flights Business traveler Business traveler Leisure traveler Leisure traveler This matrix illustrates the four PD families that can be constructed which are domestic flights international flights business traveler and leisure traveler When this is done documents should be assigned to the appropriate families Next code the data For example you may use codes such as punctuality general service in flight services and human interaction to describe complaints customers had To find out how the four groups might differ in terms of certain type of complaints you would make use of the Query Tool 1 Open the Query Tool 2 Double click on the code containing the information you are interested in e g complaints about in flight services 3 Click Scope to define the documents to be included in the search 4 Select the two PD families Domest
361. o pushes the last removed entry back onto the stack Note The functions above are also available from the context menu of the term stack pane More Functions Distance in lines Sig Refresh Codes Figure 73 Query Tool Miscellaneous Functions ee ee aaa E The two distance operators FOLLOWS and PRECEDES use a certain number of paragraphs lines as the maximal distance between two quotations to be considered as following one another Refresh Codes Use this option to refresh the list of codes and code families This should rarely be necessary Define the set of PDs that form the basis for a query cf Scope of Query on page 179 Context Menus Several context menus are available in the various panes of the Query Tool that complement the functions available via the buttons Most items in the context menus serve an informational need Display Codes The code family pane s context menu has a single command Display Codes Select to view the member codes of the selected code family Neighbors The code pane s menu offers information about the selected code neighbors the term i e query if it is a Super Code embedding embedded and co occurring codes Embedding codes Embedded codes Co occurring Codes Display Neighbors The results pane s menu offers information about the neighbors Embedding codes codes other quotations memos embedding embedded or co Em aded codas occurring codes of a selected hit
362. o see the changes For all options that were already described in the Network Editor s menu description there will only be a reference The Network Editor preferences are activated either from the HU editor s Networks Preferences or from the Network Editor s Specials Preferences menu Reference e 387 388 e Reference General Network Preferences General Nodes Fonts Printing Miscellaneous General Display nodes 3D Background color Display grid Mode color Automatic redraw Auto color with background Display node icon Z Draw bow for link label _ Rotate link label Max node width 200 Figure 138 General Network Preferences Display nodes 3D Display nodes as simple boxes with a 3 D border Uncheck for a box with dropped shadow Display grid Overlays the network view with a grid to help with manual placement of nodes As the grid is colored light gray you need to use a different background color when using this feature Automatic redraw default If disabled the network editor will redraw its contents only when forcing a repaint via DISPLAY REFRESH DISPLAY or by pressing F5 If the automatic redraw does not work properly e certain things are not displayed correctly press F5 Display node icon Display a type specific icon for the nodes Draw box for link label Switches between plain text display and boxed display of link labels Rotated link label
363. o the new paragraph model As this actually converts the text it is available in edit mode only For details see Converting Documents to New Paragraph Model on page 91 SYNCHRONIZE PDS Use this option to force immediate synchronization of all PDs in the current HU Synchronization consolidates all PDs and their quotations with any changes recorded in the LOG files during editing of data sources For details see Synchronization on page 88 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 RESET CHANGE LOGS This option can be used to compress log files that are no longer needed It should only be used if you are sure that all PDs in all HUs that use the same data sources have been synchronized EDIT PRIMARY DOCUMENT MAPPINGS Modifies or enters new alternative path mappings for PDs For a detailed description of this feature see Redirection on page 102 CLEAR CACHE Clears the primary document cache When a PD is activated for the first time during a session the content of its data source is saved in the cache Therefore on next access there is no need for reopening it but instead it is loaded from the cache OPEN DATA SOURCE MONITOR The monitor is an instrument to assist administrators and the support staff in resolving document access related problems For details see The Data Source Monitor on page 332 RESET LAST ACCESS INFORMATION Makes some kinds of problematic documents loadable but may also corrupt the ali
364. ocuments in RTF when you want to edit them later A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 etc To be able to utilize such documents without having to convert them to RTF ATLAS ti uses converters installed on your system as part of the basic Windows or Office installation A similar approach is also used by WordPad to display Word and other documents However no miracles should be expected from a conversion into RTF The success of the conversion heavily depends on the characteristics of the converter used Bear in mind that the quality of such conversions usually does not reach the richness in appearance and procedures of the original Word etc documents e g multiple lines in tables from a Word document are not displayed identically within ATLAS ti Plain Text Of course plain unformatted text documents can still be used including documents using Unicode In the course of editing plain text documents within ATLAS ti they can be enriched and saved with all added formatting To be able to edit textual PDs later they need to be stored as plain text or rich text files in the first place In the present version of ATLAS ti editing is restricted to RTF files because of the potential loss of formatting information If you want to edit documents originating from Word WordPerfect etc they need to be converted to rich text from within their original application before assigning them to an HU Saving documents as rich text
365. of character encodings quite a bit the limited character set could not be coped entirely So even within ANSI a number of variations was inevitable So in addition to selecting a font you may need to select the correct script in the font dialog The script chosen within ATLAS ti s font preferences should match the encoding used on the system where the text was created e g using the Cyrillic script for a text created on a Cyrillic system Unicode Wouldn t it be nice if there was only ONE encoding which would cover all languages including the East Asian languages with their enormous amount of characters To display a mixture of different languages correctly within the same text the same line Recently a new emerging standard addresses this desire Unicode The potential character set was significantly extended to cover all characters of all languages so that mixing languages in the same document became feasible Now why is Unicode not used by all applications on all systems The problem is that the computer power needed to correctly handle Unicode far exceeds the demands for simply OEM or ANSI encodings But it s getting better Appendix e 399 At least texts saved in Unicode format from an appropriate text processor can be read into ATLAS ti without any further tweaking Enriched Texts Texts available in enriched formats like RTF DOC or HTML files generally have no problems with different encodings as they stor
366. ombined Query LE Mew ork AND female under 25 Wew ork The feedback pane always displays the item that is on top of the stack The topmost item on the stack has either been entered or is the result of applying an operator 5 To yield all documents that match all three requirements female under 25 and from New York click the AND operator again A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 6 The stack and query feedback pane now looks as follows Quey LCILS ILE 4AD AND female under 25 New York Female amp under 25 amp New York 7 If these are all the attributes that you want to combine click on the SUPER FAMILY button If you want to combine a fourth or fifth attribute continue as described above Creating a complex query as a sequence When creating a complex query in one sequence the rule is to select all families first followed by the appropriate number and type of operators Using the same example as above the sequence would be as follows 1 Double click on the family female 2 Double click on the family under 25 3 Double click on the family New York Quey LEJE Recalc Undo Redo J j ew York 4 Select the operator AND Query LE JLS JOP Reale Undo Redo J AND under 25 New York female m 25 amp Mew York 5 Select the operator AND again Quer LCJLSJLP Recale Undo Redo AND emale AND under 25 Mew York
367. omplished in a variety of ways a Via Windows Explorer 1 Open Windows Explorer in the desired folder 2 Right click in this folder and select NEW HERMENEUTIC UNIT from the Context Menu This will store the HU in the proper location 3 Rename the HU to reflect the project s title 4 Start ATLAS ti by double clicking the new HU b From within ATLAS ti 1 Start ATLAS ti 2 Choose FILE NEW HERMENEUTIC UNIT from the main menu 3 Save the new HU via FILE SAVE AS Option Use Special Paths In most scenarios you will be reminded to have the Use Special Paths option switched on This is the default setting and does not need to be modified However you should make sure that it is set as recommended via EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES When assigning Primary Docs Use special paths HJPATH TBPATH Document Folder Structure Whenever feasible data source documents should be stored in a common location 1 e folder Of course instead of piling all documents into a single folder you may create appropriate subfolders This allows for convenient separation of a potentially large number of files into different media types or sub topics However after a project has been set up this way subfolders should never be moved independently of the base folder HE project A pictures i text data 9 video data 272 e Project Management A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 os Don t pack all your documents
368. on You can select more than one PD at a time This is useful for printing a selected list of PDs OQUTPUT LIST Colors e Usable PDs are colored black e PDs that are available but cannot be loaded due to a consistency problem are colored red e PDs with an inaccessible data source file are colored gray Main Workspace The HU Editor e 51 The PD Manager Toolbar The toolbar is a convenient alternative to selecting procedures via the menus Open network view Edit comment Open PD family Toggle always on top browser E Assign primary doc 4 Erg xg E w Disconnect primary doc Create output Toggle list view PD Manager List Columns The columns of the PD Manager s details view offer a vast amount of information to keep track of possible access problems The arrangement of columns may differ from your current setting I Name Origin Usable Location Media Created Author Modified Quotations AIP 1 The sefirot HUPATH Ka Yes GRAF 24 05 9 Super O7 08 0 5 E ID The internal ID number assigned to the document when it was first added as a PD An icon indicates the document type Name The name of the PD Note that this name can differ from the file name as PDs can be renamed within ATLAS ti Origin The original location of the PD s data source from where it was assigned to the HU Usable Yes indicates that a PD s data source can be loaded and no indicates that the data source not
369. on page 52 MISCELLANEOUS SUBMENU INFO Displays information about the currently activated quotation the source PD s name the author s name all codes that reference this quotation and its comment MERGE QUOTATIONS Merges one or more quotations You have the option to unify the quotations hence changing the boundaries to cover the full length of all quotations to be unified or to keep the boundary of the first selected quotation SQUEEZE Removes gaps in the numbering sequence of quotations resulting from deleting quotations CHANGE DATE Changes the creation date for the currently displayed quotation CHANGE AUTHOR Changes the name of the author 1 e the user who created this quotation for the selected PD SUBMENU OUTPUT All output options for quotations are discussed in chapter The Quotations Output Submenu on page 314 Reference e 355 Create Free Code Coding Link Code bo Rename Edit Comment Delete Sort Mame Filter All Toggle Filter Edit Families Open Network view Code Manager Miscellaneous Dukput 356 e Reference The Codes Menu CREATE FREE CODE Creates a new code without any links CODING Submenu e OPEN CODING e Creates a new code or more than one divided by l as in codeA codeB codeC for the current selection e CODE IN VIVO e Creates a code by using the selected text chunk as the code name This works for textual PDs only Also available vi
370. on results in smaller file sizes but often in less precision so marking a specific period or sequence of frames becomes problematic Audio Documents ATLAS ti supports most common audio formats like WAV MP3 WMA SND etc unless appropriate MCI drivers are not installed Primary Documents e 75 Sty Put transcripts into quotation comments Audio Files and Transcriptions Can an audio source and a transcription be synchronized Currently it is not possible to listen to the audio file and see the transcribed text scrolled in sync or vice versa There is no automatic link between the two Both the original audio material and the transcription need to be assigned as two separate PDs However you can manually link chunks of text to the corresponding audio segments using the ATLAS ti hypertext function see Hypertext on page 251 Furthermore an audio or video quotation s comment is a convenient and accessible place for the transcription When double clicking a multimedia quotation in the Quotation Manager the transcript is displayed in the comment pane Video Documents ATLAS ti supports several common video formats like AVI MPG WMV MOV etc As with audio files the necessary MCI drivers need to be installed When creating video documents to be used with ATLAS ti the above mentioned issue of compression should be taken into account While uncompressed video data allows a fine grained frame level navigation
371. only be loaded after all necessary alignments have been processed during the synchronization You may say NO to this message for now but you will not be able to load the document until you confirm the synchronization After synchronizing observation_4 William can continue to work on it add new codes memos etc He may also edit the document All other team members will be informed about any further modifications For this reason there is no danger that the team will end up with five different versions of the document Due to ATLAS ti s content surveillance system each team member works with the most up to date version of the document The only thing that remains to be done if necessary is to merge the HUs of William Linda Peter Paul and Mary from time to time so that all coding and other work performed on the data is joined together Converting Documents to New Paragraph Model Sty SN Relevant for users of ATLAS ti 4 2 Sty aA Convert your plain text files including line breaks to the new paragraph model to A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The issue of old and new paragraph models is described in greater detail in section Handling Legacy Documents on page 73 In most cases only users of ATLAS ti 4 need to be concerned with this procedure Paragraphs in ATLAS ti 4 In previous ATLAS ti versions a paragraph was a series of lines separated by a hard return The end of the paragraph was delimited by anot
372. ons themselves are part of the HU and will always be displayed in the list However if the file to which it refers is not found when the quotation is to be displayed in context an error occurs If you move data source files that are in use to another location something you would normally not do you need to update the references inside the HU see Change Path for one PD at a time on page 104 In order to copy all files that belong to a project use the COPY BUNDLE function instead see Copy Bundle Migrate and Backup Projects on page 282 If you were to copy an HU file using standard Windows functionality the documents used as PDs are not copied along and would be missing at the target location This way of treating files results in the following benefits e The size of a PD does not affect the size of the HU to which it A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 is assigned Primary Documents e 95 96 e Primary Documents e A single data source file can be used by more than one HU It may even be assigned to the same HU multiple times e Team members can share data files Changes to data sources editing are broadcast to ALL HUs that use the files keeping everyone up to date Reference Types Many Paths One Destination There are a different ways to establish external references in order to accommodate a wide variety of situations ATLAS ti always uses the most efficient way to reference a document once it 1s
373. onts Storage Paths Text Editors PD Printing Memos ing bell on errors isplay Welcome Wizar v Ring bell Display Wel Wizard Be serious Accept changes in browsers silently ncrease list refres ay sounds Cli list refresh Pl d earch with patterns ore preferences Search with patterns GREP St f Show Taskbar Tool Use right to left settings Advanced Drag amp Drop _ 5how Tip of the Day Data Source Lock Protection Validate PDs upon HU load a List name size for quotes al vE a Recomended size 30 50 Length of HU picklist Hote when clicking Apply some changes aftect m ay newly opened windows only GK Cancel Apply A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 337 338 e Reference Section General Ring bell on errors Self explanatory Be serious You can reduce the amount of humor thrown at you in the user interface Increase list refresh If lists do not display properly during scrolling activate this option However screen flicker may increase Search with patterns GREP When turned on the text search and auto coding functions use regular expressions see GREP Search on page 149 This setting is also controlled by the respective checkbox in the text search and auto code window Show Taskbar Tool Displays an icon in the task bar to easily access the ATLAS ti window manager Advanced Drag amp Drop Drag amp Drop can be suppressed in the margin area This app
374. operation can assign an unexpected number of files to your HU Make sure you know what is in the folders Note You can drag arbitrary files as opposed to the standard assign technique that filters the files offered but you are responsible for only assigning valid file types When ATLAS ti detects a file extension that does not correspond to one of the file formats specified in the Assign File Dialog you are asked for confirmation Remember a file with unknown type is always assigned as a plain text document If it does not contain text you will see a lot of garbage when it is displayed A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Assign Memos as Primary Documents You can also use memos as PDs For more detail see Using Memos as PDs on page 133 This procedure is only recommended for small to medium size projects without the need to share the documents for details see Scenario 4 All Inclusive on page 280 Using a PD Family Table to Assign Documents This method allows bulk assignment of documents while importing document properties 1 e families at the same time 1 Prepare a PD Family Table for instance in Excel see Preparing and Importing a PD Family Table on page 200 for details A table can also be created by using Export PD Family Table in ATLAS ti 2 Import the PD Family table by selecting the menu option DOCUMENTS MISCELLANEOUS IMPORT PD FAMILY TABLE 3 Selec
375. or details In the left pane the available families are listed For our example above there are four Super Families and four regular families The panes on the right hand side from top to bottom the term stack pane the feedback pane and the result pane display information once you begin to create a combination of families The buttons above the stack pane are described in the context of the Query Tool see Stack Management on page 180 To create a Super Family combining two families such as domestic flights and business traveler do the following 3 Double click on family domestic flight It is displayed in the stack pane 4 Double click on the family business traveler It is pushed on top of the stack Now you have two families on the stack that can be combined with one of the operators Families Query LOLS ILE business traveller GH domestic flights 14 domestic flights international flights 11 E leisure traveller 12 JI gt C lt business traveller A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Family Life e 205 In our example the resulting Super Family should contain the intersection of the other two families A 5 Click the AND operator This operator fetches the two families from the stack and creates the combined expression 6 The stack now contains the query expression and the pane below the infix notation of the query is displayed The resulting
376. ordingly Otherwise click YES to accept the multi page printout or click WO bo scale the network down to 40 to Fit on a single page Make your choice and the network view will be printed Network Views for other Applications Copy to Clipboard Menu option NETWORK COPY TO CLIPBOARD copies the network view to the Windows clipboard From the clipboard it can be included in Word or other foreign documents The Network The Network Editor et al e 233 View all nodes or selected nodes only is copied to the clipboard in a variety of formats e A textual description of the contained nodes a node synopsis e An Windows Enhanced Metafile for high quality graphics to be used in reports Depending on the processing capabilities of the target application results may sometimes be less than optimal e A bitmap file that has more accurate layout and fonts but less quality when printed In other applications Word PowerPoint etc a selection or all of these formats are offered via PASTE SPECIAL Save Network View as Graphic File You can save your Network View as a graphic file either as a bitmap BMP or as a Windows Enhanced Meta file EMF You can insert this file into reports Word PowerPoint etc Choose SAVE AS GRAPHICS FILE Note This function does not save the network as a reusable structure for import to other HUs In order to accomplish this visit chapter To export the code network on page 242 Link
377. ormation retrieval systems the terms index indexing or keyword are often used for what we call code or coding The length of a code should be restricted and should not be too verbose If textual annotations are what you want you should use memos instead Super Codes A Super Code differs from a standard code A standard code is directly linked with the quotations to which it is associated while a Super Code is a query that typically consists of several combined codes See Super Codes on page 176 for details Memos capture your thoughts regarding the text and are an important device for creating theory A memo is similar to a code but usually contains longer passages of text A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A memo may stand alone or it may refer to quotations codes and other memos They can be grouped according to types method theoretical descriptive etc which is helpful in organizing and sorting them Memos may also be included as the objects of analysis by assigning them as PDs Families Families are a way to form clusters of PDs codes and memos for easier handling of groups of codes memos and PDs For more detail see the chapter Family Life on page 191 Families can be combined using logical operators similar to codes and Super Codes see Super Families on page 192 Network Views Network Views are a bit more sophisticated than Families They allow you to conceptualize the s
378. otation The precedence of the operators is controlled solely by the order in which operands and operators are entered Let s take a look at the changing contents of the term stack during the input of example 2 s operands and operators Ee 3 4 z zs Stack 3 d 5 20 23 6 4 3 a 168 e Special Tools A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 If there is only one operand on the stack entering a two argument operator like AND will produce an error message The result of any query is a Set of quotations Naty Build complex queries incrementally with immediate feedback after each A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Note how every operand entry is pushed down the stack and how every operator entered takes the appropriate number of operands from the stack and pushes the result of the operation back to the top of the stack Both operators and used in the example need two operands The multiplier takes the topmost two elements from the stack 5 and 4 and pushes the result 20 back on the stack The subsequent takes the remaining two operands 20 and 3 from the stack calculates the result and pushes the result 23 back onto the stack The stack grows with every entry of an operand and it shrinks with every operator entered The following shows the execution of example 3 Tapit 3 4 J 2 SEACE 6 4 12 D 60 5 alee Despite its seeming peculiarity RPN is actually a very common procedure wi
379. ote Make sure to check out the Project Management section before starting any serious projects You can save yourself a lot of time and trouble by following a set of simple rules for proper planning storing and moving your ATLAS ti project files See Project Management on page 270 for details Starting and Ending an ATLAS ti Session Starting ATLAS ti ATLAS ti can be started like many other Windows applications e g via the Windows Start menu or by clicking on projects or program shortcuts Select ATLAS ti from the Programs menu START BUTTON PROGRAMS SCIENTIFIC SOFTWARE J FA Documentation Double click on the program s shortcut on the desktop 1f you have created one A ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Working with ATLAS ti e 59 The wizard is not displayed if you select an existing project to start the session 60 e Working with ATLAS ti Double click on an existing Hermeneutic Unit HU in the Windows Explorer You can create a fresh HU via a folder s context menu s NEW HERMENEUTIC UNIT entry ti Proverbs Apr If you started ATLAS ti directly not by selecting a project you will see the ATLAS ti Welcome Wizard see Figure 18 which offers four options to start a session Open Hermeneutic Unit from Picklist If you choose this option you can select from a list of recently used HUs If this is the first time you open ATLAS ti you are offered the sample projects Open
380. other computers Optimize Paths Usually the best path is already chosen when a document is assigned and the Use Special Paths option was set Older HUs typically contain absolute path references and are therefore less flexible You can change an HU s references to its documents to conform to the scheme above even after files have already been assigned as PDs 1 e you can Optimize Paths Optimize Paths does two things at the same time 1 Replaces an invalid path that was redirected with its mapped path making this redirection obsolete 2 Translates a path into its most condensed and flexible representation 1f the path can be subsumed under the special paths see examples Only those PDs with accessible data sources are included in the path optimization Optimize Path can be applied to all or a selection of PDs Via the HU Editor main menu s DOCUMENTS DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT OPTIMIZE PATHS optimization for all PDs is initiated When using the equivalent option offered in the PD Manager only the currently selected PDs are optimized Examples If PDs in the HU reference files in folder D ProjectX and the HU itself is in the same folder Optimize Paths DOCUMENTS DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT OPTIMIZE PATHS will change the references to these data sources to include the HUPATH special path variable D ProjectX interview_1 rtf D ProjectX Specialinterview_7 rtf A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5
381. ou can readily construct a more complex query for example click on the OR operator the topmost in the left toolbar The combined result is instantly displayed in the results list Special Tools e 169 step A Boolean Query The example below uses the HU The Sample hpr5 Please load and display this HU while reading the following It can be found in the ATLAS ti samples folder easily accessible via EXTRAS EXPLORER SAMPLES FOLDER Our sample query using Boolean operators is this Find all quotations coded with either code EARTH or code MAGIC 1 Open the Query Tool by clicking on the binoculars button Eh in the main toolbar 2 Double click on the Earth code The Query Tool displays the following entries EN ATLAS ti Query Tool Seles Families Query LOE Reale Undo Redo Chemistry J SF BigFamily 10 a Chemistry 81 JE Black Magic 0 1 Booth 1 0 gh Brass 1 1 ga Casualties 3 0 gh Chemical warfare 41 0 a Dimension Horror 0 5 Create Super Code aE arth 44 1 Id Name 7 Jj 11 0 1 19 1 And when he had opened E Fire 12 3 E422 And there came out of the sn al George 15 Oh Ey2 7 4 Andit was commanded ther oe Gold 4 3 and unto them was given por eg Golden Altar 1 0 4 i lt ti gt Distance in lines ig Refresh Codes Result 4 TE All The previously empty term stack now displays code Earth The results pane lists all quotations for code E
382. our Network View as a graphic file either as a bitmap bmp or as a Windows Enhanced Meta file emf PRINT NETWORK VIEW Opens the printer dialog Check Selection to print the selected nodes only COPY TO CLIPBOARD Submenu Copies the Network View all nodes or selected nodes only to the clipboard in a variety of formats A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Undo Positioning Chrl z2 New Mode Delete Entities Remove Modes from view Ctrl Del Import Modes Import Neighbors Import Cooccurring Codes Merge Network view Undo Import Neighbors Chrlt Shift 7 Merge Codes Duplicate Codes De Select all Nodes Ctrl 4 Inverse Selection Ctrl I Select Neighbors Ctrl M Select From List A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 RENAME NETWORK Renames the current Network View EDIT COMMENT Opens a text editor to edit the Network View comment CLOSE Closes the Network Editor Nodes Menu The Nodes menu offers node related operations All operations except UNDO POSITIONING NEW NODE DE SELECT ALL NODES and IMPORT NODES affect the currently selected node s UNDO POSITIONING Moves the nodes back to their previous position This is a very handy option when experimenting with different arrangements layouts and alignments of nodes Note that this a one level undo and only the most recent layout can be restored Shortcut CTRL Z NEW NODE Create a new code or memo inside the Network Editor A new object is created and
383. oving inserting characters lines paragraphs e We would need to make this logbook of changes accessible to EVERY HU that uses this PD e In order not to get the above procedures mixed up we would also need to protect the document against editing by more than one user at the same time This is what we accomplished with ATLAS ti 5 For understanding the editing procedures and their consequences it is helpful to make a few conceptual distinctions e An ATLAS ti project consists of an HU and all referenced data sources mostly document files e A PD is NOT the data source A PD that resides in an HU is created when you assign a data source a file a memo as a PD A Primary Document is has A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Don t separate a document and its log file Set Window Explorer s option to display all file extensions or you ll be A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 e a NAME which is used when it is displayed in the PD manager By default the name of the data source the file name or the memo title is used e an AUTHOR the user who assigned this PD to the HU e a CREATION DATE date of assignment e acollection of QUOTATIONS e a REFERENCE e g a file name and path to its data source which is where it gets its content from whenever it needs to be displayed The Reference is an important property to understand ATLAS ti 5 has a number of powerful functions and tools see Adjusting Referenc
384. ows you to leverage a cluster of loose concepts into a more semantically rich model fragment IMPORT PD FAMILY TABLE Assigns PDs and creates PD families from a table created with the following function or created with another application such as Excel EXPORT PD FAMILY TABLE Generates an Excel compatible table of PD descriptions and PD families A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Miscellaneous Menu Miscellaneous FAME INFO Info Displays information about the selected family e g type and name creation date author commentary number of objects included in the family and their names Create Snapshot Change Date Change Author CREATE SNAPSHOT This option is only available for Super Families see Super Families on page 203 A snapshot creates a hard wired standard family containing the current items of the Super Family as its members see Create a Snapshot on page 210 CHANGE DATE Changes the date of creation for a selected family CHANGE AUTHOR Changes the name of the author for a selected family The Family Manager Toolbar Open Object Manager Edit Comment Change View Toggle View Output Family Create New Family 5 a B a 0ga X Open Network Open Super Family Tool Toggle Filter Delete Family The Network Editor s Menus and Toolbar This section explains the menus and toolbars available for the Network Editor see The Network Editor et al on page 215 As
385. p until stopped manually Use special paths HUPATH TBPATH If activated one of the two abstract paths HUPATH or TBPATH is used if applicable path or part of the document s path matches a special path For more information see Special Paths on page 97 Remember windows positions Stores the position and size of the HU Editor and most other windows Auto open Upon opening the HU editor automatically opens the selected manager s and or Object Explorer Reference e 339 340 e Reference Section Margin General HU Editor Margin Fonts Storage Paths Test Editors PD Printing Memos Display ln Place Action Show margin Show line numbers O None Use images Display quotation coordinates Bracket width 10 Include Codes Hyperlinks Memos Use short names sized 3g Double click toggles short name Show tips Global rename Local replace Display Show margin When checked displays the margin area to the right of the primary document This option can also be changed through the VIEWS MARGIN AREA menu item or the corresponding tool button Show line numbers Shows the line more precisely paragraph number pane for textual PDs Use images Adds a type related icon to the label of the margin objects Display quotation coordinates Adds the start and end position paragraphs text y coordinates graphic etc of the quotations to the label of the margin o
386. p to fit it to the page size The margin settings can also be set to suit individual preferences A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Miscellaneous General Nodes Fonts Printing Miscellaneous Relation import strategy oO Overwrite existing relations Don t touch existing relations Overwriting existing relations when using the Relation Editor to load a new set of relations existing relations same ID are replaced Figure 142 Network Miscellaneous Preferences When loading an HU all relations used inside the HU are imported This is comparable to word processors that use styles For relations imported by loading another HU the default strategy is to not overwrite already loaded relations with the same ID Don t touch existing relations Example If your standard set of relations as defined in the file default rel contains a relation ISA with line width 2 and the HU just loaded contains the same relation but defined with width 1 all Network Views of any HU loaded will display any ISA link with a width of 2 Furthermore when you save any of the HUs their original relational definitions are exchanged with the current ones Choosing the option Overwrite existing relations does the following If a new HU is opened all already loaded relations that use the same ID as relations in the newly opened HU are replaced This changes the characteristics of the links in the HU loaded previously Although this
387. pens Select a relation The linking procedure ends here Note dropping a bracket onto another quotation displayed alongside a bracket replaces the existing hyperlink Modifying Hyperlinks There are two place to modify existing hyperlinks the Network Editor and the Hyperlink Manager see Link Management on page 234 To modify links in the Network Editor 1 Open a network view on a hyperlinked quotation e g by right clicking on a quotation and then selecting the option OPEN NETWORK VIEW from the context menu 2 Inthe Network Editor right click on a link label and select CHANGE RELATION from the context menu 3 The relation menu pops up Select a different relation Building Text Webs with the Network Editor The Network Editor can be used to link quotations much in the same way it is used to link codes to form semantic networks A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Hypertext e 257 258 e Hypertext To create hyperlinks using a Network Editor 1 Click on a quotation in the quotation list 2 Open a network editor by either 3 choosing OPEN NETWORK from the QUOTATIONS menu or the marked quotations context menu move the mouse cursor into the marked region or clicking the Open Network button of the Quotation Manager 4 A Network Editor opens and shows the selected quotation as a node If the quotation already has neighbors codes memos quotations their nodes are displayed as well 5 Choose NODES IMPORT NOD
388. per Codes allows access to the various parts of a query Below you can see the expanded branch for the Super Code SUB Magic WITHIN Horror 4 see Example 3 Creating a query using proximity operators on page 176 When double clicking on the entry SUB all quotations associated with the first part of the query SUB Magic are shown When double clicking on WITHIN the results of the full query are displayed rig SUB Magic WITHIN Horror 4 O e S WITHIN SUB Magic 11 6 2 Horror 4 10 1 Expanding the Memos branch displays all memos and then the memos associated with other memos On the next level all associated codes are shown When expanding the Family branches on the first level all existing families are shown On the next level all members are displayed Below the members all objects that are usually associated with the type of object can be expanded 1 e as described above quotations underneath PDs codes connected to other codes and so on In case you have created Super Families the operators used to build up the super families are also shown When clicking on an operator only the corresponding family members are shown as explained above for Super Codes Expanding the Network Views branch shows the existing networks on the first level and all objects contained in the Network Views on the next level On the levels below the usual elements as described above for the Primary Docs
389. pity are the Object Managers the Object Explorer the interactive margin area full text search and the hypertext functionality Exploration Frankly we added this term because needed an e to make for a nicer acronym Seriously though exploration is closely related to the above principles Through an exploratory yet systematic approach to your data as opposed to a mere bureaucratic handling it is assumed that especially constructive activities like theory building will be of great benefit The entire program s concept including the process of getting acquainted with its particular idiosyncrasies is particularly conducive to an exploratory discovery oriented approach Areas of Application 4 e Introduction ATLAS ti serves as a powerful utility for qualitative analysis particularly of larger bodies of textual graphical audio and video data The content or subject matter of these materials is in no way limited to any one particular field of scientific or scholarly investigation Its emphasis is on qualitative rather than quantitative analysis 1 e determining the elements that comprise the primary data material and interpreting their meaning A related term would be knowledge management which emphasizes the transformation of data into useful knowledge ATLAS ti can be of great help in any field where this kind of soft data analysis is carried out While ATLAS ti was originally designed with the social
390. ptg Elements I 5 eS 4 Elements 7 2 Click on the selected object again After a short delay the list entry changes its appearance into a small text entry field Alternatively press the F2 key Network views 10 Ta Texture a hypertext SS 4 Elements I 7 3 Edit the name of the object you can use the arrow keys and cut copy paste Network Views 10 SS Texture a hypertext ta Four Elements I 5 4 Elements II 7 4 Click anywhere else to finish editing or press the Esc key to cancel editing Network views 10 SS Texture a hypertext g a Four Elements I 5 SS 4 Elements II 7 Opening Object Menus Each object in the Object Explorer has a context menu These menus can be accessed in the usual manner with a right mouse click This selects the object if not already selected and opens the context menu which offers a few selected object specific operations 186 e Special Tools A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 YA Network Views 12 A E SS Texture a hypertext example H ea EEE E 4 Elem Open Network Editor E SS Allmen Edit Comment Figure 75 Context menu for a Network View Displaying and Editing Comments To edit an object s comment 1 Select an object and edit the comment that appears in the text pane 2 Save changes by opening the context menu inside the text area and choose ACCEPT The View Menu
391. ption for text and graphics Drag amp Drop Drag amp Drop is now used in many more situations that benefit from this direct manipulation technique Objects can be copied and moved in the margin area to accomplish tasks like coding code revision creating codes memos hyperlinks and merging quotations For more information see Margin Drag amp Drop on page 135 In place Renaming In place renaming of labels initiated by a click on a selected item is available in the HU Editor s margin area the object managers and other browsers like the Object Explorer A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Hold down CTRL SHIFT when clicking to reset the size to 100 Move Size Minimize Maximize Close Alt F4 Rollup Mode A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Margin Area Graphic documents can now also make full use of the margin area to display and edit quotation brackets and attached codes hyperlinks and memos The margin area is now drag amp drop capable and it allows in place label editing ga kabbala 45 supports 4 5 lt explains gt Figure I Graphic PD with margin area Zooming Text and graphics documents can be zoomed in or out by holding down the CTRL key while using the mouse wheel if available In the primary document area the zoom button the last button on the vertical toolbar can also be used Hold down the CTRL key to zoom out To return to the original size hold down
392. ption in the Code Family Manager Additional options in the PD Family Manager 376 e Reference Opens an editor to edit the Super Family s query DISPLAY QUERY Shows the Super Family s query An example of such a query would be the expression Female Age 20 30 l rural OUTPUT Creates an output providing descriptive information about the selected family see example below The output includes the name of the HU the date of creation the name of the author the comment the number and names of codes included in the family and the number of quotations that are referenced by these codes If desired the quotations content can also be included in the output Code Family Magic stuff HIJ Bible Kabala and Apocalyptic Visions File e ProgramtScientifict SottwarewATLAstiTEs TRANKIBIBLE Apr Edited by Super DateTime 22 07 03 163559 Created 11 07 93 12 53 46 Guest comment Collects all terms with magic references Codes 133 Alchemie Black Magic Kabbala Magic Magic 3 Magic 7 Humber magic Red Magic Seal Secret Sefiroth The key White Magic OUTPUT ALL FAMILIES This output option provides an overview of all families of a specific type PD code or memo families Referenced quotations are not included CREATE NETWORK Creates a new code named F lt Family Name gt _l or consecutive numbers and links all members of the family to this code via the is a relation This all
393. pty Lines iF vou do not wish empty lines between the new paragraphs _ Confirm each paragraph Keep empty lines Convert selection ox coves 5 Leave the Edit mode and save the PD Optimizing Load Time for Converted Documents You may experience a significant increase of the time needed to load a document which has been previously converted into the new paragraph model The conversion to the new paragraph model is an automatic editing procedure that will increase the size of the companion LOG file significantly This log file records all changes to the content of a data source and is always inspected when loading a PD The time needed for checking is proportional to the size of the LOG file Note If you know that all PDs in all HUs using this document are in sync with the document you have converted you may compress the LOG file via DOCUMENTS DATA SOURCE A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 longer time to load consider resetting the LOG file MANAGEMENT RESET CHANGE LOG This will reduce the size of the LOG file and keep loading times to a minimum How ATLAS ti Handles Documents Naty Pia The content of a file is not embedded but referenced via its path and name This connection must stay intact If it is not you are about to ask the most frequently asked question Where is my PD A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 An HU or more precisely its PDs accesses documents via reference e g file name
394. query always enter the expressions in the order in which they appear in their natural language manifestation Another important characteristic for these operators is the specification of the operand for which you want the quotations Special Tools e 165 commutativity every proximity operator comes in two versions The rectangular areas symbolize overlapping and adjacent quotations E WITHIN button 166 e Special Tools retrieved A WITHIN B specifies the constraint but you must also specify if you want the quotations for the As or the Bs This is done implicitly by the sequence The code or term that is entered first is the one in which you are interested If B s quotations are requested you have to enter B ENCLOSES A using the query language described below Primary document P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 Figure 66 Visualizing the spatial relations between segments In the scheme above the quotations Q1 Q5 are referenced by the codes A B C Sample queries B overlaps A gt Q3 Q4 A overlapped by B gt Q1 Q2 C overlaps B gt Q5 A within C gt Q2 A overlaps C gt Q3 C follows A gt Q5 B overlaps C gt Q3 Q4 Embedding Operators The embedding operators describe quotations that are contained in one another and that are coded with certain codes WITHIN A WITHIN B retrieves all quotations coded with A that are contained within data segments coded with B A5 Us
395. quotations while a code family yields the quotations of all the codes that its members have In other words a family is interpreted as its member codes connected by the Boolean operator OR Selecting a code family F1 which contains five codes C1 C5 is equivalent to the query C1 OR C2 OR C3 OR C4 OR C5 Complex Operands Operand does not only apply to basic descriptors An operand can be any expression that itself 1s used as an argument An expression A AND B may be used in a more complex query as an operand NOT A AND B A AND B OR C AND NOT D etc All types of operands can be freely mixed in a query using any of the operators described below Operators Three sets of operators are available They are located within the toolbar at the left edge of the Query Tool Boolean operators allow combinations of keywords according to set operations They are the most common operators used in information retrieval systems Semantic operators exploit the network structures that were built from the codes Proximity operators are used to analyze the spatial relations e g distance embeddedness overlapping co occurrence between coded data segments Note You can display a short help message for each operator by right clicking on its corresponding button in the toolbar A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 J gt CK Boolean Operators kai OR button Y XOR button fy AND button NOT button A5 Us
396. r Scenario will likely reflect the project management procedures that will be used In order to better understand our recommendations for certain project setups it is useful to gain a solid understanding of how ATLAS ti handles documents See How ATLAS ti Handles Documents on page 93 for details Project Planning and Setup A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The scenarios below aim to provide concrete examples of how to create and maintain consistent projects In real life situations you may find that it sometimes makes sense to combine scenarios to achieve the best result Before starting a new project give some thought to the location of the documents and the HU Choosing a proper location can make your work significantly easier especially when it comes to teamwork Maximum flexibility can be achieved by storing all associated documents in a common folder hierarchy For simple projects one would typically choose to store the HU and the documents into the same folder If a common location for the documents is not possible e g your documents are scattered across the file system or the local area network certain rules should be followed see scenario 3 Project Management e 271 Basics Creating a New Hermeneutic Unit It is recommended that you decide on a location for the HU and a name for your project as a first step This eases the subsequent assignment of PDs Creating an HU in a specific folder can be acc
397. r 3 degree of fear 4 degree of fear 5 A special naming convention is necessary to let ATLAS ti identify variable codes from dichotomous codes Naming Convention for Scaled Codes Each code name is followed by at least one blank and the character you may choose an alternative lead character for the value part through the SPSS initial screen followed immediately by a value A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sty Use comments for an explanation of scaled code s values Don t assign mutually exclusive codes to the same quotation A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 This notation allows the system to construct one variable from a group of codes as in the example given above The new ordinal variable degree of fear has as many distinct values as the number of codes the user defined according to the convention In SPSS syntax the transfor mation of the data could be expressed as follows if degree of fear 1 eq 1 degree of fear 1 if degree of fear 2 eq 1 degree of fear 2 if degree of fear 3 eq 1 degree of fear 3 etc You are not restricted to numerical values anything that follows the special symbol is interpreted as a value The width reserved in the Data List statement of the syntax file is the maximum width of the largest of all values collected for a variable code Name Christine Name Thomas Name Hal The variable code Name will have three values Christine Thomas and Hal The width reserved
398. r plain text with formatting does not change the file extension A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Saving Edited Primary Documents If you leave the edit session without saving the edited PD the changes will be discarded This includes all changes to the HU caused by the editing session e g quotations deleted copied or moved by deleting copying or moving text If you do not save the text will revert to the state before the last edit session or when the document was last saved Leaving ATLAS ti without saving the HU after having edited and saved a document is not a problem as far as data integrity e g misaligned quotations is concerned Editing related changes to the HU quotations deleted copied or moved by deleting copying or moving text are not lost Of course all other HU related changes new or removed quotations codes memos are lost when leaving a session without saving the HU When you reload this HU the next time it will be synchronized with the PD s modified data source contents automatically To save a PD after editing click the Edit button and select either SAVE AND LEAVE EDIT MODE or SAVE ONLY from the drop down menu Enriching A Plain Text Document If you have edited a plain text document and added formatting attributes like fonts color font size bold italic embedded objects etc you are asked if you want to keep the formatting information and save the document as a rich text rtf document
399. r a simple quantitative content analysis It creates a list of word frequency counts for the selected or all currently filtered textual PDs A stop list and a list of ignorable characters can be used to control the analysis Creating a Word Frequency Report From the main menu select DOCUMENTS MISCELLANEOUS WORD CRUNCHER or click the main toolbar s Word Cruncher button A property dialog opens offering a Special Tools e 155 156 e Special Tools number of options that affect the procedure Word Cruncher Specify Properties Include Selected PD only Uncheck to include ALL curent textual POs Disabled if no PD te currently selected Use Built In Tool Uncheck to create an Excel compatible CSW file Use comma to separate fields for CSW clear to use semicolon Use Stoplisk toplist txt Clean text before counting ignore Ee agni E Ignore case Figure 57 Setting properties to start a word frequency count You may specify a number of properties before starting the frequency count Include Selected PD only Select the scope of the count to be all textual documents or the selected one only Use Built in Tool If you want to output the frequency count in Excel compatible format uncheck this option The built in tool is a simple list window In addition to the frequency count size and percentage for each word is shown The built in tool can only be used for a selected PD Use comma to separa
400. r field while holding down the Ctrl key double click the filter field to remove a filter Filter by Families When double clicking a family in any of the Family Managers the corresponding objects are filtered to the members of the selected family Double click again to remove the filter Overview of Filter Options Entity type Description PDs quotes codes me All objects are displayed filter off mos Pattern PDs quotes codes me Objects matching the entered search mos pattern Only today s PDs quotes codes me Objects created today mos Only mine PDs quotes codes me Objects created by the current user mos Co Authors PDs quotes codes me Objects created by any of the selected mos co authors Families PDs quotes codes me Objects belonging to a family mos Free PDs quotes codes me Objects that do no reference any other mos objects Commented PDs quotes codes Objects bearing a comment Selected PD quotes codes memos Objects referring or belonging to the currently selected primary document PD Memo PDs Memo used as primary document data sources Text PDs Textual primary documents plain and Rich Text Selected code Quotes Quotations coded with the currently selected code Abstract codes Codes Codes without quotations Less selective than Free A l 142 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Textual Level
401. r left corner of the Network Editor You can either distribute them manually by moving each node with the mouse or you can place them automatically by mis using the option LAYOUT SEMANTIC LAYOUT To import nodes from Object Managers using drag amp drop As another option you can import nodes by dragging objects from Object Managers the Network View Manager the Family Manager the margin or the Object Explorer into the Network Editor Drag amp drop gives you better control of the initial position of the imported nodes 1 Open the Network View to which you want new objects imported 2 Open the manager s for objects code list memo list etc that you want to import into a Network View 3 Select the node s you want to import into the Network View 4 Drag the selected objects into the Network Editor To drag selections of a primary text into a Network Editor This method creates nodes from textual quotations or new selections of text 1 Open the PD that contains the text that you want to import into a Network View 2 Make a selection within the PD or select an existing quotation 3 Drag the selected text into the Network Editor 4 Release the mouse button at the position you want the new node to be placed A new node is created and displayed If a quotation did not yet exist for the selection of text it will now be created The Network Editor et al e 227 Text dragged from other applications becomes
402. r now ATLAS ti converts all formatted text rich text contained in comments or memos into plain text Note When using XML as an exchange format to transfer memos and codes between HUs or when creating XML version HUs you will lose any formatting of the texts contained in the memos and codes A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Exporting and Importing Codes in XML Exporting Codes The code s name author creation and modification date as well as the query for super codes and their respective comments are included in the export format However no links to quotations or other objects are included You can export all codes or selected codes or all codes that pass the current filter To export all codes 1 Choose CODES MISCELLANEOUS EXPORT CODES XML from the main menu 2 Inthe output target dialog select File 3 Confirm the default or enter a new file name and save it to disk To export a list of selected codes 1 Open the Code Manager and select one or more codes 2 Choose EXPORT SELECTED CODES XML from the Code Manager s MISCELLANEOUS menu 3 Inthe output target dialog select File 4 Confirm the default or enter a new file name and save it to disk Importing Codes When you import codes in XML format additional information like the date of creation and modification the author and code comments in plain text only are also imported This is how you do tt 1 Se
403. r paragraphs are often the basis for the length of textual quotations Only text offers enough syntactical clues to allow for searches for the occurrence of specific evidence that may support a concept Text also offers the option for automatic segmentation as used by the Auto Coding procedure see also The Auto Coding Tool on page 151 Graphic quotations The creation activation and display of graphical quotations has similarities with but also differs from their textual counterparts A graphical quotation is a rectangular region inside a graphical PD From its data structure it is identical to textual quotations since their main attributes are also the PD identifier and two coordinates that mark the beginning and end defining a rectangle through its upper left and lower right corner Handling graphical quotations is analogous to marking text passages in a textual document See Selecting Graphical Segments on page 108 Multimedia quotations Audio quotations can be as short as a few milliseconds The length of an audio quotation can be selected on a track bar Segment starts and ends are displayed in the following format minutes seconds milliseconds Instructions on how to handle multimedia quotations can be found at Navigating Multimedia and Selecting Segments on page 109 Video quotations are handled very similar to audio quotations Selection is done via a track bar and the smallest unit you can select is
404. r s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Workbench Tools Overview e 39 Main Workspace The HU Editor Overview The Hermeneutic Unit HU Editor is the main workspace It is opened after the start of the program and will be your home page most of the time A weird HU ATLAS ti File Edit Documents Quotations Codes Memos Networks Views Tools Extras Windows Help oH E amp SHB P e y 1 oa z 2 sorte F 2 objectrepository rtf e other voices ofthe S PS A text with lotta objects Pai revsneantt y which are yet to sound Angel Action Consequence 4n embedded Excel table 41 sound hail and fire etc 2 sound great mountain burning 3 sound great star fell from heaven 4 sound 1 3 part of sun smitten Medium severity C4 E T is n embedded Excel Workspace Double click to ac Now look at E 5 2 An embedded movie clip 1 Main toolbar 2 Edit toolbar 3 Drop down lists 4 PD toolbar 5 Primary doc pane 6 Paragraph numbers T Status bar 6 Margin area Play videos by double clicking 9 Split bar fish av ilk Aubo Backup 18 21 32 rd 2 ANSI CP O Figure 10 The HU Editor with activated line numbers and margin area The HU Editor serves as the main editing tool and offers access to all other workbench tools With all optional controls buttons and panes visible the HU Editor looks rather overwhelming at first You can decide which parts of the window to display and customize its appearance to A5
405. r there as well Object Explorer HU The Sample Sel The Sample Pi Primary Docs 64 Se Codes 52 Ek Memos 12 F Primary Doc Families t8 F Code Families t6 F Memo Families 2 eS Network Views 103 This HU is a toy example but nevertheless draws some interesting relations between magic and religous terminology The Sample Figure 74 The Object Explorer The upper pane displays the tree structured contents of the HU The text pane below displays the comment that is associated with the activated object The root object of the tree is of course the HU itself The direct branches from this root are Primary Docs Codes Memos Primary Doc Families Code Families Memo Families and Network Views Using the Object Explorer The Object Explorer can be launched by clicking on the a button in the main toolbar or by selecting EXTRAS OBJECT EXPLORER from the main menu Special Tools e 183 Codes linked via transitive relations as shown in the figure to the right are displayed in hierarchical order in the Object Explorer and Code Forest 184 e Special Tools Expanding and Collapsing Branches You can expand and collapse the branches of the Object Explorer tree If a branch can be expanded a plus sign is displayed to the left of the object unless this is switched off via VIEWS HAS BUTTONS Expanded branches are indicated by a minus sign You can expand or collapse a branch with a mouse click
406. rag amp Drop 9 10 15 51 63 68 69 178 Open Hermeneutic Unit 63 E Edit Families Menu 351 Index e 405 Edit Menu 349 Embedded Objects 13 72 82 Activation 82 Editing 85 Encoding type 351 Epistemological primitives 214 Error log file 333 Execute 349 Exploration 4 Export HTML 307 Export network 242 Extension 164 F Families 33 191 Add items 194 As filters 196 Create 194 Create from network views 203 387 Family Manager 192 Remove 197 Family Manager 19 36 192 File locking 88 File menu commands 347 Filter 21 139 Remove 142 Reverse 141 First class links 212 Folders 14 Fonts 390 Format Menu 349 G Graph theory 211 Graphical PDs 74 GREP search 149 Grounded Theory 116 214 H Hermeneutic Unit 28 Close 347 Edit comment 347 Load last used 63 New HU 347 406 e Index Open file 347 Open using HU Browser 62 347 Open with drag amp drop 63 Save 63 347 Save as 347 Hermeneutic Unit editor See also HU Editor Hierarchical view 183 HTML Absolute paths 393 Code lists 394 Contents table 392 Export 307 File size 308 Include HPR link 392 including network views 309 Inlined documents 393 Inlining network views 396 PD reference 393 Preferences 391 Reference to network view 396 Short report 392 HU Browser 36 62 347 HU Editor 36 launching object manager 43 Line Paragraph Numbers 43 Main Screen 41 Margin Area 43 117 Save Hermeneutic Unit 347 Status Bar 44 title bar 42 Hyperlink Defining new re
407. rage until selected for the first time Memos which are not yet loaded are displayed in gray Memos which were created or modified today are displayed bold A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Main Workspace The HU Editor e 57 Memo Manager Toolbar Open network view Edit memo content Open memo family Toggle always on top browser Create anew memo SEER xS M Delete memo L Create output Toggle view Memo Manager List Columns Name Type Grounded Density Size 4uthor Created Modified POs W Big Star Com 2 6 56 ATLAS Tes yes Ue OS Oi Name Memo title Type Memo type Grounded Number of quotations to which a memo is connected Density Number of objects to which a memo is connected Density is at least the size of groundedness because associated quotations are counted Size Size of text Counts characters and embedded objects Author Name of the user who created the memo Created Creation date and time Modified Date and time of last modification PDs Indicates whether the memo is used as the data source for one or more PDs A dash indicates that it is not used as a PD 58 e Main Workspace The HU Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Working with ATLAS ti This section describes how to start and end an ATLAS ti session how to create and save a project a Hermeneutic Unit in ATLAS ti terminology how to assign and load primary documents and how to navigate within Primary Documents PDs N
408. rd data interface 400 e Appendix look like This is commonly achieved with the help of so called stylesheets XML vs HTML A Little Tech Talk XML is short for eXtensible Markup Language This is already quite a useful description when you compare it to its competitor or predecessor HTML short for HyperText Markup Language A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The crucial term 1s extensible NOT extended HTML was intended to allow documents and information of considerable complexity to be exchanged across different technologies operating systems browsers etc It was also meant as a language which describes the logical structure of documents If you look at today s HTML code right click and select View Source when browsing a web page you will have a hard time identifying content in the chaotic noise produced by tags representing tables frames buttons rulers fonts images indentation etc Both HTML and XML are descendants of a much more powerful and less comprehensible language SGML the Standard Generalized Markup Language What XML shares with the latter 1s that you can define your own new languages something HTML does not allow for While HTML is a ready complete language itself XML is a meta language for defining new languages HTML has no clear separation of content and presentation With a fixed set of tags there 1s no way to clearly mark up document content in a meaningful manner If you have
409. re a common data source Primary Documents P 4 and P 5 in the figure below refer to the same file E Primary Doc Manager HU A very new HU Documents Edit Miscellaneous Outpuk View Mame Origin Media OUSA JPts lt HUPATH gt US4 JPG Image INDIAN TAT lt HUPATH gt INDIAN TST Text AMN Terminology bmp lt TBPATH 1 Terminology bmp Image beyond text doc Deitextelbeyond text doc Rich Text Figure 25 Five PDs created from four documents Two documents from the HU s folder one from the textbank folder and one assigned twice from an arbitrary path Assigning Documents via the File Dialog To assign files 1 Choose DOCUMENTS ASSIGN from the main menu The file dialog box opens by default on the textbank folder If you have already assigned files during this session the most recently used folder is opened 2 By default all file types that are permitted to be assigned as PDs are offered By selecting from the filter drop down you Working with ATLAS ti e 67 CA Sty oe Complete folders can be assigned in one step Don t assign incompatible files via drag amp drop 68 e Working with ATLAS ti can restrict the type of documents 3 BE Uy PP FICK etA ormat Files rtt q Nadia rte Windows or 05 2 Bitmap bmp L b F wihi Flaster crmu S Rebeccartt windows or 05 2 DIB dib Ei Samantha rtf FEM fbr Bl silvia rtf GEM Bit gem T tf JPEG JFIF Compliant iF 1 ai JPEG
410. re identifies overlapping or embedded quotations that are associated with the same code Such codings possibly indicating redundancy can result from normal coding but may occur unnoticed during a merge procedure You might not need or want to correct redundant codings but these occurrences may be indicative of methodological issues in your analysis The Coding Analyzer Screen The Coding Analyzer finds codes with redundant codings and offers appropriate procedures To open the tool select EXTRAS REDUNDANT CODING ANALYZER from the HU editor s main menu The upper pane displays a list of codes referencing overlapping quotations Clicking on a code displays the conflicting quotations pair wise Double clicking on a listed quotation displays it in context 188 Special Tools A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 EEk Redundant Coding Analyzer Codes with redundant codings Marne Redundancy Grounded Author 2 Fire 11 3 Admin 2 cold 3 Admin eMagic 3 1 Created 11 035 91 ic 11 0391 iLi Ei he Density Admin Pairs of redundant quotations Mame Eli 13 and the third part Ejj 13 and the third part Ei 17 and the third part Eli 15 and the third part Mame El 17 and the third part 9 1 27 12 And the Fourth E4 1 27 12 And the Fourth 4 1 24 9 And the third par Figure 76 The Redundant Coding Analyzer The upper pane lists all code
411. re seeing links between a quotation represented by a bracket and the code represented by its name icon etc Renaming or removing a code in the margin besides a text on real paper using an eraser and a pencil affects only one specific occurrence of a code all other occurrences of the same code are untouched The effect of the operation is local With ATLAS ti you can do the same However you can do additional things that are not possible using traditional paper and pencil By renaming or removing a code from an HU you are affecting every occurrence of the code throughout the entire HU The effect is global Renaming the code will instantly change all the code links in the margin to reflect the new name Deleting it will The Textual Level Basic Functions e 123 Naty k Renaming or replacing remove all occurrences in the margin and from all other contexts in which it was engaged like network views families etc To Rename a Code 1 Select a code in a Network View or in one of the following places the code drop down list the Code Manager the Object Explorer or the Code Forest 2 When selecting a code from a list you can use the CODES RENAME function from the main menu The Rename option is also available from the context menu 3 Enter the new name and click OK Another method to rename a code is to use In Place Editing This option is available in the Code Manager the Object Explorer and
412. re that the new PDs are numbered consecutively If your HU already contains P1 to P10 the numbers of the additional PDs in the documents column need to start at P11 If the document number and path reference do not match an existing reference then this document is ignored and not assigned as a PD To Import a PD Family Table 1 From the main menu select DOCUMENTS MISCELLANEOUS IMPORT PD FAMILY TABLE This option is also available from the Families menu or from the context menu in the PD Family Manager 2 If you are importing into a new HU the following dialog opens asking you to store the HU before proceeding This is A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Family Life e 201 needed to be able to access HU follower documents using the special lt HUPATH gt E import PD Family Table You are about bo import a PO Family table into a mew HU which has not yet been saved to disk For imported PDs which use the relative lt HUPATH to access their data sources Files the HU s location must be known It is recommended to store the HU before importing the table Do you want fo save if now 3 Inthe next step a standard file dialog window opens Select and open a PD Family file created as explained above 4 Select the field delimiter comma semicolon or tab Import PD Family Table Choose field delimiter used to separate values Recommended by analyzing input file Semicolon O Tab ATLAS ti analyzes
413. reate each user in the user editor see steps in Add a New User on page 266 Be sure that the project administrator has administrative rights All other users should have standard rights As a reminder administrative rights allow a user to add and delete users from the user database Register each user as a project co author This action will allow them to open and work with your project see details in Co Authors on page 263 Set the access rights for this HU If this action is not taken each user will only have read rights and will not be able to save From the HU Editors main menu CHOOSE EXTRAS CHANGE ACCESS RIGHTS PUBLIC READ ONLY or PRIVATE if you want users to save their project work See Access Rights on page 263 for details A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Scenario 1 All in One This is the simplest of all scenarios All data files related to your project and your HU will be stored in the same folder hierarchy Examples 1 You work on your own on a single project for example a thesis dissertation or research project at one computer desktop or laptop 2 A user works on different aspects of a problem using several HUs 3 Simple team Several users are working on different aspects of a problem in separate HUs All HUs are located on a central server Project Setup Note If you have already stored the documents you can proceed with Step 3 1 Create a new folder for your projec
414. reated with the Relation Editor 1 When linking codes or quotations select the option OPEN RELATION EDITOR instead of one of the offered relations Or select NETWORKS RELATION EDITOR from the main menu 2 Inthe Relation Editor select the menu option EDIT NEW RELATION 3 Enter a short unique ID for the relation you want to create The internal ID is displayed in the list of relations in column ID 4 Next enter a label 1 a label 2 and the menu text In the Network Editor you have three options to display the name of the relation see figure below As a view option you can either display label 1 label 2 or the menu label If there is sufficient space in the network you can select to display the menu label which is usually longer Choose an abbreviation for labels 1 and 2 as a display option when space is limited Suggestion Choose a symbol for label 1 a short word for label 2 Link Display Label 1 Label 2 e Menu Label Full Image for POs Quotation verbosity Set Fonts Boxed Labels Set Colors Rotated Labels The menu label equals the menu text The text entered in the field Menu Text is used in the relation menu and as a label In addition the menu text is also used when outputting networked codes in the form of quasi sentences CODES OUTPUT CODE HIERARCHY or CODE NEIGHBORS 5 Next select the line style width color solid or dashed 6 If you wish you can specify the preferred layout direction that
415. reen s resolution When preparing a graphic file for use with ATLAS ti use image processing software to reduce the size so that the graphics are comfortably displayed on your computer s screen If an image does not fit into the primary pane you may need to use the zoom function available via the mouse wheel or the zoom button when displaying the image using ATLAS ti Preparing Multimedia Documents Supported Formats ATLAS ti s multimedia capabilities are built upon the Windows Media Control Interface MCI To be able to access multimedia files from ATLAS ti the corresponding MCI device drivers must be installed If you assign PDs and the file dialog does not offer any of the expected file formats you may have to install the drivers While drivers for AVI and WAV files are installed in any A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Naty rA Test MCI compatibility of your multimedia data A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 basic Windows system or at least when installing a sound adapter formats like MOV QT AU SND MPG and MP3 may require a dedicated driver Check the Multimedia section in EXTRAS SYSTEM REPORT for a complete list of supported media types Test Multimedia File Compatibility There is a simple test to check if a document is compatible with ATLAS ti s multimedia approach Run Windows MC I based multimedia player Go to the START menu in the Windows taskbar and choose RUN Enter MPLA Y32 and hit OK Fro
416. removes items to families e ASSIGN FAMILIES Assigns one or more families to the selected code When choosing this option in the context of an Object Manager more than one code can be selected and assigned OPEN NETWORK VIEW Opens a Network View on the selected code Choosing this option in the context of an Object Manager displays all selected codes in the network view Hold down the Ctrl key to list all network views containing the selected code CODE MANAGER Displays the list of codes in a separate window the Code Manager The Code Manager offers a number of options for managing codes see Code Manager on page 55 for details MISCELLANEOUS SUBMENU A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 357 Info Duplicate Split Code Edit Query Create Snapshot Code Forest Code Tree Import Code List Merge Codes Unlink Guokations Unilink all Quotations Export Code XML Export Codes ML Import Codes ML Change Date Change Author 358 e Reference INFO Displays information about the currently activated code code name date of creation and modification name of author number of referenced quotations its comment DUPLICATE Opens a Network View including the currently activated code and a clone The clone duplicates the code its comment all quotation references and other linked objects After importing all referenced quotations the original code can be split see Splitting Codes on pa
417. renced quotation s Family Output When clicking the output button in any of the three family managers a report is created with information associated with the selected family name comment list of members When desired a report of all quotations that are associated with any of the members of the family is included Creating Reports with the XML Converter 318 e Generating Output Introduction While ATLAS ti s HTML generator see HTML Export on page 307 offers a comfortable way to create browsable versions of a Hermeneutic Unit on the fly using XML extends the available options considerably However to fully exploit the potentials of XML you need to learn this new language The real power of the XML standard is unleashed by applying so called stylesheets In fact an entire style language the eXtensible Style Language XSL or more specifically XSLT is dedicated to A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 b A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 creating useful little programs and even full blown applications on the basis of XML structured data Note You do not have to learn the XSLT language to use the XML Converter with the provided stylesheets However to create your own reports browsers and converters some knowledge of the language 1s necessary A Hermeneutic Unit exported to XML representation via EXTRAS EXPORT TO XML see Exporting the Hermeneutic Unit in XML on page 306 can be converted into
418. rent window e They are minimized when the parent window is minimized and they are restored with their parent window e They are closed when the parent window is closed e However child windows do NOT move with the parent window 46 e Main Workspace The HU Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 F Dorcs F1 Revelation g F 2 Revelation 9 JP 3 Indian Camp F 4 The sefiroth treee PS Revelation NIETZ5CH BMF unicodememo Ext A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Quotes On low resolution screens Object Managers can cover relatively large areas of the workspace You can use the roll up mode to save screen space see Rollup Mode on page 11 Launching an Object Manager To the left of every drop down list is a button to launch the corresponding Object Manager El Primary Doc Manager HU The Sample Documents Edit Miscellaneous Qutpuk view Hrg X E W Id Mame Media Origin Quotations Author Revelation 87 Rich Text lt HUPATH 2 rev 6 rtr 36 Admin Rich Text lt HUPATH rew 9 rtF 32 Admin Revelation 9 7 i Indian Camp Text ANSI lt HUF ATH 1indian txt 45 Andreas al P 4 The sefiroth tree Image lt HUPATH gt Kabbala bmp 6 Thomas M w PS Revelation Rich Text Memo Revelation O M 1 Thomas M Ei Pe NIETZ5 CH BMP Image De TextBankiNIETZSCH B 0 Admin 2 Py unicodemerna txt Text ANSI lt TBPATH unicodemema 1 Admin MH gt A
419. res not covered by the explanations found in The Conceptual Level Networks on page 211 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Network Editor et al e 241 Theory Transfer Theory transfer supports By Theory Transfer we mean the re use of codes relations and a deductive approach to code networks produced in one project in subsequent projects analyzing qualitative data and the application of proven theories to e The re use of a flat unstructured list of codes including other domains names code definitions author date of creation and modification in other HUs Two different strategies are supported e The transfer of rich representations of codes including the connections between codes Flat Code Migration The first strategy using unstructured code lists includes the output of all or a selection of codes from one HU into a file and the later import of this code file into another HU Step by step instruction is provided elsewhere see Transferring Codes from Other Projects on page 122 The method of flat code migration is useful when working in teams and when a code list is first developed on one computer This way other team members can easily import the agreed upon list of codes into their HUs Other potential applications for this function include testing reliability or starting deductive structural theory work from scratch When testing for reliability a given code base can be used on the same m
420. rily intended to be printed directly but are to be processed by other applications like the SPSS generation several CSV comma separated values that can be processed by Excel formatted outputs and HTML and XML export XML allows flexible user defined reports You can find those procedures in chapter Export amp Import on page 299 One powerful output function described below makes use of XML converted HUs the XML Converter A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 General Procedure A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Output Destinations When creating textual output or when creating text based exports the following dialog is usually displayed in the course of the process Send output to Editor C Printer File File amp Run You can send output to e Editor The output will be displayed within a text editor This option is useful if modifications are needed before actually sending 1t to the printer or if you are unsure about the size of the result e Printer If you select this option the output will be printed the printer dialog window opens where you may select the desired print options e File If you select this option the output will be saved to a file a save file dialog opens e File amp Run If you select the last option the file dialog window opens After it has been saved the file will be opened by the application registered for its extension e g a CSV file will be opened in E
421. rimary Documents e 77 Navigating within Graphical Primary Documents To change the visible section of a graphical PD e Use the scrollbars e Youcan scroll up and down using the mouse wheel e The cursor arrows and other navigational keys can be used Note When you click on the upper left corner of a graphical PD its comment is displayed in a pop up window Navigating within Multimedia Primary Documents Display selected parts of audio or video documents by moving the track bar slider Do this by clicking the navigation button of the media control window or by using short cut keys see Navigating Multimedia and Selecting Segments on page 109 Disconnecting Primary Documents Removing unwanted PDs from an HU 1s called disconnecting If you disconnect a PD the data source the document file or memo to which it refers is not deleted or otherwise affected but disconnecting a PD does remove all of its quotations from the HU As a consequence all references to other quotations hyperlinks other codes and memos are also removed Disconnecting a Primary Document 1 Select the PD to be removed from the HU 2 Choose DOCUMENTS DISCONNECT from the main menu If you select a PD in the Document Manager right click on the document and choose DISCONNECT from the context menu Editing Primary Documents PDs are often shared among different projects and or researchers A single file can be in use by more than one pro
422. rison creates additional alternatives leaving the original reference untouched Based on these different functionalities the two options can be used for different purposes Use the change path option to do the following e To move a PD and all associated files to a different location on your computer e To modify the path for a single or only a few PDs after documents have been moved e To change the name of a data source file reference Use the redirection option for the following purposes e To create alternative access routes to your data source files if the location has changed for many or all of your PDs This may occur when a system is restructured A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Primary Documents e 101 Wta aN you can avoid Path Mapping altogether great But there are a few situations where it might be necessary 102 e Primary Documents e To create an alternative access route if a drive that was used to assign PDs e g Z 1s not available on your computer which may happen after migrating to another computer e Last resort If no explicit redirection yields a valid path via fallback described below documents with the same file name are searched for only in the HUPATH or TBPATH folder Redirection If a document cannot be found under its original reference file name and path two procedures are initiated first Path Mapping is tried then Fallback How ATLAS ti loads mapped P
423. rol Window Primary Quotation Segment Segment Segment Doc title name start end length videof2 avi 1450 Track bar T E OS KHUN UE 0 00 00 359 Sneak Skip Create Current position Preview and quotation Repeat WA Mark segment end Stop Play Pause Mark segment start Figu re 35 The multimedia control window The title bar displays the name of the selected primary document together with some information about the media contents e g length stereo vs mono recording quality etc Below the title bar are three info fields that display the name of the selected quotation the start and end position and its length For audio files the position data is displayed in minutes seconds milliseconds for video files it is displayed in frames Next to the toolbar you will find another info field displaying the current absolute position The track bar represents the entire length of the audio or video file The slider shows the current position To navigate audio or video files you can move the track slider push the skip and move buttons or use the right and left cursor keys The toolbar offers the following functionalities from left to right Description Clicking on this button will toggle between playing Play Pause or pausing the current audio or video stream When you hold down the Ctrl key at the same time the current segment will be played Keyboard shortcut Play p toggle Space Stops playing the current
424. rotect the Hermeneutic Unit against loading unless a correct password is provided Make sure you remember the password or you will not be able to load your own Hermeneutic Unit again As with all other access related options you need to save the Hermeneutic Unit before any changes are in effect To restrict access to a group of co authors 1 e more than one author the sub menu EXTRAS CO AUTHORS offers three options for authors add remove and view the list of co authors currently defined for this Hermeneutic Unit This feature only makes sense if public access to the HU has not been granted Register co authors Co authors have the same rights as the original author except for the right to define or remove co authors unless having administrative rights themselves To include co authors you are presented the list of all users known to the system which have previously been defined by the administrator or the original author Collaboration e 263 Remove co authors You are presented the list of current co authors Choose the ones to be removed from the Hermeneutic Unit Display co authors Displays the list of co authors currently assigned to the Hermeneutic Unit Filtering by co authors To display only those parts of a Hermeneutic Unit created by a subset of the co authors involved choose the filter option Co AUTHORS in any of the Object Managers User Management 2 ATLAS ti s user database is independent of
425. rs 2 Create the HU in an appropriate location See Creating a Hermeneutic Unit on page 61 3 Make sure that the Use Special Paths option is unchecked 4 Assign documents from their respective folders Drag amp Drop is an efficient technique here This procedure results in a project where all documents are assigned with their absolute paths Benefits of this approach e The HU is not tied to the location of its documents and may be copied and moved anywhere without losing functionality as long as references point to the correct locations of the documents e Archive friendly documents can stay where they are and do not need to be placed in a common folder Drawbacks e Copying or moving an HU to other environments is not as smooth For instance if a server that hosts PDs is changed e g new or changed disk drives these documents can no longer be reached When you migrate such a project using Copy Bundle the situation on the target computer can differ considerably from the computer on which the project was created Variation Distributed Project See Variation Distributed Project Team on page 273 for an introduction Unlike Scenario 1 HUs are fully movable and can be copied as long as the HUs refer to the same documents on every team member s computer If all work is on the same local area network this can be accomplished by assigning documents as network resources browse My Networks resultin
426. rsions of ATLAS ti To utilize those documents formatted and used in previous versions of ATLAS ti users can either convert documents to the new paragraph model see Converting Documents to New Paragraph Model on page 91 or leave them as is as long as you can live without the neat line breaks If you have a lot of documents formatted using the old paragraph model and you do not have the time to convert them to properly formatted texts you may still assign them to a HU as is However unlike PDs in old HUs it is assumed that newly assigned documents use the standard new paragraph model The effect is that each line is treated as a paragraph and empty lines are not treated in any special way This diminishes the options to select search and auto code these documents For such a situation you may force the legacy document to be interpreted the old way by setting the properties to old paragraph model using DOCUMENTS DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT ASSUME OLD PARAGRAPH MODEL Preparing Graphical Documents A variety of graphic formats can be used as PDs in ATLAS ti Supported Formats More than twenty graphic file formats are accepted by ATLAS ti as valid data sources for PDs including BMP JPEG and TIFF Scanners often produce TIFF and digital cameras usually create JPEG images Size recommendations Digital cameras and scanners often create images with a resolution that significantly exceeds the sc
427. rting Bugs on page 333 To contact our support team visit our website at www atlasti com and follow the Support link A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Troubleshooting Of Bugs amp Nuisances A bug is a software error The term originates from an actual bug that once crashed the hardware of a computer system A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Sad but inevitable no software and no operating system is totally free of errors or bugs It s usually not so much inherent programming slip ups that cause a program to malfunction Much more frequently it is simply the digital environment inside your computer with which it doesn t agree This is because every deployment scenario is ultimately unique every installation on every single computer differs from the next as different software packages drivers hardware components and many many individual user settings all struggle to get along and vie for system resources Sometimes that precarious balance cannot be easily achieved and clashes occur There really is no good way to test complex software other than through empirical tests Only by practical application in the hands of developers beta testers and yes the users can errors and conflicts be found The development of ATLAS ti is and has been an evolutionary process by design and with significant user involvement providing feedback proposing new features reporting bugs It is for this reason it
428. ry building often associated with building networks also can involve the use of memos Memos are explanatory and descriptive texts that may be associated with other objects like quotations codes or other memos Memos can also stand alone simply as part of a HU They can contain methodological notes they can be used as a bulletin board to exchange information between team members you can use them to write notes about the analytical process keeping a journal of to dos Memos may also serve as a repository for symbols text templates and embedded objects that you may want to insert into PDs or other memos One important usage for memos is as internal data sources for primary documents as described in Using Memos as PDs on page 133 Difference between Memos and Codes Code names are or should be succinct dense descriptors for concepts emerging during the stage of closely studying the data They often reduce complex findings to crisp placeholders and or theoretically relevant concepts Beginners often stuff lengthy treatises into a code name blurring the distinction between codes comments and memos and thereby mistaking codes for their more appropriate siblings If you find yourself using more than a few words as code word consider using memos or the code comment instead Like codes memos have names These names or titles are used for displaying memos in browsers and help to find specific memos Just like cod
429. s EXPAND Shortcut CTRL Expands a Network View by increasing distances between nodes SHRINK Shortcut CTRL Shrinks a Network View by decreasing distances between nodes FIT TO WINDOW Reference e 381 Left Fight Top Bottom Center vertically Center Horizontally Ckrl ShiFt 4lk 0 Ctrl ShiFk L Ctrl ShiFt R Ctrl ShiFk T Ctrl Shirk B Ctrl ShiFk C Distribute Vertically Ctrl ShiFt b l Distribute Horizontally ctrl shitt at D Aligns selected nodes with the left hand side of the first selected Send to Back Bring to Front Move 382 e Reference Ctrl B Ctrl F Expands or shrinks the current layout proportionally to fit the current window size FIT WINDOW TO NETWORK Shortcut CTRL W Reduces or enlarges the Network Editor s window depending on the size of the network displayed Alignment Submenu The alignment options help produce neat looking Network Views Only selected nodes are affected by the alignment process If you use alignment functions frequently open the floating alignment tool via the Display menu LEFT Shortcut Ctrl Left L node Their vertical position is not changed 1 Select a node whose left edge should serve as reference point 2 Select the nodes that are to be aligned with the first node s left edge RIGHT Shortcut CTRL SHIFT R Aligns selected nodes with the right hand side of the first selected node Their vertical position is not changed
430. s on page 228 for more detail MERGE NETWORK VIEWS Imports all nodes from another Network View of the same HU Objects for nodes that already exist are ignored UNDO IMPORT NEIGHBORS Shortcut CTRL SHIFT Z Removes all nodes that were imported when last clicking on the IMPORT NEIGHBORS option This can be helpful when a large number of quotation nodes were accidentally imported MERGE CODES One or more selected codes are incorporated into one single code See also Merging Codes using the Network Editor on page 243 DUPLICATE CODES Creates exact clones of the selected code nodes This option is only available if codes are selected Super Codes are not allowed Can be used used to inverse the effect of Merge Codes See Splitting Codes on page 245 for an application of this function DE SELECT ALL NODES Shortcut CTRL A Selects all nodes If all nodes are already selected this operation de selects all nodes De selecting all nodes can also be accomplished by double clicking on the background of the Network Editor between nodes INVERSE SELECTION Shortcut CTRL I Selects all nodes that are currently not selected and de selects all nodes currently selected SELECT NEIGHBOR S Shortcut CTRL N Selects all direct neighbors of the currently selected node s See also Selecting Neighbors on page 221 SELECT FROM LIST A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Link Modes Cue Links Flip Links Edit
431. s WI Int 1 rephrased Sum EI Revelation Memo 1 6 Justification Com Figure 40 The PDs column shows how many PDs use the memo is used as the data source To assign a memo as primary document 1 Create or select a memo in the Memo Manager 2 Select the menu option MISCELLANEOUS USE AS PRIMARY Doc from the context menu or the Memos menu Or drag the The Textual Level Basic Functions e 133 memo into the PD Manager Miscellaneaous Memo Goodies Memo Preferences You may specify a number of settings for memos via EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES MEMOS See General Preferences Section Memos on page 346 Dragging a Memo to Another Hermeneutic Unit You can drag memos between HUs This transfers the memo name body type but none of its referenced quotations codes etc are migrated along B Using Memos to Create a Code List Using a pseudo memo allows you to bulk create a large number of free codes 1 Create a new memo 2 Type a list of codes with one code per line 3 Save the memo 4 From the MISCELLANEOUS menu choose the option CREATE CODES FROM SELECTED MEMO Codes in the memo s code list that already exist are prefixed with three exclamation marks If such prefixed codes already exist they are ignored Drag amp Drop Text to Create a Memo While dropping text into the text pane of the Memo Manager or the memo editor inserts the dropped text at the drop position dragging select
432. s long history of practical application in the hands of many dedicated users the world over that ATLAS ti 5 has achieved its level of maturity stability and robustness So the good news is that the majority of bugs are harmless and most are never even noticed under normal conditions Other errors are only errors in the eye of the user and not infrequently even turn out to be part of the software by design And quite often errors or unexpected behavior are the result of applying the wrong procedure to a task Troubleshooting e 329 Known Issues Most errors are trapped by the program and reported to the user in such a way that the erroneous behavior can be avoided in a subsequent attempt In this section a few problems and if available possible workarounds are described These issues are being monitored and may appear as bug fixes in the future Screen Refresh When scrolling lists in any of the tools you may experience refresh problems under certain system configurations Such problems may appear as incomplete redraw of items looking like items are missing Use General Preferences and check option Increase List Refresh This will result in more complete redraws but also increases screen flicker No Buttons in Main Toolbar This problem has been reported by some users As far as we know this problem only appears on some computers when working under Windows XP in Classic Mode user interface elements look as in pre
433. s 13 0 Chemical warfare 1 0 3 Dimension Horror 0 5 2 Earth 4 1 TE A SF Ecology 1 01 eal l and stood at the altar he gt S4 Fire 12 3 and there fell a great star A George 15 0 And the smoke of the ince 2 Gold 4 3 gh Golden Altar 11 0 kS LU Distance in lines E Result 15 TE All and there Followed hail ar and there Fell a great star gt The term stack now contains one term OR Earth Fire again now the combination of the two codes This term can be used as an operand to further extend the query e g to negate the expression But we will stop here for now The feedback pane displays the query in infix notation as we would have entered it into a regular calculator Earth OR Fire The results pane lists 15 quotations that have been coded with code Earth or with code Fire or with both codes You can look at the quotations in the context of the document by clicking ona quotation in the list or you can create a report Viewing results in context 1 Make sure that the Query Tool does not completely obstruct the area where PDs are displayed 172 e Special Tools A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 2 Click on a quotation in the results pane 3 The quotation is highlighted in the primary document pane Wi e mee e e e ke e 1 6 andtherefell a great star E 3 Fire 12 3 ga George 115 047 18 And the smoke of the inc
434. s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Another way to add members is to drag them from an Object Manager the Object Explorer or the margin area into the member s pane If you want to add one item at a time you can simply double click an item To remove items from a family 1 Open the Family Manager for the relevant object type 2 Select a family 3 Select one or more items in the list pane entitled Members 4 Click the Remove Items button to remove the selected items from the selected family The items are only deleted from this family and not from the system 5 If you want to remove one item at a time you can simply double click on each item Note If you delete objects that belong to a family somewhere else they will be removed automatically from all their hosting families Writing a Comment for a Family The family comment can be used to describe why and for what purpose a family was created This is especially useful when families are treated as attributes Creating or Editing a Family Comment 1 Open the Family Manager for the relevant object type e g by clicking the Family button E in an Object Explorer 2 Select a family 3 Inthe text pane write or edit a comment Alternatively you can open a full fledged editor by clicking the Comment button CI in the toolbar Assigning Families to Objects The option Assigning families is another way of adding members to a family Given a number of predefined attributes
435. s Using Drag amp Drop on page 70 EA Primary Doc Manager HU The Sample Seles Documents Edit Miscellaneous Output View ay Name Media Origin Quotations Author Revelation Ge Rich Text lt HUPATH rex 6 rtf 36 Admin Revelation Ge Rich Text lt HUPATH gt rev 9 rth ae Admin Indian Camp Text AMSI lt HUPATH indian txt 45 Andreas The sefiroth tree Image lt HUPATH gt Kabbala bmp Thomas Ml Revelation Rich Text M Memoa Revelation 0 M Thomas M MIETZSCH BMP Image De TextBankiWIETZ5CH E Admin unicodemema txt Text ANSI lt TBPATH unicodememna Admin A short story by Ernest Hemingway which was used in a semiotics seminar This primary text has nothing to do with the topic of this HU The text was included merely as a filler to demonstrate primary text families Note All quotations in this text were created by automatic coding where search category 3 was used to code all sentences including either three or third 7 Primary Docs F 3 Indian Campe All Id The F index Figure 14 The Primary Document Manager with one PD selected Its comment displayed in the text pane Single click selects a quotation If you have written a comment for the selected PD it is displayed in the text pane Single click pause single click or F2 activates in place editing of PD names Double click Double clicking a PD loads the data source and displays its content in the PD pane Multiple Selecti
436. s bar offers a few additional options like reversing or removing the filter When a filter is active the background color of the affected lists and Object Managers changes The figure below shows the Filter menu for codes with the current filter set to All which is also the default Filter All e Al Toggle Filter Pattern Selected primary document Edit Families hee i ree codes Open Network View Abstract codes Code Manager SUPEr Miscellaneous PE n ays Output ieee Only mine Co authors Commented codes Families Figure 49 Available filter settings for codes After setting a filter the background color of the affected Object Manager and drop down list changes You can modify this color by changing the tool tip color via Windows display preferences In the figure below the filter is set to abstract codes 140 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Filters affect a number of procedures A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 E Code Manager HU The Sample Sele Codes Edit Miscellaneous Output View ca a eT Grounded Density 4uthor Current Filter n Current Sort 9 Codes Mo item selected Abstract Mame Title Figure 50 Object Manager with active filter Note Most operations e g display printing export on sets of objects include only the currently filtered set For this reason if a filter was set for quotations the output of all quotations woul
437. s case the links Define your own epistemological primitives Another way to think of links and relations is to view links as instances of relations Links are well informed about the characteristics of relations which define their styles If a characteristic of a relation is changed e g line width color symbol these changes are propagated to all links using it PAIN consequence temporary reliet strategy strategy strategy a Reading a book Splint leg Taking pills Figure 85 Four links using two relations strategy and consequence The Role of Relations It is useful to understand the role that relations play in the construction of a theory The concepts codes that are linked using relations represent aspects of the problem domain under investigation On the other hand the relations used to link these domain concepts are part of the methodology used to analyze the phenomena As important epistemological tools they constitute the main questions that guide the development of a model or a theory The Grounded Theory method of Glaser amp Strauss uses relations like is phenomenon is context of is consequence of is condition for is strategy for etc to relate concepts found during the data oriented open coding phase In the analysis of argumentation structures other relations are more suitable e g is evidence of is contradictory to warrants etc
438. s for which redundant codings were found The Redundancy column displays the number of pairs of redundant quotations found for the codes If you select one of the codes the redundant quotations are listed in pairs in the two lower panes Double clicking on the listed quotations displays and highlights them in context Because of this you can check them in context and decide how to proceed The two figure below illustrate a typical redundant coding 0 And the third part of the creatures which were in these and had life ded and the third part of the ships were destroyed Figure 77 Viewing quote 1 24 in context 3 And the third part of the creatures which were in these and had life died tere Mitta part of the ships were destroyed Horror 54 Figure 78 Viewing quote 1 15 in context Three procedures to handle a redundant coding are offered Unlink detaches the selected code from the quotation selected in one of the quotation panes This method is the least destructive of the available options Remove deletes the selected quotation Merge melts the quotation in the right pane into the quotation selected in the left pane All references to and from the merged Special Tools e 189 190 e Special Tools quotation is inherited by the other If the two quotations overlap the resulting quotation includes all data from both quotations Both quotation panes have a Connectivity column that shows the
439. s will be discarded Commit changes and proceed Cancel Figure 22 Lists all objects with pending changes Before taking any further action you can inspect any pending changes in their respective editors simply by double clicking an item in the list Backup Copies You can set preferences so that ATLAS ti creates a backup copy of an existing HU before overwriting it on Save EXTRAS GENERAL A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Keep both the regular backup and the automatic recovery backup on PREFERENCES STORAGE Backup files can be distinguished from their original by a name prefix For file Sample hpr5 a backup file backup of Sample hpr5 would be created Crash Recovery Automatic Backup As backup of files are only created from the previous HU when saving the current HU this functionality would not protect you from losing the work you completed since the last save in the event of abnormal termination of the program e g caused by system crashes or power failures For such situations an automatic periodic backup feature is provided that will store recovery information every 10 minutes or a period of time you can set via EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES Should ATLAS ti or Windows crash or in any other way be terminated irregularly e g a power failure the amount of work lost is only the work conducted since the last recovery backup or regular save When exiting ATLAS ti or after saving the HU the recov
440. se to the target node and click the left mouse button The target node inherits all the references 1 e quotations links to other codes and memos and comments into the incorporated node s Splitting Codes At last ATLAS ti 5 offers a rudimentary split code function There is still some work involved in splitting a code and therefore it 1s called the Poor Man s Split Code function When clicking on CODES MISCELLANEOUS SPLIT CODE the following window opens providing a summary instruction on what to do in order to split a code Poor Man s Split Code Thanks to Joerg 5 For proposing this very useful Function Unfortunately it is not yet Fully implemented However here is a workaround First Duplicate the code you want to split This creates an exact clone of the selected code The clone inherits all quotations code links Family memberships and all other relations From the original code How you can differentiate the two codes by n selectively removing unneeded links From each a Use a network editor as an appropriate workspace and use Splitting codes the hard Import Neighbors For simultaneously displaying the links way F Below step by step instruction is offered As an example the code Number magic is split Above in the section on merging codes we merged the two codes Magic 3 and Magic 7 into the Number magic code see Merging Codes using the Network Editor
441. ses where more than one user On a specific computer needs to access files from a central A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 repository this path variable should be set to a location that is outside the user s private folder hierarchy e g C ATLASti Data All users working on the same local network can use a UNC path instead Serverl C ATLASti Data Each user wishing to access this folder needs to set their TBPATH identically Pros e If this path is set appropriately on different computers projects can easily be carried back and forth e If the location of the data repository changes access can be easily managed by simply changing the TBPATH to the new location e Ina local area network this folder is available to all ATLAS ti users 1f it was set to a central location 1 e one where all users have appropriate permissions Cons e When the TBPATH is changed and the new location does not contain the files or the previous location or an exact copy of these files references of PDs using the TBPATH reference will fail As ATLAS ti has very strict version control features regarding the usability of files used as PDs access will be rejected if files found at the new location do not match the accessibility information each PD stores when accessing a data source Inaccessibility can be caused by a file that has been edited Working with special paths By default the Use Special Pa
442. set the filter to all non female documents EDIT FAMILIES SUBMENU The items in the families submenu provide access to the operations available for assigning objects to subsets families For details see Family Life on page 191 OPEN FAMILY MANAGER Creates edits or deletes PD families Assigns to or removes items from families ASSIGN FAMILIES Assigns one or more families to the selected PD If you are choosing this option in the context of an Object Manager more than one PD can be selected and assigned OPEN NETWORK Opens a Network View with the selected PD as a node Choosing this option in the context of an Object Manager displays all selected PDs in the network view Hold down the Ctrl key to list all network views containing the selected PD PRIMARY DOC MANAGER Displays PDs in a separate tool The Primary Document Manager offers a number of options to handle and manage PDs see Primary Document Manager on page 51 MISCELLANEOUS SUBMENU INFO Displays information about the PD This information includes name creation and modification dates location of its data source file and comment SET ENCODING Changes the encoding type of primary plain text documents ANSI OEM See ANSI or OEM on page 399 CHANGE POSITION Changes the position of the selected PD as reflected in its ID see Rearranging PDs on page 69 RENUMBER ALL Reference e 351 Change Path Optimize Pat
443. should loaded and display or play when the source is multimedia correctly Primary Documents e 71 Naty Make data sources as small as possible but as large as necessary Naty SN Rich Text supports character and paragraph related formatting Data from other applications can be embedded Sty FaN Word 72 e Primary Documents Files that might prove problematic are multimedia files using exotic codecs software that enables playing of a certain multimedia file format on your computer and files that rely on RTF converters If a file 1s listed but cannot be loaded see Primary Document Cannot be Loaded page 330 Size Restrictions Theoretically size restrictions do not play a major role due to the way ATLAS ti handles PDs see How ATLAS ti Handles Documents on page 93 However you should bear in mind that your computer s processing speed and storage capacity affect the performance Excessively large documents can be uncomfortable to work with even when you have an excellently equipped computer The crucial issue is not always the file size but rather in the case of multimedia files the length of playing time For textual documents the number and size of embedded objects may cause extraordinarily long load times There is a high likelihood that if a textual document loads slowly in ATLAS ti 1t would also load slowly in WORD or Wordpad For very long texts or multimedia files navigation ca
444. splayed After a code has been created it appears as a new entry in several locations drop down list code manager The Code Manager provides a number of display options 2 A classic view as known from ATLAS ti 4 Fire Typical Windows display options like Large Icons Small Icons ear 12 3 List and Details ire 12 3 The details view has already been described at Code Manager List Columns on page 56 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Textual Level Basic Functions e 117 H Fire 12 3 Naty J Write comments Mame Grounded Density Author Created Modified A Fire 12 3 ATLAS 11 03 91 04 03 03 13 58 18 The Classic view Within curly brackets following the code name groundedness and density are displayed Grounded ness The number of quotations associated with this code above example 12 Large numbers indicate strong evidence already found for this code Density The number of codes connected to this code follows the dash above example 3 Large numbers can be interpreted as a high degree of theoretical density Comment The tilde character flags commented codes It is used not only for codes but for all commented objects Open Coding Open Coding assigns new codes with already existing or newly created quotations You can create one ore more codes in a single step Coding with a single new code 1 Select the data section or the quotation you want to code 2 Click the
445. splayed in the Query Tool are updated immediately e The button Prefix Notation has been removed e The code list displays the current codes e g the ones matching requirements consistent with the current code filter e In addition to primary document families search results can now also be restricted to Super Families e When right clicking on a code in the Query Tool a list of co occurring codes can be displayed What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 e 15 Network Editor 16 e What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 e Report offers more options Snapshot Codes A Super Code can be frozen in time by creating a snapshot code A snapshot code is a standard code hard wired with the quotations of a Super Code Being a standard code it can be displayed in the margin area and be used for further coding but it does not have the dynamic behavior of a Super Code quotations connected to it will not automatically update Object Crawler The Object Crawler collects all objects within an HU whose textual attributes name author date comments and content contain a specified pattern For details see The Object Crawler on page 158 Additional Node Types In ATLAS ti 5 you can import all object types as nodes In addition to primary documents quotations codes and memos ATLAS ti 5 allows importing document code and memo families and network views into other network views Co occurring Codes Codes that co occur wi
446. ssage will pop up telling you that automatic backup is disabled during the edit session If a non editable document e g a Word or HTML document is loaded the editing toolbar is not available To be able to edit such documents you need to create a Rich Text or plain text copy using your word processor and assign this file as a PD Leaving Edit Mode 1 Click on the down arrow next to the Edit button or select EDIT DOCUMENT ACCESS from the main menu and 2 choose the SAVE AND LEAVE EDIT MODE or the DISCARD CHANGES AND LEAVE EDIT MODE option from the submenu Ea Save and Leave Edit Mode Save Only Discard Changes and Leave Edit Mode Discard Changes Only If you choose SAVE ONLY all modifications are saved and you can continue to edit the document If you choose DISCARD CHANGES the recent modifications are dropped and the document is reverted to its last saved state 1 e the way it was before you issued the last SAVE ONLY or before the session if you never did an intermediary save Note As there is no Undo function for document editing activities make it a habit to select SAVE ONLY once in a while during the edit session If you use SAVE ONLY and then make changes you can elect to DISCARD CHANGES ONLY to eliminate changes since your last save or in effect revert to the last saved version A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Changes to the document need to be explicitly saved when leaving the edit session Saving a forme
447. t 2 Copy all documents to be used by your project into this folder and use subfolders if you desire an added degree of structure 3 Create the HU inside the folder hierarchy Make sure that all documents really are in the same folder as the HU or subfolders thereof 4 Make sure that the option Use Special Paths is checked 5 Make sure that the TBPATH variable is not set to a folder within this folder hierarchy check GENERAL PREFERENCES PATHS TBPATH is not used for this approach 6 Assign documents from the selected folder it is OK to use drag amp drop This results in a project located in ONE folder All documents are automatically assigned using the special lt HUPATH gt variable Benefits of this approach e The folder can be completely moved to another location and all documents remain accessible A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Project Management e 275 276 e Project Management e Migrating or backing up your project using the Copy Bundle function 1s easy and allows the use of arbitrary folders on the target computer Drawbacks e Sharing documents is restricted to HUs that reside in the same folder HUs created under this paradigm will not work when detached from their original folder which leads us to the next scenario Variation Distributed Project See Variation Distributed Project Team on page 273 for an introduction Once they have been created HUs are fully functional only in
448. t Content is used as a column header while the value part grafic or text is used in the respectice cell 6 Families Conkent kext Active Filker Figure 79 PD Family Manager window Components of the Family Manager 1 The Family Manager s main pane lists all families for the 5 specific object type In the figure above the PD family Content text is used as a filter and appears in bold letters The window displays the name member size author and creation and modification dates not currently visible The columns can be used to sort the families according to these criteria by clicking the column header The left list below the family list displays the family members already assigned The two buttons between the list panes are for assigning or removing items from the selected family The right list displays all items not currently assigned to the selected family The comment area contains an optional description for the family To Open a Family Manager Select EDIT FAMILIES OPEN FAMILY MANAGER from the DOCUMENTS CODES or MEMOS menu A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Family Life e 193 The EDIT FAMILIES submenu is available from the Documents Codes and Memos menu ay 194 e Family Life Open Family Manager Edit Families Open Network view Assign Families The Family Manager is also available by clicking the button in the correspondi
449. t click over the quotation node and choose DISPLAY IN CONTEXT You are moved to the section of the Primary Document where the quotation resides To import the neighbors of a quotation The Network Editor lets you import the neighbors of selected nodes by choosing IMPORT NEIGHBORS from the Network Editor s NODE menu see description in section Import Node Neighbors on page 228 Importing the neighbors of a quotation that is part of a hypertext not only retrieves linked objects of type quotations but also yields all codes memos and other quotations directly connected to it Note To reduce clutter by only importing neighbors that are quotations and not codes memos or documents hold down the CTRL key when selecting the option from the Network Editor s menu If you want the neighbors of only one quotation imported open the context menu of this quotation and choose IMPORT NEIGHBORS Editing Hyperlink Comments The links between quotations use fully qualified relations like the links between codes and unlike the simple association between a code and a quotation As first class objects these links can be assigned a dedicated comment Such a comment could explain why quotation A has been linked to quotation B Link comments can be accessed displayed and edited from three locations the margin area the Hyperlink Manager and the Network Editor The margin area has the advantage that it is readily available during scrolli
450. t at tl The two Indians sent ther Create Link Source In the shanty nearest the Create Link Target the window 3 Choose CREATE FREE QUOTATION 112 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 cA Note If you have accidentally chosen a section for which a quotation already exists the context menu will not include the CREATE FREE QUOTATION command Creating Quotations Using Drag amp Drop This technique allows you to virtually throw pieces of text into the quotations list A number of drag amp drop activities create quotations To create a free quotation from a textual document selection 1 Move the mouse pointer into the selected text The pointer will change to its drag amp drop appearance 2 By holding down the left mouse button drag the selection into the quotation drop down list or the Quotation Manager 2 3 Indian Camp P 3 P 3 Indian Camp Camp Quotes E 3 48 They came Codes that led to the logging road that ran back into the hills B It was much lighter on the logging road as the timber was cut away on both sides The young Indian stopped and blew out his lantern and they all walked on along the road hey came around a bend and a dog came out barking shead were the lights of the shanties here the Indian ark peelers lived l More dogs rushed out at them pana The two Indians sent them back to the shanties You have just created a quotation A
451. t initialized with a new HU SAVE Saves the HU under its current file name If the HU has not yet been saved the Save As dialog is presented instead SAVE AS Saves the current HU under a new file name EDIT COMMENT Opens an editor for writing or editing an HU comment This function is also available in the main toolbar The HU s comment is included in HTML or XML output code generated from the HU It becomes part of the HU s file properties and can be viewed in Windows Explorer via the properties dialog INFO Displays information about the current HU Hint If you press the Ctrl key while selecting this item a text editor opens and you can edit and print the information Otherwise the information is displayed in a read only window Reference e 347 OUTPUT SUBMENU Prints a list of all objects included in the HU Three options are available e PRINT WITH MARGIN Prints complete or the selected text the current PD including the margin area Currently only available for textual documents e ALL OBJECTS Provides output of all objects sorted by time of their creation It illustrates the development of a project as a sequence of object creations e ALL OBJECTS GROUPED Provides output of all objects sorted by object type 1 e the list of PDs quotations codes memos PD families Code families Memo families Network Views code links and hyperlinks PRINTER SETUP Opens the standard Windows print set
452. t the appropriate file and the field delimiter separates the field names and field values in tables when stored as a text file that was used when the table was created The result should show new or modified families PDs in the table that did not exist before are imported Existing PDs become members of imported or existing families Rearranging PDs The ID of a PD determines its position in the list of PDs when in default sort order Furthermore it is essential that PDs in HUs to be merged see Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 289 have matching IDs To rearrange PDs to change their IDs use one of the following options e Rearrange a selected PD only e Rearrange one or more PDs using drag amp drop e Renumber all PDs to make the current sort permanent while eliminating gaps in the numbering at the same time Of course all quotations belonging to a repositioned PD are taken along Rearranging a Selected Primary Document 1 Select the PD in the Document Manager whose list position should be changed 2 Choose DOCUMENTS MISCELLANEOUS CHANGE POSITION from the main menu Working with ATLAS ti e 69 CA 70 e Working with ATLAS ti 3 Enter a position number after which the selected document is to be moved Rearranging Primary Documents Using Drag amp Drop Rearranging PDs via drag amp drop is a convenient alternative and lets you rearrange a number of selected PDs concurrently 1 Open the Document Mana
453. t the two quotations Next select whether you want to create a chain or a star If you do not want to connect more than these two quotations select the option FINI If you select the option CHAIN or STAR you can proceed to connect further quotations To do so continue with step three To validate the established structure you can open a Network Editor on the source or target quotation by right clicking on the quotation and selecting OPEN NETWORK VIEW 256 e Hypertext A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Creating Hyperlinks in the Quotation Manager This method can be applied to connect one or more existing quotations to one target quotation 1 Select one or more source quotations in the Quotation Manager multiple selections can be done in the standard way 2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the quotation s to a target quotation in the Quotation Manager raza 3 Release the left mouse button The Relation menu opens and you can specify the relation to be used for the hyperlinks 4 The new hyperlinks are created Creating Hyperlinks in Margin Area Like the method described above creating hyperlinks in the margin area is best suitable for connecting two quotations that are in close proximity to each other 1 Select a quotation bracket in the margin area 2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the bracket onto another quotation bracket raza 3 Release the left mouse button The Relation menu o
454. t to code networks Several theoretical memos can be imported into a network to map out their relationship The visual layout provides comfortable territory for moving from memo to memo to read and contemplate each individually and the relationship s between them When dragging a piece of text from a drag enabled application like MS Word into a Network Editor the text becomes a memo with an automatically assigned title The title can be renamed later The Network Editor et al e 217 The icons displayed for files in Windows Explorer are used as standard icons for PD nodes A P 4 The sefiroth tree The node icons for quotations te CF BigFamily a ME Theoretical gS PF Content itext The node icon and label for network views YA 4 Elements II Primary Documents as Nodes PDs as nodes are useful sometimes but in the presence of quotations may clutter the view by myriad links However PDs as nodes make a nice graphical content table for graphical primary documents When selecting the option DISPLAY FULL IMAGE FOR PDs thumbnail images of the PDs are displayed This option only affects graphical PDs Quotations as Nodes Quotations and codes have one thing in common that is not true for the other objects They can link to each other quotations to quotations and code to codes with fully qualified first class links using relations The inclusion of quotations in a Network View supports the constr
455. tations in Query Size Start Deis Doing a Caesarian with a jack 162 How do vou like being an inte 127 I d rather mot kouch ik Lat Tm terribly sorry I brought 194 T know said Mick fall TE was an awful mess to put v 197 Ma FRR maz wer Wer eycen ann LII Figure 71 Defining the scope of queries In the Scope of Query window above the PD family Textual docs was selected The results list below displays all quotations from the PDs that are members of this family It does not show the PDs themselves PD families and PDs can be combined Additional QueryTool Functions Stack Management Several functions are available in pocket calculator style as a series of buttons Other functions can be activated by context menus opened in one of the list panes JEE Recalc Lindo Redo Figure 72 Query Tool Stack Functions Clear the complete term stack of expressions Swaps the two top elements of the stack Use if you mix up the input order Push a copy of the topmost element onto the stack in other words duplicate it This is a useful feature if you need to replicate a complex expression A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Recalc If you created new coding that affect the current query while the Query Tool is open you have to click RECALC to reprocess the query UNDO removes the topmost entry from the stack This is convenient if you clicked on the wrong code Red
456. te this library by adding new categories and removing or modifying existing categories It is also possible to create completely new search libraries that better fit your requirements different languages domains etc To manage categories three options are available Click the search tool s OPTIONS button for this menu A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 GREP searches are very flexible Regular Expressions efficiently exploit the syntactical properties of the technical device called text A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Options LA Load Categories Help Save Categories Close Delete Category u LOAD CATEGORIES opens a file dialog window showing existing search library files like searchbib skt or srchbib skt If you select a library in the file dialog window the categories from that library are added to the currently loaded categories To clear the internal database of search categories before loading new ones use the option Delete Category SAVE CATEGORIES stores the currently loaded and newly created search categories in the default library file srchbib skt or a new file If you choose a new name be sure to give the file the extension SKT as in dutch skt DELETE CATEGORY opens a multiple selection list window Choose one or more categories to be removed from the internal database of search categories You can use the standard Windows techniques for multiple selections using the CTRL ALT or SHIF
457. ted fields When creating Excel compatible output you can use either a comma or a semicolon as the field separator between the PDs frequency counts You may want to experiment with this option If you find that Excel stuffs all output into a single column when using the comma use the semicolon instead This checkbox is disabled when the Built In tool is checked Stop list Use a stop list to exclude words from the count Instead of enumerating every variant of a word you can specify patterns You can create powerful stop lists for different languages different topics and different levels of detail The user system folder EXTRAS EXPLORER USER SYSTEM FOLDER contains a sample stop list with some regular expressions de excludes numbers of any length Pe excludes strings of hyphens of arbitrary size Se excludes strings of underscores A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 exclude sequences of zeros Clean text before counting ignore The characters specified in this dialog will be removed from the source word before it is counted Example including eliminates the difference between Hello and Hello Ignore case If checked upper and lowercase letters are ignored Hello HELLO and hello are not counted separately After all options are set click the OK button The figure below shows the result when using the built in tool for a single PD ATLAS ti Word Cruncher 2 0 Sele Scan
458. tegy assumes that the bundle is to be installed on another computer or another disk in order to resume work at this different location The target path for the HU can be freely chosen When checking for conflicts this strategy accepts that older versions of data source files are replaced by newer versions If a document in the bundle is older than an existing one at the new location it will not be unbundled This prevents a document from replacing a newer version of it Restore The Restore strategy is used to restore a bundle created as a backup of a project 1 e an HU and all the data source files referenced by its PDs This strategy restores the HU in exactly the same folder as at the original location It does not reject an attempt Project Management e 285 created as backup copy 286 e Project Management to replace a current file with an older version which is indeed the very nature of restore Paths Below the strategy selection section the original path of the HU is displayed A color marker next to the path indicates possible conflicts for this HU if it were to be installed in the target environment If there is indeed a conflict a different path or file name for the HU can be entered by clicking on the BROWSE button A check box lets you exclude the HU itself 1 e the HPR5 file from the installation Below the HU path the TBPATH textbank path of the target computer is displayed This pane is not visible
459. text formats like Unicode and DBCS Double Byte Character Sets in all text editors and the primary document pane Therefore East Asian languages are supported However currently you cannot create Unicode labels for codes memos network nodes etc It is also not possible to use Unicode in text searches Editing Primary Documents Textual documents txt and rtf documents assigned to an HU as primary documents can be edited at any time in the analysis process no matter whether a document has already been coded or not Modifications are broadcast to all other users of this document the PDs will be synchronized and all coding is correctly realigned For more information see Editing Primary Documents on page 78 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Embedded Objects Objects like Excel tables images PowerPoint slides formulas and audio or video files can be embedded in primary documents comments and memos Most objects can be activated and edited within ATLAS ti without the need for explicitly opening the application that was used to create them The fragment shows an embedded formula in active mode with a floating formula editing toolbar Starting a New Project No more dual name and file name There is a significant change in the way a new Hermeneutic Unit is created Just as you would start a new Word text you simply create a new HU At this point the caption of the HU editor displays the default title New H
460. th all mouse amp click interfaces You use this technique all the time e g when working with text software First you select a text passage the operand THEN you would press the delete button the operator Creating a Query with the Query Tool The retrieval of quotations with the Query Tool differs from the arithmetic example above by the result in which we are interested We are really not interested in the operands codes code families themselves but in the set of quotations that 1s the result of evaluating an operand By formulating a query A OR B this is what we really mean Quotations coded with code A OR quotations coded with B Therefore entering the operand code X displays all quotations which were coded with X in the results list And even this list of the quotations short names is not the result for which we are looking With yet another step we can generate a report listing the full quotations or we can display each quotation in the context of its PD for further refinement To assemble a query with the Query Tool you also select the operands first then the operators The simplest query is one without any explicit operators at all Just double click on a code or code family The result if any is immediately displayed in results list Now double click on another code or code family The same thing happens the result for this operand is displayed Starting from such simple examples y
461. th origin indicate that these documents are outside the HU and the textbank path or these documents were assigned differently although the physical location of the folder is indeed the textbank folder How could this happen You can browse the same location either starting from My Workplaces or from My Network Places especially when working on a network The former results in absolute paths including drive letters e g h Project Documents and the latter results in UNC paths including the computer name server c Project Documents with drive c on the server mapped to h on the local computer Although your HU will be able to access such ambiguously referenced files flexibility of the project has been greatly reduced In such a Project Management e 277 278 e Project Management situation it is much better to start the project afresh and browse folders consistently when assigning documents Benefits of this approach e The HU is not tied to the location of its documents and may be copied and moved anywhere without losing functionality as long as the texbank folder refers to the location of the documents e Migrating or backing up your project using the Copy Bundle function is easy Drawbacks e This scenario relies on the user configured textbank folder If the user wishes to work on different projects with documents stored in different folder hierarchies the textbank folder must be set appropriately e g to the pat
462. th the codes you have selected in the Network Editor can now be imported Co occurring codes are those that are used for the same overlapping or neighbored data segments Auto Coloring The auto color mode colors nodes along two dimensions according to their groundedness 1 e the number of quotations to which they are linked and their density 1 e the number of other codes connected Groundedness increases the red component while density increases the blue component of the node color Auto color is restricted to nodes representing codes A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 F is part of is part of eo ase Label Display Relation types can now be displayed alongside the line connecting two objects DISPLAY LINK DISPLAY ROTATED LABELS is part of Figure 3 Rotated and unrotated link label Object Managers The former Extra Lists and Family Browsers have been significantly improved e They are now called Object Managers Document Quotation Code Memo Family and Network Managers e All object managers have a menu and toolbar e List display can be switched between the various common display options similar to those of the Windows Explorer e Multiple item selection is supported This is useful for example to print selected code s or memo s e Forward incremental search allows you to select a specific item by simply starting to type its name A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 What s New in A
463. that serves to distribute all messages sent to this address to all members assigned to the list The main purpose of the list dedicated to ATLAS ti is peer to peer support to exchange experiences with the tool and discuss technical and methodological issues that arise with the use of the program This list also serves as an information channel to publicize news about current developments and to supply the members with Tips amp Tricks Find more information on how to subscribe to the mailing list on the ATLAS ti website in the Community section at http www atlasti com maillist shtml The mailing list archive can be accessed via the Help menu in ATLAS ti From the main menu select HELP MORE RESOURCES VISIT THE MAILINGLIST ARCHIVE Resources e 327 The ATLAS ti Website Getting Support 328 e Resources The ATLAS ti website at http www atlasti com should be a regular place to visit even if you are already a member of the mailing list Here you will find important information such as workshop announcements special service providers and especially recent service packs and patches for download to keep your ATLAS ti current Additional online resources can also be accessed via the Help menu in ATLAS ti A primary resource for issues concerning the use of ATLAS ti should be our mailing list see The ATLAS ti Mailing List on page 327 for details In case of program failures please read the instructions in Repo
464. the CTRL and the SHIFT key while clicking the button Rollup Mode To save screen space windows can be rolled up to only display the title bar that displays the caption of the window Move to another window to roll up the window currently open and move the mouse over the collapsed window to display it again To activate roll up click the button in the upper left corner of a window and choose ROLLUP MODE from the window s system menu Rollup Mode is not available for every window What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 e 11 Primary Documents 12 e What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 A central focus of our ATLAS ti 5 development and one of our proudest accomplishments has been the handling accessing and editing of primary documents Improvements center around the kind of data sources accepted as primary documents techniques for associating primary documents with a project in a flexible and robust manner and editing the contents of primary documents without affecting existing coding Rich Text Textual documents may now contain arbitrary formatting live web links and embedded objects 4 1 sound hail and fire etc 2 sound great mountain burning ae 3 sound great star fell from heaven 6 d sound 1 3 part of sun smitten Medium severity 49 An embedded Excel Workspace Double click to ac Figure 2 An Excel table embedded in a rich text primary document Unicode DBCS and plain text ATLAS ti 5 supports additional plain
465. the connected nodes in graphical presentations of networks Furthermore a link between two nodes may be directed or not A directed connection is drawn with an arrow With directed links source and target nodes must be distinguished The source node is where the link starts and the target node 1s where it ends the destination to which the arrow points Connection and link are synonymous Links are created either implicitly e g when coding a quotation the quotation is linked to a code or explicitly by the user The latter option is described in detail in this chapter Se Figure 84 Code Quotations link Strong and Weak Links Strong links or first class links are links based on relations Strong links are entities by themselves with names authors comments and other properties A strong link is only a link between a code and another code or a quote and another quote Weak links are links that do not have individual properties e g the links between quotations and codes between codes and memos between a family and its members Node Types The user can manipulate and display almost all objects within the HU as nodes in a network quotations codes code families memos memo families other network views primary documents PDs and PD families The following discussion applies to all nodes regardless of their type See Node Types on page 217 in chapter The Network Editor et al for furt
466. the data e To create codes that come to mind during normal coding work and that cannot be applied to the current segment but will be useful later Creating a Free Code iS 1 From the main menu choose CODES CREATE FREE CODE or click the Create Code button in the Code Manager 2 A prompter opens as in Open Coding Enter one or more code names and click OK Such a free code shows the name suffix 0 0 no quotations no linked codes Importing Codes Creating Free Codes via the Batch Method To create a large number of free codes use the procedure described in Using Memos to Create a Code List on page 134 This option can be found under the MEMOS MISCELLANEOUS menu Transferring Codes from Other Projects If you want to import an already existing list of codes from another HU that might serve as a repository for codes use the XML Export Import function for codes see Exporting and Importing Codes in XML on page 305 This option has the advantage that already existing code definitions 1 e code comments are transferred as well If only a subset of codes is to be transferred from one project to another set a code filter in the exporting HU How to transfer codes 122 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Renaming or deleting a code has global effects A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 1 Select CODES MISCELLANEOUS EXPORT CODES XML 2 Select the option Send Output to
467. the margin area Renaming a code in place in the margin area has two different effects The code can be renamed globally affecting all occurrences or replaced by another code locally This preference can be set via the Margin tab of General Preferences dialog EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES MARGIN IN PLACE ACTION Deleting Codes Deleting a code removes the code from the entire HU All references that involve this code are removed It also disappears from Network Views and families that contained this code If you only want to remove a code from a specific quotation you should unlink the code instead see below To delete a Code 1 Select a code in a Network View or in one of the following places the code drop down list the Code Manager the Object Explorer or the Code Forest 2 Inthe Code Manager or the drop down list use the DELETE function from the menu Object Managers also offer a Delete button 3 Ifthe code has been used e g is assigned to quotations connected to other codes part of a super code etc you are asked for confirmation before the deletion process continues 4 Furthermore if quotations coded with this code are not used in any other context you are asked whether these quotations should be removed as well Note There is no undo function to get deleted codes back If you are unsure about the effects of the operation make a backup copy of your Hermeneutic Unit 124 e The Textual L
468. their original location If team members are to be granted access to distributed local copies Scenario 2 should be used instead Variation Mobile Project See Variation Mobile Project on page 273 for an introduction Installation of a bundle on the target computer is done without any additional adjustments All documents are unpacked in the folder hierarchy selected as the target for the HU Make sure that the same path is always used for the same project on the target computer unless you want to make a stand alone working copy but be aware of version confusion Scenario 2 Single Document Path Different HU Path In this scenario all of your project related data files are stored in the same folder hierarchy However HUs are stored in a folder AWAY from the document folder hierarchy This folder can also be located on another computer in the same local area network This way HUs are independent from the location of their documents and can more easily be moved This is a scenario typical for teamwork Examples 1 A team working on a single topic All team members work on computers on the same LAN Every team member works on his or her separate portion of the project The HU representing the partial project is stored on the user s computer The documents are stored in a central server location A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 2 Documents are stored on a central server with shar
469. ths option is active It can be changed via EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES GENERAL The TBPATH is set under EXTRAS GENERAL PREFERENCES PATHS The HUPATH is determined when the HU is saved When assigning a file as a PD ATLAS ti creates the reference using the following rules If the file is located in the folder hierarchy of the HU lt HUPATH gt is used If the file is not in the HU hierarchy and if the file is located in the folder hierarchy rooted by the TBPATH variable lt TBPATH gt is stored as the reference to the file If none of the above holds or Use Special Paths is deactivated the absolute path is used Primary Documents e 99 HUSs created with ATLAS ti 4 are good candidates for OPTIMIZE PATHS 2 Data sources must be accessible for the Optimize Path procedure 100 e Primary Documents Note If the HU itself is stored in the TBPATH folder HUPATH wins If you need to assign documents using the TBPATH variable in preparation of teamwork scenarios you need to store the HU off the TBPATH folder hierarchy Conclusion Special paths should be used deliberately wherever applicable They ease the task of locating referenced documents in a very efficient manner Using special paths makes management of projects involving multiple HUs multiple locations and multiple users convenient An HU containing special paths instead of absolute references makes it easy to transfer and install projects on
470. tings This ensures an optimal result when printing e no wrap The EXECUTE command processes the selected text so that web links can be opened The FIND AND REPLACE command finds and replaces string of characters Text can be searched forward or backward searches can be case sensitive and controlled The menu options OBJECT and ICONIZE OBJECT are used on embedded objects and are discussed below FORMAT SUBMENU A Font You can set the font text color set bullet style and other Color paragraph options indention and alignment and set tabs Bullet Style Paragraph taa Tabs Brackets BRACKETS SUBMENU A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reference e 349 2 Match Ctr l Insert Crit Insert 3 Etri f Insert 1 Cty Insert Ctri H Insert Ctrl Pi Assign Rename Edit Comment Disconnect Close Doc Sort Id Filter All Toggle Filter Edit Families Open Network view Primary Doc Manager Miscellaneous I Data Source Management F Mutou 350 e Reference d These functions allow you to decorate an existing selection of text with parentheses brackets or quotation marks The following brackets and quotation marks can be inserted 0 or If you place the cursor somewhere inside a text enclosed by any of the brackets the Match option short cut Ctrl M highlights the enclosed text The Documents Menu Manage assign and access primary docume
471. tion Text Editors General HU Editor Margin Fonts Storage Paths Text Editors PD Printing Memos Text Editors HU Editor PO Area Wrap mode active Wrap at margir C uncheck for printer wrap Non DECS Language Support Convert Unicode text selections for Inviva Always on top C a e a a code page Marker Color Being Kahet Use active code page Dont use code page The settings of this section affect the behavior and appearance of the editors used for displaying and writing comments and memos and for the PD pane when displaying text documents The following options can be set for the text editors and for the PD pane independently Wrap mode active If checked line wrapping occurs as selected in the following option Wrap at margin If wrap mode is activated this option defines wrap in more detail If checked text is wrapped at the current right border of the text pane If unchecked wrap is calculated for the usable page width for the currently selected printer Always on top When checked the editors will float on top of all other windows This option can be individually set in the editor itself Marker Color You can mark selected text passages when working on editable text similar to using a highlighter on paper However unlike the non destructive temporary selection and highlighting of text when displaying a quotation this option modifies the text Click CHANGE COLOR to select a different m
472. to access the HU file to load memos etc If you expect this file to be unavailable at times e g because of an unreliable local network you should check this option However loading times and memory consumption are more demanding when loading completely Cache primary documents The content of primary documents will be kept available in memory for further access once it has been loaded See Content Caching on page 77 for more information Backup Options Backup Options Automatic backup Save auto recovery info every n minutes Automatic backup path Load automatic backups at system start Always reate backup copy when saving a HU When saving the HU a copy of the existing file with the added prefix backup of is created in the same directory Save auto recovery info every minutes ATLAS ti saves recovery information without any user intervention The idea behind such auto backups Should ATLAS ti or Windows crash or in any other way be A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 terminated irregularly e g a power failure the amount of work lost is only the work conducted since the last auto backup When exiting ATLAS ti or after saving the HU the auto recobver yinformation is removed automatically It is strongly recommended to keep this feature on Automatic backup path By default the folder Auto Backups in the user s private data folder hierarchy is
473. to all links You can modify the relations later if needed 224 e The Network Editor et al A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 2 Magic 1 61 Groundedness l Density 6 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 To link code nodes using the list method Besides using the Network Editor for creating links between codes you can also use the CODES LINK CODE TO option available from the main menu or the code context menu 1 Select the target code i e the general broader concept in the Code Manager 2 Select CODES LINK CODE TO CODES from the main menu 3 Select the source code s from the multiple choice list 4 Select a relation that links the selected codes with the target code If needed the relation can be modified One immediate effect of linking can be noticed when the Code Manager is open the density counter for all linked codes is updated Density counts all direct links to other codes For instance if six source codes are linked to one target code the target code is incremented by 6 each source code is incremented by one Note Using CODES LINK CODE TO From the HU Editor s main menu memos and quotations may also be linked to codes Memos can also be linked to other memos quotations or codes via the menu option MEMO LINK MEMO TO However no specific relation can be selected to link memos to other objects Creating code code links and hyperlinks using the Object Manager Not really a top
474. to select the new file to be used If you are happy with the result close this dialog by clicking OK If a valid document was detected at the old location another dialog box asks for confirmation to move the file from its current location to the new location If you click Yes the file is moved and the PD s reference is updated accordingly If you click No the reference is changed but the file 1s not Primary Documents e 105 moved do this for example if there already is a valid file in the target folder If you click Cancel you are back in the Change Path dialog box Note You must save the HU to make these changes permanent 106 e Primary Documents A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Textual Level Basic Functions As you may already know see The Process on page 25 there are two principle levels of interaction with ATLAS ti the textual and the conceptual The textual level includes activities like segmenting and organizing data files coding data segments and writing memos while the conceptual level focuses on model building activities such as linking codes to form semantic networks In this chapter you will learn about the main procedures needed to begin your data analysis These include how to mark code and comment text graphic audio and video segments how to write memos and how to group your documents codes and memos into families and super families Selecting Document Segments The most
475. tructure by connecting sets of similar elements together in a visual diagram With the aid of Network Views you can express relationships between codes quotations and memos PDs families and even Network Views can also be nodes in a network view Nodes Links amp Relations A node 1s any object that is displayed in a Network View You can change their look and move them around in the Network Editor Relations are link prototypes used to create a link between two codes or between two quotations An example is the is a ISA relation which is frequently used to link concepts of different abstraction level e g DOG lt isa gt MAMMAL General Properties of Objects Comments Everything can be Comments are not first class objects themselves They do not commented in ATLAS ti have a name they do not have their own list window nor do they have any property other than the text they contain However they are an important attribute of the objects described above Writing is one of the main activities when working with ATLAS ti Although the system does not give you much help with what you A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Main Concepts e 33 write it does support you in attaching your writings to the appropriate location All objects described so far have a slot that can be filled with a comment The first comment you write is typically a comment for the HU which appears in the HU browser and in output created with
476. ts a password to protect the current HU LOGIN Log in under a different name without closing the session CHANGE OBJECT OWNERSHIP Reference e 367 368 e Reference Allows to globally change the name of one or more selected authors 1 e the creators and hence owners of objects EXPORT TO SUBMENU PROLOG Generates Prolog notation from current HU XML Generates an XML file from the current HU See Exporting the Hermeneutic Unit in XML on page 306 HTML Generates a HTML file from the current HU see HTML Export on page 307 SPSS JOB Generates SPSS job with current codes as variables and current quotations as cases see SPSS Export on page 299 GENERATE SYSTEM REPORT SUBMENU Generates a report for a number of specified system settings including operating system printer capabilities etc DISPLAY SYSTEM REPORT Creates and displays a System Report in a text editor CREATE AND MAIL REPORT A zip file is created containing system information and your default email client is started You are then ready to send the file to bugsreport atlasti com See Reporting Bugs on page 333 DEBUG WINDOW When active writes debug information into a text editor For diagnostic purposes you might be asked to switch it on and deliver the report FREE UNUSED MEMORY During a work session with loading and display of large and numerous memos system resources may become low affecting performance
477. u currently filter for all free memos Toggle Filter displays all memos that are NOT free 1 e memos that reference a quotation or are linked to other memos Open Family Manager EDIT FAMILIES SUBMENU Assign Families ia l l pka The items in the Families submenu provide access to the operations available for assigning objects to subsets families For details see Family Life on page 191 e OPEN FAMILY MANAGER Creates edits or deletes memo families Assigns or removes items to families e ASSIGN FAMILIES Assigns one or more families to the selected memo When choosing this option in the context of an Object Manager more than one code can be selected and assigned OPEN NETWORK VIEW Opens a Network View on the selected memo Choosing this option in the context of an Object Manager displays all selected memos in the network view Hold down the Ctrl key to list all network views containing the selected memo MEMO MANAGER Displays the list of memos in a separate window The Memo Manager offers a number of options to handle and manage memos see Memo Manager on page 56 MISCELLANEOUS SUBMENU 360 e Reference A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Info Change Memotype Make Type Global Expork Memo ML Export Memos XML Import Memos XML Use as Primary Doc Create Codes from Selected Memo Change Date Change Author A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 INFO Displays information about the currently active
478. u read the manual sequentially from the first to the last page You may skip sections that describe concepts you are already familiar with you may jump directly to sections that describe functions you are interested in or you may simply use it as a reference guide to look up information on certain key words For users with no prior knowledge of ATLAS ti we do however recommend that you especially read through the first part of the manual in order to become familiar with the concepts used by ATLAS ti and to gain an overview of the available functions These are the chapters Main Concepts on page 25 Workbench Tools Overview on page 35 and Main Workspace The HU Editor on page 41 In order to set up a project it is recommended that you read the chapters on Project Management on page 270 and Preparing Documents on page 71 For all basic level work like creating quotations coding and writing memos consult the chapters under the main heading The 1 Bug is another name for a program s unintended misbehaviors A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Introduction e 7 8 e Introduction Textual Level Basic Functions on page 107 Advanced functions are described under The Conceptual Level Networks on page 211 The sequence of the chapters follows the steps that are necessary to start and work on an ATLAS ti project First the main concepts that ATLAS ti utilizes are explained then an over
479. uction and inspection of hyperlink structures Quotations can be included in a Network View by simply dragging a piece of text from the PD only possible for text documents Families as Nodes Families are a useful device to group codes memos or PDs that belong to one concept Instead of displaying all of the codes belonging to the concept the Code Family may be displayed The links between families and their members are depicted by a dotted red line Network Views as Nodes Network Views as nodes allow the inclusion of Network Views in other Network Views The Network View s context menu offers the option to open the View in a separate Network Editor This is also available via double click with Ctrl pressed Basic Network View Procedures 218 e The Network Editor et al Creating Network Views Two methods for creating Network Views are available The first one creates an empty Network View into which objects are imported in sequential steps The other method creates a Network View from a selected object and its neighbors To create a new Network View 1 Select NETWORKS NEW NETWORK VIEW from the HU editor s main menu or from the drop down list offered by the Network button in the main toolbar A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 2 Enter a name for the new Network View A Network Editor opens 3 Import nodes with any of the methods described in the section Importing Nodes o
480. ugh it codes it and writes a few memos Paul now also wants to look at the document observation_4 He loads the document into his HU checks a few things and codes a few more data segments Mary also continues her work on observation_4 While reading through it she remembers some further details and wants to add her thoughts into the document In order to do so she enters into edit mode Paul can continue to work on observation_4 as it is already loaded into his HU If another team member wants to edit observation_4 after Mary entered edit mode a message pops up saying that the document is currently edited by Mary and is blocked from being edited by anyone else A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Mary adds three new paragraphs to observation_4 ATLAS ti adjusts all code quotation and memo references automatically It is 10 30 a m now Mary leaves edit mode saves observation_4 and the HU and takes a break William accesses observation_4 next He receives a message stating that changes have been detected in the data source file observation_4 rtf and that all PDs using this data source need to be synchronized in this case P7 Paul will see this message the next time he loads observation_4 EE PD out of sync Changes detected in document observation 4 rtF used by PD Pi To synchronize the dependent PD please confirm In order to load P7 1 e observation_4 William needs to confirm this message Modified PDs can
481. uld NEVER separate it from the original data source Copying one without the other or deleting the log file will send the signal that something is wrong and you won t be able to access the document s contents Therefore you should never use Windows Explorer to copy or move a project Instead use ATLAS ti s Copy Bundle see Copy Bundle Migrate and Backup Projects on page 282 It correctly wraps all necessary files into one neat package for you Primary Documents e 87 confused Naty aX Synchronize all PDs at once Sty SRLK files protect your documents from accidental modifications 88 e Primary Documents Look at it this way after a document was first edited with ATLAS ti the data source indeed now consists of TWO files the original document file and its change log companion What then is recorded in the log file You won t see a single piece of the document s original text when you open it carefully in a text editor It contains information of the type paragraph 7531 was moved to position 2341 or text of length 732 has been inserted at position 8766 These are the changes you have made to the PD When editing the data source of the PD you can see the quotations in the margin update instantaneously As a matter of fact this PD would not really need the log file to know what is going on But it does need it if you finish editing the data source and then leave the HU without saving it All your
482. ument a quotation belongs to 1s coded into the variable PD primary document Export amp Import e 299 300 e Export amp Import SPSS Syntax File The output of the SPSS generator is a complete SPSS syntax file containing variable definitions optionally the data matrix and some default jobs statements e VAR LABELS are taken from code and code family names e VALUE LABELS for variables created from codes are e YES 1 code is assigned e NO 0 code is not assigned e Every case is not only described by the codes but also by information about position primary text start end line column and date of creation e Code and primary document families are handled using COMPUTE statements The SPSS syntax output created with ATLAS ti is plain ASCII and can be edited before storing it as a file for further processing with SPSS Scaled vs Dichotomous Codes Within ATLAS ti a code is always dichotomous because it either re fers to a given quotation 1 or it does not 0 Each case quotation can in respect to the codes be described as a vector of O s and I s The concept of scaled codes variables requires a special syn tax The dimension or scale along which an evaluation is to take place is partitioned into the number of different values required Assuming that five degrees of fear are to be distinguished in a given analysis five codes must be created degree of fear 1 degree of fear 2 degree of fea
483. ument can be interpreted as lines Note For video and audio documents line paragraph numbers and the margin area are not displayed Margin Area 8 a i To the right hand side of the PD area is the optional margin area Brackets are used to indicate quotations Attached codes memos and hyperlinks are displayed next to the brackets The margin area is fully interactive the displayed objects are sensitive to mouse clicks and have their own context menus In addition a variety of drag and drop options are possible See Margin Drag amp Drop on page 135 for more detail For more information about the video orimiary document open its comment MEP lt explains gt 3 1 FER lt explains gt 3 2 af EP lt explains gt 3 3 orolog entering the scene Epilog Main Workspace The HU Editor e 43 Objects in the margin area are click sensitive Double click on an object to display comments Right click on an object to open a context menu Wacmdk Ea v Codes se Images H Memos Line Refs w Hyper Links Set Font Mone All Pii ae paraaan Sal eorge U o oS CO George 15 0 Like for code Nick the text pa this code Rename Sentence was the segqmentatic to Indian Camp Display Info Display Comment Edit Comment Delete Open Network List Quotations Unlink Figure 11 Comment and context menu for a code in the margin area Note A general context menu
484. uments Output Submenu List Hierarchy Cuotations e5 Print with Margin The output submenu for primary documents List Generates a list of all primary documents in the HU If any of the PDs have a comment you are asked if these are to be printed as well Hierarchy Prints the selected PD s quotation numbers and their codes and memos in a hierarchical manner Quotations Prints all quotations belonging to the selected primary document Print with Margin The Print with Margin option creates a WYSIWYG printout of coded texts What You See Is What You Get It also prints texts with their paragraph numbers which was a dedicated option in ATLAS ti 4 2 Note Print with Margin is only available for textual primary documents The appearance of the printed text can be controlled in three places 1 Via the PD Printing tab in the General Preferences dialog 2 By the current display settings in the HU Editor The printout resembles the screen display at the time of creating the output The margin or the numbering is only included if currently displayed Only those margin objects are included that were selected to be displayed in the margin By moving the splitter bar the ratio between document and margin area can be controlled 3 The printing dialog Switching to landscape for densely populated margins may improve results Choose to print the entire text or the selected text only Generating Output e 313 Sty Print select
485. un was smitten and the third part of the moon and the third part of er the stars so as the third part of them 1 8 And the smoke of the incense was darkened andthe day shone not fora fo a nnteennnnennnnnnnnnennccccnenencncee third part of it and the night likewise And the smoke of the incense which came a with the prayers of the saints ascended up expl before God out of theangel s hand x disc E m 2 10 5 And to them it was given tha 5 And to them it was given that they should not kill them but that they should be tormented five months and their torment was as the torment of a scorpion when he strike tha man 3 2 I d rather not touch it Lat E ENE os eee ee ae Oe SUPP Fw pather not touch it Later when he atrted to operate Uncle George and three Indian men held the woman still Hypertext e 253 A hyperlink chain connects quotations sequentially A hyperlink star connects many quotations from one source quotation In list views linked quotations are prefixed with angle brackets 254 e Hypertext Figure 107 A network of quotations General Procedures Star or Chain connections When linking quotations you have the option to create a chain a star or a combination of both Below a chain and star connection are illustrated Jjustiries triticizes 2 26 Zahl 1 5 Figure 108 A hyperlink chain When creating this chain the quotation 2 26 serv
486. undled documents 35 37 EB plus size of HU 281 KE totals 316 37 KB 3 To exclude documents double click on a document or select all documents you want to exclude and click on the EXCLUDE lt lt lt button 4 Check the pane on the bottom left for problematic documents If some are listed try to resolve the conflict see Create Bundle on page 282 for possible causes Documents which cannot be bundled Report Name Path Conflict A total of 3 documents are excluded 4 E rew B rtf C Dokume source unusable 2 documents excluded by user 1 documents excluded by conflict r gt source unusable for 1 documents a Create Bundle 5 Check the report pane If everything is as it should be click the CREATE BUNDLE button 6 A standard file dialog window opens Enter a name for the bundle file or accept the suggested file name The extension ACB ATLAS ti Copy Bundle is automatically appended Click Save By default the file is saved in the HU s folder Install Bundle To unpack the copy bundle file on a target computer it needs to be installed The Install Bundle dialog box looks as follows 284 e Project Management A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Wty aA Choose the Migrate strategy when moving projects between two work locations Wty nan Use the Restore strategy when installing a bundle that was A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Install Bundle Choose Unbundle Strategy
487. uotation is depicted either in inverse color or by a thicker border Permanent display of graphical quotations frames can be toggled off and on To change the way graphical quotations are displayed Right click an area on the graphical document that is not a quotation and Choose TOGGLE AREAS DISPLAY from the pop up menu The display style of selected quotations can be set via the SELECTION DISPLAY TYPE submenu W Toggle Areas Display Selection Display Type Fy 3 D Qutline w Display Numbers w Inverted 4rea w Display Comments Dis playing audio and video quotations Audio and video quotations can be selected and dis played like any other quotation with one exception As there is no margin area for multimedia documents no clickable brackets represent multimedia quotations However they may appear in the margin as hyperlinks see figure below When you double click on a multimedia hyperlink in the margin you do not see the usual info text popping up Instead the quotation is played directly without opening the Media Control window To display the info text instead press the Shift key when double clicking on the hyperlink Media type quotations can be distinguished easily by their icons These icons may be used in the margin area the Object Manager the Object Explorer the Crawler and in Network Views The figure below shows the media types of four hyperlinked quotations in the margin From top to bottom audio video text
488. up dialog Allows you to select an appropriate printer and set properties like landscape QUIT Leaves the ATLAS ti session Closes all windows and terminates the program 348 e Reference A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The Edit Menu Documents Quotations Codes Via the DOCUMENT ACCESS menu you can enter or leave the Document Access edit mode db Cut i If you have copied selected text within the primary document ore TESA pane and want HU related information about the PD and the i yan et position of the copied segment use PASTE PD SELECTION when o inserting it somewhere else Clear Del Use the PASTE SPECIAL function whenever you need more Select All rira control over what is inserted For instance 1f inserting a Network Word Wrap View from the clipboard into a text editor using PASTE it is ne inserted as a textual description If you use PASTE SPECIAL you can select from a number of formats e g as a picture if the dh Find Replace Ctrl F target window supports images The formats offered by the Paste Special functions depend on the clipboard s content and the formats that the target application can handle 4 FindsReplace Again Ctrl G When selecting CLEAR from the Edit menu the currently lle highlighted text or object is deleted Insert d a WORD WRAP offers the following options e wrap the text at the window border splitter in PD pane e wrap the text according to current printer set
489. ures see Sorting and Filtering on page 137 The Pop Up Menus The list and text panes offer context sensitive pop up menus The list pane s context menu contains a portion of the commands available from the main menu for the selected objects The text pane s menu offers standard commands for editing and formatting 48 e Main Workspace The HU Editor A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Large Icons Small Icons List Details Single Column Arrange Icons F Align zoom List t Show Toolbar Wrap Toolbar Wise Grid w Edit Labels se Images Font Ledger Style Refresh FS Select all items A single click selects an object a double click executes an associated action for the object A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 View Menu View Options are the same for all Object Managers Choose between viewing large icons small icons a list of items or a list of items plus additional information in details view ARRANGE ICONS and ALIGN permits some control over the default positions of items in icon and list view ZOOM LIST hides the toolbar comment pane and status bar In combination with Single Column view the appearance resembles the old style Object Lists of ATLAS ti 4 SHOW TOOLBAR toggles display of the toolbar WRAP TOOLBAR displays all buttons in multiple rows if needed USE GRID displays lines between rows in Details view EDIT LABELS enables in place editing USE IMAGES toggles the display
490. usanne Friese of QUARC Qualitative Research amp Consulting for rewriting and completing the original manual Thomas Ringmayr of eBility for a first pass language and style revision A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Thanks to Ray Maietta and the ResearchTalk Team and to Alison Belisa Derrick Pat and Ron for wise comment and thoughtful editorial work on this manual during the last weeks before release For the wonderful images in sample project Digital Images thanks to Sigrid Reiss I am also indebted to the members of the ATLAS ti e mail discussion list which started during project ATLAS back in 1992 and has proven to be a valuable resource both for the developers and the users of the program Several bugs were found and reported by members of the list The list is still alive and well In 2002 we celebrated the 10 year anniversary of our mailing list With close to 1000 members March 2004 it resembles a small university with all academic levels and a wide variety of professionals including corporate users represented You are invited to join Refer to our website at www atlasti com for more information Last but not least a very special thanks to my wife Christine Her patience is simply incredible About this Manual This manual describes the functions and concepts of ATLAS ti Methodological approaches to qualitative data analysis or text interpretation will not be featured It is not required that yo
491. used as the repository for periodically stored recovery information You can change this by clicking on Browse button Load automatic backups at system start During startup of ATLAS ti auto backups are offered for recovery Section Paths General HU Editor Margin Fonts Storage Paths Text Editors PD Printing Memos Default Folder to store Hermeneutic Units primary docs etc Textbank Path H My Files Ga Folder to store HTML output also contains support Files HTML Path 9 C Program Files scientific Software se Folder to store MIL output falso contains style sheets and other support Files ML Path C Program FilesScientific Softwarea T oe Folder For 5P55 output syntax and data Files SPSS Path Textbank Path The Textbank Path is assumed to be your main repository for HUs and primary documents Although this is a user related setting it should be set to a common shared folder when working in teams This path can be used in references via the TBPATH variable see Project Management on page 270 HTML Path Specifies the path to which HTML files are saved and where HTML support files e g style sheets are located XML Path Specifies the path to which XML output is saved and where all style sheets and support files are located SPSS Path Specifies the path to which syntax and data files related to the SPSS output are stored Reference e 343 344 e Reference Sec
492. ver a feature that allows more than one user to work concurrently on the same HU is not yet available Private HUs still need to be merged when needed Maintaining project integrity in team contexts and changing document content was not a trivial thing to do See details in Inside Editing Primary Documents on page 85 What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 e 19 Change of Ownership You can change the author originally assigned to an object at creation time This can be done for a selection of items using the Object Managers or for all objects of specific authors The latter global change can be accomplished via the HU Editor s main menu EXTRAS CHANGE OBJECT OWNERSHIP Password Protection for HUs HUs can be password protected by assigning a password via EXTRAS CHANGE ACCESS RIGHTS If you choose this option you must enter a password when you load the HU SPSS Output ATLAS ti 5 now allows generation of a separate data matrix file along with the syntax file This overcomes a limitation of SPSS in regard to the maximum size of data embedded in the syntax file and thus makes much larger jobs possible Other changes include an optional task section and a user defined separator for creating scaled variables General Preferences lets you can define the folder where you want to store SPSS output XML Support ATLAS ti 5 can now export complete projects HUs as XML TOOLS XML EXPORT TO XML For more information see E
493. vial task because all of their references links and comments need to be transferred to the target code in a consistent manner Note Using the network method is the inverse procedure of the list method described earlier see Merging Codes Using the List Method on page 126 Using the list method you select the target code first Then you choose the codes to be merged Merging codes The Network Editor et al e 243 in a network editor is the inverse You select the codes to be merged first and then you select the target code Two codes Magic 7 and Magic 3 have been selected Using 4 p Merge Codes the two codes will be merged z into Number Magic Figure 99 Code Merge Before the merge After the merge The two former sub codes of Number Magic A Magic 3 and Magic 7 have been merged into Number Magic a All references to i quotations other codes yf and memos have been inherited by Number a Magic 1 4 Figure 100 Code Merge After the merge A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 244 e The Network Editor et al To merge codes using the Network Editor 1 Open or create the Network View that contains the codes to be merged 2 Select all source codes to be merged into one target code Make sure that the target node is already visible in the Network Editor 3 Choose NODES MERGE CODES from the Network Editor s main menu 4 Move the mou
494. view of all available tools is provided These introductory and more theoretically oriented parts are followed by more practically oriented chapters providing step by step instructions You will learn how to manage your data how to set up and start a project and how to prepare and edit documents After a project is set up the basic functions like coding text search auto coding writing memos etc become relevant Conceptual level functions like the Network Editor build on the textual level work at least in most cases and are therefore described last In section Reference on page 337 you will find a short description of all menu items Chapter Resources on page 327 offers some useful advice on how to get support and where to find further information on the software Up To The Minute Live Manual At the time of print or manufacturing a CD a manual is usually not 100 complete and may contain descriptions that need to be corrected Furthermore with service packs and patches come modified or added functionality that needs description For this purpose a hot link to an up to date version of this manual or manual addendums is available from our web site at http www atlasti com A5 livemanual html Online Help After the installation of ATLAS ti the online help accessible via the F1 key offers a browsable searchable and somehow modified version of this document All in all unless you prefer to read a manual in a seque
495. vious Windows versions The workaround switch to XP mode Frequently Asked Questions Help Where are my documents 330 e Troubleshooting A much more complete FAQ 1s available on our website at http www atlasti com Primary Document Cannot be Loaded The most frequently asked question regarding ATLAS ti in the past was where are my primary documents There are now two causes for a document not to be displayed in ATLAS ti Not found The document cannot be found where ATLAS ti expects it A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Reset the access information for an externally edited file A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Figure 133 File was deleted renamed or moved Not valid The document was found but it must have been edited with another application and not with ATLAS ti Or a companion file to the document was deleted or not copied Figure 134 The companion LOG file was deleted Both problems can be addressed rather efficiently e In advance by clever project planning see Project Management on page 270 or e By using the appropriate procedures and tools see How ATLAS ti Handles Documents on page 93 and Editing Primary Documents on page 78 Reset Last Access Information To avoid accessing the wrong document ATLAS ti memorizes the certain state size date path of a document each time it was successfully accessed If ATLAS ti detects a deviation between this access informatio
496. w simply removes the nodes from the Network View The nodes remain in the HU Removed nodes can be re imported at any time using the node import functions described previously However deleting nodes results in the deletion of the objects they represent from the entire HU erasing codes quotations etc Be cautious when deleting nodes To remove nodes from a Network View 1 Open the Network View 2 Select the nodes to be excluded from the view 3 From the Network Editor s main menu choose NODES REMOVE NODES FROM VIEW or press Ctrl Del on the keyboard If you only want to exclude a single node you may also choose this option from the node s context menu Note If you only want to exclude nodes from a Network View do not select option DELETE NODE from the node s context menu or DELETE ENTITIES from the main menu This option deletes the object represented by this node from the HU Therefore if you delete a code node the code itself and all coding involving this code is deleted from the HU For this operation no undo option is available The only way to undo a false deletion is to close the HU without saving it and to open the most recent backup Node and Link Actions Commands affecting selected codes or links are available via their respective context menus In addition as described below type specific procedures are activated when double clicking a node Actions via Context Menus Context menus can be activate
497. window To directly move to this quotation in context click into the pop up display or click outside the pop up to cancel The margin area makes the movement between text passages easy Whereas you have to make two mouse clicks in the last example you can simply read the names of hyperlinked quotes in the margin area To traverse hypertext links using the margin area 1 Switch on the margin area 2 If needed open up the properties context menu in the margin area and select OBJECT TYPES HYPERLINKS 3 Double click a hyperlink displayed in the margin The quotation to the left of the margin area is highlighted and a pop up window displays the hyperlink s contents Hypertext e 259 Sty nan The margin area permits a very intuitive traversal of hyper links Sty Remove all recently imported objects with CTRL SHIFT Z Naty Use the margin area to display and edit link comments 260 e Hypertext 4 To display the hyperlink in context highlighted inside the primary document pane click into the pop up window Clicking outside the pop up window cancels the process uld 5 And bo them it was given that they should not kill them but that they should be tormented Five months and their torment was i as the torment of a scorpion when he strike tha man Figure 112 Direct hyperlink traversal using margin area The Network Editor Method To move to the text of a quotation that appears in a network righ
498. xample 0 9 finds all numeric characters while 0 9 finds all non numeric characters C Matches any digit equivalent to 0 9 The escape character disables the special GREP functionality of the following character For example matches an opening bracket In the following a few search examples are presented showing the matching GREP expression in the column on the right Examples of GREP Searches Find text of arbitrary length enclosed within brackets Note that the brackets had to be escaped with as they are control characters themselves Find all years between 2001 and 2004 200 1 4 Find all numbers with 2 digits at the end of a line or d d paragraph Find all Meyer s spelled four different ways M ae 1y Jer Find all lines paragraphs starting with one arbitrary letter followed by a colon If you search for a d following the colon you will have to use the Escape character d Otherwise the letter d would be interpreted as a digit To start a GREP search 1 Open the text search tool 2 Enter a search pattern Figure 55 shows an example 3 Check the Use GREP box 4 Click on the PREVIOUS or NEXT button The search expression entered in the text search window to the right finds all 3 digit numbers with the last did digit being a 7 8 or 9 This pap can be a useful search to find net certain social security numbers ee other personal Case Sensitive Use GREP
499. xcel Report Layout Common Header When creating textual reports a common header precedes the list of objects e g all codes or all quotations for a selected code The header includes information about the kind of report All current quotations the HU name and file path the current user the date and time of the creation of the report and the current filter if any Generating Output e 311 Sorts amp Filters Many list reports are affected by the currently active filter for the reported objects For instance if the primary document s filter is set to a specific family creating a report of All quotations yields only those quotations for primary documents within that specific family All current quotations 8 Quotation Filter Hyper Hi Tha Sample File Programmescientiic Software ATLAStiiTEXTBANE the sample hr Edited by Super DateTime 24 04 04 12 1355 P 1 Revelation 8 1 8 And the smoke of the incense 13 13 Admin Codes Fire Horor 1 Smoke Ne memgs Hyper Links 2 65 And to them i was gwen tha lt diecusses gt 5 And to them it was given that they should not kill them but that they should be tormented five months and their torment was as the torment of a scorpion when he sirike tha man 296 And in those days shall roen crticizes gt b And in those days shall men seek death and shall not find iE and shall desire to dic and death shall flee from them And the s
500. xport amp Import using XML on page 304 The XML Converter allows the application of a variety of style sheets to produce individual reports and other representations of an XML formatted HU Style sheets are supplied and can be modified to your needs 20 e What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Z ATLAS ti XML Stylesheet Demo CSS Switcher Microsoft Internet Explorer Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Favoriten Extras 3 Q Zuri gt x a A P Suchen P Favoriten Medien E2 This HU is a toy example but nevertheless draws some interesting relations between magic and religous terminology You can browse the HU using itas a kind of tutorial Some ofthe memos and comments describe different aspects of working with ATLAS ti Look atthe examples of named network views Open the network browser by clicking on the network tool The Sample Figure 5 Style sheet CSS Switcher applied to a HU and displayed in Internet Explorer For more information see Creating Reports with the XML Converter on page 318 Miscellaneous Filter Visualization When objects are filtered the background color of the affected Object Manager s list pane and of the corresponding drop down list is changed The current filter is displayed in the status bar A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 e 21 22 e What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 Codes Air 0 2 w Mer E Code Manager HU BI E ES Codes E
501. y Ignore Metviews Code Families 0009000000 000000 00000000 Merge Comments Figure 119 The Merge Tool Defining the merge strategy 2 Select one of the four stock strategies A short description of the strategy is displayed at the bottom left of the dialog box Fine tune the strategy so it best suits your needs For all major object types you can divert from the pre defined stock strategies and manually define how the various object types are to be handled in the merge process Check the option Create Merge Report to generate an overview of what has been done and to see which objects have been affected in what ways during the merge process If you repeatedly merge the same HUs you might want to uncheck option Merge Comments as this may unnecessarily blow up the comment for any of the unified objects Click FINISH to start the merge process This may take a while depending on the size of both the target and source HUs and the strategy chosen The Unify strategy is generally more consumptive in processing time than Adding After the Merge After a successful merge operation some cleaning up might become necessary For example codes with different names but similar meaning 1 e Synonyms are now treated as distinct codes They may need to be merged see Merging Codes on page 125 It could also be the case that you end up with a number of quotations that overlap but are coded by the same code
502. y already be regarded as a query although it is a simple one The Query Tool is more complex in that it can be used to create and process queries that include combinations of codes A query is a search expression built from operands codes and code families and operators e g NOT AND OR etc that define the conditions that a quotation must meet to be retrieved e g all quotations coded with both codes A and B A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 By selecting codes or code families e the operands or descriptors and operators a query can be built incrementally which is instantaneously evaluated and displayed as a list of quotations This incremental building of complex search queries gives you an exploratory approach toward even the most complex queries The Query Tool Window The Query Tool is launched by clicking the Query Tool button by choosing CODES OUTPUT QUERY TOOL or TOOLS QUERY TOOL from the HU Editor s main menu E OOCR Undo Rede 4 E ATLAS ti Query Tool Families BigFamil 10 nies Chemistry 8 Horror Si Magic stuff 13 Query 2 Formula 1 0 F Abaddon 1 0 5 air 10 2 ga Alchemie 1 34 2 Animal 0 3 gi Bad weather 1 0 2 Bible 0 1 Black Magic 0 1 Booth 1 0 Brass 1 1 ge Casualties 3 0 3 Chemical warfare 1 0 v lt E gt TE All 3 Create Super Code Distance in lines
503. y choosing the bottom option from the list of relations when actually creating a link or you may use a hyper links relation editor that is identical to the code code relations editor Newly defined or edited relations must also be saved to disk A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Traversing Hyperlinks A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The In Place Method You may travel directly from a highlighted Hyper quotation to its neighbors To display hyperlinked neighbors in place 1 Activate a quotation with a double click in the Quotation Manager 2 Move the mouse cursor into the highlighted area of the document and click the right mouse button 3 From the context menu choose SHOW LINKS 4 From the list of links choose the quotation which you want to inspect m Are 5 And to them it was given that they should ZH H not References lt 2216 5 And to them z or E1 RE cO Horror 5 7 1 gt as i QU lt discusses gt 1 8 And the smoke of the incense QU 1 27 12 4nd the Fourth angel sounde explains gt g A QU 2 24 but only those men which have justifies gt gH Hor and shall not find it and shall desire to die and death shall flee from them Figure 111 List of links for the selected quotation Note Steps one and two can be combined by pressing the Ctrl key while clicking the right mouse button The quotation on the other end of the hyperlink is displayed in a pop up
504. y convert them to the new format using the file extension HPRS In addition old and new HUs display different icons in the Windows Explorer on your desktop making them easy to distinguish All PDs from ATLAS ti 4 projects can also be used without any modification and are displayed and processed correctly What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 e 23 Note a HU created or modified with ATLAS ti 5 0 cannot be used in ATLAS ti 4 2 Migrating PDs You can use all your legacy documents without any changes However to fully maximize the new capabilities especially in regard to textual documents dynamic wrapping search spanning lines etc you should take a closer look at Converting Documents to New Paragraph Model on page 91 24 e What s New in ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Main Concepts The Process A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 The following is a short overview of the main processes and concepts related to working with ATLAS ti There are two principal modes of working with ATLAS ti the Textual Level and the Conceptual Level The Textual Level includes activities like segmentation of data files coding text image audio and video passages and writing memos The Conceptual Level focuses on model building activities such as linking codes to networks A third and equally important aspect is the management of projects and the data Note Although other media types like graphic audio and video fi
505. y create a new HU first and then merge the two HUs consecutively into this HU However this approach takes two merge steps Merge Strategies Three strategies can be chosen for the processing of every object category These are Add Unify and Ignore The object categories that can be processed within the HU are PDs Quotations Codes Memos PD Families Code Families Memo Families and Network Views Add The objects of this category are added to the target HU If an identical object is found in the target the added object will get a new name consisting of the original name plus the suffix _number A A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 d Two PDs are considered equal for unification when three conditions hold Wty aN Use specially named families for fine grained control over items to be ignored A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 new number is added until the name of the object is unique For instance if a code Alchemy already exists in the target the source version of Alchemy is renamed to Alchemy_1 Unify Searches for corresponding objects in the target HU If such an object is found all attributes of the source object are inherited by the target object A corresponding quotation is one that resides in the corresponding primary document AND that has the same coordinates start line row end line row In this procedure attention is paid to deviations between two PDs to be merged that may result i
506. y referenced because of too many mapping alternatives A much safer way to handle references 1s to change the original reference to match the actual location in other words CHANGE PATH Path Mapping Path mapping works as follows A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 A precondition is that the user has defined path mappings using the mapping tool described below If a document reference cannot be resolved ATLAS ti looks into the mapping table for optional replacement paths for the one that does not work More than one replacement path can match a single path All replacement paths are tried in the order they were defined If a valid replacement is found it will be used Note Mapping affects the complete hierarchy below the map entry For instance if an invalid path z tb is mapped to c textbank path z tb projectX and then path c textbank projectX would be tried in addition unless a more restrictive mapping precedes this entry How to create path mappings 1 From the menu HU Editor or Document Manager select DOCUMENTS DATA SOURCE MANAGEMENT EDIT PRIMARY DOCUMENT MAPPINGS 2 The Path Map Editor opens Primary Document Path Map Editor Currently mapped paths Target paths unresolyable 21 My Files ATLAS project dakal Hilf Files 47 ASE project data Remove Path Add Path Remove Path Add Path Enter new path to map Enter target path for selected path From 2 My files
507. yed and can be sorted in the Memo Manager s details view in an extra Type column To add or remove global memo types i 1 Open the General Preferences dialog and select the MEMOS tab 2 In section Global Memo Types enter a new memo type in the entry field and click the ADD button Global Memo Types Memo Types team bulletin board Commentary J Method Theory use as default type 3 To remove a global memo type select a memo type from the list and click REMOVE 4 Click APPLY and close General Preferences The default memo type is Commentary unless you have set a different default in the dialog This default type is used for newly created memos To change the default type select another memo type and tick the box use as default type To create a local memo type When creating a new memo simply overwrite the default memo type displayed in the memo editor s type field with a new type After saving the memo this new type may also be used for other memos inside this specific HU To make a local type global Choose the menu option MISCELLANEOUS MAKE TYPE GLOBAL from the context menu or from the MEMOS main menu to make all types of the selected memos global 132 e The Textual Level Basic Functions A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 ro A5 User s Guide to ATLAS ti 5 0 Using Memos as PDs Memos can be assigned as primary documents How you implement this option in your work depends

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

ATLAS.ti atlas.ti atlas tire machine atlas tire changer atlas.ti login atlas.ti software atlas.ti download atlas.ti web atlas.ti my projects atlas.ti 25 atlas.ti training atlas.ti 9 atlas.ti tutorial atlas.ti cloud atlas.ti 24 atlas.ti license atlas.ti web login atlas.ti 23 atlas.ti ai atlas.ti vs nvivo atlas.ti 8 atlas.ti que es atlas.ti web website atlas.ti manual atlas.ti descargar gratis

Related Contents

  Sem título-3 - Antenas Cromus  Mode d`emploi pour le module de bridage et de butée  Epson AcuLaser C900  Manual do Usuario      7055-2  M870D User Manual  DW CHORUS 12 User Manual ver 1  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file